ML21179A118
| ML21179A118 | |
| Person / Time | |
|---|---|
| Site: | Vogtle  |
| Issue date: | 06/15/2021 |
| From: | Southern Nuclear Operating Co |
| To: | Office of Nuclear Reactor Regulation |
| Shared Package | |
| ML21179A130 | List:
|
| References | |
| ND-21-0486 | |
| Download: ML21179A118 (358) | |
Text
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR 3.9 Mechanical Systems and Components 3.9.1 Special Topics for Mechanical Components 3.9.1.1 Design Transients To provide a high degree of integrity for the equipment in the reactor coolant system (RCS),
components designed and constructed to the requirements for Class 1 in ASME Code,Section III are evaluated for design, service, and test conditions.
The design conditions include those pressure, temperature, and mechanical loadings selected as the basis for the design. Service conditions cover those normal operating conditions, anticipated transients, and accident conditions expected or postulated to occur during operation. The evaluation of the service and testing conditions includes an evaluation of fatigue due to cyclic stresses.
The following five operating conditions, as defined in ASME Code,Section III, are considered in the design of the reactor coolant system Class 1 components, auxiliary Class 1 components, reactor coolant system component supports, and reactor internals.
Level A Service Conditions - (Normal Conditions) These conditions include any condition in the course of system startup, operation in the design power range, hot standby, and system shutdown other than Level B, Level C, or Level D service conditions or testing conditions. Tests not requiring a pressure greater than the component design pressure are considered to be normal condition design transients.
Level B Service Conditions - (Upset Conditions, Incidents of Moderate Frequency) These conditions include any deviations from Level A service conditions anticipated to occur often enough that the design includes a capability to withstand the conditions without operational impairment. The Level B service conditions include those transients resulting from any single operator error or control malfunction, transients caused by a fault in a system component requiring its isolation from the system, and transients due to loss of load or power. Level B service conditions include any abnormal incidents not resulting in a forced outage and also forced outages for which the corrective action does not include any repair of mechanical damage. The estimated duration of Level B service condition is included in the design specifications.
Level C Service Conditions - (Emergency Conditions, Infrequent Incidents) These conditions include those deviations from Level A service conditions that require shutdown for correction of the conditions or repair of damage in the system. The conditions have a low probability of occurrence but are included to establish that no gross loss of structural integrity will result as a concomitant effect of any damage developed in the system. The postulated occurrences for such events which result in more than 25 strong stress cycles are evaluated for cyclic fatigue using Level B service limits. Strong stress cycles are those having an alternating stress intensity value greater than that for 106 cycles from the applicable fatigue design curves.
Level D Service Conditions - (Faulted Conditions, Limiting Faults) These conditions include those combinations of conditions associated with extremely low-probability postulated events whose consequences are such that the integrity and operability of the nuclear energy system may be impaired to the extent that consideration of public health and safety is involved. Such considerations require compliance with safety criteria as may be specified by regulatory authorities.
Testing Conditions - Testing conditions are those pressure overload tests that include primary and secondary hydrostatic tests and steam generator tube leak tests specified. Other types of tests are classified under one of the other service condition categories.
3.9-1 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR In addition to the design transients defined for evaluation of the ASME Code,Section III, Class 1 components, other transients are defined to address the same normal operating conditions, anticipated transients, and postulated accident conditions. These alternate transients are developed for evaluations of other effects. For example, a set of transients is developed for equipment qualification (see Section 3.11) and a set for accident analysis (see Chapter 15). These transients have somewhat different assumptions for the number of transients and sequence of events than do the design transients.
To provide a high degree of integrity for the equipment in the reactor coolant system, the transient conditions selected for equipment fatigue evaluation are based upon a conservative estimate of the magnitude and frequency of the temperature and pressure transients that may occur during plant operation.
To a large extent, the specific transients to be considered for equipment fatigue analyses are based upon engineering judgment and experience. The plant condition (PC) categorization defined in ANS/ANSI 51.1 (Reference 1), which categorizes transients on the basis of expected frequency, are also part of the process to define transients and which service condition applies for a given transient.
The transients selected are severe enough or frequent enough to be of possible significance to component cyclic behavior. The transients selected are a conservative representation of transients that, used as a basis for component fatigue evaluation, provide confidence that the component is appropriate for its application for the 60-year design objective. These transients are described by pertinent variations in pressure, fluid temperature, and fluid flow. Because of the large number of possible operating transients, design transients are chosen to provide a conservative representation for component cyclic analysis. The frequency in some cases is greater than the maximum frequency that defines the plant condition in ANS N51.1 (Reference 1).
The design transients and the number of events of each that are normally used for fatigue evaluations of components are presented in Table 3.9-1. A limited number of events affecting only the core makeup tank or passive residual heat removal heat exchanger are not included in the design transients. Subsections 5.4.13 and 5.4.14 describe these events.
The effects of each transient vary in consequence for each of the analyzed components. For example, the reactor vessel is subject to the pressure and temperature variations in the reactor coolant loop flow, but, the core makeup tank and passive residual heat removal heat exchangers are subject only to the pressure changes for many of the reactor coolant system transients. Additionally, the steam generator is subject to changes in the feedwater and steam system parameters that may have little or no effect on the other Class 1 components.
The individual component fatigue evaluations are based on component specific analyses of the stress levels and cycles of applied stress of the design transients. In many cases, the fatigue evaluations for the individual components combine two or more of the design transients into one bounding condition for that component.
In some cases the use of the total number of the design transients in a component fatigue analysis may indicate the requirement for a significant redesign of a portion of a component. In such cases, the number of one or more of the transients evaluated in the analysis may be reduced. In each case, the number of transients to be included in the analysis is specified in the component design specification.
In accordance with ASME Code,Section III, Level D service conditions and up to 25 stress cycles for Level C service conditions may be excluded from cyclic fatigue analysis. Any Level C service condition in excess of the 25-cycle limit is evaluated for the effect on cyclic fatigue, using Level B 3.9-2 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR criteria. The determination of which transients and seismic events are included in the 25-cycle exclusion is made separately for each component and piping line.
Levels C and D events are included in the design transients to provide the basis for pressure and temperatures used in the component stress analyses of these events. The number of events is given in the description of the transients and in Table 3.9-1 to support the determination that the fatigue evaluations do not have to consider these events.
[The stress analysis, including analysis of fatigue, of the piping, applicable component nozzles, and piping and component supports includes the effect of thermal stratification and thermal cycling.]*
Thermal stratification may occur in piping when fluid rates are low and do not result in adequate mixing. Thermal cycling due to stratification may occur because of leaking valves or operational practices.
The design of piping and component nozzles in the AP1000 includes provisions to minimize the potential for and the effects of thermal stratification and cycling. [Piping and component supports are designed and evaluated for the thermal expansion of the piping resulting from potential stratification modes. The evaluation includes consideration of the information on thermal cycling and thermal stratification included in NRC Bulletins 88-08 and 88-11 and other applicable design standards.]*
The effects of earthquakes are not considered directly in the analyses leading to the fluid systems design transients. The presence or absence of seismic activity has no effect on the input data used for the analyses nor on the resulting pressure, temperature, and flow transients. Therefore, where applicable, in addition to the effects produced by the transients, earthquake loadings must be considered. See Subsection 3.9.3 for a description of the seismic loads and other mechanical loads and loading combinations evaluated.
3.9.1.1.1 Level A Service Conditions (Normal Conditions)
The following reactor coolant system transients are considered normal operating transients (plant condition PC-1 per ANS/ANSI 51.1) and are analyzed using Level A service limits:
Reactor coolant pump startup and shutdown Plant heatup and cooldown Unit loading and unloading between 0 and 15 percent of full power Unit loading and unloading at 5 percent of full power per minute Step load increase and decrease of 10 percent of full power Large step load decrease with steam dump Steady-state fluctuations and load regulation Boron concentration equalization Feedwater cycling Core lifetime extension Feedwater heaters out of service Refueling Turbine roll test Primary leakage test Secondary leakage test Passive residual heat removal test Reactor coolant system makeup Daily load follow operations
- In accordance with the departure evaluation process specified in License Condition 2.D.(13), NRC Staff approval may be required prior to implementing a change in this information.
3.9-3 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR 3.9.1.1.1.1 Reactor Coolant Pump Startup and Shutdown The reactor coolant pumps are started and stopped during such routine operations as plant heatup and cooldown and in connection with recovery from certain transients, such as loss of power. Other (undefined) circumstances may also require pump starting and stopping.
Of the spectrum of reactor coolant system pressure and temperature conditions under which these operations may occur, three conditions have been selected for defining transients:
Cold condition: 70°F and 400 psig - The minimum pressure required for reactor coolant pump operation may be as low as 100 psig. A pressure of 400 psig is considered a conservative value for design purposes.
Pump restart condition: 100°F and 400 psig - These conditions are included to cover situations requiring stopping and restarting the pumps after plant heatup has commenced.
Hot condition: 557°F and 2235 psig These pressure and temperature values are defined for use in the design and fatigue evaluation processes. Actual pump starting and stopping conditions may be controlled by other factors such as reactor vessel material ductility considerations.
For reactor coolant pump starting and stopping operations, it is assumed that variations in reactor coolant system primary-side temperature and in-pressurizer pressure and temperature are negligible. Temperature and pressure changes in the steam generator secondary side are also assumed negligible. The only significant variables are the primary system flow and the pressure changes resulting from the pump operations.
The following cases are considered.
Case 1 - Pump Startup Two startup cases are defined as described below.
One case represents the variations in reactor coolant loop flow at cold conditions, which accompany the simultaneous ramp up in speed of both reactor coolant pumps in one loop being driven from low speed to high speed. This case involves both the highest dynamic pressure loss and the largest change in dynamic pressure loss for cold conditions and, thus, conservatively represents the variations in reactor coolant flow accompanying operation of any single pump during cold conditions.
A case is also defined that represents the variations in reactor coolant loop flow at hot conditions, which accompany the startup of a second pump in the loop with a pump currently operating and both pumps in the other loop idle. This case involves both the highest dynamic pressure loss and the largest change in dynamic pressure loss and, thus, conservatively represents the variations in reactor coolant loop flow accompanying startup of any given single pump during hot conditions.
Case 2 - Pump Shutdown This case represents the variations in reactor coolant loop flow, which accompany the shutdown of a pump when the only other operating pump is in the same loop. This transient is the reverse of the hot condition pump startup transient and involves an equally limiting change in dynamic pressure loss. It thus conservatively represents the variations in reactor coolant flow accompanying shutdown of any given single pump.
3.9-4 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Design values for the pump starting/stopping conditions are given in Table 3.9-2 along with the assumed number of occurrences.
An example of the consequence of a pump startup is that the loop flow change associated with pump startup develops a pressure differential in the normal (forward) direction across the divider plate of the steam generator in that loop. In the loop undergoing reverse flow, the direction of the divider plate differential is reversed. The magnitude of the dynamic pressure drop depends on the volumetric flowrate through the loop and on the density and viscosity of the reactor coolant.
3.9.1.1.1.2 Plant Heatup and Cooldown For the purpose of designing the major reactor coolant system components, the plant heatup and cooldown operations are conservatively represented by uniform ramp temperature changes of 100°F per hour when the system temperature is above 350°F. (For the pressurizer vessel, the design cooldown rate is 200°F per hour.) This rate bounds both potential nuclear heatup operations and cooldown using the steam dump system when system temperatures are greater than 350°F. Below 350°F, only reactor coolant pump heat and small amounts of decay heat are available to heat the reactor coolant system. Cooldown between 350°F and the shutdown temperature of 125°F is accomplished via the normal residual heat removal system. In this range, a uniform ramp rate of 50°F per hour is considered to bound the temperature changes resulting from these operations.
The number of plant heatup and cooldown operations is defined as 200 each, which corresponds to approximately three occurrences per year for design purposes.
3.9.1.1.1.3 Unit Loading and Unloading Between 0 and 15 Percent of Full Power The unit loading and unloading cases between the 0 and 15 percent load are represented by continuous and uniform ramp steam load changes, which require 30 minutes for loading and five minutes for unloading. During loading, reactor coolant temperatures are changed from their no-load values to their normal load programmed temperature values at 15 percent load. The reverse temperature change occurs during unloading.
Before loading, it is assumed that the plant is at hot standby, with feedwater cycling from the main or startup feedwater system. Loading commences, and during the first two hours, the feedwater temperature increases to the 15 percent load value, because of steam dump and turbine startup heat input to the feedwater.
After unloading, feedwater heating is reduced, steam dump is reduced to residual heat removal requirements, and feedwater temperature decreases from the 15 percent load value. Reactor coolant system pressure and pressurizer pressure are assumed to remain constant at the normal operating values during these operations.
The number of these loading and unloading transients is assumed to be 500 each for design purposes.
3.9.1.1.1.4 Unit Loading and Unloading at Five Percent of Full Power per Minute The unit loading and unloading operations are conservatively represented by continuous and uniform ramp power changes of 5 percent per minute between the 15 percent and 100 percent power levels.
This load swing is the maximum possible that is consistent with operation under automatic reactor control. The reactor temperature will vary with load prescribed by the reactor control system.
The number of loading and unloading operations is defined as 2000 each for the 60-year plant design objective. The 2000 occurrences includes the plant loading and unloading for the normal plant 3.9-5 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR startup/shutdown, and loading resulting from all service levels B, C, and D transients that result in a reactor trip.
3.9.1.1.1.5 Step Load Increase and Decrease of 10 Percent of Full Power The 10 percent step change in load demand results from disturbances in the electrical network to which the unit is tied. The reactor control system is designed to restore plant equilibrium without reactor trip following a 10 percent step change in turbine load demand initiated from nuclear plant equilibrium conditions between 15 and 100 percent of full load (the power range for automatic reactor control).
Following a step decrease in turbine load, the secondary-side steam pressure and temperature initially increase. The reactor coolant system average temperature and pressurizer pressure also increase, but this change lags slightly behind the secondary-side change. Because of the coolant temperature increase and the power mismatch between turbine and reactor, the control system automatically inserts the control rods to reduce core power. The reactor coolant temperature then decreases from its peak value to a value below its initial equilibrium value.
Pressurizer pressure also decreases from its peak value and follows the reactor coolant decreasing temperature trend. At some point during the decreasing pressure transient, the saturated water in the pressurizer begins to flash. This reduces the rate of pressure decrease. Subsequently, the pressurizer heaters turn on and restore the pressure to its normal value.
Following a step increase in turbine load, the reverse situation occurs. The secondary-side steam pressure and temperature initially decreases and the reactor coolant average temperature pressure initially decreases. The control system automatically withdraws the control rods to increase core power.
The decreasing pressure transient is reversed by actuation of the pressurizer heaters, and eventually the system pressure is restored to its normal value. The reactor coolant average temperature rises to a value above its initial equilibrium value.
The number of operations is specified as 3000 times each, or 50 times per year, for design purposes.
3.9.1.1.1.6 Large Step Load Decrease With Steam Dump This transient applies to a step decrease in turbine load from full power. This step decrease in turbine load results in a rapid mismatch between nuclear and turbine power that automatically initiates a secondary-side steam dump and actuates the rapid power reduction system, which prevents both reactor trip and lifting of steam generator safety valves.
After the large step load decrease, reactor power is reduced at a controlled rate, which results in lower flow through the steam dump system.
The AP1000 plant is designed to accept a step load change to house load, without a reactor trip, with up to 40 percent of the load reduction provided by the steam dump capability. The balance of the load reduction is provided by the rapid power reduction system. The number of occurrences of this transient is specified at 200 times for design purposes.
3.9.1.1.1.7 Steady-State Fluctuations and Load Regulation Reactor coolant pressure and temperature can vary around the nominal (steady-state) values during power operation. These variations can occur at many frequencies but for design purposes two cases are considered.
3.9-6 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Initial Fluctuations - Initial fluctuations are due to rod cycling during the first 20 full power months of reactor operation. Reactor coolant temperature is assumed to vary by +/- 3°F, and pressure by +/- 25 psi once during each 2-minute period. The total number of occurrences is specified as 1.5 x 105. The fluctuations are assumed to occur consecutively, but not simultaneously, with random fluctuations.
Random Fluctuations - Reactor coolant temperature is assumed to vary by +/- 0.5°F, and pressure by +/- six psi, once during each six-minute period. The total number of occurrences for design purposes does not exceed 4.6 x 106.
These small, primary-side fluctuations have no effect on the steam generator secondary side.
The above described steady-state fluctuations and the following load regulation transients are considered to be mutually exclusive. Component evaluations are based on the more limiting of either the steady-state fluctuations or the load regulation transients.
Load Regulation - Load regulation refers to the relatively small, rapid fluctuations in load, regarding some nominal operating condition that is the result of the participation of the plant in some form of grid frequency control. The nominal operating condition is either a constant power level or a very slowly changing power level such as that which occurs because of a daily load follow maneuver.
For design purposes it is assumed that the plant experiences load changes of 10 percent of rated load peak-to-peak at a rate of 2 percent of rated load per minute. It is assumed that up to 35 of these load swings may occur during any given day of plant operation. Frequency control capability is to be provided while performing ramp power changes required for load follow maneuvers. This capability is to be provided within 15 to 100 percent of full power. Load regulation is performed with backup heaters continuously energized and spray flow modulated to control pressure.
The load regulation transient can result in considerable cycling of components affected by pressurizer spray, the pressurizer backup heaters, and the control rod drive mechanisms (CRDMs).
The 37,000 design occurrences of load regulation correspond to the following component cycles:
Control rod drive mechanism stepping 1.3 x 106 steps Pressurizer spray on-off cycling 94,000 Pressurizer backup heater on-off cycling 20,000 This cycling of the components should be considered to occur in addition to the duty cycles imposed on these components due to other modes of plant operation.
3.9.1.1.1.8 Boron Concentration Equalization Following any large change in boron concentration in the reactor coolant system, the pressurizer spray is operated to equalize the concentration between the loops and the pressurizer. This can be done by manually operating the pressurizer backup heaters, which causes a pressure increase and spray initiation at a pressurizer pressure of approximately 2260 psia. The pressure increases to approximately 2267 psia before being returned to 2250 psia by the proportional spray. The pressure is maintained at 2250 psia by spray operation, matching the heat input from the backup heaters, until the concentration is equalized.
Since reactor coolant system boron concentration changes are not required for daily load follow, it is assumed that this operation is performed about once each week. For design purpose the total number of occurrences is placed at 2900.
The operations cause no significant effects on the steam generator secondary side. The only effects of these operations on the primary system are as follows:
3.9-7 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR The reactor coolant pressure varies in step with the pressurizer pressure.
The pressurizer surge line nozzle at the hot leg will experience the temperature transient associated with outflow from the pressurizer.
3.9.1.1.1.9 Feedwater Cycling The feedwater cycling transient occurs when the plant is being maintained at hot standby or no-load condition. With the plant in the steam pressure mode of steam dump control, a low steam generation rate occurs because of dissipation of decay and/or pump heat. This low steam generation rate decreases steam generator water level.
To compensate for the decreasing level, the steam generators are fed using the startup feedwater control. Either the main or startup feedwater pumps can continuously provide flow to the steam generators and maintain the desired steam generator level. For this case the reactor coolant system transient is relatively moderate.
If the startup feedwater control system is unavailable, the feedwater is provided intermittently in a slug-feeding mode.
Two modes of slug-feeding the steam generators are considered. In the first mode, it is assumed that the steam generators are slug-fed through the startup feedwater nozzle once every two hours. In the second mode, it is assumed that tighter control of steam generator water level is maintained by slug-feeding once every 24 minutes.
For design purposes, the following numbers of feedwater cycling transients are considered:
Mode 1: Slug feed every 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> - 3000 cycles Mode 2: Slug feed every 24 minutes - 15,000 cycles The component designers consider both modes of slug-feeding. Each component evaluation is based on the more limiting of the two modes.
3.9.1.1.1.10 Core Lifetime Extension These transients occur at the end of core life when the critical boron concentration required to maintain full thermal power conditions becomes less than achievable (approximately 10 ppm). To extend core lifetime beyond this point, the operator does the following:
Allows the reactor coolant system average temperature to decrease below the normal programmed temperature, thereby adding reactivity to the core through the negative moderator temperature coefficient.
Manually controls the turbine to maintain full electrical load until the turbine control valves have fully opened.
Reduces steam flow by an amount that will maintain the plant at full rated electrical load after a feedwater heater has been taken out of service and allow plant conditions to reach a new steady state.
Takes a feedwater heater out of service.
This process is repeated until the maximum allowable feedwater heaters have been taken out of service and the turbine control valves have fully opened.
3.9-8 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR For design purposes, the number of occurrences of these transients is a total of 40 transients. During this mode of operation, the plant is not capable of daily load follow operation. Thus, this transient is considered separately from unit loading and unloading transients.
3.9.1.1.1.11 Feedwater Heaters Out of Service These transients occur when one or more feedwater heaters are taken out of service. During the time that the heaters are out of service, the operator maintains the plant at full rated thermal load. To accomplish this, the operator performs the following:
Calculates the appropriate steam flow reduction which will maintain the plant at full rated thermal load after the heater has been taken out of service.
Reduces steam flow by the appropriate amount and allow plant conditions to reach a new steady state (approximately 10 minutes).
Takes heater (or heaters) out of service.
The transient is based on the maximum allowable number of heaters out of service. For design purposes, the number of occurrences of this transient is a total of 180.
3.9.1.1.1.12 Refueling At the beginning of the refueling operation, the reactor coolant system is assumed to have been cooled down to 140°F. The vessel head is removed and the refueling canal is filled. This is done by transferring water from the in-containment refueling water storage tank, which is conservatively assumed to be at 70°F, to the refueling cavity by the spent fuel pool cooling system (SFS).
This operation is assumed to occur 40 times over the expected plant design. This transient is experienced only by the primary system.
3.9.1.1.1.13 Turbine Roll Test This transient is imposed upon the plant during the hot functional test for turbine cycle checkout.
Reactor coolant pump power is used to heat the reactor coolant to operating temperature (no-load conditions), and the steam generator is used to perform a turbine roll test. However, the plant cooldown during this test exceeds the 100°F per hour design rate.
The number of such test cycles is specified at 20 times, to be performed at the beginning of plant operation before reactor operation. This transient occurs before plant startup, so the number of cycles is independent of other operating transients.
The transient curves and the number of cycles are based on a conservatively high steam flowrate for turning the turbine.
3.9.1.1.1.14 Primary-Side Leakage Test A leakage test is performed after each opening of the primary system. During this test the primary system pressure is raised (for design purposes) to 2500 psia, with the system temperature above the minimum temperature imposed by reactor vessel material ductility requirements, while the system is checked for leaks.
3.9-9 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR The secondary side of the steam generator is pressurized so that the pressure differential across the tubesheet does not exceed 1650 psi. This is accomplished with the steam, feedwater, and blowdown lines closed.
For design purposes the number of occurrences is a total of 200 cycles.
3.9.1.1.1.15 Secondary-Side Leakage Test A secondary side leakage test is performed after each opening of the secondary system to check closures for leakage. For design purposes, it is assumed that the steam generator secondary side is pressurized to just below its design pressure to prevent the safety valves from lifting. So that a secondary-side to primary-side pressure differential of 670 psi is not exceeded, the primary side must also be pressurized. The 670 psi differential is the steam generator design differential pressure for secondary-to-primary pressure. The primary system must be above the minimum temperature imposed by reactor vessel material ductility requirements (that is, between 120°F and 250°F). It is assumed that this test is performed 80 times for design purposes.
3.9.1.1.1.16 Not Used 3.9.1.1.1.17 Passive Residual Heat Removal Test During the initial test program, the passive residual heat removal flow and heat transfer rates are tested. Passive residual heat removal flow is initiated by opening the passive residual heat removal isolation valves. For component design purposes, the temperature and pressure responses to this testing are based on a conservative definition of the test conditions with a total of 5 occurrences.
3.9.1.1.1.18 Reactor Coolant System Makeup The chemical and volume control system makeup subsystem is used to accommodate normal minor leakage from the reactor coolant system. On a low programmed pressurizer level signal one of the chemical and volume control system makeup pumps starts automatically in order to provide makeup.
The pump automatically stops when the pressurizer level increases to the high programmed setpoint.
The addition of the makeup water to the reactor coolant system via the chemical and volume control system purification loop and attendant changes in reactor coolant system parameters constitute the reactor coolant system makeup design transient. The total number of occurrences of the makeup transient is 5640, which corresponds to twice per week during the plant design objective of 60 years assuming a 90 percent availability factor for the plant.
3.9.1.1.1.19 Daily Load Follow Operations During the load follow operations, the plant power is reduced from the 100-percent power to 50-percent at a prescribed rate and remains there for a specified time, and then the power ramps up to 100-percent power at a prescribed rate. Power remains at 100-percent power for the remainder of the 24-hour cycle. The reactor coolant temperature will vary with load as prescribed by the reactor control systems.
The AP1000 features a rod control system that provides a load follow capability without requiring a change in the boron concentration in the coolant. Thus, the reactivity gain available from temperature reduction is not required for load follow, and reduced temperature return to power is not applicable to the AP1000.
The number of daily load follow operations is specified as 17,800 times during the plant design objective of 60 years. One swing of load follow operation consists of one power ramp down from 3.9-10 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR steady-state 100-percent power to 50-percent power and one power ramp up from steady-state 50-percent power to 100-percent power.
3.9.1.1.2 Level B Service Conditions (Upset Conditions)
The following paragraphs describe the reactor coolant system upset condition transients, which are considered to be plant condition PC-2 and PC-3 per ANS/ANSI 51.1. From the standpoint of the use of design transient in the evaluation of cyclic fatigue, there is no difference between PC-2 and PC-3.
These transients are analyzed using Level B service limits and are as follows:
Loss of load Loss of power Reactor trip from reduced power Reactor trip from full power Case A - with no inadvertent cooldown Case B - with cooldown and no safeguards actuation Case C - with cooldown and safeguards actuation Control rod drop - three cases Cold overpressure Inadvertent safeguards actuation - three cases Partial loss of reactor coolant flow Inadvertent reactor coolant system depressurization Excessive feedwater flow Loss of power with natural circulation cooldown Case A - loss of power with natural circulation cooldown with onsite ac power Case B - loss of power with natural circulation cooldown without onsite ac power Under the upset condition transients listed, 505 reactor trip cases are assumed. A total of 505 reactor trips for design purposes exceeds the design goal. The design goal for the AP1000 is less than one unplanned trip per year. The number of reactor trips in the design transients represents a conservative number for the analysis of cyclic stresses in the components and is not to be considered an estimate of expected plant performance.
For some component or portions of components, the number of reactor trips analyzed for the effects of cyclic loads may be reduced from 505. In each case the number of reactor trips analyzed is greater than the design goal of one per year.
3.9.1.1.2.1 Loss of Load This transient involves a step decrease in turbine load from full power (turbine trip) without immediate automatic reactor trip or rapid power reduction. These conditions produce the most severe pressure transient on the reactor coolant system under upset conditions. The reactor is assumed to trip as a consequence of a trip initiated by the reactor protection system. Since redundant means for tripping 3.9-11 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR the reactor are provided by the reactor protection system, a transient of this nature is not expected, but is included to confirm conservative component design.
The number of occurrences of this transient is specified at 30 times for design purposes.
3.9.1.1.2.2 Loss of Power This transient applies to a blackout situation involving the loss of outside electrical power to the station, assumed to be operating initially at 102 percent power, followed by reactor and turbine trips.
The reactor coolant pumps are de-energized, as are electrical loads connected to the turbine-generator bus, including the main feedwater and condensate pumps.
As the reactor coolant pumps coast down, reactor coolant system flow reaches an equilibrium value through natural circulation. This condition permits removal of core residual heat through the steam generators, which receive feedwater from the startup feedwater system. For this event reactor coolant temperature stabilizes at hot standby conditions.
The number of occurrences of this transient is specified at 30 times for design purposes.
For one occurrence, a worst case is postulated in which the shell side of a single steam generator is assumed to be emptied after the blackout. The startup feedwater flow is then delivered into the hot, dry shell side. The steam generator tube and secondary shell integrity are evaluated for this condition.
3.9.1.1.2.3 Reactor Trip from Reduced Power A significant percentage of reactor trips occur at low power as the plant is being brought up from hot standby to power. The low power reactor trip is provided to bound these occurrences without the excessive conservatism associated with the reactor trip from full power. The transient is assumed to start at 25 percent load, which bounds the conditions associated with achieving criticality, turbine roll, and turbine synchronization; establishing automatic rod control; and making the transitions in feedwater control from the startup feedwater nozzle to the main feedwater nozzle.
Reactor coolant system temperature and pressure variations are similar to those of reactor trip from full power, but are smaller. The transients continue until the reactor coolant and steam generator secondary side temperatures are in equilibrium at zero power conditions. Controlled steam dump and startup feedwater remove any core residual heat and prevent steam generator safety valve actuation.
For design purposes, 180 reactor trips from reduced power are postulated.
3.9.1.1.2.4 Reactor Trip from Full Power Reactor trips from full power may occur for a variety of reasons. The reactor coolant temperature and pressure undergo rapid decreases from full power values as the reactor protection system causes the control rods to move into the core. Transients also occur in the secondary side of the steam generator because of continued heat transfer from the reactor coolant through the steam generators.
These transients continue until the reactor coolant and steam generator secondary side temperatures are in equilibrium at zero power conditions. Continuation of feedwater flow and controlled steam dump remove the core residual heat and prevent steam generator safety valve actuation. For design purposes, reactor trip from full power is assumed to occur 120 times.
Three reactor trip cooldown transients are considered.
3.9-12 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Case A - Reactor Trip With No Inadvertent Cooldown Case A of the reactor trip transient represents the likely case in which the systems function as designed and as such no inadvertent cooldown occurs. This case maintains conservatism over the best estimate reactor trip via assumptions that result in the RCS temperatures initially cooling below the no load conditions before steam and feedwater flow are both controlled to bring the plant back to no-load conditions and maintain it at no load. For design purposes, 50 occurrences of this transient are specified.
It is assumed that for most reactor trip Case A transients, the turbine control system operates as designed. For five of the reactor trip Case A transients, it is conservatively assumed that the control system fails, which results in an emergency turbine overspeed. This situation could be initiated with malfunction of the turbine control system, which results in a turbine speed increase past the overspeed trip setpoint. It is assumed that the reactor then trips and that the turbine speed increases to 120 percent of nominal, with accompanying proportional increases in generator bus frequency, reactor coolant pump speed and reactor coolant flowrate. None of the other reactor coolant system primary side, pressurizer, or steam generator secondary side variables is affected.
For design purposes it is assumed that the emergency turbine overspeed constitutes a special case of the reactor trip with no inadvertent cooldown transient. Thus, for five of the 50 occurrences, the effects of the reactor coolant flow variation are considered in addition to the basic pressure and temperature variations.
Case B - Reactor Trip With Cooldown and No Safeguards Actuation This transient is similar to Case A, except that a failure in the main feedwater control valves is assumed to delay main feedwater isolation. Additionally, for this case, it is assumed that the startup feedwater pumps are started within five seconds of the reactor trip. Both main and startup feedwater flow continue until the feedwater flow is assumed to be isolated just prior to the actuation of safeguards system. This maintains a high heat transfer rate through the steam generator, which continues to drive the primary side pressure and temperature down. Flow through the startup feedwater nozzle is continued until isolated on Low-2 Tcold. No other safety functions are assumed to be actuated following the Low-2 Tcold signal. The plant is then brought back to the no-load condition.
For design purposes, 50 occurrences of this transient are specified.
Case C - Reactor Trip with Cooldown and Safeguards Actuation This transient is similar to Case B, but it is assumed that the steam generator secondary side shrinkage is sufficient to actuate the passive residual heat removal heat exchanger in addition to the PLS starting of the startup feedwater pumps. The core makeup tanks are then actuated on Low-2 pressurizer water level signal. Main and startup feedwater are assumed to continue until isolated on Low-2 Tcold. After 30 minutes, the plant is assumed to be manually controlled to either cold shutdown or returned to the no-load conditions.
For design purposes, 20 occurrences of this transient are specified. The components analyses should be based on 20 occurrences of either the reactor trip - Case C transients or 20 occurrences of the control rod drop - Case B transients, whichever transient is more severe for the component being evaluated.
3.9.1.1.2.5 Control Rod Drop This transient occurs when one or more rod cluster control assemblies inadvertently drop into the core because of equipment failure or operator error. If this rod drop occurs while the plant is at power, pressure and temperature transients will occur in the reactor coolant system and on the secondary side of the steam generators. The severity of the rod drop accident depends on a number of factors, 3.9-13 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR such as the number and worth of rod cluster control assemblies that drop, and the value of the moderator temperature coefficient of reactivity.
The following three types of control rod drop transients are postulated for design purposes.
Control Rod Drop - Case A This transient occurs when the worth of the dropped control rods is high. When the rods drop, reactor power quickly decreases, but plant load is maintained at its initial value.
The steam load-reactor power mismatch causes the plant to cool down, eventually leading to a reactor trip, main feedwater isolation, turbine trip, and steamline isolation following a Low-2 steam line pressure signal. No other safety functions are assumed to be actuated during this transient.
Following the reactor trip, the steam generator water level falls because of shrinkage in the secondary side. This is assumed to cause startup feedwater flow to actuate on low steam generator level, thus continuing to drive the primary system temperature and pressure down. The transient is terminated 10 minutes after rod drop.
For design purposes, 30 occurrences of this transient are specified.
Control Rod Drop - Case B This transient is similar to Case A, except the PRHR HX and CMT are assumed to be actuated.
Therefore, the response of the various plant parameters during this transient are very similar to those of reactor trip from full power - Case C.
For design purposes, a combined total of 20 occurrences of the control rod drop - Case B transient and the reactor trip from full power - Case C transient are defined. The components analyses should be based on 20 occurrences of either the control rod drop - Case B transients or 20 occurrences of the reactor trip - Case C transients, whichever transient is more severe for the component being evaluated.
Control Rod Drop - Case C This transient occurs when the worth of the dropped rod is relatively low and the moderator temperature coefficient of reactivity is negative. When the rod drops, reactor power is reduced but no trip occurs.
However, plant steam load is maintained at the initial value through the transient.
The steam load-reactor power mismatch causes the plant to cool down. With a negative moderator temperature coefficient of reactivity, reactor power returns to its initial value. The plant eventually stabilizes, with reactor power, plant steam flow, reactor coolant system pressure, and pressurizer pressure equal to their initial values, but the reactor coolant system temperature and steam generator secondary-side temperature and pressure are lower.
The magnitude of the reactor coolant system temperature reduction is proportional to the relative worth of the dropped control rod and the negative moderator temperature coefficient of reactivity. For design purposes, 30 occurrences of this transient are specified.
At the end of the control rod drop - Case C transient, plant parameters stabilize at their final values.
After plant parameters achieve their final values, the plant remains at these conditions indefinitely.
Subsequently, plant parameters are returned to their initial values.
Following initiation of recovery, hot and cold leg temperatures and steam generator steam temperature and pressure return to their initial values over a 30 minute period. Pressurizer water 3.9-14 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR volume returns to its initial value in about the same amount of time as the return of hot and cold leg temperatures to their initial values. Pressurizer surge rate variation is consistent with the increase in pressurizer water level.
3.9.1.1.2.6 Cold Overpressure The relief valves located in the residual heat removal pump suction piping provide the capability for additional reactor coolant system inventory letdown in order to maintain the reactor coolant system pressure consistent with the reactor vessel pressure temperature limits, as required by Appendix G of 10 CFR Part 50. Reactor coolant system cold overpressurization occurs at low temperature (below 350°F) during plant heatup or cooldown, and can occur with or without a steam bubble in the pressurizer. A cold overpressurization is especially severe when the reactor coolant system is water solid. The event is inadvertent, and can be generated by an equipment malfunction or an operator error.
Cold overpressure events are initiated by either a mass addition that exceeds normal letdown capabilities, or a heat addition that attempts to expand the reactor coolant system water volume.
Under water-solid conditions, a worst-case scenario, the mass addition causes an increase in system pressure until the relief valve set pressure, plus accumulation, is reached. The relief valves remain open, with the system pressure stabilizing at the set pressure plus accumulation, until the mass injection is terminated by the operator. Heat addition, also under water-solid conditions, results in a system pressure increase that eventually is terminated by the relief valves.
Once thermal equilibrium is established between the heat source and the reactor coolant system, and the volume expansion has been let down through the relief valves, system pressure stabilizes at the relief valve set pressure.
Fifteen reactor coolant system cold overpressure events, as described above, are specified for design purposes.
3.9.1.1.2.7 Inadvertent Safeguards Actuation A spurious system-level actuation of the passive core cooling system results in an immediate reactor trip followed by actuation of the various components of the passive core cooling system. The resulting transient is bounded by the reactor trip Case C. The number of reactor trip transients is sufficient to cover a system-level inadvertent safeguards actuation.
A spurious actuation of the passive residual heat removal heat exchanger isolation valves or the core makeup tank valves causes cold reactor coolant to flow into the reactor coolant system. Rapid changes in the temperature of the core makeup tank or passive residual heat removal heat exchanger and associated piping occur. Ten events of this limited transient are postulated.
3.9.1.1.2.8 Partial Loss of Reactor Coolant Flow This transient applies to a partial loss of flow from full power in which a reactor coolant pump is tripped out of service as a result of loss of power to that pump. The consequences of such an accident are a reactor trip on Low-2 reactor coolant flow, followed by a turbine trip; actuation of startup feed control; and automatic opening of the steam dump system. Flow reversal occurs in the associated cold leg. The normal flow direction is maintained in the hot leg of the affected loop but at a reduced rate. Flow through the operating pump in this loop increases.
Operation of the steam dump system tends to bring the plant toward no-load conditions. Cold feedwater from the startup feedwater system then enters the steam generators, causing the plant to 3.9-15 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR cool down. This cooldown continues until termination of startup feed water. The plant is then returned to no-load conditions.
The number of occurrences of this transient is specified as 60 times for design purposes.
3.9.1.1.2.9 Inadvertent Reactor Coolant System Depressurization - Umbrella Case Several events can be postulated as occurring during normal plant operation that cause rapid depressurization of the reactor coolant system. These include the following:
Actuation of a single pressurizer safety valve with failure of the valve to reclose Malfunction of a single pressurizer pressure controller causing two pressurizer spray valves to open Inadvertent opening of one pressurizer spray valve Inadvertent opening of the auxiliary spray valve Umbrella Case - Of these events, the pressurizer safety valve actuation causes the most severe reactor coolant system pressure and temperature transients. It can be used as an umbrella case to conservatively represent the reactor coolant pressure and temperature variations arising from any of them.
Although inadvertent actuation of the pressurizer spray is included among the transient events covered by the umbrella case, the pressurizer safety valve actuation case selected to represent the depressurization transients does not involve spray operation. Therefore, for the umbrella case, it is assumed that pressurizer spray is not actuated and that no temperature transients due to flow occur at the spray nozzle.
Inadvertent Pressurizer Spray - The inadvertent pressurizer spray transient represents the depressurization transient, with the most significant temperature variations on portions of the pressurizer, spray nozzle, and spray piping. Should auxiliary spray flow be inadvertently initiated, it could cause a rapid temperature change at the pressurizer spray nozzle and on the pressurizer vessel. Therefore, to provide a conservative design for these components, an inadvertent pressurizer spray transient is defined.
An inadvertent pressurizer spray occurs if the normal spray valve is opened during normal plant operation because of either failure of a control component or operator error. This introduces water at reactor coolant system cold leg temperature into the pressurizer. The flowrate is assumed to be the maximum design spray flowrate. This transient results in a pressure decrease and, eventually, in a low-pressure reactor trip.
An inadvertent auxiliary spray occurs if the auxiliary spray valve is opened during normal plant operation because of either failure of a control component or operator error. The opening of the auxiliary spray valve causes an inadvertent spray transient only during the limited time that the makeup pump in the chemical and volume control system is operating. The inadvertent auxiliary spray introduces cold water into the pressurizer, which results in a sharp pressure decrease and, eventually, in a Low-2 pressure reactor trip.
The temperature of the auxiliary spray flow is dependent upon the performance of the regenerative heat exchanger. The most conservative case assumes that the letdown stream is shut off and that unheated charging fluid enters the 653°F pressurizer. It is assumed that the temperature of the spray water is 70°F and that the spray flowrate is equal to the normal charging rate.
3.9-16 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR For inadvertent auxiliary spray, it is also assumed that the spray flow continues for five minutes before it is shut off and that the temperature changes at the pressurizer and spray nozzle occur as steps. For design purposes, it is assumed that no reactor coolant temperature changes occur as the result of inadvertent auxiliary spray.
For design purposes, 20 occurrences of the inadvertent reactor coolant system depressurization transient are specified. Component evaluations are based on the more limiting of either the umbrella case or the inadvertent spray case, or, alternatively, are based on a combination of design transients (5 stuck open PSV and 15 inadvertent spray) that total up to the 20 transients. For those components for which the limiting transient is caused by the inadvertent pressurizer spray transient, 10 occurrences of inadvertent normal spray and five occurrences of inadvertent auxiliary spray are postulated.
3.9.1.1.2.10 Excessive Feedwater Flow An excessive feedwater flow transient is conservatively defined as an umbrella case to cover the occurrence of several events of the same general nature. The postulated transient results from inadvertent opening of a feedwater control valve while the plant is at the hot standby or no-load condition, with the feedwater, condensate, and heater drain systems in operation.
It is assumed that the stem of a feedwater control valve fails and the valve immediately reaches the full open position. In the steam generator directly affected by the malfunctioning valve (failed loop),
the feedwater flow step increases from essentially zero flow to the value determined by the system resistance and the developed head of the operating feedwater pumps. Steam flow is assumed to remain at zero.
The CMTs and PRHR HX are actuated on the Low-2 pressurizer water level signal. The startup feedwater and main feedwater flow in the faulted loop are effectively isolated on Low-2 Tcold.
This transient is assumed to occur 30 times for design purposes.
3.9.1.1.2.11 Loss of Power with Natural Circulation Cooldown This event is the same as a loss of power transient, except that the reactor coolant system temperature is reduced by natural circulation through the operation of either the startup feedwater pumps and steam dump through the power-operated relief valves if onsite power is available or the passive residual heat removal system transferring heat to the in-containment refueling water storage tank if onsite power is not available. For design purposes 30 natural circulation cooldown occurrences, are assumed. These two cases are discussed below.
Case A - Loss of Power with Natural Circulation Cooldown with Onsite ac Power For this case, natural circulation cooldown is performed with onsite ac power available. This permits operation of the startup feedwater pumps which enables steam dump through the steam generator power-operated relief valves. This transient is analyzed assuming at least one onsite diesel is operable. For this case the startup feedwater pumps operate and the control rod drive mechanism fan coolers operate to maintain the temperature of the reactor vessel head close to the temperature of the remainder of the reactor vessel. For design purposes, 20 occurrences of this transient are assumed.
Case B - Loss of Power with Natural Circulation Cooldown without Onsite ac Power For this case, the reactor coolant is cooled by natural circulation with the passive residual heat removal heat exchangers. For this case, no credit is taken for nonsafety-related equipment including the diesel generators. For design purposes, 10 occurrences of this transient are assumed.
3.9-17 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR 3.9.1.1.3 Level C Service Conditions (Emergency Conditions)
The following paragraphs describe the reactor coolant system emergency condition transients considered to be plant condition PC-4 per ANS/ANSI 51.1. A list of these transients follows. The effect of these events are analyzed using Service Level C limits. As noted previously, up to 25 strong stress cycles due to these transients are not analyzed for cyclic fatigue. Any cycles exceeding the 25 excluded are analyzed for cyclic fatigue using Service Level B limits. The mechanical loads due to pipe rupture are analyzed using Service Level D limits. See Subsection 3.6.2 for a discussion of the analysis of mechanical loads due to pipe break.
Small loss of coolant accident Small steam line break Complete loss of flow Small feedwater line break Steam generator tube rupture Inadvertent opening of automatic depressurization system valves 3.9.1.1.3.1 Small Loss-of-Coolant Accident For design transient purposes, the small loss-of-coolant accident is a pipe break equivalent to the severance of a 1-inch ID branch connection to the reactor coolant system. It is assumed that the passive core cooling system is actuated and that it delivers water at a minimum temperature of 70°F to the reactor vessel.
It is assumed that this transient occurs five times for design purposes.
3.9.1.1.3.2 Small Steam Line Break For design purposes, a small steam line break is a break equivalent to a steam generator safety valve opening and remaining open.
For design purposes, it is assumed that this transient occurs five times.
3.9.1.1.3.3 Complete Loss of Flow This accident involves a complete loss of flow from full power resulting from the simultaneous loss of power to all reactor coolant pumps. The consequences are a reactor trip on Low-2 pump speed, followed by an automatic turbine trip.
This event is considered to be bounded by the loss of power transient. The frequency of occurrence of loss of power transients incorporates the frequency of occurrence of complete loss of flow accidents.
3.9.1.1.3.4 Small Feedwater Line Break This transient is postulated as a small break in the piping between the steam generator and the main feedwater isolation valve. The main feedwater control system is assumed to malfunction. The malfunction of the main feedwater flow in the affected loop is equivalent to the fluid spilling through the break. No main feedwater is supplied to either steam generator.
After reactor trip, the main feedwater control system is assumed to be lost and reverse flow is assumed to be initiated from the pipe with the break. During the course of the transient, reactor trip, turbine trip, the passive core cooling system and the startup feedwater system are actuated because of low level in the steam generator.
3.9-18 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR For design purposes, this transient is assumed to occur five times.
3.9.1.1.3.5 Steam Generator Tube Rupture This transient is postulated as the double-ended rupture of a single steam generator tube, which results in decreases in pressurizer level and reactor coolant pressure. Assuming no operator action, the reactor eventually trips on overtemperature T or Low-2 pressurizer pressure. Reactor trip initiates a turbine trip. Reactor coolant system pressure continues to decrease after the trip because of energy transfer from the primary system to the secondary side and continued primary to secondary leakage through the ruptured steam generator tube. Continued reactor coolant system leakage results in an actuation of the passive core cooling system because of Low-2 pressurizer level or pressure.
For design purposes this transient is assumed to occur five times.
3.9.1.1.3.6 Inadvertent Opening of Automatic Depressurization System Valves Rapid depressurization of the reactor coolant system results from the inadvertent opening of the automatic depressurization system (ADS) valves. This event is postulated to occur by:
Inadvertent opening of an ADS flowpath through two 4-inch (ADS Stage 1) motor-operated valves connected to the pressurizer. Inadvertent opening of an ADS flowpath through two 8-inch valves (ADS Stage 2 or ADS Stage 3), prior to ADS Stage 1 actuation, is not a credible design transient. Inadvertent opening of the 14-inch (ADS Stage 4) valves connected to the reactor coolant system hot legs is not possible at normal operating pressure. The inadvertent opening of the ADS Stage 1 - 4 valves out of sequence is prevented by the Protection and Safety Monitoring System (PMS) logic for a controlled, staged opening (Figure 7.2-1, Sheet 15) and inadvertent opening of ADS valves individually or in any sequence is prevented by the PMS ADS blocking device described in Subsection 7.3.1.2.4.1 and Figure 7.2-1, Sheet 19.
Inadvertent automatic depressurization system actuation due to a spurious system level signal.
For design purposes, 15 occurrences of the system level inadvertent opening of automatic depressurization system valves transient are assumed, which bounds the inadvertent opening of a single 4-inch flowpath.
3.9.1.1.4 Level D Service Condition (Faulted Conditions)
The following paragraphs discuss the reactor coolant system faulted condition transients considered to be plant condition PC-5 per ANS/ANSI 51.1. A list of these transients follows. These transients are analyzed using Level D service limits and are not analyzed for fatigue due to cyclic loads. See Subsection 3.6.2 for a discussion of the analysis of mechanical loads due to pipe break.
The components are not evaluated for the dynamic effects of pipe rupture for the pipe break events when the requirements for mechanistic pipe break have been satisfied for the connecting piping. See Subsection 3.6.3 for a discussion of the leak-before-break requirements for mechanistic pipe break.
The maximum fluid pressure on components is evaluated for these events when leak-before-break requirements are satisfied.
Reactor coolant pipe break (large loss-of-coolant accident)
Large steam line break Large feedwater line break 3.9-19 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Reactor coolant pump locked rotor Control rod ejection Each of these accidents is evaluated for one occurrence only.
3.9.1.1.4.1 Reactor Coolant Pipe Break (Large Loss-of-Coolant Accident)
Following a rupture of a reactor coolant pipe or connecting branch line that results in a large loss of coolant, the primary system pressure decreases rapidly. This rapid decrease causes the primary system temperature to decrease. Because of the rapid blowdown of coolant from the system and the comparatively large heat capacity of the metal sections of the components, it is likely that the metal will remain at or near operating temperature during blowdown. The passive safety injection system is actuated to introduce water into the reactor coolant system (reactor vessel). The RCS thermal hydraulic response to this transient is developed assuming injection occurs at a maximum initial temperature of 120°F, while the component analyses account for stress associated with injection at a minimum temperature of 50°F. The safeguards actuation signal also trips the reactor and the turbine.
3.9.1.1.4.2 Large Steam Line Break This transient is based on a double-ended rupture of a main steam line. The analyses performed are based on the following conservative assumptions:
The plant is initially at no-load condition.
The steam line break results in an immediate reactor trip.
Main steam line isolation valves are initially open.
The passive core cooling system operates as designed, and no single failures are assumed.
This maximizes the extent and rate of plant cooldown.
Reactor coolant pumps continue to operate until tripped on core makeup tank actuation coincident with Low-2 pressurizer water level.
An alternate definition of large steam break if postulated for evaluation of steam generator pressure boundary components, with respect to stress levels in the steam generator tubes and tubesheet, may represent a more severe transient. The alternate definition is as follows: If the break should occur while the plant is operating at full power instead of no load, and the break is located outside of containment, the affected steam generator will quickly blow down to atmospheric pressure. Flow through the startup feedwater nozzle is then delivered to the hot, dry shell side of the affected steam generator. The primary side pressurizes to 2600 psia (set pressure of pressurizer safety valves plus one percent set pressure error plus 3 percent accumulation). This results in a large differential pressure across the tubes and tubesheet. The combination of parameters giving the most conservative results is used.
The simultaneous, complete severance of both a main steam line and a feedwater line is not a credible event in the AP1000. In addition to the application of criteria to demonstrate leak-before-break on these lines, layout and support requirements are imposed to prevent extensive steam line or feedwater line displacement following rupture.
3.9.1.1.4.3 Large Feedwater Line Break This postulated accident involves the double-ended rupture of a main feedwater line, which results in rapid blowdown of the affected steam generator and termination of feedwater flow to the other. The 3.9-20 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR plant is assumed to be operating at an initial power level of 102 percent of design rating, with temperatures conservatively higher than the nominal full power values when the break occurs. The feedwater line break results in immediate reactor and turbine trips. The passive core cooling system is actuated, the passive residual heat removal heat exchanger operates, and the reactor coolant pumps are tripped.
In the analysis, no credit is taken for operation of pressure control systems, steam dump, or steam generator power-operated relief valves. The intact steam generator feeds the break through the main steam header after the faulted steam generator discharges its liquid inventory. Steam flow continues until the main steam lines are isolated on Low-2 steam line pressure.
3.9.1.1.4.4 Reactor Coolant Pump Locked Rotor This accident is based on the seizure of the rotating assembly of a reactor coolant pump rotor, with the plant operating at full power. Reactor trip occurs rapidly, as the result of Low-2 coolant flow in the affected cold leg. Assumptions made in the analysis include the following:
Initially the plant is operating at 102 percent of design rating.
Initially temperature is conservatively higher than the program value.
No return to criticality occurs in the core.
No credit is taken for reactor coolant system pressure control.
For the determination of the increase in pressure and response of the reactor core to the reduction in flow, the seizure is assumed to occur instantaneously. For the evaluation of dynamic effects imposed on the pump casing, steam generator, and connecting piping, the rotating assembly is assumed to come to a stop rapidly but not instantaneously. See Subsection 5.4.1 for a discussion of the time for a locked rotor to occur.
Level D pressure limits are applied to the affected reactor coolant pump, steam generator channel head and piping, and Level B pressure limits are applied to the rest of the reactor coolant system.
The system effects and the maximum fluid pressure are evaluated for this condition on components not affected by the dynamic effects.
3.9.1.1.4.5 Control Rod Ejection This accident is based on the single most reactive control rod being instantaneously ejected from the core. This reactivity insertion in a particular region of the core causes a severe pressure increase in the reactor coolant system in such a way that the pressurizer safety valves will lift. It also causes a more severe temperature transient in the loop associated with the affected region (the hot loop) than in the other loop.
Since the pressure boundary of the control rod drive mechanism is constructed using the requirements of the ASME Code,Section III, the ejection of the control rod is postulated as a nonmechanistic event and not as the result of a rupture of the control rod drive housing. The analysis of the system response is based on the reactivity insertion without any mitigating effects (on the pressure transient) of coolant blowdown through the hole in the vessel head above the rod. The maximum fluid pressure on the components is evaluated for this condition.
3.9.1.1.5 Test Conditions Transients The following paragraphs describe the following reactor coolant system test conditions transients:
Primary-side hydrostatic test Secondary-side hydrostatic test 3.9-21 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Tube leakage test 3.9.1.1.5.1 Primary-Side Hydrostatic Test The pressure tests covered by this subsection include both shop and field hydrostatic tests that occur as a result of component or system testing. This hydrostatic test is performed at a water temperature compatible with reactor material ductility requirements and a test pressure of 3107 psig (1.25 times design pressure). In this test, the reactor coolant system is pressurized to 3107 psig coincident with steam generator secondary-side pressure of zero psig. The reactor coolant system is designed for 10 cycles of these hydrostatic tests. The number of cycles is independent of other operating transients.
Additional, lower-pressure hydrostatic tests may be performed to meet the inservice inspection requirements of ASME Code,Section XI, Subarticle IWB-5200. Four such tests are expected. The increase in the fatigue usage factor caused by these tests is covered by the primary-side leakage tests that are considered for design. No additional specification is required.
3.9.1.1.5.2 Secondary-Side Hydrostatic Test The secondary side of the steam generator is pressurized to 1.25 design pressure, with a minimum water temperature of 70°F. For design purposes it is assumed that the steam generator will experience 10 cycles of this test. These hydrostatic test cycles are considered in the stress and fatigue analyses.
These tests may be performed either before plant startup or after major repairs or both. The number of cycles is independent of other operating transients.
3.9.1.1.5.3 Tube Leakage Test It may be necessary to check the steam generator for tube leakage and tube-to-tubesheet leakage.
This is done by inspecting the underside (channel-head side) of the tubesheet for water leakage, with the secondary side pressurized. Tube leakage tests are performed during plant cold shutdown.
For these tests, the secondary side of the steam generator is pressurized with water, initially at a relatively low pressure, and the primary system remains depressurized. The underside of the tubesheet is examined for leaks. If any are observed, the secondary side is depressurized and the leaking tube is plugged. The secondary side is then repressurized (to a higher pressure), and the underside of the tubesheet is again checked for leaks. This process is repeated until the leaks are repaired. The maximum (final) secondary-side test pressure reached is 840 psig.
The total number of tube leakage test cycles is defined as 800 for design purposes. The following is a breakdown of the anticipated number of occurrences at each secondary side test pressure:
Test Pressure Number of (psig) Occurrences 200 400 400 200 600 120 840 80 During these tests, both the primary and the secondary sides of the steam generators are at ambient temperatures. Neither the primary-side nor secondary-side design pressure is exceeded. The 3.9-22 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR expected secondary-to-primary pressure differential exceeds the design value of 670 psi for some of the test cycles.
3.9.1.2 Computer Programs Used in Analyses A number of computer programs that are used in the dynamic and static analyses of mechanical loads, stresses, and deformations, and in the hydraulic transient load analyses, of seismic Category I components and supports are listed in Table 3.9-15. [The Combined License applicant will implement the NRC benchmark program using AP1000 specific problems (Reference 20) if a piping analysis computer program other than those used for design certification (PIPESTRESS, GAPPIPE, WECAN, and ANSYS) is used.]*
The development process, verification, validation, configuration control and error reporting and resolution for computer programs used in these analyses for the AP1000 are completed in compliance with an established quality assurance program. The quality assurance program is described in Chapter 17. The verification conforms to at least one of the following methods:
Hand calculations Alternate verified calculational methods Results of other verified programs Results obtained from experiments and tests Known solutions for similar or standard problems Measured and documented plant data Confirmed published data and correlations Results of standard programs and benchmarks Parametric sensitivity analysis Reference to a verification and validation that has been reviewed and accepted by an independent third party 3.9.1.3 Experimental Stress Analysis For the reactor internals, measured results from prototype plants and various scale model tests are used to validate the analysis of vibrations of reactor vessel internals as discussed in Subsection 3.9.2. [No other experimental stress analysis is used for the AP1000.]*
3.9.1.4 Considerations for the Evaluation of the Faulted Conditions Subsection 3.9.3 describes the analytical methods used to evaluate ASME Code,Section III, Class 1 components for Service Level D Conditions (faulted conditions).
- In accordance with the departure evaluation process specified in License Condition 2.D.(13), NRC Staff approval may be required prior to implementing a change in this information.
3.9-23 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR 3.9.1.5 Module Interaction, Coupling, and Other Issues Many portions of the systems for the AP1000 are assembled as modules and shipped to the plant as completed or partially completed units. The following provides a discussion of influence of modularization on the structural analysis, inservice inspection, and maintenance in the AP1000.
The modules are constructed using a structural steel framework to support the equipment, pipe, and pipe supports in the module. Piping in the modules is routed and analyzed in the same manner as in a plant built by traditional methods. See Subsection 3.7.3 for additional discussion of the structural analysis of modules.
The modules are designed and engineered to provide access for inservice inspection and maintenance activities. Field run pipes and equipment supports do not hinder access for maintenance and inspection.
The quality assurance requirements for the installation and welding of components, piping, supports, and structural elements are the same as in a plant built by traditional methods. The improved access to the parts of the module during fabrication enhances inspection.
3.9.2 Dynamic Testing and Analysis 3.9.2.1 Piping Vibration, Thermal Expansion, and Dynamic Effects A pre-operational test program as described in Section 14.2 is implemented as required by NB-3622.3, NC-3622, and ND-3622 of the ASME Code,Section III to verify that the piping and piping restraints will withstand dynamic effects due to transients, such as pump trips and valve trips, and that piping vibrations are within acceptable levels. The piping systems to be tested include ASME Code,Section III, Class 1, 2, and 3 systems, high energy systems inside seismic Category I structures, high energy portions of systems whose failure could reduce the functioning of seismic Category I features to an unacceptable level, and the seismic Category I portions of moderate-energy piping systems located outside containment. This includes ASME instrumentation lines up to the first support in each of three orthogonal directions from the process pipe or equipment connection point.
The pre-operational test program for the ASME Code,Section III, Class 1, 2, and 3, and other high-energy or seismic Category I piping systems simulates actual operating modes to demonstrate that the components comprising these systems meet functional design requirements and that piping vibrations are within acceptable levels. The pre-operational testing programs are outlined in Subsection 14.2.9. Piping systems are checked in three sequential steps or series of tests and inspections.
Construction acceptance, the first step, entails inspection of components for correct installation.
During this phase, pipe and equipment supports are checked for correct assembly and setting. The cold locations of reactor coolant system components, such as steam generators and reactor coolant pumps, are recorded.
During the second step of testing, plant heatup, the plant is heated to normal operating temperatures.
During the heatup, systems are observed periodically to verify proper expansion. Expansion data is recorded at the end of heatup.
During the third step of testing, performance testing, systems are operated to check the performance of critical pumps, valves, controls, and auxiliary equipment. This phase of testing includes transient tests performed as outlined in Chapter 14. During this phase of testing, the piping and piping restraints are observed for vibration and expansion response. Automatic safety devices, control 3.9-24 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR devices, and other major equipment are observed for indications of overstress, excess vibration, overheating, and noise. Each system test includes critical valve operation during transient system modes.
The locations in the piping system selected for observation during the testing, and the respective acceptance standards, are provided in the preoperational vibration, thermal expansion, and dynamic effects test program plan.
Provisions are made to verify the operability of essential snubbers by recording hot and cold positions. If vibration during testing exceeds the acceptance standard, corrective measures are taken and the test is performed again to demonstrate adequacy.
3.9.2.1.1 Piping Vibration Details Piping vibration loadings can be placed in two categories: transient-induced vibrations and steady-state vibrations. The first is a dynamic system response to a transient, time-dependent forcing function, such as fast valve closure. The second is a constant vibration, usually flow-induced. Piping vibration testing and assessment is performed in accordance with ASME OM-S/G (Reference 39),
Part 3.
Transient Response Dynamic events falling in this category are anticipated operational occurrences. The systems and the transients included in the preoperational test program are outlined in Section 14.2.
For those types of transients where a time-dependent dynamic analysis is performed on the system, the stresses obtained are combined with system stresses resulting from other operating conditions in according to the criteria identified in Subsection 3.9.3.
Details of the program and the pipe monitoring displacement transducers or scratch plates and strain gage or load cells locations, including the criteria for evaluation of data gained, are provided in the test procedures.
Steady-State Vibration System vibrations resulting from flow disturbances are considered steady-state vibration. Since the exact nature of the flow disturbance is not known prior to pump operation, no analysis is performed. If system vibration is evident during initial operation, the maximum amplitudes are measured and related to alternating stress intensity levels based on the guidance of ASME OM-S/G (Reference 39),
Part 3.
In some locations, vibration monitors are installed to provide additional indication to the operator of the vibration levels on the piping system and supports. The information provided by the monitoring prevents unnecessary fatigue accumulation in the piping system.
The AP1000 preoperational vibration monitoring program includes appropriate safety-related instrument lines up to the first support in each of three orthogonal directions from the process pipe or equipment connection point. The acceptance standard is that the maximum alternating stress intensity, Salt, calculated from the measured amplitudes, shall be limited as defined in the following:
A. For ASME Class 1 piping systems:
C2 K 2 S Salt = M el Z
3.9-25 Revision 9
C2 = secondary stress index as defined in the ASME Code
= allowable stress reduction factor: 1.3 for materials covered by Figure I-9.1; or 1.0 for materials covered by Figure I-9.2.1 or I-9.2.2 of the ASME Code,Section III, Appendices K2 = local stress index as defined in the ASME Code M = maximum zero to peak dynamic moment loading due to vibration only, or in combination with other loads as required by the system design specification Sel = 0.8 SA, where SA is the alternating stress at 106 cycles from Figure I-9.1; or SA at 1011 cycles from Figure I-9.2.2 of the ASME Code. The influence of temperature on the modulus of elasticity is considered.
Z = section modulus of the pipe B. For ASME Class 2 and 3 or ASME B31.1 piping:
C2 K 2 S Salt = M el Z
where:
C2K2 = 2i i = stress intensification factor, as defined in subsection NC and ND of the ASME Code or in ASME B31.1.
If significant vibration levels are detected during the test program that have not been previously considered in the piping system analysis, consideration is given to modifying the design specification to re-verify applicable code conformance using the measured vibration as input.
If required, additional restraints are provided to reduce stresses to below the acceptance levels.
3.9.2.1.2 Piping Thermal Expansion Program The piping thermal expansion testing program verifies that the piping systems expand within acceptable limits during heatup and cooldown. Also, this program verifies that the standard component supports (including spring hangers, snubbers, and struts) can accommodate the expansion of the piping within an acceptable range for required modes of operation. Test specifications for thermal expansion testing of piping systems during preoperational and start-up testing will be in accordance with ASME OM-S/G (Reference 39), Part 7.
3.9.2.2 Seismic Qualification Testing of Safety-Related Mechanical Equipment Safety-related mechanical equipment and supports are tested or analyzed to demonstrate functional integrity during and following a postulated safe shutdown earthquake. Equipment that must be active to shut down the plant or mitigate the effects of postulated accidents is analyzed or tested to verify operability. The operability requirements for active valves are discussed more fully in Subsection 3.9.3.2.
3.9-26 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Section 3.2 lists the equipment classification and seismic category for components and equipment in the AP1000. Table 3.9-12 lists the active valves. The AP1000 has no safety-related active pumps or turbines.
Seismic Category I safety-related equipment is shown to have structural integrity by analysis satisfying the stress criteria applicable to the particular piece of equipment or by tests showing that the equipment retains its structural integrity under the simulated test environment.
Analyses used to verify functional integrity demonstrate that stresses do not exceed the allowables specified for the appropriate loading combinations listed in Subsection 3.9.3. Deformations do not exceed those that permit the component to perform its required safety function.
Subsection 3.7.3 describes the methods for seismic subsystem analysis.
Tests used to verify operability demonstrate that the component is not prevented from performing its required safety function during and after the test.
The testing procedures used in the seismic qualification of instrumentation and electrical equipment are discussed in Section 3.10. The operability of active valves includes the operability of the valve operator. Valves and operators are tested for operability as an assembly. Section 3.10 includes a description of operability testing for ASME Code Classes 1, 2, and 3 valves and respective drives, operators, and vital auxiliary equipment. That section includes a description of the seismic operability criteria.
Dynamic testing, analysis, or a combination of the two may be used to qualify safety-related seismic Category I mechanical equipment for a postulated safe shutdown earthquake. The criteria used to decide whether dynamic testing or analysis is used are as follows:
Analysis without Testing Structural analysis without testing is used if structural integrity alone can verify the intended design function. Equipment which falls into this category includes:
Piping Ductwork Tanks and vessels Heat exchangers Filters Passive valves Dynamic analysis without testing is used to qualify heavy machinery too large to be tested. For active equipment, it is verified that deformations due to seismic loadings do not cause binding of moving parts to the extent that the component cannot perform its required safety function.
Dynamic Testing Dynamic testing is used for components with mechanisms that must change position in order to perform the required safety function. Section 3.10 discusses the seismic qualification of electrical equipment and combinations of valves and valve operators. Such components include the following:
Electric motor valve operators Valve position sensors Similar appurtenances for other active valves 3.9-27 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Combinations of Analysis with Testing Combinations of analysis, static testing, and dynamic testing are used for seismic qualification of complex valves. Section 3.10 discusses the requirements for these combinations for equipment, which includes the following:
Main steam and main feedwater isolation valves Other active valves 3.9.2.3 Dynamic Response Analysis of Reactor Internals under Operational Flow Transients and Steady-State Conditions The vibration characteristics and behavior due to flow-induced excitation are complex and not readily ascertained by analytical means alone. Assessment of vibrational response is done using a combination of analysis and testing. Comparisons of results obtained from reference plant vibration measurement programs have been used to confirm the validity of scale model tests and other prediction methods as well to confirm the adequacy of reference plant internals regarding flow-induced vibration (FIV). The flow-induced vibration assessment was originally documented in WCAP-15949 (Reference 18) during development of the AP1000 Design Control Document. The FIV assessment program for the final reactor internals design is provided in WCAP-17983 (Reference 40) and WCAP-17984 (Reference 41). WCAP-17983 and WCAP-17984 supersede WCAP-15949, and the reference to WCAP-15949 is retained for historical purposes.
Reactor components are excited by flowing coolant, which causes oscillatory pressures on the surfaces. The integration of these pressures over the applied area provides the forcing functions to be used in the dynamic analysis of the structures. In view of the complexities of the geometries and the random character of the pressure oscillations, a closed form solution of the vibration problem by the integration of the differential equations is not always practical and realistic.
The determination of forcing functions as a direct correlation of pressure oscillations cannot be practically performed independently of the dynamic characteristics of the reactor vessel internals structure. The main objective is to establish the characteristics of the forcing functions that determine the response of the structures.
By studying the dynamic properties of the structure from previous analytical and experimental work, the characteristics of the forcing function are deduced. These studies indicate that the most important forcing functions are flow turbulence and pump-related excitation. The relevance of such excitation depends on factors that include the type and location of components and flow conditions.
The effects of these forcing functions have been studied in tests performed on models and reference plants. These effects will be factored into the analysis models used to evaluate flow-induced vibrations in the AP1000 reactor internals.
The structural analysis models include modeling of the gaps between the core barrel and reactor vessel, the core barrel and upper core plate, and the core barrel and core shroud. To ensure that the range of possible gaps between the components is evaluated, time-history analyses are performed with various sets of gaps. The resulting loads are evaluated, and the resulting highest load for each component is used in the structural analysis.
Loads on the reactor vessel internals components result from the reactor coolant pump pulsations.
Using a reactor coolant system analysis, the resulting pressure differences across the components are calculated for inclusion in the structural evaluation models. The uncertainties associated with these component loads are considered by using a general design basis in which the reactor coolant pump related pressure pulsations are taken to be coincident with the component natural frequency if 3.9-28 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR the natural frequency is within +/-10% of the reactor coolant pump excitation frequency. The calculated maximum forces from this resonance condition are used in the component structural evaluation.
The vibration assessment program for the AP1000 reactor internals determines, prior to testing of the first AP1000, that the internals are not expected to be subject to unacceptable flow-induced vibrations. The assessment is consistent with the guidelines of Regulatory Guide 1.20. Conformance with Regulatory Guide 1.20 is summarized in Subsection 1.9.1.
The reactor vessel internals in the AP1000 are similar in size and overall configurations to the reactor vessel internals in previous Westinghouse-designed three-loop nuclear power plants.
The original reference plant for Westinghouse three-loop plant reactor internals flow-induced vibration is H. B. Robinson. The results of vibrations testing at H. B. Robinson are reported in WCAP-7765-AR (Reference 3).
Successive design changes that have been incorporated into the AP1000 design since the reference plant tests have also been included in previous preoperational plant vibration testing including the following:
Inverted hat upper internals and 17x17 guide tubes at DOEL 3 and Sequoyah 1 XL lower core support structure at DOEL 4 Core shroud at Yonggwang 4 Neutron panels at Trojan 1 These tests confirmed that the internals behaved as expected and that the vibration levels were within allowable values. The vibration testing for 17x17 fuel internals and inverted hat upper internals is reported in WCAP-8766 (Reference 4) and WCAP-8516-P (Reference 5). The vibration testing of three-loop XL type lower core support structure in DOEL 4 is reported in WCAP-10846 (Reference 6). The vibration evaluations of upper and lower internals assemblies for a four-loop XL plant are reported in WCAP-10865 (Reference 7). The vibration testing of the core shroud lower internals design is reported in Reference 13.
The results of the Doel 3 and Doel 4 reactor internals vibration test programs are utilized to support the vibration assessment of the AP1000 reactor internals. The measured responses from Doel 3 and Doel 4 are adjusted to the higher AP1000 flowrate to support the determination of the expected upper internals and lower internals vibration levels respectively. The velocity through the core is approximately the same as that of Doel 4.
The results of the Trojan 1 tests showed that the lower internals vibrations are lower with neutron panels than with a circular thermal shield as reported in WCAP-8766 (Reference 4).
Subsequent operation of numerous plants has further demonstrated the adequacy of the reactor vessel internals regarding flow-induced vibration.
AP1000 includes design features that differ from the design in plants in which the reactor internals have been tested as outlined previously. These design differences include the following:
The design has four inlet nozzles and two outlet nozzles in a three-loop size reactor vessel with a three-loop size core barrel diameter.
The AP1000 core barrel overall length is 11 inches longer than that of the standard 3XL design.
3.9-29 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR The skirt of the internals support structure is 11-inches longer than the skirt of previous three-loop internals designs.
The upper support plate has sixty-nine 9.78 inch diameter holes as compared to sixty-one 9.50 inch diameter holes in the previous three-loop design. The plate thickness is identical at 12 inches in both designs.
The design has a new in-core instrumentation system.
The structures below the lower core support plate and the height of the lower plenum have been changed. The core barrel restraint elevation is within the radius of the lower head.
The reactor coolant is moved using a sealless pump instead of a shaft seal pump.
A flow skirt is included in the reactor vessel lower head.
The vibrations of the upper internals components are well characterized by previous plant testing based on the following: The control assembly guide tubes and support column designs are similar to those in a previously tested plant. Vibratory loads on these components are expected to be comparable to previously tested three-loop plants, because the AP1000 outlet nozzle velocity is approximately the same as in the three-loop plants.
The AP1000 upper internals design is substantially the same as that measured in the Doel 3 plant and 3XL scale model tests. The AP1000 support columns, guide tubes and upper support assembly are nearly identical to the components in the 3XL scale model test, although the AP1000 arrangement includes more guide tubes and support columns. Preliminary consideration indicates that the corresponding AP1000 responses will be calculated to be similar to the previous plant responses.
The vibration assessment evaluation will demonstrate that the vibration levels of the AP1000 lower internals are acceptable. Comparison of lower internals design features between the AP1000 and standard 3XL are discussed below.
The core barrel outside diameter, inside diameter, and the reactor vessel inside diameter are approximately the same as the tested three-loop plants. The core barrel length is 11 inches longer
(~6%). Although the inlet nozzle and upper downcomer configuration of the AP1000 design differs from that of the 3XL design, the AP1000 reactor coolant inlet velocity is approximately the same as in the three-loop plants. The reactor coolant velocity in the lower plenum is comparable to the lower plenum velocity in the three-loop plants. The coolant velocity in the downcomer annulus between the core barrel and the reactor vessel wall is lower in the AP1000 design than in previous three-loop plants.
The vibrational response of the core barrel was measured during the Doel 4 reactor internals vibration measurement program. The diameter, length, and thickness are nearly identical to the AP1000 core barrel, and both use the single combined lower core support plate and neutron panels.
The core shroud is shorter than the core barrel, has a smaller outer diameter than the core barrel inside diameter, and is more rigidly clamped at its axially supported end, so that it is not expected to have a significant effect on core barrel vibration.
The replacement of the baffle-former structure with the core shroud reduces the stiffness of the lower internals assembly. The AP1000 shell mode amplitudes are estimated to be higher than three-loop core barrel responses based on scaling the measured responses to the AP1000 reduced core barrel stiffness. The AP1000 shell mode amplitudes are expected to be acceptable.
3.9-30 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR The AP1000 core barrel and core shroud will be instrumented during the pre-operational testing of the first plant to determine the shell mode and beam mode frequencies and amplitudes.
The in-core instrumentation cables are inside the upper internals support columns and are thus shielded from core plenum coolant flows. The instrumentation cables are subjected to fuel assembly outlet nozzle turbulence. This is judged to be not greater than the inlet nozzle turbulence to which in-core instrumentation thimbles in previous plants were subjected.
One of the changes below the lower core support is the addition of a vortex suppressor. The vortex suppressor design is subject to flow-induced vibrations from coolant flows in the core inlet plenum and by motions of the core barrel. The other significant changes below the lower core support plate are the removal of bottom mounted instrumentation and associated guide tubes and the reduction of the plenum height.
The sealless reactor coolant pumps of the AP1000, have a higher rotational speed and the same number of impeller blades as in previous plants. An evaluation of pump-induced loads is included in the vibration assessment. Calculations of the pump induced pulsations acting on the AP1000 reactor internals are based on full-scale AP1000 pump test data.
3.9.2.4 Pre-operational Flow-Induced Vibration Testing of Reactor Internals The VEGP Units 3 & 4 reactor internals are classified as non-prototype, Category I as defined in Regulatory Guide 1.20. Sanmen Unit 1, as the first AP1000 plant, is the valid prototype for the AP1000 reactor internal design. Based on this classification, an instrumented test is not required.
The recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.20 are satisfied by conducting the confirmatory pre-and post-hot functional examination for integrity. Conformance with Regulatory Guide 1.20 is summarized in Subsection 1.9.1.
The reactor internals flow-induced vibration assessment program is documented in WCAP-17983 (Reference 40) and WCAP-17984 (Reference 41), including comparison of the AP1000 plant and operating plants that have undergone vibration measurement programs.
The acceptance criteria for the vibration predictions are established and related to the ASME Code allowables for long term steady-state conditions.
During the hot functional test, the internals are subjected to flow conditions representative of normal operation for a sufficient length of time to generate a cyclic loading of greater than 106 cycles on the main structural elements of the internals. In addition, there is some operating time with one, two, or three pumps operating.
Inspection before and after the hot functional test serves to confirm that the structural integrity of the internals with regard to flow-induced vibrations. When no indications of harmful vibrations or signs of abnormal wear are detected and no apparent structural changes take place, the core support structures are considered to be structurally adequate and sound for operation. If such indications are detected, further evaluation is required.
The testing and inspection plan includes features with emphasis on the areas susceptible to FIV, including flow-induced wear. Consistent with Regulatory Guide 1.20, these areas include as a minimum:
The major load-bearing elements of the reactor internals relied upon to retain the core support structures in position, The lateral, vertical, and torsional restraints provided within the vessel, 3.9-31 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR The locking and bolting components whose failure could adversely affect the structural integrity of the reactor internals, Those surfaces that are known to be or may become contact surfaces during operation, Those critical locations on the reactor vessel internal components as identified by the vibration analysis, and The interior of the reactor vessel for evidence of loose parts or foreign material.
The expected and acceptable vibration levels and expected natural frequencies will be determined as part of the vibration assessment program. Appropriate acceptance criteria for the inspection of the reactor internals before and after the hot functional testing are defined as part of the vibration assessment program (WCAP-17983, Reference 40).
3.9.2.5 Dynamic System Analysis of the Reactor Internals Under Faulted Conditions The reactor internals analysis for Level D Service condition events considers safe shutdown earthquake seismic events and pipe rupture conditions. Subsection 3.9.3 defines the loads and loading combinations considered.
The standard for acceptability in regard to mechanical integrity analyses, are that adequate core cooling and core shutdown must be provided. This implies that the deformation of the reactor internals must be sufficiently small so that the geometry remains substantially intact. Consequently, the limitations established for the internals are concerned with the deflections and stability of the parts in addition to stress criteria to confirm integrity of the components.
The AP1000 design loads for LOCA conditions are based on the use of mechanistic pipe break criteria (see Subsection 3.6.3).
3.9.2.5.1 Reactor Internals Analysis Methodology The evaluation of the reactor internals consists of two major steps. The first step is the three-dimensional response of the reactor internals resulting from the seismic and pipe rupture conditions caused by breaks in the pipe that are not qualified by leak-before-break criteria. The breaks evaluated are those which have the greatest dynamic effect on the reactor internals.
The second step of the evaluation is the component stress evaluations. Maximum stresses and displacements under seismic plus pipe rupture conditions are obtained for the reactor internal components and are combined by the square root of the sum of the squares rule. These maximum stresses and displacements are compared to the allowable values for Level D service conditions.
3.9.2.5.1.1 Dynamic Response of Reactor Pressure Vessel System for Postulated Pipe Rupture The structural analysis of the reactor vessel system for a postulated pipe rupture considers simultaneous application of the time-history loads that could result from the rupture. The mechanical loads are limited to those due to the movement of the fluid through the reactor internals and a small depressurization effect. Because of the application of mechanistic pipe rupture criteria, evaluation of dynamic effects such as cavity pressurization loads, jet impingement loads, and internal hydraulic pressure transients is limited to those pipe breaks which are not excluded by mechanistic pipe break criteria.
3.9-32 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR The vessel is restrained by reactor vessel supports beneath four of the reactor vessel nozzles and the reactor coolant loop piping. The reactor coolant loop piping is also supported by the steam generator and steam generator supports.
Analysis of the reactor internals for the loads resulting from a postulated pipe rupture is based on the time-history response of the internals to simultaneously applied forcing functions. The forcing functions are defined at points in the system where changes in cross section or direction of flow occur in such a way that differential loads are generated during the transient. The dynamic mechanical analysis can employ the displacement method, lumped parameters, and stiffness matrix formulations. Because of the complexity of the system and the components, finite element stress analysis codes are used to provide information at various points.
A digital computer program modeling the blowdown of coolant out of the break (see WCAP-8708-P-A, Reference 8), has been developed to calculate local fluid pressure, flow, and density transients that occur in pressurized water reactor coolant systems during a loss of coolant accident. This program is applied to the subcooled, transition, and saturated two-phase blowdown regimes. The program is based on the method of characteristics wherein the resulting set of ordinary differential equations, obtained from the laws of conservation of mass, momentum, and energy are solved numerically, using a fixed mesh in both space and time.
Although spatially, one-dimensional conservation laws are used, the code can be applied to describe three-dimensional system geometries by use of the equivalent piping networks. Such piping networks may contain any number of channels of various diameters, dead ends, branches (with up to six pipes connected to each branch), contractions, expansions, orifices, pumps, and free surfaces (such as in the pressurizer). System losses such as friction, contraction, and expansion, are considered.
The program evaluates the pressure and velocity transients for a maximum of 2400 locations throughout the system. These pressure and velocity transients are stored as a permanent tape file and are made available to a program that uses a detailed geometric description in evaluating the loadings on the reactor internals.
Each reactor component for which calculations are required is designated as an element and assigned an element number. Forces acting upon each of the elements are calculated summing up the effects of the following:
Pressure differential across the element Flow stagnation on and unrecovered orifice losses across the element Friction losses along the element Input to the code, in addition to the pressure and velocity transients, includes the effective area of each element on which the force acts because of the pressure differential across the element, a coefficient to account for flow stagnation and unrecovered orifice losses, and the total area of the element along which the shear forces act.
The pressure waves generated within the reactor are highly dependent on the location and nature of the postulated pipe failure. In general, the more rapid the severance of the pipe and the larger the pipe, the more severe the imposed loading is on the components. With the application of mechanistic pipe rupture and the determination of leak-before-break characteristics in large diameter pipe, the pressure waves are of small consequence compared with the seismic loads.
3.9-33 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR 3.9.2.5.1.2 Reactor Vessel, Core Support, and Internal Components Modeling The mathematical model of the reactor pressure vessel (RV) is a three-dimensional, nonlinear, finite element model that represents the dynamic characteristics of the reactor vessel and its internals in the six geometric degrees of freedom. This model is known as the Reactor Equipment System Model (RESM). The model is developed using a general purpose finite element computer code. The model consists of four major concentric, structural submodels connected by nonlinear impact elements and hydrodynamic mass. The four major concentric submodels represent the following components:
Reactor vessel shell, hemispherical domed head, the lower dome, flow skirt, inlet and outlet nozzles, and integrated head package Lower internals assembly including: the core barrel (CB), core shroud (CS), lower core support plate (LCSP), secondary core support structure (SCSS) and vortex suppression plate, and CB neutron panels Upper internals (UI) assembly consisting of the upper support plate (USP), guide tubes (GT),
upper support columns (USC), upper core plate (UCP), and instrumentation grid assembly (IGA)
Simplified fuel assemblies (FA)
Several structural interfaces, for both linear and nonlinear impact elements, and hydrodynamic mass matrices include the following:
Lower radial keys between the RV and CB RV flange and CB flange RV and UI flange UI flange and hold-down spring Hydrodynamic mass matrices between the RV and CB, and between the CB and CS Restraint provided by the support stiffness at the RV four inlet nozzle support pads of the primary loop and ground Hot and cold leg loops Nonlinear impact elements are included for both radial and tangential gaps and stiffnesses at several interface locations. The RV-to-USP flange, USP-flange-to-CB flange (hold-down spring), and CB-flange-to-RV interfaces are modeled as a series of elements that simulate preload, friction, rotational stiffness, and impact stiffness in the joints. Stiffnesses are developed for each interface, while gaps are established by calculating the steady-state hot gap values. Likewise, the CS-FA annulus is simulated using gap elements at various elevations. The locations of gap elements in the AP1000 RESM are as follows:
RV and CB at the lower radial keys CB nozzles and RV outlet nozzles RV and CB flanges and the RV and UI flanges.
UCP-CB alignment plate CS-CB alignment plate CB-CS annulus and 3.9-34 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR CS-FA annulus The dynamic time history of the RESM for seismic and loss-of-coolant-accident (LOCA) events provide a number of outputs for all of the components that are included in the model. Thus, for example, the impact forces at all the gap elements are one of the key output results provided to the component analysts. Other results include the internal forces and moments, acceleration and displacement time histories for the detailed stress analyses of the core support, and internals components. Head and lower dome motions, core plate, and CS displacement time histories are also provided for evaluation of the CRDMs, SCCS, flow skirt, and fuel assembly (core) components.
3.9.2.5.2 Analytical Methods The time-history effects of the internals hydraulic loads and loop mechanical loads are combined and applied simultaneously to the appropriate nodes of the mathematical model of the reactor vessel and internals. The analysis is performed by numerically integrating the differential equations of motion to obtain the transient response.
The output of the analysis includes the displacements of the reactor vessel and the loads in the reactor vessel supports that are combined with other applicable Level D Service condition loads and used to calculate the stresses in the supports.
Also, the reactor vessel displacements are applied as input to the pipe rupture blowdown analysis of the primary loop piping. The resulting loads and stresses in the piping components and supports include both pipe rupture blowdown loads and reactor vessel displacements. Thus, the effect of vessel displacements upon loop response and the effect of loop blowdown upon vessel displacements are both evaluated.
The system seismic analysis of the reactor vessel and its internals for the safe shutdown earthquake (SSE) event is performed using the time-history method. The seismic response is combined with the pipe rupture response, as outlined in Subsection 3.9.3, in order to obtain the maximum stresses and deflections.
Reactor internals components are within acceptable stress and deflection limits for the postulated pipe rupture combined with the safe shutdown earthquake condition.
3.9.2.5.3 Control Rod Insertion During full power plant operation, rod cluster control assemblies and the corresponding drive rod assemblies are held at a fully withdrawn position by their respective control rod drive mechanisms.
During certain accident conditions, such as small break loss of coolant accident or a safe shutdown earthquake condition or both, control assemblies are assumed to drop to their fully inserted position.
The guide tubes are evaluated to demonstrate the function of the control rods for a break size consistent with use of the leak-before-break criteria.
No credit for the function of the control rods is assumed for large breaks in the safety analyses outlined in Chapter 15. However, for break sizes consistent with use of the leak-before-break criteria, the design of the guide tubes permits control rod insertion at each control rod position.
3.9.2.6 Correlation of Reactor Internals Vibration Tests with the Analytical Results The results of dynamic analysis of reactor internals have been compared to the results of preoperational testing in reference plants. This comparison verifies that the analytical model used provides appropriate results.
3.9-35 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR The preoperational vibration test program for the reactor vessel internals of the AP1000 conducted on the first plant, conforms to the intent of the guidelines in Regulatory Guide 1.20 for a comprehensive vibration assessment program. This program includes a correlation of the analysis and test results. This comparison provides additional verification for the analytical model.
3.9.3 ASME Code Classes 1, 2, and 3 Components, Component Supports, and Core Support Structures Pressure-retaining components, core support structures, and component supports that are safety-related are classified as Class A, B, or C (see Subsection 3.2.2) and are constructed according to the rules of the ASME Code,Section III, Division 1. As noted in Subsection 3.2.2, Classes A, B, and C mechanical components meet the requirements of Code Classes 1, 2, and 3 respectively.
This subsection discusses the application of the ASME Code to safety-related components and core support structures, the operability of pumps and valves, the design and installation criteria for overpressure protection devices, automatic depressurization devices and the requirements for component supports.
Section 3.8 addresses the loads, loading combinations, and stress limits for structures, including containment.
The ASME Code,Section III requires that a design specification be prepared for ASME Class 1, 2, and 3 components. The specification conforms to and is certified to the requirements of ASME Code,Section III. The Code also requires a design report for safety-related components, to demonstrate that the as-built component meets the requirements of the relevant ASME Design Specification and the applicable ASME Code. The design specifications and design reports will be completed as discussed in Subsection 3.9.8.2. Design specifications for ASME Class 1, 2, and 3 components and piping are prepared utilizing procedures that meet the ASME Code. The design report includes as-built reconciliation.
The as-built reconciliation includes the evaluation of pipe break dynamic loads, changes in support locations, construction deviations, and completion of the small bore piping analysis.
3.9.3.1 Loading Combinations, Design Transients, and Stress Limits The integrity of the pressure boundary of safety-related components is provided by the use of the ASME Code. Using the methods and equations in the ASME Code, stress levels in the components and supports are calculated for various load combinations. These load combinations may include the effects of internal pressure, dead weight of the component and insulation, and fluid, thermal expansion, dynamic loads due to seismic motion, and other loads.
To determine if a design is acceptable for the loading combination, the calculated stress levels are compared to acceptance standards in the ASME Code. The acceptance standards in the ASME Code differ depending on the plant operating modes and loads considered. The ASME Code includes a design limit and four service limits (A, B, C, and D) against which to evaluate design conditions and plant and system operating conditions.
The design transients for the AP1000 are defined in Subsection 3.9.1. The transients are classified into Level A, B, C, and D Service conditions and test conditions, depending on the expected frequency of occurrence and severity. The description of the transients in Subsection 3.9.1 provides the initial plant operating condition and identifies the different component operating conditions. The design transients for Levels A and B are used in the evaluation of cyclic fatigue for the Class 1 components and piping. The effects of seismic events are also included in the evaluation of cyclic 3.9-36 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR fatigue (See Subsection 3.9.3.1.2). Level D and up to 25 strong stress cycles of Level C service conditions are not required by the rules of the ASME Code to be included in the fatigue evaluation.
3.9.3.1.1 Seismic Loads and Combinations Including Seismic Loads Seismic Category I systems and components, including core support structures, are designed for one occurrence of the safe shutdown earthquake which is evaluated as a Service Level D condition for pressure boundary integrity. In addition, systems and components sensitive to fatigue are evaluated for cyclic motion due to earthquakes smaller than the safe shutdown earthquake. Using analysis methods, these effects are considered by inclusion of seismic events with an amplitude not less than one-third of the safe shutdown earthquake amplitude. The number of cycles is calculated based on IEEE-344-1987 (Reference 21) to provide the equivalent fatigue damage of two full safe shutdown earthquake events with 10 high-stress cycles per event. There are five seismic events with an amplitude equal to one-third of the safe shutdown earthquake response. Each of the one-third safe shutdown earthquake events has 63 high-stress cycles.
ASME Class 1, 2, 3 and CS systems, components and supports are analyzed for the safe shutdown earthquake with other dynamic events. See Tables 3.9-5 and 3.9-8 for load combinations.
The safe shutdown earthquake is analyzed in combination with those operating modes that occur more than 10 percent of the time. Plant conditions combined with safe shutdown earthquake include the following:
Normal 100-percent power operation. Material properties are based on those at operating temperatures. Water inventories are based on normal operating levels. The in-containment refueling water storage tank is full, the refueling canal is empty, the spent fuel pool, fuel transfer canal, cask loading pit and cask washdown pit are full, and the passive containment cooling system tank is full.
The safe shutdown earthquake, which is postulated to occur with the plant at normal 100-percent power operation, is assumed to cause nonsafety-related systems, including ac power sources, to be unavailable. A single active failure in the safety-related systems is also postulated.
The timing and causal relationships that exist between the safe shutdown earthquake and transients such as valve discharge are considered and the events combined when the safe shutdown earthquake is the cause of the transient condition. For analysis of piping systems, the timing and causal relationships are not used to exclude load combinations. The safe shutdown earthquake duration is assumed to be 30 seconds. Nonseismically analyzed structures and components are assumed to be unavailable at the beginning of the safe shutdown earthquake. A single active component failure is assumed to occur at the time the component would be expected to function after the failure of the nonseismic components and structures.
Nonsafety-related systems are evaluated to confirm that their failure in an earthquake does not jeopardize plant safety.
A water source is provided for limited fire protection after occurrence of the safe shutdown earthquake. See Section 9.5 for additional information on fire protection.
The AP1000 is also designed for special combinations of events that are not based on the probability of occurrence but are based on past precedents and regulatory guidelines. These special combinations are treated as load combinations, not event sequences. That is, even though the safe 3.9-37 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR shutdown earthquake event does not occur coincident with another event, the loads were combined to provide additional design margin.
ASME Code components, supports, and support miscellaneous steel for these components are designed for the safe shutdown earthquake combined by the square root of the sum of the squares method, with short-term dynamic loads due to postulated pipe ruptures. The pipe ruptures included in this combination are those postulated in accordance with Subsections 3.6.1 and 3.6.2, but do not include those postulated in the break exclusion zone for evaluation of spray wetting, flooding, and subcompartment pressurization effects, nor those excluded by application of mechanistic pipe rupture criteria. (See Subsection 3.6.3.)
This combination is used for components and supports that are required to mitigate the effects of the postulated pipe rupture.
The containment boundary is designed for the safe shutdown earthquake in combination with containment design pressure at containment design temperature.
The polar crane is designed assuming occurrence of the safe shutdown earthquake during handling of a critical load, such as the reactor vessel head.
3.9.3.1.2 Loads for Class 1 Components, Core Support, and Component Supports The loads used in the analysis of the Class 1 components, core supports, and component supports are described in the following paragraphs. The loads are listed in Table 3.9-3. Additional information on the loads, stress limits and analysis methods for piping is described in Subsection 3.9.3.1.5.
Pressure loading is identified as either design pressure or operating pressure. [The design pressure is used in minimum wall thickness calculations in accordance with the ASME Code.]* The term operating pressure is associated with Service Levels A, B, C, and D conditions.
[A dead-weight analysis is performed to meet ASME Code requirements by applying a load equal to the acceleration due to gravity (1.0g) downward on the piping system and components. The piping is assigned a distributed mass or weight as a function of its properties. This method provides a distributed loading to the piping system as a function of the weight of the pipe, insulation, and contained fluid during normal operating conditions.]*
The analysis of the safe shutdown earthquake loads demonstrates pressure boundary integrity of the Class 1 systems and components. Seismic loads are identified as either seismic inertia loads or seismic anchor motion loads. The seismic inertia loads represent the dynamic portion of the response, and the seismic anchor motion loads represent the static portion. Subsection 3.7.3 describes seismic analysis methods.
Transient dynamic flow and pressure loads resulting from a postulated pipe break are analyzed.
Structural consideration of dynamic effects of postulated pipe breaks requires postulation of a finite number of break locations. Section 3.6 defines postulated pipe break locations.
Safety-related piping including the reactor coolant loops, the main steam piping, and reactor coolant system branch lines equal to or larger than six inches nominal pipe size is evaluated with a leak-before-break analysis to verify that there are no locations subject to a sudden, unanticipated rupture of one of these lines. As a result, the piping and components in these systems do not have to be analyzed for the dynamic effects of a break in the pipe when the leak-before-break criteria are satisfied.
The pipe rupture event considered as a loading is the largest pipe that does not satisfy leak-before-break criteria. The leak-before-break analyses use the acceptance standard of the broad scope rule
- In accordance with the departure evaluation process specified in License Condition 2.D.(13), NRC Staff approval may be required prior to implementing a change in this information.
3.9-38 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR change to General Design Criterion 4 and NUREG 1061, Volume 3. Subsection 3.6.3 outlines the acceptance standard and approach, including application, methodology, and limits.
Transient dynamic loads are also associated with valve opening and closing. The categories associated with valve operation include automatic depressurization system actuation, fast valve closure, relief valve closed system, relief valve open system, and safety valve discharge. Transient dynamic loads include those due to actuation of the explosive device in squib valves. Components and piping are evaluated for the dynamic response to these transient loads. The relief valve open system (sustained) is evaluated as a static load.
In addition to the loads that apply to the ASME Code Class 1 components, additional miscellaneous loads apply to selected components. These loads are evaluated on a case-by-case basis and are not combined with any other Level C or D Service condition. These miscellaneous loads include the following circumstances.
The reactor coolant pump, steam generator channel head, and connected piping are evaluated for a postulated seized rotor event. For this condition, the rotating mass of the reactor coolant pump is assumed to come to a rapid (but not instantaneous) stop and to transfer the angular momentum through the motor enclosure and pump casing to the steam generator nozzle and reactor coolant piping. The stresses calculated for this event are evaluated using Level D limits for the immediately affected components and supports and using Level B limits for components in the other loop.
For additional information on the specification and analysis of locked rotor loads, see the description in the reactor coolant pump information in Subsection 5.4.1.
The passive residual heat removal heat exchanger is evaluated for hydraulic loads from the discharge of steam from the automatic depressurization system valves through the spargers in the in-containment refueling water storage tank. These loads include pressure pulses from the introduction of steam into the tank and collapse of the steam bubbles and the gross movement of water in the tank. The stresses in the passive residual heat removal heat exchanger calculated for this event are evaluated using Level B stress limits.
For additional information on the specification and analysis of hydraulic loads see the description in the passive residual heat removal heat exchanger information in Subsection 5.4.14.
Portions of the integrated head package that provide seismic restraint for the control rod drive mechanisms also act as part of the load path for the lifting rig function of the integrated head package. These components are designed and evaluated for heavy load lifting.
For additional information on the design and evaluation of the components of the integrated head package in the load path of the lifting rig, see Subsection 3.9.7.
The ASME Code,Section III requires satisfaction of certain requirements relative to design transient conditions for Class 1 components. Subsection 3.9.1.1 summarizes the design transients.
To provide integrity for the reactor coolant system, the transient conditions selected for fatigue evaluation are based on conservative estimates of the magnitude and anticipated frequency of occurrence of the temperature and pressure transients resulting from various plant operation conditions. Generally, only Level A and B service condition design transients are evaluated in the analysis of cyclic fatigue. Up to 25 stress cycles for Level C service conditions may be excluded from cyclic fatigue analysis in conformance with ASME Code,Section III criteria. Any Level C service conditions which are in excess of the 25-cycle limit are evaluated for the effect on cyclic fatigue using Level B criteria. For the evaluation of cyclic fatigue, the cycles included for seismic events are evaluated using Level B criteria and are not excluded from the fatigue evaluation regardless of the 3.9-39 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR size of the stress range considered. The determination of which transient events are included in the 25-cycle exclusion is made separately for each component and line of piping.
The effects of seismic events on the design of components other than piping are considered in one of the following ways. The effects of seismic events are considered by including 20 full cycles of the maximum safe shutdown earthquake stress range in the fatigue analysis. The seismic contribution to the fatigue evaluation is based on five seismic events with an amplitude of one-third the safe shutdown earthquake and 63 cycles per event. The seismic evaluation of piping components is discussed in Subsection 3.9.3.1.5.
Thermal Stratification, Cycling, and Striping Thermal stratification, cycling and striping (TASCS) are phenomena that have resulted in pipe cracking at nuclear power plants. As a result of these incidents, the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission has issued several bulletins, which are discussed below.
Thermal stratification may occur in piping when flowrates are low and adequate mixing of hot and cold fluid layers does not occur. Thermal cycling due to stratification may occur because of leaking valves or plant operation. Thermal striping is a cyclic mechanism caused by instabilities in the hot-cold fluid interface in stratified fluid during relatively steady flow conditions. The design of piping and component nozzles in the AP1000 includes provisions to minimize the potential for and the effects of thermal stratification and cycling. [Piping and component supports are designed and evaluated for the thermal expansion of the piping resulting from potential stratification modes. The evaluation includes consideration of the information on thermal cycling and thermal stratification included in NRC Bulletins 79-13, 88-08, and 88-11, and other applicable design standards.]*
NRC Bulletin 79-13 Bulletin 79-13 (Reference 16) was issued as a result of a feedwater line cracking incident at Donald C. Cook Unit 2. This bulletin required that inspections of operating plant feedwater lines be performed. This resulted in the discovery of cracks in the feedwater lines of several plants. To provide a uniform approach to address this issue, a Feedwater Line Cracking Owners Group was established. The specific tasks of the Owners Group Program were to evaluate the thermal, hydraulic, structural and environmental conditions which could individually or collectively contribute to feedwater line crack initiation and growth. The Feedwater Line Cracking Owners Group was disbanded in 1981, after the original investigations were completed. The results of this program indicated that the primary cause of the cracking was thermal fatigue loading induced by thermal stratification and high-cycle thermal striping during low flow auxiliary feedwater injection. The mode of failure was concluded to be corrosion fatigue. This information is documented in WCAP-9693 (Reference 17).
The AP1000 steam generators are equipped with separate nozzles for the main feedwater and startup feedwater lines. Analyses of the AP1000 main feedwater nozzles are performed to demonstrate that the applicable requirements of the ASME Section III Code are met. Thermal stratification is prevented in the main feedwater line based on the flowrate limitations within the main feedwater line and the flow control stability for feedwater control. Low feedwater flow duty is provided by the startup feedwater line while higher feedwater flowrates are provided and controlled via the main feedwater line. The switchover from the startup to the main feedwater line occurs above a minimum flowrate to prevent thermal stratification for limiting temperature deviations. Main feedwater control valve positioning during normal operation is the function of the plant control system. The control scheme enhances steam generator level stability and thus reduces potential feedwater thermal stratification resulting from temporary low flow transients
- In accordance with the departure evaluation process specified in License Condition 2.D.(13), NRC Staff approval may be required prior to implementing a change in this information.
3.9-40 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR NRC Bulletin 88-08 Bulletin 88-08, Supplement 1, Supplement 2, and Supplement 3 (Reference 12) were issued following the discovery of cracks in unisolable piping at several nuclear power plants. These cracks were attributed to unanalyzed thermal stresses resulting from isolation valve leakage. This bulletin required that utilities: 1) review systems connected to the reactor coolant system to determine whether unisolable sections of piping connected to the reactor coolant system can be subjected to stresses from temperature stratification or temperature oscillations that could be induced by leaking valves and that were not evaluated in the design analysis of the piping, 2) nondestructively examine the welds, heat-affected zones and high stress locations, including geometric discontinuities and base metal, as appropriate, to provide assurance that there are no existing flaws, and 3) plan and implement a program to provide continuing assurance of piping integrity. This assurance may be provided by designing the system to withstand the stresses from valve leakage, instrumenting the piping to detect adverse temperature distributions and establishing appropriate limits on these temperature distributions, or providing a means that pressure upstream from isolation valves that might leak into the reactor coolant system is monitored and does not exceed reactor coolant system pressure. In addition to leakage into the reactor coolant system, leakage out of the reactor coolant system may also result in adverse thermal stresses as discussed in Supplement 3 of the bulletin.
For adverse stresses from leakage to occur in unisolable piping, three conditions are necessary:
- 1. A component with the potential for leakage must exist. In most cases, this will be a valve.
- 2. A pressure differential capable of forcing leakage through the pressure-retaining component must exist. Leakage in unisolable piping sections may be directed toward the reactor coolant system (inleakage), or from the reactor coolant system (outleakage).
- 3. A temperature differential between the unisolable piping section and the leakage source sufficient to produce significant stresses in the event of leakage must exist. For cases involving inleakage, this could result from a cold leakage entering hot sections of unisolable piping. For cases involving outleakage, this could result from hot leakage from the reactor coolant system entering cold sections of unisolable piping.
The criteria used in the evaluation of the AP1000 systems design for susceptibility to adverse stresses from valve leakage are summarized below:
Single isolation valves can leak, regardless of design except for explosively actuated valves.
It is generally assumed that two or more closed valves in series are sufficient to limit the amount of leakage to a magnitude which would have a negligible effect on piping integrity.
Valves which have external operators may leak through the valve seat and packing. In the case of leaking through the packing, additional in-series closed valves may not be beneficial.
A positive pressure difference should be considered as a possible leak source.
Cross-leakage is possible between interconnected lines that are attached to different reactor coolant loop pipes and are isolated by single check valves.
[ Sections of piping systems which have a slope of greater than 45 degrees from the horizontal plane are not subject to thermal stratification, cycling and striping thermal loadings.
Pipe lines, or sections of lines less than or equal to 1-inch nominal size do not require a thermal stratification, cycling and striping evaluation.]*
- In accordance with the departure evaluation process specified in License Condition 2.D.(13), NRC Staff approval may be required prior to implementing a change in this information.
3.9-41 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR The unisolable portions of the following lines connected to the reactor coolant system have been reviewed and are not susceptible to thermal stratification, cycling or striping:
Core make up lines from the cold legs to the core make up tanks.
Auxiliary pressurizer spray from the pressurizer spray line to the auxiliary spray check valve.
Chemical and volume control purification line from the passive residual heat removal line to the charging valve.
Pressurizer safety valve lines from the pressurizer to the safety valve.
Pressurizer spray lines from the cold legs to the pressurizer.
Automatic depressurization Stage 1, 2, and 3 lines from the pressurizer to the depressurization valves.
The unisolable portions of the following lines connected to the reactor coolant system have been reviewed and are determined to be susceptible to thermal stratification, cycling or striping:
Passive residual heat removal line from the passive residual heat removal heat exchanger to the steam generator channel head.
Automatic depressurization Stage 4 lines from the hot legs to the Stage 4 depressurization valves.
Passive residual heat removal lines from the hot leg to the passive residual heat removal heat exchanger.
Chemical and volume control purification line from the pressurizer spray line to the letdown valve.
Normal residual heat removal suction lines from the hot legs to the isolation valves.
Direct vessel injection lines from the reactor vessel nozzle up to the accumulator injection valves, core make up injection valves, in-containment refueling water storage tank injection valves, and normal residual heat removal injection valves.
Analyses of these lines are performed to demonstrate that the applicable requirements of the ASME Section III Code are met. This analysis includes consideration of plant operation and thermal stratification using temperature distributions which are developed from finite element fluid flow and heat transfer analysis.
The final design reports for ASME components, including reconciliation of the as-built piping is discussed in Subsection 3.9.8. This reconciliation includes verification of the thermal cycling and stratification loadings considered in the stress analysis.
NRC Bulletin 88-11 Bulletin 88-11 (Reference 14) was issued after Portland General Electric Company experienced difficulties in setting whip restraint gap sizes on the pressurizer surge line at Trojan plant. The cold gaps were adjusted to design settings several times and were found to be out of specification after each operating cycle. The gap changes were caused by plastic deformation in the surge line piping resulting from excessive thermal loadings. The thermal loadings were determined to be caused by thermal stratification based on monitoring and analysis. Several similar incidents were subsequently 3.9-42 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR discovered in other surge lines, and an industry-wide program to evaluate this phenomena was undertaken by the various PWR owners groups.
The purpose of Bulletin 88-11 was a request to addresses, establish, and implement a program to confirm pressurizer surge line integrity in view of the occurrence of thermal stratification, and to require addressees to inform the NRC staff of the actions taken to resolve this issue.
The actions requested in the bulletin are discussed below, and the manner in which AP1000 addresses the actions, if required, for surge line stratification:
For all licensees of operating PWRs:
Request 1.
The actions included under this heading are not applicable to the AP1000.
For all applicants for PWR Operating Licenses:
Request 2. a)
Before issuance of the low power license, applicants are requested to demonstrate that the pressurizer surge line meets the applicable design codes and other FSAR and regulatory commitments for the licensed life of the plant. This may be accomplished by performing a plant specific or generic bounding analysis. The analysis should include consideration of thermal stratification and thermal striping to ensure that fatigue and stresses are in compliance with applicable code limits. The analysis and hot functional testing should verify that piping thermal deflections result in no adverse consequences, such as contacting the pipe whip restraints. If analysis or test results show Code noncompliance, conduct of all actions specified below is requested.
AP1000 Conformance Analysis of the AP1000 surge line considers thermal stratification and thermal striping, and demonstrates that the surge line meets applicable code requirements for the licensed life of the plant. Hot functional testing requirements for the AP1000 ensure that piping thermal deflections result in no adverse consequences.
Request 2. b)
Applicants are requested to evaluate operational alternatives or piping modifications needed to reduce fatigue and stresses to acceptable levels.
AP1000 Conformance Analysis of the AP1000 surge line ensures that stress and fatigue requirements are satisfied, therefore the evaluation of operational alternatives or piping modifications is not required.
Request 2. c)
Applicants are requested to either monitor the surge line for the effects of thermal stratification, beginning with hot functional testing, or obtain data through collective efforts to assess the extent of thermal stratification, thermal striping and piping displacements.
AP1000 Conformance 3.9-43 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR As part of the Westinghouse Owners Group program on surge line thermal stratification, Westinghouse collected surge line physical design and plant operational data for all domestic Westinghouse PWRs. In addition, Westinghouse collected surge line monitoring data from approximately 30 plants. This experience was used in the development of the AP1000 thermal stratification loadings. As described in the AP1000 Conformance to Request 3 of Bulletin 88-11, monitoring will be performed during hot functional testing and during the first cycle of the first AP1000 plant. This Combined License item is identified in Subsection 3.9.8.5. Subsequent monitoring of the AP1000 surge line is not required.
Request 2. d)
Applicants are requested to update stress and fatigue analyses, as necessary, to ensure Code compliance. The analyses should be completed no later than one year after issuance of the low power license.
AP1000 Conformance Revision of the stress and fatigue analyses is not required for the AP1000 surge line, since the design analysis considers thermal stratification and thermal striping.
Request 3)
Addressees are requested to generate records to document the development and implementation of the program requested by Items 1 or 2, as well as any subsequent corrective actions, and maintain these records in accordance with 10 CFR Part 50, Appendix B and plant procedures.
AP1000 Conformance AP1000 procedures require documentation and maintenance of records in accordance with 10 CFR Part 50, Appendix B.
A monitoring program will be implemented as discussed in Subsection 3.9.8.5 at the first AP1000 to record temperature distributions and thermal displacements of the surge line piping, as well as pertinent plant parameters such as pressurizer temperature and level, hot leg temperature, and reactor coolant pump status. Monitoring will be performed during hot functional testing and during the first fuel cycle. The resulting monitoring data will be evaluated to show that it is within the bounds of the analytical temperature distributions and displacements.
PRESSURIZER SURGE LINE MONITORING General The pressurizer surge line is monitored at the first AP1000 plant to record temperature distributions and thermal displacements of the surge line piping, as well as pertinent plant parameters. This monitoring occurs during the hot functional testing and first fuel cycle. The resulting monitoring data is evaluated to verify that the pressurizer surge line is within the bounds of the analytical temperature distributions and displacements.
Subsequent AP1000 plants (after the first AP1000 plant) confirm that the heatup and cooldown procedures are consistent with the pertinent attributes of the first AP1000 plant surge line monitoring.
In addition, changes to the heatup and cooldown procedures consider the potential impact on stress and fatigue analyses consistent with the concerns of NRC Bulletin 88-11.
The pressurizer surge line monitoring activities include the following methodology and requirements:
3.9-44 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Monitoring Method The pressurizer surge line pipe wall is instrumented with outside mounted temperature and displacement sensors. The data from this instrumentation is supplemented by plant computer data from related process and control parameters.
Locations to be Monitored In addition to the existing permanent plant temperature instrumentation, temperature and displacement monitoring will be included at critical locations on the surge line. The additional locations utilized for monitoring during the hot functional testing and the first fuel cycle (see Subsection 14.2.9.2.22) are selected based on the capability to provide effective monitoring.
Data Evaluation Data evaluation is performed at the completion of the monitoring period (one fuel cycle). The evaluation includes a comparison of the data evaluation results with the thermal profiles and transient loadings defined for the pressurizer surge line, accounting for expected pipe outside wall temperatures. Interim evaluations of the data are performed during the hot functional testing period, up to the start of normal power operation, and again once three months worth of normal operating data has been collected, to identify any unexpected conditions in the pressurizer surge line.
Other Applications Thermal stratification in the reactor coolant loops resulting from actuation of passive safety features is evaluated as a design transient. Stratification effects due to both Level B and Level D service conditions are considered. The criteria used in the evaluation of the stress in the loop piping due to stratification is the same as that applicable for other Level B and Level D service conditions.
3.9.3.1.3 ASME Code Class 1 Components and Supports and Class CS Core Support Loading Combinations and Stress Limits Tables 3.9-5 and 3.9-8 list loading combinations for ASME Class 1 components and component supports and Class CS core support structures. Table 3.9-9 lists the stress limits for these components. Table 3.9-3 lists the loads included in the loading combinations.
The stress limits for Service Level D that allow inelastic deformation are supplemented with the requirements of Rules for Evaluation of Service Loadings with Level D Service Limits, Appendix F of ASME Code,Section III. The limits and rules of Appendix F confirm that pressure boundary integrity and core support structural integrity are maintained but do not confirm operability. The limits and rules of Appendix F do not apply to the portion of the component or support in which the failure has been postulated. Subsection 3.9.1 provides a discussion of design transients used in the analysis of cyclic fatigue.
The structural stress analyses performed on the ASME Code Class 1 components and supports and Class CS core support structures consider the loadings specified, as shown in Table 3.9-3. These loads result from thermal expansion, pressure, weight, earthquake, pipe rupture, and plant operational thermal and pressure transients. Dynamic effects of pipe rupture, including the loss of coolant accident, are not included in loading combinations when the leak-before-break criteria are satisfied. The methods and acceptance standard for leak-before-break analyses are described in Subsection 3.6.3.
[The combination of safe shutdown earthquake plus pipe rupture]* (those breaks not excluded by mechanistic pipe break criteria) [loads by square-root-sum-of the squares is considered.]* This loading combination is evaluated for ASME Code components and piping that are required to mitigate the effects of the postulated pipe rupture and the supports for those components and piping.
- In accordance with the departure evaluation process specified in License Condition 2.D.(13), NRC Staff approval may be required prior to implementing a change in this information.
3.9-45 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR The dynamic effects of pipe rupture that are combined with safe shutdown earthquake in loading combinations are those for lines for which the leak-before-break criteria are not satisfied. [When the safe shutdown earthquake event is determined mechanistically to result in concurrent transient loads due to relief valve or safety valve discharge in ASME Code Class 1, 2, or 3 systems, the maximum response due to the safe shutdown earthquake is combined with the maximum response due to the valve opening discharge transient. The responses are combined using the square-root-sum-of-the-squares method.]* Concurrent sustained loads due to open system relief valve discharge are combined with safe shutdown earthquake by absolute sum.
3.9.3.1.4 Analysis of Reactor Coolant Loop Piping The reactor coolant loop and support system model consists of the primary loop piping (hot and cold legs), the connecting components (reactor vessel, steam generator, and reactor coolant pump) and the components supports (steam generator and reactor vessel).
The integrated reactor coolant loop and supports system model is the basic system model used to compute loadings on components, component supports, and piping. The system model includes the stiffness and mass characteristics of the reactor coolant loop piping and components, the stiffness of supports, and the stiffnesses of auxiliary line piping affecting the system. This model is used to determine the static and dynamic loads on the primary loop piping and the component supports and the interfacing loads on the connecting components.
The analysis of the connecting components is based on more detailed models of the steam generator, reactor vessel, and reactor coolant pump. Appendix 3C describes the analytical methods used in evaluating the piping of the reactor coolant loops.
[The primary loop analysis for the safe shutdown earthquake uses the time-history integration or response spectra methods for seismic dynamic analysis.]* Appendix 3C provides a description of the model.
The model used in the static analysis is modified for the dynamic analysis by including the mass characteristics of the piping and equipment. [In the time-history seismic analysis, the containment internals structure is included in the system coupled model unless appropriate time-history seismic input from the building is provided at multiple support locations.]* The effect of the equipment motion on the reactor coolant loop and supports system is obtained by modeling the mass and the stiffness characteristics of the equipment in the overall system model.
The main loop piping and the surge line satisfy the leak-before-break requirements for the elimination of nonmechanistic pipe breaks. See Subsection 3.6.3 for a description of the evaluation of piping for leak-before-break requirements. Reactor coolant system piping of 6-inch nominal pipe size or larger is evaluated for leak-before-break characteristics. The reactor coolant loop piping is evaluated for loads due to a break in the largest connected pipe that does not meet leak-before-break requirements. [The primary loop analysis for pipe breaks uses time-history integration or equivalent static analysis to determine the structural response due to jet impingement loads, thrust loads, and subcompartment pressure loads.]*
Operating transients in a nuclear power plant cause thermal or pressure fluctuations or both in the reactor coolant fluid. The thermal transients cause time-varying temperature distributions across the pipe wall. The transients as summarized in Subsection 3.9.1.1 are used to define the fluctuations in plant parameters.
A one-dimensional finite difference heat transfer program is generally used to solve the thermal transient problem. The pipe is represented by many elements through the thickness of the pipe. The convective heat-transfer coefficient used in this program represents the time-varying heat transfer
- In accordance with the departure evaluation process specified in License Condition 2.D.(13), NRC Staff approval may be required prior to implementing a change in this information.
3.9-46 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR due to free and forced convection. The outer surface is assumed to be adiabatic, while the inner surface boundary experiences the temperature of the coolant fluid.
Fluctuations in the temperature of the coolant fluid produce a temperature distribution through the pipe wall thickness that varies with time. The average through-wall temperature, TA, is calculated by integrating the temperature distribution across the wall. This integration is performed over each time step so that TA is determined as a function of time.
A load-set is defined as a set of pressure loads, moment loads, and through-wall thermal effects at a given location and time in each transient. The through-wall thermal effects are functions of time and can be subdivided into four parts:
Average temperature (TA), which is the average temperature through-wall of the pipe that contributes to general expansion loads Radial linear thermal gradient, which contributes to the through-wall bending moment (T1)
Radial nonlinear thermal gradient (T2), which contributes to a peak stress associated with shearing of the surface Discontinuity temperature (TA - TB) which represents the difference in average temperature at the cross sections on each side of a discontinuity Each transient is described by at least two load-sets representing the maximum and minimum stress states during each transient. The construction of the load-sets is accomplished by combining the following to yield the maximum (minimum) stress state during each transient.
T1 T2 ATA - BTB Moment loads due to TA Pressure loads This procedure produces at least twice as many load-sets as transients for each point.
For the possible load-set combinations, the primary-plus-secondary and peak stress intensities, fatigue reduction factors (Ke), and cumulative usage factors (U) are calculated.
The combination of load-sets yielding the highest alternating stress intensity range is first used to calculate the incremental usage factor. The next most severe combination is then determined, and the incremental usage factor is calculated. This procedure is repeated until the combinations having an allowable number of cycles less than 1011 are formed. The total cumulative usage factor at a point is the summation of the incremental usage factors.
3.9.3.1.5 ASME Classes 1, 2, and 3 Piping The loads for ASME Code Classes 1, 2, and 3 piping are included in the loads listed in Table 3.9-3.
[Tables 3.9-5, 3.9-6, and 3.9-9 list the loading combinations and stress limits for Class 1 piping.
Tables 3.9-5, 3.9-7, and 3.9-10 list the loading combinations and stress limits for Class 2 and 3 piping.
Piping systems are designed and analyzed for Levels A, B, and C service conditions, and corresponding service level requirements to the rules of the ASME Code,Section III. The analysis or test methods and associated stress or load allowable limits that are used in evaluation of Level D
- In accordance with the departure evaluation process specified in License Condition 2.D.(13), NRC Staff approval may be required prior to implementing a change in this information.
3.9-47 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR service conditions are those that are defined in Appendix F of the ASME Code,Section III. Inelastic analysis methods are not used.]*
Subsection 3.7.3 summarizes seismic analysis methods and criteria. Subsection 3.6.2 summarizes pipe break analysis methods.
The supports are represented by stiffness matrices in the system model for the dynamic analysis.
Alternate methods for support stiffnesses representation is provided in Subsection 3.9.3.4. Shock suppressors that resist rapid motions and limit stop supports with gaps are also included in the analysis. The solution for the seismic disturbance uses the response spectra method. This method uses the lumped mass technique, linear elastic properties, and the principle of modal superposition.
Alternatively, the time-history method may be used for the solution of the seismic disturbance.
The total response obtained from the seismic analysis consists of two parts: the inertia response of the piping system and the response from differential anchor motions (see Subsection 3.7.3). The stresses resulting from the anchor motions are considered to be secondary and are evaluated to the limits in Tables 3.9-6 and 3.9-7.
The mathematical models used in the seismic analyses of the Class 1, 2, and 3 piping systems lines are also used for pipe rupture effect analysis. To obtain the dynamic solution for auxiliary lines with active valves, the time-history deflections from the analysis of the reactor coolant loop are applied at nozzle connections. For other lines that must maintain structural integrity or that have no active valves, the motion of the reactor coolant loop is applied statically.
[The functional capability requirements for ASME piping systems that must maintain an adequate fluid flow path to mitigate a Level C or Level D plant event are shown in Table 3.9-11.]* These requirements are based on Reference 19.
Thermal analysis is required to obtain the stresses and loadings above the stress free state of the system. The stress free state of a piping system is defined as a temperature of 70°F. [If the piping system operating temperature is 150°F or less, no thermal expansion analysis is required. If the piping system does not contain at least one 90-degree bend, then thermal expansion analysis is required.]* This type of layout is avoided when practical. [The thermal anchor displacements are also considered as negligible if they are 1/16 inches or less.]* This is consistent with the practice that 1/
16-inch of gap is allowed at a pipe support.
[A thermal transient heat transfer analysis is performed for each different piping component on the Class 1 branch lines larger than 1-inch nominal diameter.]* The following discussion on the evaluation of cyclic fatigue is not applicable to Class 2 and 3 pipe.
[The Level A and B service condition and test condition transients identified in subsection 3.9.1.1 are included in the fatigue evaluation. For each thermal transient, two load-sets are defined representing the maximum and minimum stress states for that transient. The effects of seismic events on the design of piping are considered in one of the following ways. The effects of seismic events are considered by including 20 full cycles of the maximum safe shutdown earthquake stress range in the fatigue analysis. Alternatively, the seismic contribution to the fatigue evaluation is based on five seismic events with an amplitude of one-third the safe shutdown earthquake and 63 cycles per event.
The primary-plus-secondary and peak stress intensity ranges, fatigue reduction factors, and cumulative usage factors are calculated for the possible load-set combinations. It is conservatively assumed that the transients can occur in any sequence, thus resulting in the most conservative and restrictive combinations of transients.]*
- In accordance with the departure evaluation process specified in License Condition 2.D.(13), NRC Staff approval may be required prior to implementing a change in this information.
3.9-48 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR The combination of load-sets yielding the highest alternating stress intensity range is determined, and the incremental usage factor is calculated. Likewise, the next most severe combination is then determined, and the incremental usage factor is calculated. This procedure is repeated until the combinations having an allowable cycle of less than 1011 are formed. The total cumulative usage factor at a point is the summation of the incremental usage factors.
The methods and criteria used in the design and analysis of the ASME Code Classes 1, 2, and 3 piping are itemized in Table 3.9-19. These methods are included in the design specifications and design reports required for piping in Subsection 3.9.8.2. Use of these methods is documented in both as-designed and as-built reports.
3.9.3.1.6 Analysis of Primary Components and Class 1 Valves and Auxiliary Components Primary components that serve as part of the pressure boundary in the reactor coolant loop include the steam generators, reactor coolant pumps, pressurizer, and reactor vessel. This equipment is AP1000 Equipment Class A. The pressure boundary meets the requirements of ASME Code,Section III. This equipment is evaluated for the loading combinations outlined in Table 3.9-5. The equipment is analyzed for the normal loads of weight, pressure, and temperature; mechanical transients of safe shutdown earthquake and auxiliary line pipe ruptures; and pressure and temperature transients are outlined in Subsection 3.9.1.1.
The results of the reactor coolant loop analysis and other ASME Code,Section III, Class 1, 2, and 3 piping analyses are used to determine the seismic loads acting on the equipment nozzles and the support and component interface locations. Subsection 3.7.3 summarizes seismic analysis methods and criteria used for analysis of primary components. The results of the reactor coolant loop analysis, other ASME Code,Section III, Class 1, 2, and 3 piping analyses, and the reactor vessel system analysis are used to determine pipe break loads on the equipment nozzles and the support component interface locations for those lines that do not meet the leak-before-break requirements.
Section 3.6 summarizes the pipe break analysis methods used to determine pipe rupture loads for the ASME Code Class 1 components.
Seismic analyses are performed individually for the reactor coolant pump, pressurizer, and steam generator. Detailed and complex dynamic models are used for the dynamic analyses. Seismic analyses for the steam generator, reactor coolant pump, and pressurizer are performed using 4 percent damping for the safe shutdown earthquake.
The reactor pressure vessel is seismically qualified in accordance with ASME Code,Section III. The loadings used in the analysis are based on loads generated by a dynamic system analysis.
Auxiliary equipment that serves as part of the reactor coolant system pressure boundary includes ASME Code,Section III, Class 1 valves, core makeup tanks, and passive residual heat removal heat exchanger. Components and valves which form part of the reactor coolant system pressure boundary are designed and analyzed according to the appropriate portions of the ASME Code,Section III. This equipment is evaluated for the loading combinations and stress limits in Tables 3.9-5 and 3.9-9. The operability criteria for these valves are described in Subsection 3.9.3.2.
Valves in sample and instrument lines connected to the reactor coolant system are not considered to be AP1000 Equipment Class A nor ASME Class 1. This is because the nozzles where the lines connect to the primary system piping include an orifice with a 3/8-inch hole. This hole restricts the flow so that loss through a severance of one of these lines can be made up by normal charging flow.
These small lines are seismically analyzed as described in Subsection 3.7.3.
3.9-49 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR 3.9.3.1.7 ASME Code Class 2 and 3 Components Table 3.9-3 lists the loads for ASME Code Class 2 and 3 components. Table 3.9-5 provides the loading combinations. The loading conditions for ASME Class 2 and 3 piping are presented in Table 3.9-3. Table 3.9-10 presents the stress limits for the various service levels. Functional capability requirements are presented in Table 3.9-11. Subsection 3.7.3 summarizes the seismic analysis methods and criteria for these components. The pipe break analysis methods are summarized in Subsection 3.6.2. Analysis methods for Class 2 and 3 piping are summarized in Subsection 3.9.3.1.5.
The allowable stress limits established for the components are low enough so that breach of the pressure-retaining boundary does not occur. Active valves requirements are further described in Subsection 3.9.3.2.
3.9.3.2 Pump and Valve Operability Assurance The design and service limits specified by the ASME Code,Section III are established to confirm the pressure-retaining or support function of the ASME Code-class component. To assess the functional capability of required components to operate, additional criteria and considerations, including collapse and deflection limits, are developed.
3.9.3.2.1 Pump Operability There are no active pumps relied upon to perform a safety-related function in the AP1000.
3.9.3.2.2 Valve Operability Active valves are those whose operability is relied upon to perform a safety-related function during transients or events considered in the respective operating condition categories. Inactive components are those whose operability is not relied upon to perform a safety-related function for the various transients and plant conditions. Table 3.9-12 lists the active valves.
Table 3.9-9 provides the stress limits used for active Class 1 valves. Table 3.9-10 provides the stress limits used for active Class 2 and Class 3 valves.
Active valves are subjected to a series of tests and inspections prior to service and during the plant life. These tests and inspections along with controls on maintenance and operation provide appropriate reliability of the valve for the design life objective of the plant.
Prior to service, qualification of functional capability of active valve assemblies is performed in accordance with the requirements of ASME QME-1-2007 (Reference 36). Prior to installation, the following tests, as appropriate to the function and mission of the valve, are performed: shell hydrostatic test, backseat and main seat leakage tests, disc hydrostatic tests, and operational tests to verify that the valve opens and closes.
Cold hydro tests, hot functional tests, periodic inservice inspections, and periodic inservice operations are performed in situ to verify the functional capability of the valve.
Refer to Section 3.11 for the operability qualification of motor operators for the environmental conditions.
For active valves with extended structures, an analysis of the extended structure is performed for equivalent static seismic safe shutdown earthquake loads applied at the center of gravity of the extended structure.
3.9-50 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR In addition to these tests and analyses, a representative number of valves of each design type are tested for verification of operability during a simulated Service Level D (safe shutdown earthquake) condition event by demonstrating operational capabilities within the specified limits. Valve sizes that cover the range of sizes in service are tested.
When seismic qualification is based on dynamic or equivalent static load testing for structures, systems or subsystems that contain mechanisms that must change position in order to function, operability testing is performed for the safe shutdown earthquake preceded by one or more earthquakes. The number of preceding earthquakes is calculated based on IEEE-344-1987 to provide the equivalent fatigue damage of one safe shutdown earthquake event.
The seismic qualification testing procedures for valve operability testing are as follows: The valve is mounted in a manner that will conservatively represent typical valve installations. The valve includes the operator, accessory solenoid valves, and position sensors when attached to the valve in service.
The operability of the valve during a Service Level D condition is demonstrated by satisfying the following criteria:
A static load or loads equivalent to those resulting from the accelerations due to Service Level D conditions is applied to the extended structure center of gravity so that the resulting deflection is in the nearest direction of the extended structure. The design pressure of the valve is applied to the valve during the static deflection tests.
The valve is cycled while in the deflected position. The valve must function within the specified operating time limits while subject to design pressure.
Electrical motor operators, position sensors, and pilot solenoid valves necessary for operation are qualified in accordance with IEEE seismic qualification standards. Section 3.10 describes the methods and criteria used to qualify electrical equipment.
Active valves that do not have an extended structure, such as check valves and safety valves, are considered separately.
Check valves are characteristically simple in design, and their operation is not affected by seismic accelerations or the maximum applied nozzle loads. The check valve design is compact, and there are no extended structures or masses whose motion could cause distortions that could restrict operation of the valve. These valves are designed such that if structural integrity is maintained, the valve operability is maintained. In addition to these design considerations, the check valves also undergo the following: in-shop hydrostatic test, in-shop seat leakage test, and periodic in situ valve testing and inspection.
Pressurizer and main steam safety valves are qualified for operability in the same manner as valves with extended structures. The qualification methods include analysis of the bonnet for equivalent static safe shutdown earthquake loads, in shop hydrostatic and seat leakage tests, and periodic in situ valve inspection.
To verify analysis methods, representative safety valves are tested. This test is described as follows:
The safety valve is mounted to represent the specified installation.
The valve body is pressurized to its normal system pressure.
A static load representing the Service Level D condition load is applied to the top of the valve bonnet in the weakest direction of the extended structure.
3.9-51 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR The pressure is increased until the valve actuates.
Actuation of the valve at its setpoint provides for operability during the Service Level D condition load.
Using these methods, the active valves in the system are qualified for operability during a Service Level D condition event. These methods conservatively simulate the seismic event, and confirm that the active valves perform their safety-related function when necessary.
3.9.3.3 Design and Installation Criteria of Class 1, 2, and 3 Pressure Relieving Devices
[The design of pressure relieving valves comply with the requirements of ASME Code,Section III, Appendix O, Rules for the Design of Safety Valve Installations.]* When there is more than one valve on the same run of pipe, the sequence of valve openings is based on the anticipated sequence of valve opening. This sequence is determined by the set point pressures or control system logic. The applicable stress limits are satisfied for the components in the piping run and connecting systems including supports. The reaction forces and moments are based on a dynamic load factor of 2.0 unless a dynamic structural analysis is performed to calculate these forces and moments.
3.9.3.3.1 Pressure Relief Devices and Automatic Depressurization Valves Connected to the Pressurizer The pressurizer safety valves provide overpressure protection for the reactor coolant system. The safety valves connected to the pressurizer are the only ASME Code,Section III, Class 1 pressure relief valves in the AP1000. The automatic depressurization system valves that provide a means to reduce reactor coolant system pressure to allow the passive core cooling system to fully function are not designed to provide overpressure protection and are not classified as pressure relief devices.
The safety valves and the first three stages of the automatic depressurization valves are mounted in and supported by the pressurizer safety and relief valve (PSARV) module located above the pressurizer. The valves are connected to two piping manifolds that are connected to two nozzles located in the pressurizer upper head. [The spring loaded safety valves are designed to prevent system pressure from exceeding design pressure by more than ten percent.]*
If the pressure exceeds the setpoint of either safety valve, the valve opens and steam is discharged through a rupture disk to the containment atmosphere. Normal pressurizer liquid and vapor volumes combined with operation of the plant control systems limit pressure increases so that opening of the safety valves is not required for any Level A or B service condition transient. The connecting pipe between the pressurizer and safety valves does not include a loop seal. The safety valves seal against the steam and any noncondensible gas in the upper portion of the pressurizer.
The valves for the automatic depressurization system open when required for the passive safety injection system. The motor-operated automatic depressurization valves open in sequence to reduce reactor coolant system pressure when required to allow stored water sources to cool the core. The valves open in stages as required by the controls for the automatic depressurization system. The automatic depressurization system valves open more slowly than do the safety valves. The operation of the automatic depressurization system is outlined in Subsection 5.4.6 and Section 6.3. For the three stages that are connected to the pressurizer, the valves discharge into the in-containment refueling water storage tank through a sparger. The piping connection of the automatic depressurization system valves to the pressurizer contain loop seals.
The valve opening generates transient thrust forces at each change in flow direction or area. The analysis of the piping system and support considers the transient forces associated with valve opening.
- In accordance with the departure evaluation process specified in License Condition 2.D.(13), NRC Staff approval may be required prior to implementing a change in this information.
3.9-52 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR For each pressurizer safety and automatic depressurization system piping system, an analytical hydraulic model is developed. The piping from the pressurizer nozzle to the rupture disk and in-containment refueling water storage tank sparger is modeled as a series of single pipes. The pressurizer is modeled as a reservoir that contains steam at constant pressure and at constant temperature. Fluid acceleration inside the pipe generates reaction forces on the segments of the line that are bounded at either end by an elbow or bend. Reaction forces resulting from fluid pressure and momentum variations are calculated. These forces are defined in terms of the fluid properties for the transient hydraulic analysis.
3.9.3.3.2 Pressure Relief Devices for Class 2 Systems and Components Pressure relieving devices for ASME Code,Section III, Class 2 systems include the safety valves and power operated relief valves on the steam line and the relief valves on the containment isolation portion of the normal residual heat removal system.
The design and analysis requirements for the safety and relief valves and discharge piping for the steam line are described in Subsection 10.3.2.
In addition to providing overpressure protection for the normal residual heat removal system, the relief valves also provide low temperature overpressure protection for the reactor coolant system.
The location and connection for the valves on the residual heat removal system are discussed in Subsection 5.4.7.
3.9.3.3.3 Design and Analysis Requirements for Pressure Relieving Devices The design of pressure-relieving devices can be generally grouped in two categories: open discharge and closed discharge.
Open Discharge An open discharge is characterized by a relief or safety valve discharging to the atmosphere or to a vent stack open to the atmosphere. [The design and analysis of open discharge valve stations includes the following considerations:
Stresses in the valve header, the valve inlet piping, and local stresses in the header-to-valve inlet piping junction due to thermal effects, internal pressure, seismic loads, and thrust loads are considered.
Thrust forces include both pressure and momentum effects.
Where more than one safety or relief valve is installed on the same pipe run, valve spacing requirements are as specified in the ASME Code. The minimum moments to be used in stress calculations are those specified in the ASME Code.
The effects of the valve discharge on piping connected to the valve header are considered.
The reaction forces and moments used in stress calculations include the effects of a dynamic load factor (DLF), or are the maximum instantaneous values obtained from a time-history structural analysis.]*
Closed Discharge The closed discharge system is characterized by piping between the valve and a tank or some other terminal end. Under steady-state conditions, there are no net unbalanced forces. [The initial transient response and resulting stresses are determined using either a time-history computer solution]* or a
- In accordance with the departure evaluation process specified in License Condition 2.D.(13), NRC Staff approval may be required prior to implementing a change in this information.
3.9-53 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR conservative equivalent static solution. [In calculating initial transient forces, pressure and momentum terms as well as water slug effects are included.]*
3.9.3.4 Component and Piping Supports
[The supports for ASME Code,Section III, Class 1, 2, and 3 components including pipe supports satisfy the requirements of the ASME Code,Section III, Subsection NF.]* In addition to meeting the requirements of ASME Code,Section III, Subsection NF, the welded connections of ASTM A500 Grade B tube steel members (identified as hollow structural sections [HSSs]) satisfy the requirements of the AISC Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Steel Hollow Structural Sections, November 10, 2000. The nominal strength of the connections, as provided in Sections 8 and 9 of the AISC Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Steel Hollow Structural Sections, November 10, 2000, will be divided by a safety factor to generate the allowable stress design (ASD) connection capacity. [The boundary between the supports and the building structure is based on the rules found in Subsection NF.]* Table 3.9-3 presents the loading conditions.
[Table 3.9-8 summarizes the load combinations. The stress limits are presented in Tables 3.9-9 and 3.9-10 for the various service levels.]*
The criteria of Appendix F of the ASME Code Section III is used for the evaluation of Level D service conditions. When supports for components not built to ASME Code,Section III criteria are evaluated for the effect of Level D service conditions, the allowable stress levels are based on tests or accepted industry standards comparable to those in Appendix F of ASME Code,Section III.
In order to provide for operability of active equipment, including valves, ASME limits for Service Level C loadings are met for the supports of these items.
Dynamic loads for components loaded in the elastic range are calculated using dynamic load factors, time-history analysis, or any other method that accounts for elastic behavior of the component. A component is assumed to be in the elastic range if yielding across a section does not occur. Local yielding due to stress concentration is assumed not to affect the validity of the assumptions of elastic behavior. The stress allowables of Appendix F for elastically analyzed components are used for Code components. Inelastic stress analysis is not used.
The stiffness of the pipe support miscellaneous steel is controlled by one of the following methods so that component nozzle loads are not adversely affected by support deformation:
[Pipe support miscellaneous steel deflections are limited for dynamic combined faulted loading to 1/8 inch in each restrained direction. The dynamic faulted loading combinations considered are those in Table 3.9-8 associated with Level D service limits.]* These deflections are defined with respect to the structure to which the miscellaneous steel is attached. These deflection limits, provide adequate stiffness for seismic analysis and are small enough so that nozzle loads are not affected by pipe support deformation. In this case, the pipe support and miscellaneous steel are represented by the following stiffness values in the piping system analysis. Default rigid stiffness values are used for supports except that vendor stiffness values are used for snubbers and rigid gapped supports. [The mass of the pipe support miscellaneous steel is evaluated as a self-weight excitation loading on the steel and the structures supporting the steel.]*
[Alternatively, if the deflections for dynamic loading exceeds 1/8 inches, the pipe support and miscellaneous steel are represented by calculated stiffness values in the piping system analysis.]*
Use of baseplates with concrete expansion anchors is minimized in the AP1000. Concrete expansion anchors may be used for pipe supports. For these pipe support baseplate designs, the baseplate flexibility requirements of IE Bulletin 79-02, Revision 2, dated November 8, 1979 are met by
- In accordance with the departure evaluation process specified in License Condition 2.D.(13), NRC Staff approval may be required prior to implementing a change in this information.
3.9-54 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR accounting for the baseplate flexibility in the calculation of anchor bolt loads. Supplemental requirements for fastening anchor bolts to concrete are outlined in Subsection 3.8.4.5.1.
[Friction forces induced by the pipe on the support must be considered in the analysis of sliding type supports, such as guides or box supports, when the resultant unrestrained thermal motion is greater than 1/16 inch. The friction force is equal to the coefficient of friction times the pipe load, and acts in the direction of pipe movement. A coefficient of friction of 0.35 for steel-on-steel sliding surfaces shall be used. If a self-lubricated bearing plate is used, a 0.15 coefficient of friction shall be used. The pipe load from which the friction force is developed includes only deadweight and thermal loads. The friction force can not be greater than the product of the pipe movement and the stiffness of the pipe support in the direction of movement.]*
Small gaps are provided for frame type supports built around the pipe. These gaps allow for radial thermal expansion of the pipe as well as allowing for pipe rotation. The minimum gap (total of opposing sides) between the pipe and the support is equal to the diametral expansion of the pipe due to temperature and pressure. [The maximum gap is equal to the diametral expansion of the pipe due to temperature and pressure plus 1/8 inch.]*
For standard component pipe supports, the manufacturers functional limitations for example, travel limits and sway angles, should be followed. This criterion is applicable to limit stops, snubbers, rods, hangers and sway struts. Snubber settings should be chosen such that pipe movement occurs over the mid range of the snubber travel. Some margin should be provided between the expected pipe movement and the maximum or minimum snubber-stroke to accommodate construction tolerance.
3.9.3.4.1 ASME Code Class 1 Component Supports The load combinations and allowable stresses for ASME Code Class 1 component supports are given in Tables 3.9-8 and 3.9-9.
3.9.3.4.1.1 Class 1 Component Supports Models and Methods The static and dynamic structural analyses employ the matrix method and normal mode theory for the solution of lumped-parameter, multimass structural models. The equipment support structure models are dual-purpose, since they represent quantitatively the elastic restraints that the supports impose upon the component, and represent the individual support member stresses due to the forces imposed upon the supports by the component.
A description of the supports for the reactor pressure vessel, steam generator, and pressurizer is found in Subsection 5.4.10. The supports are modeled using elements such as beams, plates, and springs where applicable.
The reactor vessel supports are located at each of the four inlet nozzles and are modeled using a finite element computer program.
Steam generator supports include a column support below the steam generator, a lateral support attached to the top of the column support, a lateral support transverse to the hot leg attached to the secondary shell at the operating floor, and a lateral support (snubbers) parallel to the hot leg attached to the secondary shell at the top of the steam generator compartment, and are normally modeled as linear or nonlinear springs. The reactor coolant pump is supported by the connection to the steam generator and does not have separate supports.
The pressurizer is supported by four columns. Each core makeup tank is supported by eight columns.
- In accordance with the departure evaluation process specified in License Condition 2.D.(13), NRC Staff approval may be required prior to implementing a change in this information.
3.9-55 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR The passive residual heat removal heat exchanger is supported by the in-containment refueling water storage tank. The channel heads are outside of the tank and the tubesheets are connected to the tank wall. The tubes are inside the tank, exposed to fluid motion and supported by a structure resting on the floor of the tank and attached to the tank wall.
For each operating condition, the loads (obtained from the reactor coolant loop analysis or the analysis of the component) acting on the reactor pressure vessel, steam generator, and pressurizer supports are appropriately combined. The adequacy of each member of the supports, is verified by solving the stress and interaction equations of ASME Code,Section III, Subsection NF and Appendix F. The adequacy of the reactor pressure vessel support structure is verified using a finite element computer program and comparing the resultant stresses to the criteria given in ASME Code,Section III, Subsection NF and Appendix F.
The test load method given in Appendix F is an acceptable method of qualifying components in lieu of satisfying the stress/load limits established for the component analysis. The test load method is not used in the AP1000 to qualify supports of components built to ASME Code,Section III requirements.
3.9.3.4.2 ASME Code Class 2 and 3 Supports
[Class 2 and 3 component supports are designed and analyzed for design condition, and Level A, B, C, and D service conditions to the rules and requirements of ASME Section III, Subsection NF, and Appendix F.]* The analyses or test methods and associated stress or load allowable limits that are used in the evaluation of linear supports for Level D service conditions are those defined in the ASME Code. Plate and shell type supports satisfy the Level D service condition limits provided in Appendix F of the ASME Code,Section III. Tables 3.9-8 and 3.9-10 outline the allowable stresses and loading combinations for ASME Code,Section III, Class 2 and 3 component supports.
3.9.3.4.3 Snubbers Used as Component and Piping Supports The location and size of the snubbers are determined by stress analysis. Access for the testing, inspection, and maintenance of snubbers is considered in the AP1000 layout. The location and line of action of a snubber are selected based on the necessity of limiting seismic stresses in the piping and nozzle loads on equipment. Snubbers are chosen in lieu of rigid supports where restricting thermal growth would induce excessive thermal stresses in the piping or nozzle loads or equipment.
Snubbers that are designed to lock up at a given velocity are specified with lock-up velocities sufficiently large to envelope the highest thermal growth rates of the pipe or equipment for design thermal transients. The snubbers are constructed to ASME Code,Section III, Subsection NF standards.
[In the piping system seismic stress analysis, the snubbers are modeled as stiffness elements. The stiffness value is based on vendor stiffness data for the snubber, snubber extension, and pipe clamp assembly.]* Supports for active valves are included in the overall design and qualification of the valve.
The elimination of the analysis of dynamic effects of pipe breaks due to leak-before-break considerations, as outlined in Subsection 3.6.3, permits the use of fewer snubbers than in plants that were designed without considering leak before break. Also, the AP1000 uses gapped support devices to minimize the use of snubbers. The evaluation of those snubbers used as supports is outlined below.
Design specifications for snubbers include:
Seismic requirements Normal environmental parameters
- In accordance with the departure evaluation process specified in License Condition 2.D.(13), NRC Staff approval may be required prior to implementing a change in this information.
3.9-56 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Accident/post-accident environmental parameters Full-scale performance test to measure pertinent performance requirements Instructions for periodic maintenance (in technical manuals)
Two types of tests will be performed on the snubbers to verify proper operation:
Production tests, including dynamic testing, on every unit to verify proper operability Qualification tests on randomly selected production models to demonstrate the required load performance (load rating)
The tests for large hydraulic snubbers (that is, those with capacities of 50 kips or greater) include the following qualification tests:
- 1) a full Level D load test to verify sufficient load capacity,
- 2) testing at full load to verify proper bleed with the control valve closed, and the following production tests:
- 1) testing to verify the control valve closes within the specified velocity range, and
- 2) testing to demonstrate that breakaway and drag loads are within the design limits.
The operability of essential snubbers is verified as described in Subsection 3.9.3.4.4 and in the inservice testing program required by Subsection 3.9.8.3 by verifying the proper installation of the snubbers, and performing visual inspections and measurements of the cold and hot positions of the snubbers as required during plant heatup to verify the snubbers are performing as intended.
3.9.3.4.4 Inspection, Testing, Repair, and/or Replacement of Snubbers A program for inservice examination and testing of dynamic supports (snubbers) is prepared in accordance with the requirements of ASME OM Code, Subsection ISTD.
The inservice examination and testing includes a thermal motion monitoring program that is established for verification of snubber movement, adequate clearance and gaps, including motion measurements, and acceptance criteria to assure compliance with ASME Section III, Subsection NF.
The inservice examination and testing plan for applicable snubbers is prepared in accordance with the requirements of the ASME OM Code, Subsection ISTD. Snubber maintenance, repairs, replacements, and modifications are performed in accordance with the requirements of the ASME OM Code, Subsection ISTD. Details of the inservice examination and testing program are reported in the inservice inspection and testing plan included in the inservice testing program required by Subsection 3.9.8.3.
- a. Snubber Design and Testing
- 1. A list of safety-related snubbers is included in Table 3.9-201.
- 2. The snubbers are tested to verify they can perform as required during the seismic events, and under anticipated operational transient loads or other mechanical loads associated with the design requirements for the plant. Production and qualification test programs for 3.9-57 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR both hydraulic and mechanical snubbers are carried out by the snubber vendors.
Acceptance criteria for compliance with ASME Section III Subsection NF, and other applicable codes, standards, and requirements, are as follows:
Snubber production and qualification test programs are carried out by strict adherence to the manufacturers testing and technical manuals. These manuals are prepared by the snubber manufacturer and subjected to review for compliance with the applicable provisions of the ASME Pressure Vessel and Piping Code of record. The test program is periodically audited during implementation for compliance.
Snubbers are inspected and tested for compliance with the design drawings and functional requirements of the procurement specifications.
Snubbers are load rated by testing in accordance with the snubber manufacturers testing program.
Design compliance of the snubbers per ASME Section III Paragraph NF-3128, and Subparagraphs NF-3411.3 and NF-3412.4.
The snubbers are tested for various abnormal environmental conditions. Upon completion of the abnormal environmental transient test, the snubber is tested dynamically at a frequency within a specified frequency range. The snubber must operate normally during the dynamic test. The functional parameters cited in Subparagraph NF-3412.4 are included in the snubber qualification and testing program. Other parameters in accordance with the ASME OM Code will be incorporated.
The codes and standards used for snubber qualification and production testing are as follows:
- ASME B&PV Code Section III (Code of Record date) and Subsection NF.
- ASME OM Code, Subsection ISTD.
Large bore hydraulic snubbers are full Service Level D load tested on a random sampling basis, including verifying proper bleed rates with the control valve closed. Snubbers receive testing that ensure control valve closure within the specified velocity range and demonstration that drag forces/breakaway forces are within design limits.
- 3. Safety-related snubbers are identified in Table 3.9-201, including the snubber identification and the associated system or component, e.g., line number. The snubbers on the list are hydraulic and constructed to ASME Section III, Subsection NF. The snubbers are used for shock loading only. None of the snubbers are dual purpose or vibration arrestor type snubbers. Dual purpose snubbers are those snubbers used for shock arrestor (low cycle) and vibration arrestor (high cycle), i.e. snubbers used for a) impact loads from seismic, pipe break, etc., and b) control of high cycle operational vibration. Snubbers used for low cycle shock loadings for any purpose are considered a single purpose.
- b. Snubber Installation Requirements Installation instructions contain instructions for storage, handling, erection, and adjustments (if necessary) of snubbers. Each snubber has an installation location drawing that contains the installation location of the snubber on the pipe and structure, the hot and cold settings, and additional information needed to install the particular snubber.
3.9-58 Revision 9
- c. Snubber Preservice Examination and Testing Snubbers are examined and tested during the preservice period in accordance with the Preservice Test Plan, which was prepared in accordance with the requirements of the ASME Code for Operation and Maintenance of Nuclear Power Plants (OM Code) (Reference 2),
Subsection ISTD. The required ISTD examinations are supplemented with an additional examination requirement to verify that snubbers are not seized, frozen or jammed.
- d. Snubber Inservice Examination and Testing Inservice examination and testing of snubbers is conducted in accordance with the requirements of the ASME OM Code, Subsection ISTD as outlined in the Inservice Test program plan.
Visual examinations are performed on the snubbers to identify conditions that could adversely affect a snubbers operational readiness. Snubbers evaluated as unacceptable during visual examination may be accepted for continued service by successful completion of an operational readiness test. The schedule of snubber visual examinations is based on snubber performance.
Snubbers are tested according to the established sampling plan each fuel cycle. When an in-place test or bench test cannot be performed, snubber subcomponents that control the parameters to be verified are examined and tested. Snubbers that do not meet test requirements are evaluated and additional testing is conducted until the appropriate sample plan completion criteria are satisfied.
There is also an assessment performed to ensure that the service life of a snubber is not exceeded prior to removing the snubber from service.
3.9.3.5 Instrumentation Line Supports
[The design loads, load combinations, and acceptance criteria for safety-related instrumentation supports are similar to those of pipe supports. Design loads include deadweight, thermal, and seismic (as appropriate). The acceptance criteria is ASME Subsection NF.]*
3.9.4 Control Rod Drive System (CRDS) 3.9.4.1 Descriptive Information of CRDS 3.9.4.1.1 Control Rod Drive Mechanism (CRDM)
The AP1000 control rod drive mechanism is based on a proven Westinghouse design that has been used in many operating nuclear power plants. Figure 3.9-4 shows the control rod drive mechanism.
Figure 4.2-8 shows the configuration of the driveline, including the control rod drive mechanism.
Subsection 4.2.2 describes the design of the rod cluster control assemblies and gray rod cluster assemblies. The material requirements for the control rod drive mechanisms and the control assemblies are discussed in Section 4.5.
Control rod drive mechanisms are located on the head of the reactor vessel. They are coupled to rod cluster control assemblies (RCCAs) that have neutron absorber material over the active length of the control rods. The control rod drive mechanisms are also attached to gray rod cluster assemblies (GRCAs) that are used for load follow. The gray rod cluster assemblies are geometrically identical to the rod cluster control assemblies except that most of the rodlets are fabricated from a material specified in Subsection 4.2.2.
- In accordance with the departure evaluation process specified in License Condition 2.D.(13), NRC Staff approval may be required prior to implementing a change in this information.
3.9-59 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR The control rod drive mechanisms for both the rod cluster control assemblies and the gray rod cluster assemblies are identical. Although the gray rod cluster assemblies are expected to drop during a trip insertion, the insertion of these assemblies is not required in order to shut down the reactor.
The primary functions of the control rod drive mechanism is to insert or withdraw, at a designated speed, 53 rod cluster control assemblies and 16 gray rod cluster assemblies from the core to control average core temperature. During startup and shutdown the control assemblies control changes in reactivity.
Operation of the control rod drive mechanisms is integrated to move groups of assemblies together.
Each cluster assembly is in a bank of assemblies which is used for reactivity control, axial power distribution control, or shutdown control. The assemblies of each bank of several rod cluster control assemblies or gray rod cluster assemblies move at the same time.
The design of the control rod drive mechanisms and the control assemblies permits load follow without the use of chemical shim over most of the life of the core. The design of the control rod drive mechanisms also permits holding the rod cluster control assemblies and the gray rod cluster assemblies at any step elevation within the range of rod travel during normal operation. The rod cluster control assemblies and gray rod cluster assemblies have the same mechanical coupling with the control rod drive mechanism.
The control rod drive mechanism is a magnetically operated jack (magjack). A magnetic jack is an arrangement of three electromagnets energized in a controlled sequence by a power cycle to insert or withdraw rod cluster control assemblies and gray rod cluster assemblies in the reactor core in discrete steps. The control rod drive mechanism is designed to release the drive rod and rod cluster control assembly during any part of the power cycle sequencing if electrical power to the coils is interrupted. When released from the control rod drive mechanism, the drive rod and rod cluster control assembly or gray rod cluster assembly falls by gravity into a fully inserted position.
The control rod drive mechanism consists of four separate subassemblies. These are the pressure vessel, coil stack assembly, latch assembly, and drive rod assembly.
The pressure vessel includes a latch housing and a rod travel housing that are connected by a threaded, seal-welded, maintenance joint that facilitates removal of the latch assembly. The top of the rod travel housing provides seismic support by an interface with the integrated head package. The latch housing is the lower portion of the vessel and contains the latch assembly. The latch housing is welded to the mechanism nozzle by a bi-metallic weld. The nozzle of the control rod drive mechanism is attached to the vessel head by a shrink-fit and a partial penetration weld. The rod travel housing is the upper portion of the vessel and provides space for the drive rod during its upward movement as the control rods are withdrawn from the core.
The coil stack assembly includes the coil housings, electrical conduit and connector, and three operating coils: the stationary gripper coil, the movable gripper coil, and the lift coil. The coil stack assembly is a separate unit. It is installed on the drive mechanism by sliding it over the outside of the latch housing. It rests on the base of the latch housing without mechanical attachment. Energizing the operating coils causes movement of the pole pieces and latches in the latch assembly.
The latch assembly includes the guide tube, stationary pole pieces, movable pole pieces, and two sets of latches: the movable gripper latches and the stationary gripper latches. The latches engage grooves in the drive rod assembly. The movable gripper latches are moved up or down in 5/8-inch steps by the lift pole to raise or lower the drive rod. The stationary gripper latches hold the drive rod assembly while the movable gripper latches are repositioned for the next 5/8-inch step.
3.9-60 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR The drive rod assembly includes a coupling, drive rod, disconnect button, disconnect rod, and locking button. The drive rod has a 5/8-inch pitch from groove to groove that engage the latches during holding or moving of the drive rod. The coupling is attached to the drive rod and provides the means for coupling to the rod cluster control assembly directly below the control rod drive mechanism. The disconnect button, disconnect rod, and locking button provide positive locking of the coupling to the rod cluster control assembly and permit remote disconnection of the drive rod.
The control rod drive mechanism withdraws and inserts a rod cluster control assembly or gray rod cluster assembly as shaped electrical pulses are received by the operating coils. An on or off sequence, repeated by silicon-controlled rectifiers in the power programmer, causes either withdrawal or insertion of the control rod. Withdrawal of the drive rod and rod cluster control assembly or gray rod cluster assembly is accomplished by magnetic forces. Insertion is by gravity.
The mechanism is capable of raising or lowering a maximum 400-pound load (which includes the drive rod weight) at a rate of 45 inches per minute.
During plant operation, the stationary gripper coil and movable gripper coil of the drive mechanism holds the rod cluster control assembly in a static position until a stepping sequence is initiated, at which time the stationary gripper coil, movable gripper coil, and lift coil are energized sequentially.
The control rod position is measured by 48 discrete coils mounted on the position indicator assembly surrounding the rod travel housing. Each coil magnetically senses the entry and presence of the top of the ferromagnetic drive rod assembly as it moves through the coil center line.
The mechanism internals are designed to operate in 650°F reactor coolant. The pressure vessel is designed to contain reactor coolant at 650°F and 2500 psia. The three operating coils are designed to operate at 392°F, with forced-air cooling required to maintain the coil internal temperature at or below 392°F. The air for cooling is provided by fans and shrouds included as part of the integrated head package. A loss of the air cooling would be expected to result in the release of the drive rod in the worst case. For this reason, the cooling air is not required to be a safety-related system and does not require an emergency power supply.
The design and construction of the control rod drive mechanism includes provisions to establish that gross failure of the housing sufficient to allow a control rod to be ejected from the core is not credible.
These provisions include the following:
Construction of the housing of Type 304 or 316 stainless steel, which exhibits excellent notch toughness at the temperatures that will be encountered.
The allowable stress levels in the mechanism are not exceeded due to system thermal transients at power or by thermal movement of the reactor coolant loops.
The control rod drive mechanisms are hydrotested after manufacture at a minimum of 125 percent of system design pressure.
The housings are hydrotested at a minimum of 125 percent of system design pressure after installation to the reactor vessel head and included as part of the hydro test of the completed reactor coolant system.
The analyses of postulated accidents discussed in Chapter 15 include the evaluation of a nonmechanistic control rod ejection. Section 3.5 does not consider ejected rods to be a credible missile.
3.9-61 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR 3.9.4.1.2 Control Rod Withdrawal The rod cluster control assembly is withdrawn by repeating the following sequence of events. The sequence, starting with the stationary and movable grippers energized in the hold position, is as follows:
- 1. Moveable Gripper Coil B - OFF The latch-locking plunger separates from the movable gripper pole under the force of a spring and gravity. Three links, pinned to the plunger, swing the three movable gripper latches out of the drive rod assembly groove. Note: the movable gripper is turned off at the start of rod motion even though it will be turned on in step 2 to provide identical CRDM cycling for all steps since a step ends with the movable gripper off.
- 2. Movable Gripper Coil B - ON The latch-locking plunger rises and swings the movable gripper latches into the drive rod assembly groove. A small axial clearance exists between the latch teeth and the drive rod.
- 3. Stationary Gripper Coil A - OFF The force of gravity, acting upon the drive rod assembly and attached control rod, causes the stationary gripper latches and plunger to move downward 1/16 inch, transferring the load of the drive rod assembly and attached control rod to the movable gripper latches. The plunger continues to move downward and swings the stationary gripper latches out of the drive rod assembly groove.
- 4. Lift Coil C - ON The 5/8-inch gap between the movable gripper pole and the lift pole closes, and the drive rod assembly rises one step length (5/8 inch).
- 5. Stationary Gripper Coil A - ON The plunger rises and closes the gap below the stationary gripper pole. The three links, pinned to the plunger, swing the stationary gripper latches into a drive rod assembly groove. The latches contact the drive rod assembly and lift it (and the attached control rod) a small fraction of an inch.
The small vertical drive rod assembly movement transfers the drive rod assembly load from the movable gripper latches to the stationary gripper latches.
- 6. Movable Gripper Coil B - OFF The latch-locking plunger separates from the movable gripper pole under the force of a spring and gravity. Three links, pinned to the plunger, swing the three movable gripper latches out of the drive rod assembly groove.
- 7. Lift Coil C - OFF The gap between the movable gripper pole and the lift pole opens. The movable gripper latches drop 5/8 inch to a position adjacent to a drive rod assembly groove.
- 8. Repeat Step 3.9-62 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR The sequence just described (items 1 through 6) is termed one step or one cycle. The rod cluster control assembly moves 5/8 inch for each step or cycle. The sequence is repeated at a rate of up to 72 steps per minute, and the drive rod assembly (which has a 5/8-inch groove pitch) is raised 72 grooves per minute. The rod cluster control assembly is thus withdrawn at a rate of up to 45 inches per minute. The gray rod cluster assemblies are withdrawn in an identical manner.
After rod motion has ended, movable gripper coil B is turned on to re-establish double-hold (that is, holding the rod in place with both the stationary and movable grippers).
3.9.4.1.3 Control Rod Insertion The sequence for rod cluster control assembly insertion is similar to that for control rod withdrawal, except that the timing of lift coil C ON and OFF is changed to permit lowering of the control assembly.
The sequence, starting with the stationary gripper energized in the hold position, is as follows:
- 1. Movable Gripper Coil B - OFF The latch-locking plunger separates from the movable gripper pole under the force of a spring and gravity. Three links, pinned to the plunger, swing the three movable gripper latches out of the drive rod assembly groove.
- 2. Lift Coil C - ON The 5/8-inch gap between the movable gripper and lift the pole closes. The movable gripper latches are raised to a position adjacent to a drive rod assembly groove.
- 3. Movable Gripper Coil B - ON The latch-locking plunger rises and swings the movable gripper latches into a drive rod assembly groove. A small axial clearance exists between the latch teeth and the drive rod assembly.
- 4. Stationary Gripper Coil A - OFF The force of gravity, acting upon the drive rod assembly and attached rod cluster control assembly, causes the stationary gripper latches and plunger to move downward 1/16 inch transferring the load of the drive rod assembly and attached rod cluster control assembly to the movable gripper latches. The plunger continues to move downward and swings the stationary gripper latches out of the drive rod assembly groove.
- 5. Lift Coil C - OFF The force of gravity and spring force separate the movable gripper pole from the lift pole. The drive rod assembly and attached rod cluster control assembly drop down 5/8 inch.
- 6. Stationary Gripper Coil A - ON The plunger rises and closes the gap below the stationary gripper pole. The three links, pinned to the plunger, swing the three stationary gripper latches into a drive rod assembly groove. The latches contact the drive rod assembly and lift it (and the attached control rod) a small fraction of an inch. The small, vertical drive rod assembly movement transfers the drive rod assembly load from the movable gripper latches to the stationary gripper latches.
- 7. Movable Gripper Coil B - OFF 3.9-63 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR The latch-locking plunger separates from the movable gripper pole under the force of a spring and gravity. Three links, pinned to the plunger, swing the three movable gripper latches out of the drive rod assembly groove.
- 8. Repeat Step The sequence is repeated, as for rod cluster control assembly withdrawal, up to 72 times per minute, which gives an insertion rate of 45 inches per minute. The gray rod cluster assemblies are inserted in an identical manner.
After rod motion has ended, movable gripper coil B is turned on to re-establish double-hold (that is, holding the rod in place with both the stationary and movable grippers).
3.9.4.1.4 Holding and Tripping of the Control Rods During most of the plant operating time, the control rod drive mechanisms hold the rod cluster control assemblies withdrawn from the core in a static position. During most plant operation the gray rod cluster assemblies are held by the control rod drive mechanisms withdrawn or inserted in the core in a static position as directed by flux shape considerations. In the holding mode, two coils - stationary gripper coil A and movable gripper coil B - are energized on each mechanism. The drive rod assembly and attached rod cluster control assemblies or gray rod cluster assemblies hang suspended from the three latches of the stationary gripper. Additionally, the three latches of the movable gripper are engaged to hold the drive rod assembly in place in the event of a failure that would cause the release of the stationary gripper.
When the drive line is positioned in the last few steps, the rod cluster control assemblies and gray rod cluster assemblies are out of the last portion of the core, although not fully withdrawn from the fuel assemblies. This covers the range of steps from 263-266. The control rod drive mechanism may be located at any one or more of these step locations during operation of the plant and be considered fully out without any adverse impact on the control rod drive mechanism or plant operation.
The rod clusters cannot be physically withdrawn from the guide tubes by the control rod drive mechanisms since no additional grooves are machined in the drive rod past the last position.
If power to the stationary and movable gripper coils is cut off, the combined weights of the drive rod assembly and the rod cluster control assembly or gray rod cluster assembly (plus the stationary gripper and movable gripper return springs) move the latches out of the drive rod assembly groove.
The trip occurs as follows:
The magnetic field, holding the stationary gripper plunger against the stationary gripper pole, collapses, and the stationary gripper plunger is forced down by the stationary gripper return spring and the weight acting upon the latches.
The magnetic field, holding the moveable gripper plunger against the movable gripper pole, collapses, and the movable gripper plunger is forced down by the moveable gripper return spring and the weight acting upon the latches.
The control rod falls by gravity into the core. After the driveline is released by the mechanism, it falls freely until the control rods enter the dashpot section of the fuel assembly where the coolant in the guide tubes slows the rate of descent until the rods are fully inserted.
3.9-64 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR 3.9.4.1.5 Testing Program As noted earlier, the AP1000 control rod drive mechanism is based on a proven Westinghouse design that has been used in many operating nuclear power plants. The control rod cluster and fuel assembly thimble tube mechanical design is also based on a proven design. The production tests that each control rod drive mechanism undergoes are outlined in Subsection 3.9.4.4.
3.9.4.2 Applicable CRDS Design Specifications The specifications for the design, fabrication, construction, and operation of the control rod drive system (CRDS) include provisions related to the functional requirements, pressure boundary integrity, strength and durability of the internal components, and electrical requirements for the operating mechanism. The specifications and design requirements are consistent with the safety classification of the various parts of the control rod drive system as defined in Section 3.2.
The materials used in the control rod drive mechanisms are discussed in Subsection 4.5.1. The rod position instrumentation is described in Section 7.7.
Since the AP1000 control rod drive mechanism is a design previously provided for other nuclear power plants the specifications are well established. The specifications are outlined in the following discussions.
3.9.4.2.1 Control Rod Drive Mechanism Functional Requirements The suitability of the functional requirements for the step size and rate of withdrawal and insertion during normal operation and the time to drop into the core have been demonstrated during many years of successful operation of similar Westinghouse-designed control rod drive mechanisms. The time required for the control rod drive system to release the rod cluster control assemblies into the core is evaluated to determine that it is sufficient in analyses of postulated accident conditions. For a discussion of the evaluation of the performance of the reactivity control function of the AP1000 control rod drive system and specific AP1000 accident analyses see Section 4.6 and Chapter 15.
The basic operational requirements for the control rod drive mechanisms follow:
5/8-inch step 166.755 inch travel, maximum (cold conditions) 400-pound maximum load Step in or out at 45 inches per minute (72 steps per minute) maximum, 5 inches per minute (8 steps per minute) minimum Electrical power interruption initiating release of drive rod assembly Trip delay time of less than or equal to 150 millisecond. Free fall of drive rod assembly is to begin less than 150 millisecond after power interruption, no matter what holding or stepping action is being executed, with any load and coolant temperature of 100°F to 650°F.
60-year design objective with normal refurbishment Testing and operating experience has validated these requirements and the capability of the AP1000 control rod drive mechanism design to meet them.
3.9-65 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR 3.9.4.2.2 Pressure Housing Requirements The pressure housing portion of the control rod drive mechanism, the latch housing and rod travel housing, comprises a portion of the reactor coolant pressure boundary. The design pressure and temperature for the control rod drive mechanism pressure housing are the same as for the reactor vessel.
As part of the reactor coolant pressure boundary, the pressure housing is constructed in conformance with requirements in 10 CFR 50.55a. The conformance of the reactor coolant pressure boundary with applicable code and standards is discussed in Section 5.2. The pressure housing meets design, material, fabrication, analysis, quality assurance, and other requirements for Class 1 components in ASME Code,Section III. The pressure housing is required to meet stress requirements for design and transient conditions. The AP1000 control rod drive mechanism pressure housing uses only one canopy seal weld, which is between the latch housing and the rod travel housing. The rod travel housing includes a vent hole to allow water to drain from the canopy seal weld area. This eliminates the presence of an oxygenated environment near the weld. The single AP1000 canopy seal weld has reduced stresses compared to the lower seal weld in past designs.
These design improvements over past control rod drive mechanisms aid to prevent the occurrence of stress corrosion cracking.
3.9.4.2.3 Internal Component Requirements The internal components of the control rod drive mechanism include the latch assembly, drive rod and the coupling that attaches the drive rod to the rod cluster control assemblies and gray rod cluster assemblies.
The design, fabrication, inspection, and testing of these non-pressure boundary components typically do not come under the jurisdiction of the ASME Code. For those materials which do not have established stress limits the limits are based on the material specification mechanical property requirements.
In addition to dead-weight and operational loads, the design of the driveline is evaluated for loads due to safe shutdown earthquake and flow induced vibration as described in Subsection 3.9.5.3, and the resulting deflections are limited such that the CRDM will function properly.
Postulated failures of drive rod assemblies and latch mechanisms by fracture or decoupling lead to a decrease in reactivity. A postulated failure leading to the release of a drive rod or portion of a drive rod results in an insertion of control rods guided by the control rod assembly. A control rod drop is indicated by instrumentation that monitors the nuclear reaction and detect a decrease in reactivity.
A postulated failure of a control rod drive mechanism to insert a control assembly due to sticking or galling of the drive rod or latch assembly is accounted for in the safety analyses, which assume that the control assembly at the most reactive core location is inoperable.
In addition to the requirements related to the strength of the internal components, criteria have been developed for clearances in the latch assembly and between the latch arms and drive rod. The latch assembly has parts of austenitic and ferritic stainless steels and other alloys. Differential thermal expansion could eliminate clearances and result in binding or otherwise restrict movement of the latch assembly if not allowed for in the design.
The design requirement is that sufficient clearance exist between the moving parts in the latch assembly at expected operating and design condition temperatures. An evaluation of the thermal expansion, room temperature clearances, and geometry demonstrates that an appropriate clearance is available at design and normal operating conditions.
3.9-66 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR For the magjack mechanism to work properly to insert or withdraw the control rods, the latch arms contacting the drive rod, (that is the movable and stationary gripper latches) must not be under load at the same time. The effect of the differential thermal expansion on the latch arms, pressure housing, is evaluated to provide that the appropriate clearance between the drive rod and the unloaded latch arm is maintained.
3.9.4.2.4 Coil Stack Assembly Requirements The coil stack assembly provides the electromotive force to move the latches in the latch assembly.
The safety function of rapid insertion of the control rods can be accomplished by removing power from the coils. The separation and redundancy required of the control system and power supplied to the control rod drive system is discussed in Section 4.6.
Postulated electrical or structural failures of the coil assembly do not result in a condition which would prevent control rod insertion. As a result, the electrical coils are built using standard industrial quality assurance and are not required to be built to IEEE Class 1E standards.
The coil stack assembly is located outside the pressure housing. The assembly does not come in contact with the reactor coolant and does not have any pressure-retaining function. The operating temperature of the coils is maintained below 392°F.
The coil stack assembly slides over the pressure housing and remains in place without a permanent mechanical or welded attachment. The assembly clearances permit removal of an assembly even when the control rod drive mechanism is at normal operating temperature. Thus, a malfunctioning coil assembly could be replaced without a complete cooldown of the plant. The clearances between the coil and coil housing are selected to minimize the gap at normal operating temperature to facilitate coil cooling.
3.9.4.3 Design Loads, Stress Limits, and Allowable Deformations The pressure housing portion of the control rod drive mechanism is a Class 1 component required to meet the requirements of ASME Code,Section III. Subsection 3.9.3 defines the loading combinations considered in the evaluation of ASME Code,Section III, pressure boundary components.
For each loading combination, the appropriate stresses due to pressure, component weight, external loads, hydraulic forces, thermal gradients, and seismic dynamic forces are evaluated and demonstrated to be less than the applicable stress limits. The cyclic stresses are combined with constant stresses to evaluate the fatigue usage due to cyclic loads. The transients used in the evaluation of cyclic loads are described in Subsection 3.9.1. The effect of seismic events is addressed by considering a seismic event with an amplitude equal to one-third of the safe shutdown earthquake evaluated as a Level B event. The seismic contribution to the fatigue evaluation is based on five seismic events with an amplitude of one-third the safe shutdown earthquake and with 63 cycles per event. The results of the stress evaluation are documented in a component stress report, as required by the ASME Code.
The control rod drive mechanism is supported by the attachment of the bottom of the assembly to the reactor vessel head and a connection to the integrated head package at the top of the rod travel housing. The integrated head package also provides the support to the cooling air shrouds and control rod drive mechanism electrical supply cables to prevent excessive loading on the control rod drive mechanisms during seismic events.
Hydrostatic tests according to the requirements of the ASME Code verify the pressure boundary integrity of the pressure housing prior to operation. The nozzle is attached to the reactor vessel head 3.9-67 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR by the head supplier and is hydro tested as required. The rod travel housing seal weld is performed prior to final assembly following the assembly of the travel housing to the latch assembly housing.
The hydrostatic test of the connection between the rod travel housing and the latch housing is done on the reactor vessel closure head after the housings are threaded together and seal welded.
To assure functional capability of the control rod dive mechanism following a seismic event or a pipe break, the bending moments on the control rod drive mechanisms are limited to those that produce stress levels in the pressure boundary of the control rod drive mechanism less than ASME Code limits during anticipated transient conditions. This limit provides that the rod travel housing does not bend to the extent that the drive rod binds during insertion of the control rods. The analysis evaluates the load combinations that include safe shutdown earthquake and pipe break. The pipe break considered is at least as large as the largest pipe in or connected to the reactor coolant system that is not qualified as leak before break line. See Subsection 3.9.7 for information on the control rod drive mechanism deflection limit requirements for the integrated head package.
3.9.4.4 Control Rod Drive Mechanism Performance Assurance Program The capability of the pressure housing components to perform throughout the 60 year design objective is confirmed by the stress analysis report required by the ASME Code,Section III.
To confirm the operational adequacy of the combination of fuel assembly, control rod drive mechanism, and rod cluster control assembly, functional test programs have been conducted. These tests verify that the trip time achieved by the control rod drive mechanisms meets the design requirements. These tests have been reported in WCAP-8446 (Reference 9).
The units are production tested prior to shipment to confirm the capability of the control rod drive mechanism to meet design specification operation requirements. Each production control rod drive mechanism undergoes a production test as listed in Table 3.9-13.
The trip time requirement is confirmed for each control rod drive mechanism prior to initial reactor operation and at periodic intervals after initial reactor operation, as required by the technical specifications. See Section 14.2 for preoperational and startup testing.
To demonstrate proper operation of the control rod drive mechanism and to provide acceptable core power distributions, rod cluster control assembly partial movement checks are performed as required by the Technical Specifications. In addition, periodic drop tests of the rod cluster control assembly are performed at each refueling shutdown to demonstrate continued capability to meet trip time requirements, consistent with safety analyses in Chapter 15.
3.9.5 Reactor Pressure Vessel Internals 3.9.5.1 Design Arrangements The AP1000 reactor internals consist of two major assemblies - the lower internals and the upper internals. The reactor internals provide the protection, alignment and support for the core, control rods, and gray rods to provide safe and reliable reactor operation. In addition, the reactor internals help to accomplish the following: direct the main coolant flow to and from the fuel assemblies; absorb control rod dynamic loads, fuel assembly loads, and other loads and transmit these loads to the reactor vessel; support instrumentation within the reactor vessel; provide protection for the reactor vessel against excessive radiation exposure from the core; and position and support reactor vessel radiation surveillance specimens.
During reactor operation, the core barrel directs the coolant flow from the reactor vessel inlet nozzles, through the downcomer annulus, and into the lower plenum below the lower core support plate. The 3.9-68 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR flow then turns and passes through the lower support plate and into the core region. After leaving the core, it passes through the upper core plate; then bypasses through and around the control rod guide tubes and the support columns to reach the outlet nozzles. During operation, a small amount of inlet coolant is diverted from the core to cool the core shroud and the vessel head area.
3.9.5.1.1 Lower Core Support Assembly The major containment and support member of the reactor internals is the lower core support assembly, shown in Figure 3.9-5. This assembly consists of the core barrel, lower core support plate, secondary core support, vortex suppression plate, core shroud, neutron panels, radial supports, and related attachment hardware. The major material for this structure is 300 series austenitic stainless steel. The lower core support assembly is supported at its upper flange from a ledge in the reactor vessel flange. Its lower end is restrained in its transverse movement by a radial support system attached to the vessel wall. The radial support system consists of keys attached to the lower end of the core barrel subassembly. These keys engage clevis inserts in the reactor vessel. This system restricts the lower end of the core barrel from rotational and/or translational movement, but allows for radial thermal growth and axial displacement.
The core shroud is located inside the core barrel and above the lower core support. This shroud forms the radial periphery of the core. Through the dimensional control of the cavity (the gap between the fuel assemblies and the shroud) and the shroud cooling flow inlets, the core shroud provides directional and metered control of the reactor coolant through the core. The core shroud serves to provide a transition from the round core barrel to the square fuel assemblies.
Loads acting vertically downward from weight, fuel assembly preload, control rod dynamic loading, hydraulic loads, and earthquake acceleration are carried by the lower core support plate into the core supports. The loads are then carried through the core barrel shell to the core barrel flange, which is supported by the vessel flange. Transverse loads from earthquake acceleration, coolant cross-flow, and vibration are carried by the core barrel shell and distributed through the lower radial support to the vessel wall and to the vessel flange. Transverse loads from the fuel assemblies are transmitted to the core barrel shell by direct connection of the lower core support plate to the barrel wall, and by the upper core plate inserts to the core barrel alignment plates described in Subsection 3.9.5.1.2.
The main radial support system of the lower end of the core barrel is accomplished by key and keyway joints to the reactor vessel wall. Clevis blocks are welded to the vessel inner diameter at equally spaced points around the inner circumference of the vessel. Another insert block is bolted to each of these blocks and has a keyway geometry. Opposite each of these is a key attached to the internals. During assembly, as the internals are lowered into the vessel, the keys engage the keyways in the axial direction. Correct positioning of the internals is provided by the installation equipment (lifting rig) guide studs and bushings. In this design, the internals have a support at the furthest extremity, such that the core barrel is laterally supported at the top and bottom.
Radial and axial expansion of the core barrel is accommodated, but transverse movement of the core barrel is restricted by this design. With this system, cyclic stresses in the internal structures are within ASME Code,Section III, Subsection NG limits.
In the event of an abnormal downward vertical displacement of the internals following a hypothetical failure, energy-absorbing devices limit the dynamic force imposed on the reactor vessel. The energy absorbing device is the secondary core support. In addition, the secondary core support also transmits the vertical load of the core uniformly to the reactor vessel, limits the displacement to prevent withdrawal of the control rods from the core, and limits the displacement to prevent loss of alignment of the core with the upper core support to allow the control rods to be inserted into the reactor.
3.9-69 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR The lower plenum vortex suppressor plate is positioned in the vessel lower plenum to suppress flow vortices formed by the reactor coolant flow reversal in this region. The suppressor plate is supported by columns from the lower core support plate.
3.9.5.1.2 Upper Core Support Assembly The AP1000 upper core support assembly consists of the upper support, the upper core plate, the support columns, and the guide tube assemblies. Figure 3.9-6 shows the upper core support assembly.
The support grid assembly establishes the spacing between the upper support and the upper core plate. The support columns are fastened at the top and bottom to these plates. The support columns transmit the mechanical loadings between the two plates and some serve the supplementary function of supporting the tubes that house the fixed in-core detectors.
The IGA feeds instrumentation from eight reactor vessel head penetrations to 42 locations within the fuel assemblies. The IGA is composed of a number of plate and shell members welded or bolted together, and rests on the top surface of the upper support plate. The top of the IGA is constrained where Quickloc stalks interface with the vessel head penetrations.
The IGA is designed to prevent excessive vibration of the incore instrumentation thimble assemblies (IITAs), which contain the fixed in-core flux detectors and core-exit thermocouples. The IGA provides a pathway from the Quickloc instrument nozzles through the upper support assemblies and upper support columns to the top of the fuel assemblies. The pathway protects and guides the IITAs during initial installation, reactor operation, and withdrawal/insertion during outages.
The guide tube assemblies sheath and guide the control rod drive shafts and control rods. The guide tubes are fastened to the upper support and are restrained by pins in the upper core plate for proper orientation and support.
The upper core support assembly is positioned in its proper orientation, with respect to the lower core support assembly, by alignment plates in the core barrel. Four equally spaced alignment plates are located at an elevation in the core barrel where the upper core plate is positioned. Four mating sets of inserts are located in the upper core plate at the same positions. As the upper support assembly is lowered into the lower support assembly, the inserts engage the alignment plates in the axial direction. Lateral displacement of the plate and of the upper support assembly is restricted by this design.
Fuel assembly locating pins protrude from the bottom of the upper core plate and engage the fuel assemblies as the upper assembly is lowered into place. This system of locating pins and guidance arrangement provides proper alignment of the lower core support assembly, the upper core support assembly, the fuel assemblies, and control rods.
The upper and lower core support assemblies are preloaded by a large circumferential spring, which rests between the upper barrel flange and the upper core support assembly. This spring is compressed by installation of the reactor vessel head.
Vertical loads from weight, earthquake acceleration, hydraulic loads, and fuel assembly preload are transmitted through the upper core plate via the support columns, to the upper support, and then into the reactor vessel head. Transverse loads from coolant cross-flow, earthquake acceleration, and possible vibrations are distributed by the support columns to the upper support and upper core plate.
The upper support plate is particularly stiff to minimize deflection.
3.9-70 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR 3.9.5.1.3 Core Shroud The core shroud is between the lower core barrel and core, surrounding the core and forming the core cavity. The core shroud consists of formed vertical plates with fully welded vertical seams to prevent lateral flow from the fuel assemblies. This core shroud is a proven design that is currently utilized in operating plants.
3.9.5.1.4 Flow Skirt The flow skirt is a perforated cylindrical ring, shown schematically in Figure 3.9-9, that is an attachment to the reactor vessel bottom head. However, since this structure is located entirely within the pressure boundary, it will be described in this reactor internals section. The flow skirt is welded to support lugs on the inside surface of the reactor vessel bottom head. A vertical clearance is provided between the top of the flow skirt and the bottom surface of the lower core support plate to prevent contact during operation and postulated core drop accident conditions. The flow skirt provides a more uniform core inlet flow distribution.
3.9.5.1.5 Reactor Internals Interface Arrangement Figure 3.9-8 shows the arrangement of reactor internals components shown in Figures 3.9-5 and 3.9-6 and their relative position in the reactor vessel. As shown in the figure, the lower reactor internal (Figure 3.9-5) rests on the vessel ledge. The upper core support structure (Figure 3.9-6) also rests at the same location on the top of a large compression spring (hold down spring). The hold down spring is between the upper support plate flange and the core barrel flange as shown in the figure. Both the assemblies are held together by reactor vessel closure studs, which clamp the upper head to upper shell of reactor vessel. The lower reactor internals are also guided laterally by four support lugs welded to the bottom head of reactor vessel.
3.9.5.2 Design Loading Conditions 3.9.5.2.1 Level A and B Service Conditions The level A and B service conditions that provide the basis for the design of the reactor internals are:
Fuel assembly and reactor internals weight Fuel assembly and core component spring forces, including spring preloading forces Differential pressure and coolant flow forces Temperature gradients Operational thermal transients listed in Table 3.9-1 Differences in thermal expansion, due to temperature differences and differential expansion of materials Loss of load/pump overspeed Earthquake (included only in fatigue evaluation; amplitude equal to one-third of the safe shutdown earthquake response) 3.9-71 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR 3.9.5.2.2 Level C Service Conditions The Level C service conditions that are the basis for the design of the reactor internals are small break loss of coolant accident, and small steam line break.
3.9.5.2.3 Level D Service Conditions The Level D service conditions that are the basis for the design of the reactor internals are safe shutdown earthquake (SSE), and pipe rupture. The pipe ruptures are evaluated for lines for which dynamic effect can not be excluded based on mechanistic pipe break criteria. See Subsection 3.6.3 for a description of mechanistic pipe break criteria. The breaks considered are those inside containment, in systems that carry reactor coolant, steam and feedwater. These breaks have the greatest effect on the reactor internals response.
3.9.5.2.4 Design Loading Categories The combination of design loadings fit into either the service level A, B, C, or D conditions shown on Figures NG-3221-1 and NG-3224-1, NG-3232-1, and by Appendix F of the ASME Code,Section III.
3.9.5.3 Design Bases The reactor vessel internals components designated as ASME III Class CS core support structures are designed, fabricated, and examined in accordance with the requirements of ASME III, Subsection NG for Core Support Structures. The design documentation for these Class CS core support structures include a certified Design Specification and a certified Design Report conforming to the requirements of ASME III, Subsection NCA.
The basis used for design, construction, and examination, for those reactor vessel internals components not designated ASME III Class CS core support structures, is defined by Westinghouse as provided in the ASME Code, Subsection NG.
The scope of the stress analysis requires many different techniques and methods, both static and dynamic. The analysis performed depends on the mode of operation.
3.9.5.3.1 Mechanical Design Basis The design bases for the mechanical design of the AP1000 reactor vessel internals components are as follows:
The reactor internals, in conjunction with the fuel assemblies, direct reactor coolant through the core to achieve an acceptable flow distribution and to restrict bypass flow so that the heat transfer performance requirements are met for the varying modes of operation. In addition, required cooling for the reactor pressure vessel head is provided so that the temperature differences between the vessel flange and head do not result in leakage from the flange during reactor operation.
The core shroud forms the core cavity and directs the reactor coolant flow through the fuel assemblies.
Provisions are made for installing in-core instrumentation useful for plant operation, and vessel material test specimens required for a pressure vessel irradiation surveillance program.
3.9-72 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR The core internals are designed to withstand mechanical loads arising from the safe shutdown earthquake and to meet the requirements of the following item.
The reactor has mechanical provisions which are sufficient to adequately support the core and internals and to maintain the core intact with acceptable heat transfer geometry following transients arising from abnormal operating conditions.
Following a design basis accident, the plant is capable of being shut down and cooled in an orderly fashion, so that the fuel cladding temperature is kept within specified limits. Therefore, the deformation of certain critical reactor internals is kept sufficiently small to allow continued core cooling.
The functional limitations for the core structures and internal structures during the design basis accident are shown in Table 3.9-14.
Details of the dynamic analyses, input forcing functions, and response loadings are presented in Subsection 3.9.2.
3.9.5.3.2 Allowable Deflections Loads and deflections imposed on components, as a result of shock and vibration, are determined analytically and/or experimentally in both scaled models and operating reactors. The cyclic stresses resulting from these dynamic loads and deflections are combined with the stresses imposed by loads from component weights, hydraulic forces, and thermal gradients for the determination of the total stresses of the internals.
The reactor internals are designed to withstand stresses originating from various operating conditions, as summarized in Table 3.9-1.
For normal operating conditions, downward vertical deflection of the lower core support plate is negligible.
For normal operating and accident conditions, the deflection criteria of internal structures are the limiting values given in Table 3.9-14. The upper barrel radial inward deflection limit is based on preventing contact between the barrel and the peripheral upper guide tubes during a LOCA event.
The rod cluster control assembly can be dropped during the LOCA event if the guide tubes are not contacted by the barrel. The radial outward (uniform) deflection is based on maintaining flow in the downcomer annulus between the core barrel and pressure vessel wall. A peak deflection greater than the uniform allowable is acceptable provided that the annulus blockage from the deflected core barrel is less than the non-uniform radial outward deflection limit. The upper package allowable deflection is based on the clearance between the upper core plate and guide tube support pin shoulder. Exceeding this value could result in potential buckling of the guide tube and potential loss of function during operating or accident conditions. The rod cluster guide tube allowable lateral deflection is based on test data that indicates the rod cluster control assembly drop time will not be impaired.
The criteria for the postulated core drop accident are based on analyses that determine the total downward displacement of the internal structures, following a hypothetical core drop resulting from loss of the normal core barrel supports. The initial clearance between the secondary core support structure and the reactor vessel lower head in the hot condition is approximately 0.6 inches. An additional displacement of approximately 0.7 inches would occur from the strain of the energy-absorbing devices of the secondary core support. Therefore, the total drop distance is about 1.3 inches. That distance is less than the distance that permits the tips of the rod cluster control assembly to come out of the guide thimble in the fuel assemblies.
3.9-73 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR The secondary core support is only required to function during an accident involving the hypothetical catastrophic failure of core support (such as core barrel or barrel flange). There are four supports in each reactor. This structure limits the fall of the core and absorbs much of the energy of the fall which otherwise would be imparted to the vessel.
The energy of the fall is calculated assuming a complete and instantaneous failure of the primary core support. The energy is absorbed during the plastic deformation of the controlled volume of stainless steel loaded in tension. The maximum deformation of this austenitic stainless piece is limited to approximately 0.7 inches in the hot condition, after which a positive stop is provided. The maximum deformation of the secondary core support allows for the maintenance of flow paths through the lower portion of the vessel and lower core support to provide cooling of the fuel under forced and natural circulation conditions.
3.9.6 Inservice Testing of Pumps and Valves Inservice testing of pumps and valves is performed in accordance with the ASME Operations and Maintenance (OM) Code (Reference 2) as required by 10 CFR 50.55a(f), except where a deviation from Code requirements has been granted by the NRC as outlined in Subsection 3.9.6.3.
The requirements for system pressure tests are defined in the ASME Code,Section XI, IWA-5000.
These tests verify the pressure boundary integrity and are part of the inservice inspection program, not part of the inservice test program.
The Vogtle 3&4 Preservice Test Plan and Inservice Testing Program Plan are submitted to the NRC.
These plans document compliance with the OM Code except where a deviation from Code requirements has been granted by the NRC as outlined in Subsection 3.9.6.3. The execution and updating of these plans, as required, will ensure that all applicable pumps and valves are in a state of operational readiness to perform their safety function throughout the life of the plant.
Table 13.4-201 provides milestones for preservice and inservice test program implementation.
3.9.6.1 Inservice Testing of Pumps ASME OM Code ISTA-1100 and ISTF-1000 provide the scoping criteria for pumps to be included in the preservice testing and inservice testing (IST) program plans. ISTF-1000 limits pumps to be included in the IST program to those that have an emergency power source. The emergency power source (Class 1E) for the AP1000 is the Class 1E DC distribution system, and there are no pumps powered from this source. Therefore, no pumps are included in the Vogtle 3&4 preservice test plan or IST program plan.
3.9.6.2 Inservice Testing of Valves The Vogtle 3&4 Preservice Test Plan and IST Program Plan include lists of safety-related valves (i.e.,
those valves that perform a specific function in shutting down the reactor to a safe shutdown condition, in maintaining a safe shutdown condition, or in mitigating the consequences of an accident) and other selected valves are subject to operational readiness testing. The valve testing portion of the preservice and IST plans conforms to the requirements of the ASME OM Code and complies with all applicable portions of 10 CFR 50.55a(f), except where a deviation from Code requirements has been authorized by the NRC as outlined in Subsection 3.9.6.3.
Leakage testing requirements for pressure isolation valves, which provide isolation between high and low pressure systems, are contained in both the surveillance requirements for Technical Specification 3.4.15 and the OM Code. The pressure isolation valves that require leakage testing are identified in Table 3.9-18.
3.9-74 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Pre-conditioning of valves or their associated actuators or controls prior to IST testing undermines the purpose of IST testing and is not allowed. Pre-conditioning includes manipulation, pre-testing, maintenance, lubrication, cleaning, exercising, stroking, operating, or disturbing the valve to be tested in any way, except as may occur in an unscheduled, unplanned, and unanticipated manner during normal operation. The IST program includes practices to prevent, where practical, unacceptable preconditioning.
3.9.6.3 Deviations from Code Requirements When it is desirable to deviate from the requirements of the OM Code for Inservice or Preservice testing an NRC approved alternative can be used. The alternative can be an ASME OM Code Case approved by the NRC in 10 CFR 50.55a. Also, an Alternative to the OM Code requirements, or requirements of 10 CFR 50.55a, may be submitted in accordance with 10 CFR 50.55a(z), however this Alternative must be authorized by the NRC prior to use.
3.9.6.4 Additional Testing This section contains the testing commitments that are outside of the OM Code/IST.
3.9.6.4.1 System Level Tests The test program includes periodic systems level tests and inspections that demonstrate the capability of safety-related features to perform their safety-related functions such as passing flow or transferring heat. For this system level testing, the test and inspection frequency is once every 10 years. Staggering of the tests of redundant components is not required. These tests may be performed in conjunction with inservice tests conducted to exercise check valves or to perform power-operated valve operability tests. Alternate means of performing these tests and inspections that provide equivalent demonstration may be developed. Table 3.9-17 identifies the system level tests.
3.9.6.4.2 Check Valve Low Differential Pressure Tests Safety-related check valves that perform a safety related mission to transfer open under low differential pressure conditions have periodic testing to verify the capability of the valve to initiate flow.
The intent of this supplemental test is to determine the pressure required to initiate flow. This differential pressure will verify that the valve will initiate flow at low differential pressure. This low pressure differential test is performed in addition to exercise inservice tests.
The specified frequency for this testing is once each refueling cycle.
3.9.6.4.3 CVS/RCS Pressure Boundary Valve Leakage Testing To support the nonsafety-related classification of the CVS purification subsystem inside containment the CVS RCS pressure boundary valves are subject to leak testing. These valves are not included as pressure isolation valves in Table 3.9-18, as the non-safety CVS inside containment is designed for full RCS pressure. The leakage through valves CVS-V001, CVS-V002, and CVS-V080 will be tested separately with a leakage limit of 1.5 gpm for each valve. The leakage through valves CVS-V067, V081, V082, V084, and V085 will be tested at the same time as a group with a leakage limit of 1 gpm for the group. The leak test(s) will be performed at reduced RCS pressure. The observed leakage at lower pressure will be confirmed to be below the limit when adjusted to normal operating conditions using an NRC-accepted methodology. The test requirements including the test pressure and method 3.9-75 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR for verifying test acceptability are defined in the testing procedures. The specified frequency for this testing is once each refueling cycle.
3.9.6.4.4 Control Room Emergency Ventilation Pressure Regulating Valves (VES-V002A/B)
Pressure regulating valves that cannot be externally controlled are exempt from testing per the OM Code, and the Code does not provide testing methodology for these valves. These valves are functionally tested quarterly, and by the Technical Specification surveillance which requires monthly operation of VES for 15 minutes. Additionally, these valves will be tested through the range of inlet pressures, on a frequency established by the Equipment Reliability program.
3.9.6.4.5 Air-Operated Valves Additional Testing Additional testing is performed as part of the air-operated valve (AOV) program, which includes the key elements for an AOV Program as identified in the JOG AOV program document, Joint Owners Group Air Operated Valve Program Document, Revision 1, December 13, 2000 (References 203 and 204). The AOV program incorporates the attributes for a successful power-operated valve long-term periodic verification program, as discussed in Regulatory Issue Summary 2000-03, Resolution of Generic Safety Issue 158: Performance of Safety-Related Power-Operated Valves Under Design Basis Conditions, by incorporating lessons learned from previous nuclear power plant operations and research programs as they apply to the periodic testing of air- and other power-operated valves included in the IST program. For example, key lessons learned addressed in the AOV program include:
Valves are categorized according to their safety significance and risk ranking.
Setpoints for AOVs are defined based on current vendor information or valve qualification diagnostic testing, such that the valve is capable of performing its design-basis function(s).
Periodic static testing is performed, at a minimum on high risk (high safety significance) valves, to identify potential degradation, unless those valves are periodically cycled during normal plant operation, under conditions that meet or exceed the worst case operating conditions within the licensing basis of the plant for the valve, which would provide adequate periodic demonstration of AOV capability. If required based on valve qualification or operating experience, periodic dynamic testing is performed to re-verify the capability of the valve to perform its required functions.
Sufficient diagnostics are used to collect relevant data (e.g., valve stem thrust and torque, fluid pressure and temperature, stroke time, operating and/or control air pressure, etc.) to verify the valve meets the functional requirements of the qualification specification.
Uncertainties associated with performance of these tests and use of the test results (including those associated with measurement equipment and potential degradation mechanisms) are addressed appropriately. Uncertainties may be considered in the specification of acceptable valve setup parameters or in the interpretation of the test results (or a combination of both). Uncertainties affecting both valve function and structural limits are addressed.
Test frequency is specified, and is evaluated each refueling outage based on data trends as a result of testing. Frequency for periodic testing is in accordance with References 203 and 204, with a minimum of 5 years (or 3 refueling cycles) of data collected and evaluated before extending test intervals.
3.9-76 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Post-maintenance procedures include appropriate instructions and criteria to ensure baseline testing is re-performed as necessary when maintenance on the valve, repair or replacement, have the potential to affect valve functional performance.
Guidance is included to address lessons learned from other valve programs specific to the AOV program.
Documentation from AOV testing, including maintenance records and records from the corrective action program are retained and periodically evaluated as a part of the AOV program.
3.9.6.4.6 Regulatory Treatment of Non-Safety Systems (RTNSS) Component Testing 10 CFR 50.55a(b)(3)(iii)(D) requires that the operational readiness of pumps, valves and dynamic restraints within the scope of Regulatory Treatment of Non-Safety Systems be assessed. Since the components are outside the scope of the OM Code the method used to meet this requirement is not included in the IST program. The method for assessment of operational readiness for these components is documented in the equipment reliability assessment for the associated components and includes testing of the components performed per Section 16.3.
3.9.6.4.7 Additional Testing of POVs Other Than MOVs or AOVs The attributes of the AOV testing program described in Subsection 3.9.6.4.5 above, to the extent that they apply to and can be implemented on other safety-related power-operated valves, such as electro-hydraulic valves, are applied to those other power-operated valves.
3.9.6.4.8 Valve Disassembly to Assess Valve Degradation Disassembly and inspection of valves will be performed based on information from inservice testing, or other program requirements, as noted below:
PRA importance measures.
Design reliability assurance program contained in Section 16.2.
Historical performance of power-operated valves (identify valve types which experience unacceptable degradation in service.)
Basic design of valves including the use of components subject to aging and requiring periodic replacement.
Analysis of trends of valve test parameters during valve inservice tests.
Results of nonintrusive techniques. Disassembly and inspection may not be needed if nonintrusive techniques are sufficient to detect unacceptable valve degradation.
3.9.7 Integrated Head Package The integrated head package (IHP) combines several components in one assembly to simplify refueling the reactor. Figure 3.9-7 illustrates the integrated head package. The integrated head package includes a lifting rig, seismic restraints for control rod drive mechanisms, support for reactor head vent piping, cable bridge, power cables, cables for in-core instrumentation, cable supports, and shroud assembly.
3.9-77 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR The integrated head package provides the ability to rapidly disconnect cables, including the CRDM power cables, digital rod position indication cables, and in-core instrument cables from the components. The integrated head package also provides the ability to rapidly disconnect the reactor head vent system.
The integrated head package provides the ability to move these components as an assembly to permit their lifting and removal with the reactor vessel head. In addition, the integrated head package provides support for the vessel head stud tensioner/detensioner during refueling.
The lifting rig function is discussed in Subsection 9.1.5. The control rod drive mechanisms are discussed in Subsection 3.9.4. The control rod drive mechanism support and cooling function is discussed in Section 4.6. The reactor vessel head vent function is discussed in Subsection 5.4.12.
The function and requirements of the in-core instrumentation are discussed in Chapter 7.
3.9.7.1 Design Bases Components required to provide seismic restraint for the control rod drive mechanisms and the valves and piping of the reactor head vent are AP1000 equipment Class C, seismic Category I.
These are designed in accordance with the ASME Code,Section III, Subsection NF requirements.
The loads and loading combinations due to seismic loads for these components are developed using the appropriate seismic spectra.
The structural design of the integrated head package is based on a design temperature consistent with the heat loads from the vessel head, the control rod drive mechanisms, and electrical power cables. The design also considers changes in temperature resulting from plant design transients and loss of power to the cooling fans.
Components required to provide cooling to the control rod drive mechanisms are nonnuclear safety-related AP1000 equipment Class E. Section 4.6 offers a discussion of the effect of failure of cooling of the control rod drive mechanisms.
Those components that function as part of the lifting rig are required to be capable of lifting and carrying the total assembled load of the package. This includes the vessel head, control rod drive mechanisms, control rod drive mechanism seismic supports, shroud, cooling ducts, and insulation.
The lifting rig components are required to meet the guidance for special lifting rigs, in NUREG-0612 (Reference 10). The lifting rig components are safety-related, AP1000 equipment Class C, seismic Category II.
The components of the incore instrumentation system (IIS) that interface with the IHP are the QuickLoc stalk assembly and the IIS cables and connectors. Access to each QuickLoc assembly -
including connection/disconnection of the QuickLoc, connection/disconnection of the IIS cables, and attaching/removing the bullet nose assembly - is a maintenance requirement for design of the IHP shroud. The IHP must also provide support of the IIS cables.
The shroud assembly is required to provide radiation shielding of the control rod drive mechanism.
The shroud also minimizes the effects of external events such as jets from through-wall cracks in high- and moderate-energy pipes. The control rod drive mechanisms and small diameter piping, tubing and conduit within the shroud do not represent credible sources of missiles or jets due to breaks or cracks. Therefore, the shroud is not required to act as a missile shield to contain missiles generated within the integrated head package. It is also not required to deflect any jets originating within the integrated head package.
3.9-78 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR The cables and connectors, within the integrated head package, for the in-core instrumentation system are AP1000 equipment Class C, Class 1E. These cables are required to be physically and electrically independent of other cables including control rod drive mechanism power cables.
Section 7.1 describes separation requirements. The cables and connector must be environmentally qualified, as discussed in Section 3.11. The cables are required to terminate at a connector plate located so that the cables can be readily connected or disconnected. The other cables within the integrated head package, including power cables and cables for the digital rod position indicator system, are not Class 1E.
The cable support provides seismic support and maintains separation for instrumentation and power cables.
3.9.7.2 Design Description The integrated head package combines several separate components in one assembly to simplify refueling of the reactor. The purpose of the integrated head package is to reduce the outage time and personnel radiation exposure by combining operations associated with movement of the reactor vessel head during the refueling outage. In addition, the integrated head concept reduces the laydown space required in the containment. With the integrated head package, disconnections from and connections to the control rod drive mechanisms and rod position indicators (RPI) and other components within the cooling shroud assembly are not made at the individual component.
The integrated head package consists of the following main elements:
Shroud assembly Lifting system Mechanism seismic support structure Cable support structure Cables In-core instrumentation Cable bridge Brief descriptions of the principal elements of the integrated head package are provided in the following paragraphs.
Shroud assembly - The shroud assembly is a carbon steel structure that includes a shielding shroud and an air baffle. During normal operation, it directs the flow of cooling air to the control rod drive mechanism coil stacks. The rod position indicators are also cooled by this air flow. The duct work and air baffle are integral with, and supported by, the shroud assembly. The air cooling fans are attached to the IHP. Structurally, the shroud is integrated with the mechanism seismic support structure. The shroud also provides shielding at the vessel flange region.
The shroud structure is bolted to attachment lugs on the reactor vessel head.
Cabling, conduit and their supports and attachment hardware for the nonsafety-related control rod drive mechanism cables; digital rod position indication cables; miscellaneous power, control, and instrumentation cables; and safety-related in-core instrumentation cables are routed around the cable support attached to the shroud. The cable bridge attaches to the shroud.
Lifting system - This apparatus lifts the reactor vessel head and integrated head package as a unit.
The lift legs transfer the head load during a head lift from the head attachment lugs to the lift rig. The lifting system consists of lift legs, sling block, clevises, and sling rods required to interface with the polar crane hook.
3.9-79 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Mechanism seismic support structure - This structure provides seismic restraint for the control rod drive mechanisms. It is located near the top of the control rod drive mechanism rod travel housings.
The digital rod position indication connector plate attached to the rod travel housing interfaces with spacer plates, where required, to form a system of bumpers that interface with the mechanism seismic support structure. This support interfaces with the shroud assembly to transfer seismic loads from the mechanisms to the reactor vessel head.
Cable support structure - The cable support is located at an elevation above the top of the rod travel housings. It provides permanent support and routing for the control rod drive mechanism power cables and rod position indication cables, which remain with the integrated head package and are normally not disturbed. These cables terminate at the connector plates, which constitute the interface with the mating cables. Cable disconnects are made at the connector plates.
Cables - The integrated head package cables include those portions of the control rod drive mechanism power cables, in-core instrumentation, and rod position indication instrumentation cables extending from the connector plates to the user devices. These cables remain with the integrated head package and are normally not disturbed. The individual cable length is sized to provide an orderly arrangement. A cable bridge spanning between the integrated head package to the operating deck is used to support the routing of integrated head package cables. A connector rack mounted to the end of the cable bridge is used to manage, support, and provide a means to quickly connect and disconnect the cables during the refueling outage.
In-core instrumentation - The in-core instrumentation system consists of thermocouples to measure fuel assembly coolant outlet temperature, and in-core flux thimbles containing fixed detectors for measurement of the neutron flux distribution within the reactor core. The incore thimble tubes have enhanced resistance to fluid-induced vibration and wear. The thimble is stiffer than the design in previous operating plants and the gap between the thimble tube and the tubes used to guide and protect the thimble inside the reactor vessel is smaller to minimize vibration. The design of the thimble tube assembly also precludes an non-isolable leak of reactor coolant. The thermocouples and neutron detectors are routed through the integrated head package. These are inserted into the core through the reactor vessel head and upper internals assembly.
Cable bridge - The cables from the integrated head package are routed in circumferential trays mounted to the shroud. Cables routed to those cable trays are routed via a cable bridge that attaches to the shroud. The cable bridge is raised to a vertical position during the outage and sits on the head stand during refueling as part of the integrated head package.
3.9.7.3 Design Evaluation The components of the integrated head package, which provide seismic support including the control rod drive mechanism seismic support and the shroud, are designed using the ASME Code,Section III, Subsection NF. Because of the application of mechanistic pipe break evaluations, the supporting elements do not have to be designed for loads due to a postulated break in a reactor coolant loop pipe. Pipes down to 6-inch nominal diameter are evaluated using mechanistic pipe break criteria and the integrated head package is analyzed for movement of the reactor vessel due to a break of any pipe not qualified for leak-before-break. See Subsection 3.6.3 for a discussion of the mechanistic pipe break requirements.
The integrated head package satisfies the limit on deflection of the top of the control rod drive mechanism rod travel housing. This limit restricts the bending moments on the control rod drive mechanisms to less than those that produce stress levels in the pressure boundary of the control rod drive mechanism greater than ASME Code limits during anticipated transient or postulated accident conditions. This deflection limit provides that the rod travel housing does not bend to the extent that 3.9-80 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR the drive rod binds during insertion of the control rods. This limit is based on the results of drive line drop testing with control rod drives travel housings in deflected positions.
The components of the integrated head package included in the load path of the lifting rig are designed to satisfy the requirements for lifting of heavy loads in NUREG-0612 (Reference 10). The criteria of ANSI N14.6, (Reference 11) is used to evaluate the loads and stresses during a lift. See Subsection 9.1.5 for discussion of special lifting rigs for heavy loads. Components which are part of the lifting load path are evaluated for the load due to the proof test required per ANSI N14.6.
Those cables and connectors for the in-core instrumentation system that are required to meet Class 1E requirements are evaluated for environmental conditions including normal operation and postulated accident conditions.
3.9.7.4 Inspection and Testing Requirements The components in the lifting load path are proof tested to 300 percent of the rated load per the requirements of ANSI N14.6. The components load tested are surface examined by appropriate examination methods before and after the proof test.
3.9.8 Combined License Information 3.9.8.1 Reactor Internals Vibration Assessment and Predicted Response The information consistent with the guidance of Regulatory Guide 1.20 is addressed in WCAP-16687-P (Reference 34), and the applicable changes are incorporated into the UFSAR.
3.9.8.2 Design Specifications and Reports As-designed design specifications and design reports for the major ASME Code,Section III components are available for NRC review. Design Specifications and selected design analysis information for ASME Code,Section III valves and auxiliary components are available for NRC review.
Design specifications and design reports for ASME Section III piping are made available for NRC review. Reconciliation of the as-built piping (verification of the thermal cycling and stratification loading considered in the stress analysis discussed in Subsection 3.9.3.1.2) is completed by the COL holder after the construction of the piping systems and prior to fuel load (in accordance with DCD Tier 1 Section 2 ITAAC line item for the applicable systems).
The consistency of the reactor vessel core support materials relative to known issues of irradiation-assisted stress corrosion cracking or void swelling has been evaluated and addressed in APP-GW-GLR-035 (Reference 21).
The following words represent the original Combined License Information item commitment, which has been addressed as discussed above:
Combined License applicants referencing the AP1000 design will have available for NRC audit the design specifications and design reports prepared for ASME Section III components.
Combined License applicants will address consistency of the reactor vessel core support materials relative to known issues of irradiation-assisted stress corrosion cracking or void swelling (see Subsection 4.5.2.1). [The design report for the ASME Class 1, 2, and 3 piping will include the reconciliation of the as-built piping as outlined in subsection 3.9.3. This reconciliation includes verification of the thermal cycling and stratification loadings considered in the stress analysis discussed in subsection 3.9.3.1.2.]*
- In accordance with the departure evaluation process specified in License Condition 2.D.(13), NRC Staff approval may be required prior to implementing a change in this information.
3.9-81 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR 3.9.8.3 Snubber Operability Testing A program to verify operability of essential snubbers is addressed in Subsection 3.9.3.4.4.
3.9.8.4 Valve Inservice Testing The inservice test program is addressed in Subsection 3.9.6.
3.9.8.5 Surge Line Thermal Monitoring A monitoring program to record temperature distributions and thermal displacements of the surge line piping is addressed in Subsection 3.9.3.1.2 and Subsection 14.2.9.2.22 3.9.8.6 Piping Benchmark Program The benchmark program as described in Subsection 3.9.1.2 (if a piping analysis computer program other than one of those used for design certification is used) is addressed in APP-GW-GLR-006 (Reference 35).
The piping benchmark problems identified in (Reference 20) for the Westinghouse AP600 are also representative for the AP1000 and can be used for the AP1000 piping benchmark program if required.
3.9.8.7 As-Designed Piping Analysis The piping packages chosen to demonstrate the AP1000 piping design are identified to be any piping package containing Class 1 piping larger than 1 inch in diameter plus the additional packages identified in Table 3.9-20.
Note: Piping packages included in Table 3.9-20 are generally Class 2/3 lines, with the exception of APP-RCS-PLR-230, which contains the 1-inch Class 1 reactor head vent piping.
The as-designed piping analysis is provided for the piping lines chosen to demonstrate all aspects of the piping design. A design report referencing the as-designed piping calculation packages, including ASME Section III piping analysis, support evaluations and piping component fatigue analysis for Class 1 piping using the methods and criteria outlined in Table 3.9-19 is made available for NRC review.
This topic is also addressed in Subsection 14.3.3.
3.9.9 References
- 1. ANS/ANSI 51.1 - 1983, Nuclear Safety Criteria for the Design of Stationary Pressurized Water Reactor Plants.
- 2. ANSI/ASME OM Code 2012 Edition, Code for Operation and Maintenance of Nuclear Power Plants.
- 3. Kuenzel, A. J., Westinghouse PWR Internals Vibrations Summary Three-Loop Internals Assurance, WCAP-7765-AR, November 1973.
- 4. Bloyd, C. N., Ciaramitaro, W., and Singleton, N. R., Verification of Neutron Pad and 17 x 17 Guide Tube Designs by Preoperational Tests on the Trojan 1 Power Plant, WCAP-8766 (Proprietary) and WCAP-8780, (Nonproprietary), May 1976.
3.9-82 Revision 9
- 5. Bloyd, C. N., and Singleton, N. R., UHI Plant Internals Vibrations Measurement Program and Pre- and Post-Hot Functional Examinations, WCAP-8516-P (Proprietary) and WCAP-8517 (Nonproprietary), March 1975.
- 6. Abou-Jaude, K. F. and Nitkiewicz, J. S., Doel 4 Reactor Internals Flow-Induced Vibration Measurement Program, WCAP-10846 (Proprietary), March 1985.
- 7. Bhandari, D. R. and Yu, C., South Texas Plant (TGX) Reactor Internals Flow-Induced Vibration Assessment, WCAP-10865 (Proprietary) and WCAP-10866 (Nonproprietary),
February 1985.
- 8. Takeuchi, K., et al., Multiflex-A Fortran-IV Computer Program for Analyzing Thermal-Hydraulic-Structure System Dynamics, WCAP-8708-P-A, Volumes 1 and 2 (Proprietary) and WCAP-8709-A Volumes 1 and 2. (Nonproprietary), February 1976.
- 9. Cooper, F. W., Jr., 17 x 17 Drive Line Components Tests - Phase 1B 11, 111 D-Loop Drop and Deflection, WCAP-8446 (Proprietary) and WCAP-8449 (Nonproprietary),
December 1974.
- 10. NUREG-0612, Control of Heavy Loads at Nuclear Power Plants, Nuclear Regulatory Commission, July 1980.
- 11. Special Lifting Devices for Shipping Containers Weighing 10,000 Pounds (4500 kg) or More, ANSI N14.6.
- 12. NRC BULLETIN NO. 88-08: Thermal Stresses in Piping Connected to Reactor Coolant Systems, June 22, 1988, including Supplements 1, 2, and 3, dated: June 24, 1988; August 4, 1988; and April 11, 1989.
- 13. A Comprehensive Vibration Assessment Program for Yonggwang Nuclear Generating Station, Final Evaluation of Pre-Core Hot Functional Measurement and Inspection Programs, CE Report 10487-ME-TE-240-03, August 22, 1995.
- 14. NRC BULLETIN NO. 88-11: Pressurizer Surge Line Thermal Stratification, December 20, 1988.
- 15. Not used.
- 16. NRC IE Bulletin 79-13, Cracking in Feedwater System Piping, June 25, 1979 and Revisions 1 and 2, dated August 30, 1979 and November 16, 1979.
- 17. Investigation of Feedwater Line Cracking in Pressurized Water Reactor Plants, (Proprietary) WCAP-9693, June 1980.
- 18. {HISTORICAL AP1000 Reactor Internals Flow-Induced Vibration Assessment Program, WCAP-15949-P (Proprietary) and WCAP-15949-NP (Nonproprietary),
Revision 2, June 2007. HISTORICAL}
- 19. Functional Capability of Piping Systems, NUREG-1367, Nuclear Regulatory Commission, November 1992.
- 20. Piping Benchmark Problems for the Westinghouse AP600 Standardized Plant, NUREG/
CR-6414 (BNL-NUREG-52487), Brookhaven National Laboratory, January 1997, Prepared for the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission.
3.9-83 Revision 9
- 21. APP-GW-GLR-035, Consistency of Reactor Vessel Core Support Materials Relative to Known Issues of Irradiation-Assisted Stress Corrosion Cracking (IASCC) and Void Swelling for the AP1000 Plant, Westinghouse Electric Company LLC.
- 22. Not used.
- 23. Not used.
- 24. Not used.
- 25. Not used.
- 26. Not used.
- 27. Not used.
- 28. Not used.
- 29. Not used.
- 30. Not used.
- 31. Not used.
- 32. Not used.
- 33. APP-GW-GLR-021, AP1000 As-Built COL Information Items, Westinghouse Electric Company LLC.
- 34. {HISTORICAL WCAP-16687-P (Proprietary), WCAP-16687-NP (Non-proprietary),
AP1000 Reactor Internals Expected and Acceptable Responses During Preoperational Vibration Measurement Program, Revision 1, March 2007. HISTORICAL}
- 35. APP-GW-GLR-006, Benchmark Program for Piping Analysis Computer Programs, Westinghouse Electric Company LLC.
- 36. ASME-QME-1-2007, Qualification of Active Mechanical Equipment Used in Nuclear Power Plants.
- 37. MPR-2524, Joint Owners Group (JOG) Motor Operated Valve Periodic Verification Program Summary, Revision A, November 2006.
- 38. Final Safety Evaluation by the Office of Nuclear Reactor Regulation Joint Owners Group Program on Periodic Verification of Design-Basis Capability of Safety-Related Motor-Operated Valves Project Nos. 691, 693, and 694, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, September 2006 (ADAMS Accession Number ML061280315) and its Supplement, September 2008 (ADAMS Accession Number ML082480638).
- 39. ASME OM-S/G-2000, Standards and Guides for Operation and Maintenance of Nuclear Power Plants.
- 40. WCAP-17983-P (Proprietary), WCAP-17983-NP (Non-proprietary), Comprehensive Vibration Assessment Program (CVAP) Measurement and Inspection Programs for the AP1000 Plant, Revision 0, March 2015.
3.9-84 Revision 9
- 41. WCAP-17984-P (Proprietary), WCAP-17984-NP (Non-proprietary), Comprehensive Vibration Assessment Program (CVAP) Vibration Analysis Program for the AP1000 Plant, Revision 0, July 2015.
201. Not used.
202. Not used.
203. Joint Owners Group Air Operated Valve Program Document, Revision 1, December 13, 2000.
204. USNRC, Eugene V. Imbro, letter to Mr. David J. Modeen, Nuclear Energy Institute, Comments on Joint Owners Group Air Operated Valve Program Document, dated October 8, 1999.
3.9-85 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.9-1 (Sheet 1 of 2)
Reactor Coolant System Design Transients Event Cycles Level A Service Conditions Reactor coolant pump startup and shutdown (cycles of start and stop) 3000 Heatup at 100°F per hour 200 Cooldown at 100°F per hour 200 Unit loading between 0 and 15 percent of full power 500 Unit unloading between 0 and 15 percent of full power 500 Unit loading at 5 percent of full power per minute 2000 Unit unloading at 5 percent of full power per minute 2000 Step load increase of 10 percent of full power 3000 Step load decrease of 10 percent of full power 3000 Large step load decrease with steam dump 200 Steady-state fluctuation and load regulation Initial 1.5 x 105 Random 4.6 x 106 Load regulation 37,000(3)
Boron concentration equalization 2900 Feedwater cycling at hot shutdown Mode 1 3000 Mode 2 15,000 Core lifetime extension 40 Feedwater heaters out of service 180 Refueling 40 Turbine roll test 20 Primary-side leakage test 200 Secondary-side leakage test 80 Passive residual heat removal tests 5 Reactor coolant system makeup 5640 Daily load follow operation 17,800 Level B Service Conditions Loss of load (without reactor trip) 30 Loss of offsite power 30 Reactor trip from reduced power 180 Reactor trip from full power Case A - With no inadvertent cooldown 50 Case B - With cooldown and no safeguards actuation 50 Case C - With cooldown and safeguards actuation 20(1) 3.9-86 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.9-1 (Sheet 2 of 2)
Reactor Coolant System Design Transients Event Cycles Level B Service Conditions Control rod drop Case A 30 Case B 20(2)
Case C 30(2)
Cold overpressure 15 Inadvertent safeguards actuation 10 Partial loss of reactor coolant flow 60 Inadvertent RCS depressurization 20 Excessive feedwater flow 30 Loss of offsite power - with natural circulation cooldown Case A - loss of power with natural circulation cooldown with onsite ac power 20 Case B - loss of power with natural circulation cooldown without onsite ac power 10 Level C Service Conditions Small loss of coolant accident 5 Small steam line break 5 Small feedwater line break 5 Steam generator tube rupture 5 Inadvertent opening of automatic depressurization system valves 15 Level D Service Conditions Reactor coolant pipe break (large loss-of-coolant accident) 1 Large steam line break 1 Large feedwater line break 1 Reactor coolant pump locked rotor 1 Control rod ejection 1 Test Conditions Primary side hydrotest 10 Secondary side hydrotest 10 Steam generator tube leakage test Secondary-side pressure, psig 200 400 400 200 600 120 840 80 Notes:
- 1. Reactor Trip - Case C shares its number of occurrences (20) with Control Rod Drop Case B
- 2. Control Rod Drop - Case B shares its number of occurrences (20) with Reactor Trip Case C
- 3. The Load Regulation transient occurrences are limited to 37,000 to maintain main spray flow cycles within PRHA fatigue design limits of the pressurizer spray piping. Other RCS components continue to be designed for 750,000 Load Regulation transient occurrences.
3.9-87 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.9-2 Pump Starting/Stopping Conditions RCS SG Secondary Number of Plant Condition (°F)/(psig) (°F)/(psig) Starts/Stops Operation Cold 70/400 70/0 200 Cold Startup Transients Cold 70/400 70/0 200 RCS heatup, cooldown Restart 100/400 100/0 400 Hot functional RCP stops, starts Hot 557/2235 557/1091 2200 Transients and miscellaneous 3.9-88 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.9-3 (Sheet 1 of 2)
Loadings for ASME Class 1, 2, 3, CS and Supports Load Description P Internal design pressure PMAX Peak pressure DW Dead weight DML Design Mechanical Loads (other than DW). This includes Service Level A loads and RVOS loads that are Service Level B.
XL External mechanical loads, such as the nozzle reactions associated with piping systems, shall be combined with other loads in the loading combination expressions.
SSE Safe shutdown earthquake (inertia portion)
E Earthquake smaller than SSE (inertia portion)
FV Fast valve closure RVC Relief/safety valve - closed system (transient)
RVOS Relief/safety valve - open system (sustained)
RVOT Relief/safety valve - open system (transient)
DY Dynamic load associated with various service conditions including FV, RVC, and RVOT as applicable (transient)
DN Dynamic load associated with Level A (Normal) service conditions including FV, RVC, and RVOT as applicable (transient)
DU Dynamic load associated with Level B (Upset) service conditions including FV, RVC, and RVOT as applicable (transient)
DE Dynamic load associated with Level C (Emergency) service conditions including FV, RVC, and RVOT as applicable (transient)
DF Dynamic load associated with Level D (Faulted) service conditions during which, or following which, the piping system being evaluated must remain intact including FV, RVC, and RVOT as applicable. This includes postulated pipe rupture events (transient)
DYS Dynamic load associated with various service conditions (sustained)
SSES Seismic anchor motion portion of SSE ES Seismic anchor motion of earthquake smaller than SSE TH Thermal loads for the various service conditions 3.9-89 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.9-3 (Sheet 2 of 2)
Loadings for ASME Class 1, 2, 3, CS and Supports Load Description TNU Service Level A and B (normal and upset) plant condition thermal loads; including thermal stratification and thermal cycling TN Service Level A (normal) plant condition thermal loads TU Service Level B (upset) plant condition thermal loads TE Service Level C (emergency) plant condition thermal loads TF Service Level D (faulted) plant condition thermal loads SCVNU Static displacement of steel containment vessel - normal and upset conditions SCVE Static displacement of steel containment vessel - emergency condition SCVF Static displacement of steel containment vessel - faulted condition HTDW Hydrostatic test dead weight DBPB Design basis pipe break, includes LOCA and non-LOCA (transient)
LOCA Loss-of-coolant accident HYDSP Building structure motions due to automatic depressurization system sparger discharge DBPBS Design basis pipe break, includes LOCA and non-LOCA (sustained) 3.9-90 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.9-4 Not Used 3.9-91 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.9-5 Minimum Design Loading Combinations For ASME Class 1, 2, 3 And CS Systems And Components Condition Design Loading Combinations(3)(6)
[Design P + DW + DML + XL Level A Service PMAX(1) + DW + XL(4)
PMAX + DW + DN + XL(8)
Level B Service PMAX + DW + DU + XL(8)
Level C Service PMAX + DW + DE(5) + XL(8)
PMAX + DW + DY + HYDSP + XL(9)
Level D Service PMAX + DW + DF + XL(8)
PMAX + DW + SRSS(2) ((SSE + SSES) + DBPB)(7) + XL(4)
PMAX + DW + RVOS + SRSS (SSE + SSES)(7) + XL(11)
PMAX + DW + DYS + DBPBS + SRSS ((SSE + SSES)(7) + DY + HYDSP) + XL(9)(10)]*
Notes:
- 1. The values of PMAX in the load combinations may be different for different levels of service conditions as provided in the design transients. For earthquake loadings PMAX is equal to normal operating pressure at 100% power.
- 2. SRSS equals the square root of the sum of the squares.
- 3. Appropriate loads due to static displacements of the steel containment vessel and building settlement should be added to the loading combinations expressions for ASME Code,Section III, Class 2 and 3 systems.
- 4. In combining loads, the timing and causal relationships that exist between PMAX, and XL, are considered for determination of the appropriate load combinations.
- 5. The pressurizer safety valve discharge is a Level C service condition.
- 6. See Table 3.9-3 for description of loads.
- 7. For components that behave as anchors to the piping system, such as equipment nozzles, SSE and SSES are combined by absolute sum. For other components, such as straight pipe, tees, and valves, SSE and SSES are combined by SRSS method.
- 8. In combining loads, the timing and causal relationships that exist between PMAX, DN, DU, DE, DF, and XL, are considered for determination of the appropriate load combinations.
- 9. In combining loads, the timing and causal relationships that exist between PMAX, DY, HYDSP, and XL, are considered for determination of the appropriate load combinations.
- 10. In combining loads, the timing and causal relationships that exist between PMAX, DY, and XL, are considered for determination of the appropriate load combinations.
- 11. In combining loads, the timing and causal relationships that exist between PMAX, RVOS, and XL, are considered for determination of the appropriate load combinations.
- In accordance with the departure evaluation process specified in License Condition 2.D.(13), NRC Staff approval may be required prior to implementing a change in this information.
3.9-92 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.9-6 Additional Load Combinations and Stress Limits for ASME Class 1 Piping(9)
Equation Condition Loads(7) (NB3650) Stress Limit (1), TNU, E, ES, RVC, DN, DU, 10 3.0 Sm
[Level A/B PMAX SCVNU(2)(4)(5) 11, 14 CUF = 1.0 RVOS(2)
TNU 12 3.0 Sm PMAX + DW + DU 13 3.0 Sm PMAX + DW + RVOS(2) 13 3.0 Sm Level C TE + SCVE Note 3 Note 3 Level D(8) SSES FAM/AM(6) 1.0 Sm TF + SCVF Note 3 Note 3 TNU + SSES C2Do (M1 + M2)/2I(8) 6.0 Sm]*
Notes:
- 1. The values of PMAX in the load combinations may be different for different levels of service conditions. For earthquake loading, PMAX is equal to normal operating pressure at 100% power.
- 2. Pressurizer safety valve discharge is classified as a Level C event.
- 3. See Table 3.9-11 for functional capability requirements.
- 4. The earthquake loads are assumed to occur at normal 100 percent power operation for the purposes of determining the total moment ranges.
- 7. See Table 3.9-3 for description of loads.
- 8. Where: M1 is range of moments for TNU, M2 is one half the range of SSES moments, M1 + M2 is larger of M1 plus one half the range of SSES, or full range of SSES C2, Do, I based on ASME III
- 9. When the simplified requirements of ASME Section III, NB-3640 and NB-3650 are not satisfied, the more detailed methods of NB-3200 may be used as stated in NB-3630.
- In accordance with the departure evaluation process specified in License Condition 2.D.(13), NRC Staff approval may be required prior to implementing a change in this information.
3.9-93 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.9-7 Additional Load Combinations and Stress Limits for ASME Class 2, 3 Piping Equation Condition Loads(3) (NC/ND3650) Stress Limit (1) + DW + TNU + SCVNU(4) 11 Sh + SA
[Level A/B PMAX Building Settlement 10a 3.0 SC Level C TE + SCVE(4) Note 6 Note 6 Level D TNU + SSES i (M1 + M2)/Z(2) 3.0 Sh (5)
SSES FAM/AM 1.0 Sh TF + SCVF(4) Note 6 Note 6]*
Notes:
- 1. The values of PMAX in the load combinations may be different for different levels of service conditions. For earthquake loading PMAX is equal to normal operating pressure at 100% power.
- 2. Where: M1 is range of moments for TNU, M2 is one half the range of SSES moments, M1 + M2 is larger of M1 plus one half the range of SSES, or full range of SSES
- 3. See Table 3.9-3 for description of loads.
- 4. The timing and causal relationships among TNU, TE, TF, SCVNU, SCVE, and SCVF are considered to determine appropriate load combinations.
- 6. See Table 3.9-11 for functional capability requirements.
- In accordance with the departure evaluation process specified in License Condition 2.D.(13), NRC Staff approval may be required prior to implementing a change in this information.
3.9-94 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.9-8 Minimum Design Loading Combinations for Supports for ASME Class 1, 2, 3 Piping and Components(2)
Condition Design Loading Combinations(3)
[Design DW + DML Level A Service DW + TH + DN(4)
Level B Service DW + TH + DU(4)
Level C Service DW + TH + DE(5)(4)
DW + TH + DY + HYDSP(7)
Level D Service DW + TH + RVOS + SSE + SSES + SWE(6)(8)
DW + TH + SRSS (DBPB + (SSE + SSES + SWE))(6)
DW + TH + DYS + DBPBS + SRSS ((SSE + SSES + SWE)(6) + DY + HYDSP)(7)(9)
Hydrostatic Test HTDW]*
Notes:
- 1. SRSS - square root of the sum of the squares
- 2. Appropriate loads due to static displacement of the steel containment vessel and building settlement should be added to the loading combinations expressions for Class 2 and 3 systems.
- 3. See Table 3.9-3 for description of loads.
- 4. The timing and causal relationships between TH and DY are considered to determine appropriate load combinations.
- 5. The pressurizer safety valve discharge is a Level C Service condition.
- 6. Combine SSE, SSES, and SWE by absolute sum method. SWE is self weight excitation, the effect of the acceleration of the support mass caused by building filtered loads such as SSE.
- 7. In combining loads, the timing and causal relationships that exist among TH, DY, and HYDSP are considered for determination of the appropriate load combinations.
- 8. In combining loads, the timing and causal relationships that exist among TH and RVOS are considered for determination of the appropriate load combinations.
- 9. In combining loads, the timing and causal relationships that exist among TH and DY are considered for determination of the appropriate load combinations.
- In accordance with the departure evaluation process specified in License Condition 2.D.(13), NRC Staff approval may be required prior to implementing a change in this information.
3.9-95 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.9-9 Stress Criteria for ASME Code Section III Class 1 Components(a) and Supports and Class CS Core Supports Design/Service Components Level Vessels/Tanks Pumps Piping (h, i) Core Supports Valves, Disks & Seats Supports (c,d)
Design and ASME Code,Section III [ASME Code,Section III ASME Code,Section III ASME Code,Section III [ASME Code,Section III Service Level A NB-3221, 3222 NB-3652, Equation 9]* NG-3221, 3222, 3231, NB-3520, 3525 Subsection NF (e)]*
3232 Service Level B ASME Code,Section III [ASME Code,Section III ASME Code,Section III ASME Code,Section III [ASME Code,Section III (Upset) NB-3223 NB-3654, Equation 9]* NG-3223, 3233 NB-3525 Subsection NF (e)]*
Service Level C ASME Code,Section III [ASME Code,Section III ASME Code,Section III ASME Code,Section III [ASME Code,Section III (Emergency) NB-3224 NB-3655, Equation 9]* NG-3224, 3234 NB-3526 Subsection NF (e)]*
Service Level D ASME Code,Section III (see [ASME Code,Section III ASME Code,Section III (b) (g) [ASME Code,Section III (Faulted) Chapter 3.9.1.4) NB-3225 (no NB-3656, Equation 9]* (see chapter 3.9.1) Subsection NF, (e) (see active Class 1 pumps used) NG-3225, 3235 Chapter 3.9.1) (f)]*
Notes:
- a. A test of the components may be performed in lieu of analysis.
- b. Class 1 valve service Level D criteria for inactive valves is based on the criteria in ASME III, Appendix F, F-1420 for verification of pressure boundary integrity.
- c. Including pipe supports.
- d. In instances where the determination of allowable stress values utilizes Su (ultimate tensile stress) at temperatures not included in ASME Code Section III, Su shall be calculated using one of the methods provided in Regulatory Guide 1.124, Revision 1.
- e. ASME Table 3131(a)-1.
- f. See Subsection 3.9.3.4 for supports for active equipment, valves, and piping with active valves.
- g. For active valves, pressure integrity verification will be based on using the ASME Code allowables one level less than the service loading condition. For example, for the evaluation of Level D loading, Level C allowables will be used. Valve operability is demonstrated by testing or analysis. Check valve operability may be shown by analysis. See Subsection 3.9.3.2.2 for an outline of test requirements.
- h. Table 3.9-6 includes additional stress limits for Class 1 piping.
- i. When the simplified requirements of ASME Section III, NB-3640 and NB-3650 are not satisfied, the more detailed methods of NB-3200 may be used as stated in NB-3630.
- In accordance with the departure evaluation process specified in License Condition 2.D.(13), NRC Staff approval may be required prior to implementing a change in this information.
3.9-96 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.9-10 Stress Criteria for ASME Code Section III Class 2 and 3 Components and Supports Component Supports Design/ Service Level Vessels/Tanks Piping (f) Pumps Valves, Disks, Seats (a) (b)
Design and ASME Code Section III [ASME Code,Section III ASME Code Section III ASME Code Section III [ASME Code Service Level A NC-3217 NC/ NC/ND-3652, Equation NC/ND-3400 NC/ND-3510 Section III (c)]*
ND-3310, 3320 8]*
Service Level B ASME Code Section III [ASME Code,Section III ASME Code Section III ASME Code Section III [ASME Code (Upset) NC/ND-3310, 3320 NC/ND-3653, Equation NC/ND-3400 NC/ND-3520 Section III (c)]*
9]*
Service Level C ASME Code Section III [ASME Code,Section III ASME Code Section III ASME Code Section III [ASME Code (Emergency) NC/ND-3310, 3320 NC/ND-3654, Equation NC/ND-3400 NC/ND-3520 Section III (c)]*
9]*
Service Level D ASME Code Section III [ASME Code,Section III ASME Code Section III ASME Code Section III [ASME Code (Faulted) NC/ND-3310, 3320 NC/ND-3655, Equation NC/ND-3400 NC/ND-3520 (e) Section III (c) (d)]*
9]*
See following page for notes.
- In accordance with the departure evaluation process specified in License Condition 2.D.(13), NRC Staff approval may be required prior to implementing a change in this information.
3.9-97 Revision 9
- a. Including pipe supports.
- b. In instances where the determination of allowable stress values utilizes Su (ultimate tensile stress) at temperatures not included in ASME Code Section III, Su shall be calculated using one of the methods provided in Regulatory Guide 1.124, Revision 1.
- c. ASME Table 3131(a)-1.
- d. See Subsection 3.9.3.4 for supports for active equipment, valves, and piping with active valves.
- e. For active valves, pressure integrity verification will be based on using the ASME Code allowables one level less than the service loading condition. For example, for the evaluation of Level D loading, Level C allowables will be used. Valve operability is demonstrated by testing or analysis. Check valve operability may be shown by analysis. See Subsection 3.9.3.2.2 for an outline of test requirements.
- f. Table 3.9-7 includes additional stress limits for Class 2 and 3 piping.
3.9-98 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.9-11 Piping Functional Capability - ASME Class 1, 2, and 3(1)
[Wall Thickness: Do/t 50, where Do, t are per ASME III Service Level D Conditions Equation 9 smaller of 2.0 Sy and 3.0 Sm(2, 4, 5)
Equation 9 smaller of 2.0 Sy and 3.0 Sh(3, 4, 6)
External Pressure: Pexternal Pinternal TE + SCVE C2*M*Do/2I 6.0 Sm(2) (NB-3650)
Equation 10a (NC3653.2) 3.0 Sc(3)
TF + SCVF C2*M*Do/2I 6.0 Sm(2) (NB-3650)
Equation 10a (NC 3653.2) 3.0 Sc(3]*
Notes:
- 1. Applicable to Level C or Level D plant events for which the piping system must maintain an adequate fluid flow path
- 2. Applicable to ASME Code Class 1 piping. When the simplified requirements of ASME Section III, NB-3640 and NB-3650 are not satisfied, the more detailed methods of NB-3200 may be used to calculate stress. The allowables listed above shall be met.
- 3. Applicable to ASME Code Class 2 and 3 piping
- 4. Applicable to ASME Code Class 1, 2 and 3 piping when the following limitations are met:
4.1 Dynamic loads are reversing (slug-flow water hammer loads are non-reversing) 4.2 Slug-flow water-hammer loads are combined with other design basis loads (for example: SSE; pipe break loads) 4.3 Steady-state bending stress from deadweight loads does not exceed:
B2*M 0.25 SY Z
4.4 When elastic response spectrum analysis is used, dynamic moments are calculated using 15% peak broadening and not more than 5% damping
- 5. For Class 1 piping, when slug-flow water hammer loads are only combined with pressure, weight and other sustained mechanical loads, the Equation 9 stress does not exceed the smaller of 1.8 Sy and 2.25 Sm.
- 6. For Class 2 and 3 piping, when slug-flow water hammer loads are only combined with pressure, weight and other sustained mechanical loads, the Equation 9 stress does not exceed the smaller of 1.8 Sy and 2.25 Sh.
- In accordance with the departure evaluation process specified in License Condition 2.D.(13), NRC Staff approval may be required prior to implementing a change in this information.
3.9-99 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.9-12 (Sheet 1 of 7)
List of ASME Class 1, 2, and 3 Active Valves Valve No. Description Function(a)
Compressed and Instrument Air System CAS-PL-V014 Instrument Air Supply Outside Containment Isolation 2 CAS-PL-V015 Instrument Air Supply Inside Containment Isolation Check Valve 2 CAS-PL-V205 Service Air Supply Inside Containment Isolation Check Valve 2 Component Cooling Water System CCS-PL-V200 Containment Isolation Valve - Inlet Line Isolation 2, 3 CCS-PL-V201 Containment Isolation Valve - Inlet Line Check Valve 2, 3 CCS-PL-V207 Containment Isolation Valve - Outlet Line Isolation 2, 3 CCS-PL-V208 Containment Isolation Valve - Outlet Line Isolation 2, 3 CCS-PL-V220 Containment Isolation Thermal Relief Valve 2 CCS-PL-V270 CCS IRC Relief Valve 3 CCS-PL-V271 CCS IRC Relief Valve 3 Chemical and Volume Control System CVS-PL-V001 Reactor Coolant System Purification Stop 1 CVS-PL-V002 Reactor Coolant System Purification Stop 1 CVS-PL-V003 Reactor Coolant System Purification Stop 1 CVS-PL-V042 Flush Line Containment Isolation Relief 2 CVS-PL-V045 Letdown Containment Isolation IRC 2 CVS-PL-V047 Letdown Containment Isolation ORC 2 CVS-PL-V058 Letdown Line Containment Isolation Thermal Relief 2 CVS-PL-V067 Makeup Return Line Bypass Check Valve 1 CVS-PL-V080 Reactor Coolant System Purification Return Line Check Valve 1 CVS-PL-V081 Reactor Coolant System Purification Return Line Stop Valve 1 CVS-PL-V082 Reactor Coolant System Purification Return Line Check Valve 1 CVS-PL-V084 Auxiliary Pressurizer Spray Line Isolation 1 CVS-PL-V085 Auxiliary Pressurizer Spray Line Check Valve 1 CVS-PL-V090 Makeup Line Containment Isolation 2 CVS-PL-V091 Makeup Line Containment Isolation 2 CVS-PL-V092 Zinc Injection Containment Isolation Valve ORC 2 CVS-PL-V094 Zinc Injection Containment Isolation Valve IRC 2 CVS-PL-V098 Zinc Addition Line Containment Isolation Thermal Relief Valve 2 CVS-PL-V100 Makeup Line Containment Isolation Thermal Relief Check Valve 2 CVS-PL-V136A Demineralized Water System Isolation 3 CVS-PL-V136B Demineralized Water System Isolation 3 CVS-PL-V217 Hydrogen Injection Containment Isolation Check Valve IRC 2 CVS-PL-V219 Hydrogen Injection Containment Isolation Valve ORC 2 Demineralized Water System DWS-PL-V241 DWS Containment Penetration Thermal Relief Valve 3 DWS-PL-V245 Demineralized Water Supply Inside Containment Isolation Check Valve 2 Fuel Handing System FHS-PL-V001 Fuel Transfer Tube Isolation Valve 3 3.9-100 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.9-12 (Sheet 2 of 7)
List of ASME Class 1, 2, and 3 Active Valves Valve No. Description Function(a)
Fire Protection System FPS-PL-V052 Fire Water Supply Inside Containment Isolation Check Valve 2 FPS-PL-V702 FPS Containment Penetration Thermal Relief Valve 3 Passive Containment Cooling System PCS-PL-V001A Passive Containment Cooling Water Storage Tank Isolation 3,4 PCS-PL-V001B Passive Containment Cooling Water Storage Tank Isolation 3,4 PCS-PL-V001C Passive Containment Cooling Water Storage Tank Isolation 3,4 PCS-PL-V002A Passive Containment Cooling Water Storage Tank Series Isolation 3,4 PCS-PL-V002B Passive Containment Cooling Water Storage Tank Series Isolation 3,4 PCS-PL-V002C Passive Containment Cooling Water Storage Tank Series Isolation 3,4 PCS-PL-V005 Passive Containment Cooling Water Storage Tank Supply to Fire Protection 3,4 System Isolation Valve PCS-PL-V009 Spent Fuel Pool Emergency Makeup Isolation 3 PCS-PL-V015 Water Bucket Makeup Line Drain Valve 3,4 PCS-PL-V020 Water Bucket Makeup Line Isolation Valve 3,4 PCS-PL-V023 PCS Recirculation Return Isolation Valve 3,4 PCS-PL-V039 PCCWST Long-Term Makeup Check Valve 3,4 PCS-PL-V042 PCCWST Long Term Makeup Isolation Drain Valve 3,4 PCS-PL-V044 PCCWST Long Term Makeup Isolation Valve 3,4 PCS-PL-V045 Emergency Makeup to the Spent Fuel Pool Isolation Valve 3 PCS-PL-V046 PCCWST Recirculation Return Isolation Valve 3,4 PCS-PL-V049 Emergency Makeup to the Spent Fuel Pool Drain Isolation Valve 3 PCS-PL-V050 Spent Fuel Pool Long Term Makeup Isolation Valve 3 PCS-PL-V051 Spent Fuel Pool Emergency Makeup Lower Isolation Valve 3 Primary Sampling System PSS-PL-V008 Containment Isolation - Containment Air Sample Isolation 2 PSS-PL-V010A Containment Isolation - Liquid Sample Line 2 PSS-PL-V010B Containment Isolation - Liquid Sample Line 2 PSS-PL-V011A Containment Isolation - Liquid Sample Line 2 PSS-PL-V011B Containment Isolation - Liquid Sample Line 2 PSS-PL-V023 Containment Isolation - Sample Return Line 2 PSS-PL-V024 Containment Isolation - Sample Return Line 2 PSS-PL-V046 Containment Isolation - Air Sample Line 2 Potable Water System PWS-PL-V418 PWS MCR Isolation Valve 3 PWS-PL-V420 PWS MCR Isolation Valve 3 PWS-PL-V498 PWS MCR Vacuum Relief 3 Passive Core Cooling System PXS-PL-V014A Core Makeup Tank A Discharge Isolation 3,4 PXS-PL-V014B Core Makeup Tank B Discharge Isolation 3,4 3.9-101 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.9-12 (Sheet 3 of 7)
List of ASME Class 1, 2, and 3 Active Valves Valve No. Description Function(a)
Passive Core Cooling System (Cont.)
PXS-PL-V015A Core Makeup Tank A Discharge Isolation 3,4 PXS-PL-V015B Core Makeup Tank B Discharge Isolation 3,4 PXS-PL-V016A Core Makeup Tank A Discharge Check 3,4 PXS-PL-V016B Core Makeup Tank Discharge Check 3,4 PXS-PL-V017A Core Makeup Tank A Discharge Check 3,4 PXS-PL-V017B Core Makeup Tank B Discharge Check 3,4 PXS-PL-V022A Accumulator A Pressure Relief 3 PXS-PL-V022B Accumulator B Pressure Relief 3 PXS-PL-V028A Accumulator A Discharge Check 1,3,4 PXS-PL-V028B Accumulator B Discharge Check 1,3,4 PXS-PL-V029A Accumulator A Discharge Check 1,3,4 PXS-PL-V029B Accumulator B Discharge Check 1,3,4 PXS-PL-V042 Nitrogen Supply Containment Isolation ORC Isolation Valve 2 PXS-PL-V043 Nitrogen Supply Containment Isolation IRC Check Valve 2 PXS-PL-V108A Passive Residual Heat Removal Heat Exchanger Control 3,4 PXS-PL-V108B Passive Residual Heat Removal Heat Exchanger Control 3,4 PXS-PL-V118A Recirculation Sump A Isolation 3,4 PXS-PL-V118B Recirculation Sump B Isolation 3,4 PXS-PL-V119A Recirculation Sump A Check 3,4 PXS-PL-V119B Recirculation Sump B Check 3,4 PXS-PL-V120A Recirculation Sump A Isolation 3,4 PXS-PL-V120B Recirculation Sump B Isolation 3,4 PXS-PL-V122A In-Containment Refueling Water Storage Tank Injection A Check 1,3,4 PXS-PL-V122B In-Containment Refueling Water Storage Tank Injection B Check 1,3,4 PXS-PL-V123A In-Containment Refueling Water Storage Tank Injection A Isolation 1,3,4 PXS-PL-V123B In-Containment Refueling Water Storage Tank Injection B Isolation 1,3,4 PXS-PL-V124A In-Containment Refueling Water Storage Tank Injection A Check 1,3,4 PXS-PL-V124B In-Containment Refueling Water Storage Tank Injection B Check 1,3,4 PXS-PL-V125A In-Containment Refueling Water Storage Tank Injection A Isolation 1,3,4 PXS-PL-V125B In-Containment Refueling Water Storage Tank Injection B Isolation 1,3,4 PXS-PL-V130A In-Containment Refueling Water Storage Tank Gutter Isolation 3,4 PXS-PL-V130B In-Containment Refueling Water Storage Tank Gutter Isolation 3,4 Reactor Coolant System RCS-PL-V001A First Stage Automatic Depressurization System 1,3,4 RCS-PL-V001B First Stage Automatic Depressurization System 1,3,4 RCS-PL-V002A Second Stage Automatic Depressurization System 1,3,4 RCS-PL-V002B Second Stage Automatic Depressurization System 1,3,4 3.9-102 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.9-12 (Sheet 4 of 7)
List of ASME Class 1, 2, and 3 Active Valves Valve No. Description Function(a)
Reactor Coolant System (Cont.)
RCS-PL-V003A Third Stage Automatic Depressurization System 1,3,4 RCS-PL-V003B Third Stage Automatic Depressurization System 1,3,4 RCS-PL-V004A Fourth Stage Automatic Depressurization System 1,3,4 RCS-PL-V004B Fourth Stage Automatic Depressurization System 1,3,4 RCS-PL-V004C Fourth Stage Automatic Depressurization System 1,3,4 RCS-PL-V004D Fourth Stage Automatic Depressurization System 1,3,4 RCS-PL-V005A Pressurizer Safety Valve 1,3 RCS-PL-V005B Pressurizer Safety Valve 1,3 RCS-PL-V010A Automatic Depressurization System Discharge Header A Vacuum Relief 3 RCS-PL-V010B Automatic Depressurization System Discharge Header B Vacuum Relief 3 RCS-PL-V011A First Stage Automatic Depressurization System Isolation 1,3,4 RCS-PL-V011B First Stage Automatic Depressurization System Isolation 1,3,4 RCS-PL-V012A Second Stage Automatic Depressurization System Isolation 1,3,4 RCS-PL-V012B Second Stage Automatic Depressurization System Isolation 1,3,4 RCS-PL-V013A Third Stage Automatic Depressurization System Isolation 1,3,4 RCS-PL-V013B Third Stage Automatic Depressurization System Isolation 1,3,4 RCS-PL-V150A Reactor Vessel Head Vent 1,3 RCS-PL-V150B Reactor Vessel Head Vent 1,3 RCS-PL-V150C Reactor Vessel Head Vent 1,3 RCS-PL-V150D Reactor Vessel Head Vent 1,3 Normal Residual Heat Removal System RNS-PL-V001A Reactor Coolant System Inner HL Suction Isolation 1 RNS-PL-V001B Reactor Coolant System Inner HL Suction Isolation 1 RNS-PL-V002A Reactor Coolant System Outer HL Suction Isolation 1,2 RNS-PL-V002B Reactor Coolant System Outer HL Suction Isolation 1,2 RNS-PL-V003A Reactor Coolant System Pressure Boundary Valve Thermal Relief 1 Check Valve RNS-PL-V003B Reactor Coolant System Pressure Boundary Valve Thermal Relief 1 Check Valve RNS-PL-V011 RNS Discharge Containment Isolation Valve 2, 4 RNS-PL-V012 RNS Discharge Containment Isolation Test Connection Valve 2, 4 RNS-PL-V013 RNS Discharge Containment Isolation Check Valve 2, 4 RNS-PL-V015A RNS Discharge Reactor Coolant System Pressure Boundary 1, 4 RNS-PL-V015B RNS Discharge Reactor Coolant System Pressure Boundary 1, 4 RNS-PL-V017A RNS Discharge Reactor Coolant System Pressure Boundary 1, 4 RNS-PL-V017B RNS Discharge Reactor Coolant System Pressure Boundary 1, 4 RNS-PL-V020 RNS HL Suction Pressure Relief 2 RNS-PL-V021 RNS HL Suction Pressure Relief 2 3.9-103 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.9-12 (Sheet 5 of 7)
List of ASME Class 1, 2, and 3 Active Valves Valve No. Description Function(a)
Normal Residual Heat Removal System (Cont.)
RNS-PL-V022 RNS Suction Header Containment Isolation 2 RNS-PL-V023 RNS Suction from In-Containment Refueling Water Storage Tank Isolation 2 RNS-PL-V061 RNS - Chemical and Volume Control System Containment Isolation 2 Sanitary Drainage System SDS-PL-V001 SDS MCR Vent Isolation Valve 3 SDS-PL-V002 SDS MCR Vent Isolation Valve 3 Spent Fuel Pool Cooling System SFS-PL-V034 Spent Fuel Pool Cooling System Suction Line Containment Isolation 2 SFS-PL-V035 Spent Fuel Pool Cooling System Suction Line Containment Isolation 2 SFS-PL-V037 Spent Fuel Pool Cooling System Discharge Line Containment Isolation 2 SFS-PL-V038 Spent Fuel Pool Cooling System Discharge Line Containment Isolation 2 SFS-PL-V042 Cask Loading Pit to SFS Pump Suction Isolation Valve 3 SFS-PL-V045 SFS Pump Discharge Line to Cask Loading Pit Isolation Valve 3 SFS-PL-V049 Cask Loading Pit to WLS Isolation Valve 3 SFS-PL-V066 Spent Fuel Pool to Cask Washdown Pit Isolation 3 SFS-PL-V067 Containment Isolation Thermal Relief Valve 2 SFS-PL-V068 Cask Washdown Pit Drain Isolation 3 SFS-PL-V071 Refueling Cavity to Steam Generator Compartment 3 SFS-PL-V072 Refueling Cavity to Steam Generator Compartment 3 Steam Generator System SGS-PL-V027A Power Operated Relief Valve Block Valve Steam Generator 01 2,3,4 SGS-PL-V027B Power Operated Relief Valve Block Valve Steam Generator 02 2,3,4 SGS-PL-V030A Main Steam Safety Valve Steam Generator 01 2,3,4 SGS-PL-V030B Main Steam Safety Valve Steam Generator 02 2,3,4 SGS-PL-V031A Main Steam Safety Valve Steam Generator 01 2,3,4 SGS-PL-V031B Main Steam Safety Valve Steam Generator 02 2,3,4 SGS-PL-V032A Main Steam Safety Valve Steam Generator 01 2,3,4 SGS-PL-V032B Main Steam Safety Valve Steam Generator 02 2,3,4 SGS-PL-V033A Main Steam Safety Valve Steam Generator 01 2,3,4 SGS-PL-V033B Main Steam Safety Valve Steam Generator 02 2,3,4 SGS-PL-V034A Main Steam Safety Valve Steam Generator 01 2,3,4 SGS-PL-V034B Main Steam Safety Valve Steam Generator 02 2,3,4 SGS-PL-V035A Main Steam Safety Valve Steam Generator 01 2,3,4 SGS-PL-V035B Main Steam Safety Valve Steam Generator 02 2,3,4 SGS-PL-V036A Steam Line Condensate Drain Isolation 2,3,4 SGS-PL-V036B Steam Line Condensate Drain Isolation 2,3,4 3.9-104 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.9-12 (Sheet 6 of 7)
List of ASME Class 1, 2, and 3 Active Valves Valve No. Description Function(a)
Steam Generator System (Cont.)
SGS-PL-V040A Main Steam Line Isolation 2,3,4 SGS-PL-V040B Main Steam Line Isolation 2,3,4 SGS-PL-V057A Main Feedwater Isolation 2,3,4 SGS-PL-V057B Main Feedwater Isolation 2,3,4 SGS-PL-V067A Startup Feedwater Isolation 2,3,4 SGS-PL-V067B Startup Feedwater Isolation 2,3,4 SGS-PL-V074A Steam Generator Blowdown Isolation 2,3,4 SGS-PL-V074B Steam Generator Blowdown Isolation 2,3,4 SGS-PL-V075A Steam Generator Series Blowdown Isolation 3,4 SGS-PL-V075B Steam Generator Series Blowdown Isolation 3,4 SGS-PL-V086A Steam Line Condensate Drain Control 3,4 SGS-PL-V086B Steam Line Condensate Drain Control 3,4 SGS-PL-V233A Power Operated Relief Valve 3,4 SGS-PL-V233B Power Operated Relief Valve 3,4 SGS-PL-V240A Main Steam Isolation Valve Bypass Isolation 2,3,4 SGS-PL-V240B Main Steam Isolation Valve Bypass Isolation 2,3,4 SGS-PL-V250A Main Feedwater Control 3,4 SGS-PL-V250B Main Feedwater Control 3,4 SGS-PL-V255A Startup Feedwater Control 3,4 SGS-PL-V255B Startup Feedwater Control 3,4 SGS-PL-V257A Main Feedwater Thermal Relief Valve 3,4 SGS-PL-V257B Main Feedwater Thermal Relief Valve 3,4 SGS-PL-V258A Startup Feedwater Thermal Relief Valve 3,4 SGS-PL-V258B Startup Feedwater Thermal Relief Valve 3,4 Nuclear Island Nonradioactive Ventilation System VBS-PL-V186 MCR Supply Air Isolation Valve 3 VBS-PL-V187 MCR Supply Air Isolation Valve 3 VBS-PL-V188 MCR Return Air Isolation Valve 3 VBS-PL-V189 MCR Return Air Isolation Valve 3 VBS-PL-V190 MCR Exhaust Air Isolation Valve 3 VBS-PL-V191 MCR Exhaust Air Isolation Valve 3 Main Control Room Habitability System VES-PL-V001 Air Delivery Alternate Isolation Valve 3 VES-PL-V002A Pressure Regulating Valve A 3 VES-PL-V002B Pressure Regulating Valve B 3 VES-PL-V005A Air Delivery Isolation Valve A 3 VES-PL-V005B Air Delivery Isolation Valve B 3 VES-PL-V018 Temporary Instrument Isolation Valve A 3 VES-PL-V019 Temporary Instrument Isolation Valve B 3 VES-PL-V022A Pressure Relief Isolation Valve A 3 VES-PL-V022B Pressure Relief Isolation Valve B 3 VES-PL-V040A Air Tank Safety Relief Valve A 3 VES-PL-V040B Air Tank Safety Relief Valve B 3 3.9-105 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.9-12 (Sheet 7 of 7)
List of ASME Class 1, 2, and 3 Active Valves Valve No. Description Function(a)
Main Control Room Habitability System (Cont.)
VES-PL-V040C Air Tank Safety Relief Valve C 3 VES-PL-V040D Air Tank Safety Relief Valve D 3 VES-PL-V044 Main Air Flow Path Isolation Valve 3 VES-PL-V045 Eductor Flow Path Isolation Valve 3 VES-PL-V046 Eductor Bypass Isolation Valve 3 Containment Air Filtration System VFS-PL-V003 Containment Purge Inlet Containment Isolation Valve 2 VFS-PL-V004 Containment Purge Inlet Containment Isolation Valve 2 VFS-PL-V009 Containment Purge Discharge Containment Isolation Valve 2 VFS-PL-V010 Containment Purge Discharge Containment Isolation Valve 2 VFS-PL-V800A Vacuum Relief Containment Isolation A ORC 2 VFS-PL-V800B Vacuum Relief Containment Isolation B ORC 2 VFS-PL-V803A Vacuum Relief Containment Isolation Check Valve A IRC 2 VFS-PL-V803B Vacuum Relief Containment Isolation Check Valve B IRC 2 Central Chilled Water System VWS-PL-V053 VWS Containment Penetration Thermal Relief Valve 3 VWS-PL-V057 VWS Containment Penetration Thermal Relief Valve 3 VWS-PL-V058 Fan Coolers Supply Containment Isolation 2 VWS-PL-V062 Fan Coolers Supply Containment Isolation Check Valve 2 VWS-PL-V080 Containment Isolation Thermal Relief Valve 2 VWS-PL-V082 Fan Coolers Return Containment Isolation 2 VWS-PL-V086 Fan Coolers Return Containment Isolation 2 Liquid Radwaste System WLS-PL-V055 Sump Containment Isolation IRC 2 WLS-PL-V057 Sump Containment Isolation ORC 2 WLS-PL-V058 Containment Isolation Relief Valve 2 WLS-PL-V067 Reactor Coolant Drain Tank Gas Containment Isolation IRC 2 WLS-PL-V068 Reactor Coolant Drain Tank Gas Containment Isolation ORC 2 WLS-PL-V071A Chemical and Volume Control System Compartment to Sump 3 WLS-PL-V071B Passive Core Cooling System A Compartment to Sump 3 WLS-PL-V071C Passive Core Cooling System B Compartment to Sump 3 WLS-PL-V072A Chemical and Volume Control System Compartment to Sump 3 WLS-PL-V072B Passive Core Cooling System A Compartment to Sump 3 WLS-PL-V072C Passive Core Cooling System B Compartment to Sump 3 Note:
- a. Function: 1 - Reactor coolant system pressure boundary 2 - Containment isolation 3 - Accident mitigation 4 - Safe shutdown 3.9-106 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.9-13 Control Rod Drive Mechanism Production Tests Test Acceptance Standard Cold (ambient) hydrostatic ASME Code,Section III Confirm step length and load transfer Step length:
(stationary gripper to movable gripper or 0.625 +/- 0.015 inch axial movement movable gripper to stationary gripper) Load transfer:
0.055 inch nominal axial movement Performance test at design load - Cycled under ambient Operating speed:
water temperature conditions for approximately one full 45 inches/minute drive rod travel excursion. Trip delay:
Cycled under hot test conditions for approximately Free fall of drive rod to begin within 5,000 steps. 150 milliseconds 3.9-107 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.9-14 Maximum Deflections Allowed for Reactor Internal Support Structures Allowable Component Deflections (in.)
Upper Core Barrel Radial inward (uniform) 4.1 (1) 1.0 Radial outward (uniform)
Upper package - relative vertical motion between upper core plate and upper support plate 0.20 Rod cluster guide tubes - radial toward the reactor vessel outlet 1.00 Note:
- 1. Non-uniform radial outward deflections are limited such that > 90-percent of the annulus area is maintained.
3.9-108 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.9-15 Computer Programs for Seismic Category 1 Components Program Application ABAQUS Finite element structural analysis ANSYS Finite element structural analysis FATCON ASME fatigue analysis of piping components GAPPIPE Static and dynamic analysis of piping systems MAXTRAN Transient stress evaluation of piping components WESTEMS ASME Class 1 fatigue analysis of piping and components PIPESTRESS Static and dynamic analysis of piping systems PIPSAN Structural and ASME stress analysis of piping and component supports GTSTRUDL Structural and ASME stress analysis of piping and component supports and structural frames STAAD-III Static and dynamic analysis of structural frames THERST Transient heat transfer analysis of piping components WECAN Finite element structural analysis WEGAP Dynamic structural response of the reactor core WECEVAL ASME stress evaluation of mechanical components ITCH Transient hydraulic analysis FORFUN Computes unbalanced hydraulic forces between piping elbows RELAP5 Transient dynamic analysis THRUST Computes time-history hydraulic forcing functions MULTIFLEX Thermal-hydraulic-structural system analysis GEC2 Computes time-history hydraulic forcing functions FATSTR ASME stress evaluation of piping components HSTA Hydraulic system transient analysis E0781 Axisymmetric containment shell analysis FLOW 3D Finite element fluid flow and heat transfer 3.9-109 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.9-16 Valve Inservice Test Requirements See Inservice Testing Program Plan(1)
Notes:
- 1. Inservice Testing Program is controlled by 10 CFR 50.55a and is not incorporated by reference.
3.9-110 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.9-17 System Level Operability Test Requirements System/Feature Test Purpose Test Method Tech Speca PCS PCCWST drain lines Flow capability and water coverage Note 1 SR 3.6.6.6 PXS Accumulator injection lines Flow capability Note 2 SR 3.5.1.6 CMT injection lines Flow capability Note 3 SR 3.5.2.8 PRHR HX Heat transfer capability Note 4 SR 3.5.4.9 IRWST injection lines Flow capability Note 5 SR 3.5.6.11 Containment recirculation lines Flow capability Note 6 SR 3.5.6.11 Alpha Note:
- a. Refer to the Technical Specification surveillance identified in this column for the test frequency.
Notes:
- 1. The flow capability of each PCS water drain line is demonstrated by conducting a test where water is drained from the PCS water storage tank onto the containment shell by opening two of the three parallel isolation valves. During this flow test the water coverage is also demonstrated. The test is terminated when the flow measurement is obtained and the water coverage is observed. The minimum allowable flowrate is 469.1 gpm with the passive containment cooling water storage tank level 27.5 feet (nominal) above the tank floor. The test may be run with a higher water level and the test results adjusted for the increased level. Water coverage is demonstrated by visual inspection that there is unobstructed flow from the lower weirs. In addition, air baffle panels may be removed at the containment vessel spring line, if needed, to permit visual inspection of the water coverage and the vessel coating. The water coverage observed at four locations, approximately 90 degrees apart, will be compared against the coverage measured at the same locations during pre-operational testing (see item 7.(b)(i) of ITAAC Table 2.2.2-3).
- 2. The flow capability of each accumulator is demonstrated by conducting a test during cold shutdown conditions. The initial conditions of the test include reduced accumulator pressure. Flow from the accumulator to the RCS is initiated by opening the accumulator isolation valve. Sufficient flow is provided to fully open the check valves. The test is terminated when the flow measurement is obtained. The allowable calculated flow resistance between each accumulator and the reactor vessel is 1.47 x 10-5 ft/gpm2 and 1.83 x 10-5 ft/gpm2.
- 3. The flow capability of each CMT is demonstrated by conducting a test during cold shutdown conditions. The initial conditions of the test include the RCS loops drained to a level below the top of the RCS hot leg. Flow from the CMT to the RCS is initiated by opening both CMT discharge isolation valves. The test is terminated when the flow measurement is obtained. The allowable calculated flow resistance between each CMT and the reactor vessel is 1.81 x 10-5 ft/gpm2 and 2.25 x 10-5 ft/gpm2.
- 4. The heat transfer capability of the passive residual heat exchanger is demonstrated by conducting a test during shutdown conditions. The test is conducted with the RCPs in operation and the RCS at a reduced temperature. Due to the low RCS temperature, RCP limitations require the test to be run at 50-percent RCP speed. Flow through the heat exchanger is initiated by opening one outlet isolation valve. The test is terminated when the flow and temperature measurements are obtained. The allowable calculated heat transfer is 8.46E7-Btu/hr (50-percent pump speed) with an inlet temperature of 250°F and an initial IRWST temperature of 80°F and the design basis number of tubes plugged. The heat transfer rate measured in the test should be adjusted to account for differences in the hot leg and IRWST temperatures and the number of tubes plugged.
- 5. The flow capability of each IRWST injection line is demonstrated by conducting flow tests and inspections. A flow test is conducted to demonstrate the flow capability of the injection line from the IRWST through the IRWST injection check valves. Water flow from the IRWST through the IRWST injection check valve demonstrates the flow capability of this portion of the line. Sufficient flow is provided to open the check valves. The test is terminated when the flow measurement is obtained. The allowable calculated flow resistance from the IRWST through each direct vessel injection flow path to the reactor vessel is: Line A: 5.35 x 10-6 ft/gpm2 and 9.09 x 10-6 ft/gpm2 and Line B: 6.15 x 10-6 ft/gpm2 and 1.05 x 10-5 ft/gpm2.
The flow capability of the portion of the line from the IRWST check valves to the DVI line is demonstrated by conducting an inspection of the inside of the line. The inspection shows that the lines are not obstructed. It is not necessary to operate the IRWST injection squib valves for this inspection.
- 6. The flow capability of each containment recirculation line is demonstrated by conducting an inspection. The line from the containment to the containment recirculation squib valve is inspected from the containment side. The line from the squib valve to the IRWST injection line is inspected from the IRWST side. The inspection shows that the lines are not obstructed. It is not necessary to operate the containment recirculation squib valves for this inspection.
3.9-111 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.9-18 AP1000 Pressure Isolation Valves Valve Number Description PXS-V028A Accumulator Discharge Check Valves PXS-V028B PXS-V029A PXS-V029B RNS-V001A RNS Hot Leg Suction Isolation Valves RNS-V001B RNS-V002A RNS-V002B RNS-V015A RNS Discharge RCS Pressure Boundary RNS-V015B RNS-V017A RNS-V017B 3.9-112 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.9-19 (Sheet 1 of 2)
Critical Piping Design Methods and Criteria (Piping Design Criteria)
Tier 2 Reference Commitment (Section or Table)
ASME Code and Code Cases for AP1000 Piping and Pipe Support Design Table 3.9-9, Table 3.9-10, 5.2.1.1, 5.2.1.2, Table 5.2-3 Analysis Methods: experimental stress analysis, independent support motion, 3.7.3.9, 3.7.3.12, 3.7.3.13, inelastic analysis, non-seismic/seismic interaction, buried piping 3.9.1.3, 3.9.3.1.5 Piping Modeling: piping benchmark program, decoupling criteria 3.6.2.1.1.1, 3.6.2.1.1.2, 3.6.2.1.1.3, 3.7.3.8.2.1, 3.9.1.2 Pipe Stress Analysis Criteria: loading and load combinations, damping values, 3.6.2.2, 3.6.3.3, 3.7.2.14, 3.7.3.2, combination of modal responses, high frequency modes, thermal oscillations in 3.7.3.7, 3.7.3.8.2.1, 3.7.3.9, Table piping connected to the reactor coolant system, thermal stratification, 3.7.1-1, 3.9.3.1.2, 3.9.3.1.5, safety-related valve design, installation and testing, functional capability, 3.9.3.3, Table 3.9-5, Table 3.9-6, combination of inertial and seismic motion effects, welded attachments, modal Table 3.9-7, Table 3.9-8, Table damping for composite structures, minimum temperature for thermal analysis 3.9-9, Table 3.9-10, Table 3.9-11 Pipe Support Criteria: applicable codes, jurisdictional boundaries, pipe support 3.9.1.2, 3.9.3.4, 3.9.3.5 baseplate and anchor bolt design, use of energy absorbers and limit stops, pipe support stiffnesses, seismic self-weight excitation, design of supplementary steel, considerations of friction forces, pipe support gaps and clearances, instrument line support criteria Equivalent Static Load Method of Analysis 3.7.3.5, 3.7.3.5.1, 3.7.3.5.2 Three Components of Earthquake Motion 3.7.3.6 Left-Out-Force Method Used in PIPESTRESS Program 3.7.3.7.1.1 SRP 3.7.2 Method for High-Frequency Modes 3.7.3.7.1.2 Combination of Low-Frequency Modes 3.7.3.7.2 Modeling Methods and Analytical Procedures for Piping Systems 3.7.3.8, 3.7.3.8.1, 3.7.3.8.2.2, 3.7.3.8.3, 3.7.3.8.4 Seismic Anchor Motions 3.7.3.9 Methods Used to Account for Torsional Effects of Eccentric Masses 3.7.3.11 Design Methods of Piping to Prevent Adverse Spatial Interactions 3.7.3.13.4, 3.7.3.13.4.1, 3.7.3.13.4.2, 3.7.3.13.4.3 Analysis Procedure for Damping 3.7.3.15 Time History Analysis of Piping Systems 3.7.3.17 3.9-113 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.9-19 (Sheet 2 of 2)
Critical Piping Design Methods and Criteria (Piping Design Criteria)
Tier 2 Reference Commitment (Section or Table)
Design Transients 3.9.1.1 Use of NRC Bulletins 88-08 and 88-11 Loads for Class 1 Components and Core/Component Supports 3.9.3.1.2 Use of Square-Root-Sum-of-the-Squares Method for SSE plus Pipe Rupture 3.9.3.1.3 Analysis of Reactor Coolant Loop Piping 3.9.3.1.4 ASME Classes 1, 2, and 3 Piping 3.9.3.1.5 Use of ASME Code,Section III Design of Spring-Loaded Safety Valves 3.9.3.3.1 Design and Analysis Requirement for Open and Closed Discharge Systems 3.9.3.3.3 Component and Piping Supports for Dynamic Loading 3.9.3.4 Class 2 and Class 3 Component Supports 3.9.3.4.2 Use of ASME Section III Piping System Seismic Stress Analysis 3.9.3.4.3 Design Report for ASME Classes 1, 2, and 3 Piping 3.9.8.2 Hard Rock High Frequency (HRHF) Seismic Response Effect on Piping Systems Appendix 3I.6.3 Integrity of Nonsafety-Related CVS Piping Inside Containment 5.2.1.1 Compliance with 10 CFR 50.55a and ASME B31.1 Code 3.9-114 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.9-20 (Sheet 1 of 2)
Piping Packages Chosen to Demonstrate Piping Design for Piping DAC Closure (in addition to Class 1 lines larger than 1 inch in diameter)
ASME Inside/Outside Piping Package Class Containment (IC/OC) Line(s) Description Number 2 IC Hot Leg 2 I&C APP-RCS-PLR-210 1,3 IC Reactor Head Vent APP-RCS-PLR-230 2 IC Hot Leg 1 I&C APP-RCS-PLR-260 2 IC Hot Leg 1 Sampling APP-RCS-PLR-460 2 IC Hot Leg 2 Sampling APP-RCS-PLR-470 2 IC Pressurizer Sampling APP-RCS-PLR-480 2 IC Pressurizer I&C APP-RCS-PLR-510 2/3 IC Component Cooling from Penetration C01 IRC APP-CCS-PLR-040 2/3 IC Component Cooling from Penetration C02 IRC APP-CCS-PLR-050 2/3 IC CVS Makeup from Penetration C03 IRC APP-CVS-PLR-090 2/3 IC CVS Letdown from Penetration 002 IRC 2 APP-CVS-PLR-100 2/3 IC ACC-A/B3 Makeup APP-PXS-PLR-620 2/3 IC SFS from Penetration C01 APP-SFS-PLR-600 2/3 IC/OC Feedwater to SG 01 APP-SGS-PLR-010 2/3 IC/OC Feedwater to SG 02 APP-SGS-PLR-020 2/3 IC/OC Main Steam to SG 01 APP-SGS-PLR-030 2/3 IC/OC Main Steam to SG 02 APP-SGS-PLR-040 2/3 IC SG01 Blowdown to Penetration C03A APP-SGS-PLR-070 2/3 IC SG02 Blowdown to Penetration C03B APP-SGS-PLR-080 2/3 IC SG01 Startup Feed Water from Penetration C05A APP-SGS-PLR-310 2/3 IC SG02 Startup Feed Water from Penetration C05B APP-SGS-PLR-320 2/3 IC VWS Supply from Containment Penetration C02 APP-VWS-PLR-500 2/3 IC VWS Return to Containment Penetration C01 APP-VWS-PLR-530 2/3 OC Component Cooling from Penetration C01 ORC APP-CCS-PLR-810 3.9-115 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.9-20 (Sheet 2 of 2)
Piping Packages Chosen to Demonstrate Piping Design for Piping DAC Closure (in addition to Class 1 lines larger than 1 inch in diameter)
ASME Inside/Outside Piping Package Class Containment (IC/OC) Line(s) Description Number 2/3 OC Component Cooling from Penetration C02 ORC APP-CCS-PLR-820 2/3 OC CVS Makeup from Penetration C03 ORC APP-CVS-PLR-530 2/3 OC PCS Recirculation, DWS Supply, and FPS Supply APP-PCS-PLR-100 2/3 OC From Spent Fuel to RNS and PCCWST Drain APP-RNS-PLR-100 2/3 OC Normal RHR to Heat Exchangers and Pumps from APP-RNS-PLR-170 Containment Penetrations C01 and C02 2/3 OC Spent Fuel Cooling Module R3-65 APP-SFS-PLR-350 2/3 OC SG01 Startup Feedwater to Penetration C05A APP-SGS-PLR-110 2/3 OC SG02 Startup Feedwater to Penetration C05B APP-SGS-PLR-120 2/3 OC Nonradioactive Vent Return from Main Control Room APP-VBS-PLR-010 2/3 OC Nonradioactive Vent Supply to Main Control Room APP-VBS-PLR-030 2/3 OC VWS Supply to Containment Penetration C02 APP-VWS-PLR-910 2/3 OC VWS Return from Containment Penetration C01 APP-VWS-PLR-920 3.9-116 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.9-201 Safety Related Snubbers System Snubber (Hanger) No. Line # System Snubber (Hanger) No. Line #
CVS APP-CVS-PH-11Y0262 L040 RCS APP-RCS-PH-11Y1144 L214 CVS APP-CVS-PH-11Y0268 L038 RCS APP-RCS-PH-11Y2005 L022A CVS APP-CVS-PH-11Y2040 L001 RCS APP-RCS-PH-11Y2101 L032B CVS APP-CVS-PH-11Y2223 L001 RCS APP-RCS-PH-11Y2106 L137A CVS APP-CVS-PH-11Y2224 L001 RCS APP-RCS-PH-11Y2107 L133A CVS APP-CVS-PH-11Y2227 L040 RCS APP-RCS-PH-11Y2264 L112 CVS APP-CVS-PH-11Y2229 L071 RNS APP-RNS-PH-12Y2060 L006 CVS APP-CVS-PH-11Y2265 L056 SGS APP-SGS-PH-11Y0001 L003B CVS APP-CVS-PH-11Y2266 L056 SGS APP-SGS-PH-11Y0002 L003B CVS APP-CVS-PH-11Y7074 L068 SGS APP-SGS-PH-11Y0004 L003B PXS APP-PXS-PH-11Y0020 L127A SGS APP-SGS-PH-11Y0057 L003A PXS APP-PXS-PH-11Y0578 L113A SGS APP-SGS-PH-11Y0058 L003A PXS APP-PXS-PH-11Y2052 L114 SGS APP-SGS-PH-11Y0063 L003A PXS APP-PXS-PH-11Y2057 L117A SGS APP-SGS-PH-11Y0463 L006A PXS APP-PXS-PH-11Y2059 L132A SGS APP-SGS-PH-11Y0464 L006A RCS APP-RCS-PH-11Y0039 L215 SGS APP-SGS-PH-11Y0470 L006B RCS APP-RCS-PH-11Y0060 L215 SGS APP-SGS-PH-11Y2002 L006A RCS APP-RCS-PH-11Y0067 L005B SGS APP-SGS-PH-11Y2021 L006A RCS APP-RCS-PH-11Y0081 L112 SGS APP-SGS-PH-11Y3101 L006B RCS APP-RCS-PH-11Y0082 L112 SGS APP-SGS-PH-11Y3102 L006B RCS APP-RCS-PH-11Y0090 L118A SGS APP-SGS-PH-11Y3121 L006B RCS APP-RCS-PH-11Y0103 L003 SGS APP-SGS-PH-11Y7057 L006B RCS APP-RCS-PH-11Y0112 L032A SGS APP-SGS-PH-12Y0108 L023B RCS APP-RCS-PH-11Y0388 L133B SGS APP-SGS-PH-12Y0136 L023A RCS APP-RCS-PH-11Y0391 L137B SGS APP-SGS-PH-12Y0507 L022B RCS APP-RCS-PH-11Y0528 L005A SGS APP-SGS-PH-12Y0510 L022A RCS APP-RCS-PH-11Y0810 L011A SGS APP-SGS-PH-12Y7056 L022A RCS APP-RCS-PH-11Y0811 L010A SGS APP-SGS-PH-12Y7058 L022B RCS APP-RCS-PH-11Y0813 L010B SGS SG 1 Snubber A (1A) (1)
RCS APP-RCS-PH-11Y1127 L110A SGS SG 1 Snubber B (1B) (1)
RCS APP-RCS-PH-11Y1130 L212B SGS SG 2 Snubber A (2A) (1)
RCS APP-RCS-PH-11Y1132 L215 SGS SG 2 Snubber B (2B) (1)
RCS APP-RCS-PH-11Y1134 L215 RCS APP-RCS-PH-11Y1140 L214 RCS APP-RCS-PH-11Y1141 L215 (1) These snubbers are on the upper lateral support assembly of the steam generators.
3.9-117 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Figures 3.9-1-3.9-3 Not Used 3.9-118 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Figure 3.9-4 Control Rod Drive Mechanism 3.9-119 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Figure 3.9-5 Lower Reactor Internals 3.9-120 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Figure 3.9-6 Upper Core Support Structure 3.9-121 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Figure 3.9-7 Integrated Head Package 3.9-122 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Figure 3.9-8 Reactor Internals Interface Arrangement 3.9-123 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Figure 3.9-9 Flow Skirt Schematic 3.9-124 Revision 9
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR 3.10 Seismic and Dynamic Qualification of Seismic Category I Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Safety-related equipment and selected portions of post-accident monitoring equipment are classified as seismic Category I, as discussed in Subsection 3.2.1.1. This section addresses the seismic and dynamic qualification of this equipment other than piping and includes the following types:
Safety-related instrumentation and electrical equipment and certain monitoring equipment.
Safety-related active mechanical equipment that performs a mechanical motion while accomplishing a system safety-related function. These devices include the control rod drive mechanisms; HVAC and fluid system valves.
Safety-related, nonactive mechanical equipment whose mechanical motion is not required while accomplishing a system safety-related function, but whose structural integrity must be maintained in order to fulfill its design safety-related function.
This section presents or references information to demonstrate that mechanical equipment, electrical equipment, instrumentation, and, where applicable, their supports classified as seismic Category I are capable of performing their designated safety-related functions under the full range of normal and accident (including seismic) loadings. This equipment includes devices associated with systems essential to safe shutdown, containment isolation, reactor core cooling, and containment and reactor heat removal, or are otherwise essential in preventing significant release of radioactive material to the environment or in mitigating the consequences of accidents. The information presented or referenced includes:
Identification of the seismic Category I instrumentation, electrical equipment, and appropriate mechanical equipment Qualification criteria employed for each type of equipment Designated safety-related functional requirements Definition of the applicable seismic environment Definition of other normal and accident loadings Documentation of the qualification process employed to demonstrate the required structural integrity and operability of mechanical and electrical equipment and instrumentation in the event of a safe shutdown earthquake (SSE) after a number of postulated occurrences of an earthquake smaller than a safe shutdown earthquake in combination with other relevant dynamic and static loads.
The AP1000 plant is based on the Certified Seismic Design Response Spectra (CSDRS) defined in Subsection 3.7.1.1. The CSDRS are based on Regulatory Guide 1.60 design response spectra with an increase in the 25 hertz region. The Ground Motion Response Spectra (GMRS) for some Central and Eastern United States rock sites show higher amplitude at high frequency than the CSDRS. Evaluations for high frequency exceedance at AP1000 plant rock sites have been performed as described in Appendix 3I. It is the conclusion of these evaluations that AP1000 plant systems, structures, and components are qualified for the high frequency seismic response based on the CSDRS with the exception of potential high frequency sensitive components (APP-GW-GLN-144, Reference 3). Specific models of components are not identified as part of the AP1000 certified design and are evaluated for high frequency sensitivity as part of the equipment qualification. Appendix 3I 3.10-1 Revision 5
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR provides the criteria for addressing potential high frequency sensitive components for plant locations where there is CSDRS exceedance in the high frequency region.
3.10.1 Seismic and Dynamic Qualification Criteria 3.10.1.1 Qualification Standards The methods of meeting the general requirements for the seismic and dynamic qualification of seismic Category I mechanical and electrical equipment and instrumentation as described by General Design Criteria (GDC) 1, 2, 4, 14, 23, and 30 are described in Section 3.1. The general methods of implementing the requirements of Appendix B to 10CFR50 are described in Chapter 17.
The Nuclear Regulatory Commission (NRC) recommendations concerning the methods employed for seismic qualification of mechanical and electrical equipment are contained in Regulatory Guide 1.100, which endorses IEEE 344-1987 (Reference 1).
[AP1000 meets IEEE 344-1987, as modified by Regulatory Guide 1.100, by either type testing or analysis or by an appropriate combination of these methods]* employing the methodology described in Appendix 3D.
The guidance provided in the ASME Code,Section III, is followed in the design of seismic Category I mechanical equipment to achieve the structural integrity of pressure boundary components. In addition, the AP1000 implements an operability program for active valves based on ASME QME-1-2007, as addressed in Section 3.9.
3.10.1.2 Performance Requirements for Seismic Qualification An equipment qualification data package (EQDP) is developed for the instrumentation and electrical equipment classified as seismic Category I. Table 3.11-1 of Section 3.11 identifies the seismic Category I electrical equipment and instrumentation supplied for the AP1000. Each equipment qualification data package contains a section entitled Performance Requirements. This section establishes the safety-related functional requirements of the equipment to be demonstrated during and after a seismic event. The required response spectra employed by the AP1000 for generic seismic qualification are also identified in the section.
For active seismic Category I mechanical components, the performance requirements are defined in the appropriate design and equipment specifications. Requirements for active valves are discussed in Subsection 3.10.2.2.
For other seismic Category I mechanical components, the performance requirement is to maintain structural integrity under appropriate loading conditions. Seismic qualification documentation requirements for mechanical equipment are discussed in Subsection 3.10.4.
A master list and summary of seismic qualification of safety-related seismic Category I electrical and mechanical equipment are maintained as part of the equipment qualification file.
3.10.1.3 Performance Criteria Seismic and dynamic loading qualification demonstrates that seismic Category I instrumentation and electrical equipment and active valves are capable of performing their designated safety-related functions under applicable plant loading conditions, including the safe shutdown earthquake. The qualification also demonstrates the structural integrity of seismic Category I nonactive valves, mechanical supports, and structures. Some permanent deformation of supports and structures is
- In accordance with the departure evaluation process specified in License Condition 2.D.(13), NRC Staff approval may be required prior to implementing a change in this information.
3.10-2 Revision 5
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR acceptable at the safe shutdown earthquake level, provided that the capability to perform the designated safety-related functions is not impaired.
3.10.2 Methods and Procedures for Qualifying Electrical Equipment, Instrumentation, and Mechanical Components Testing is the preferred method to qualify equipment. Both dynamic and static test approaches are used to demonstrate structural integrity and operability of mechanical and electrical equipment in the event of a safe shutdown earthquake preceded by five earthquakes of a magnitude equal to 50 percent of the calculated safe shutdown earthquake. Test samples are selected according to type, load level, and size, as well as other pertinent factors on a prototype basis.
Analysis using mathematical modeling techniques correlated to tests performed on similar equipment or structures and verified analytical approaches are used to qualify equipment. Combined analysis and testing is also used to qualify equipment.
The analytical approach to seismic qualification without testing is used under the following conditions:
If operability can be demonstrated by analysis alone.
If only maintaining structural integrity is required for the safety-related function.
If the equipment is too large or heavy to obtain a representative test input at existing test facilities. (The essential control devices and electrical parts of large equipment are tested separately if required.)
If the interfaces (for example, interconnecting cables to the cabinet or other complex inputs) cannot be conservatively considered during testing.
If the response of the equipment is essentially linear or has a simple nonlinear behavior that can be predicted by conservative analytical methods.
A combination of testing and analysis is used when complete testing is not practical.
Equipment that has been previously qualified by means of test and analysis equivalent to those described herein is acceptable provided that proper documentation is submitted.
Seismic qualification of seismic Category I instrumentation and electrical equipment is demonstrated by either type testing or a combination of test and analysis. The qualification method employed by the AP1000 for a particular item of equipment is based upon many factors including practicability, complexity of equipment, economics, and availability of previous seismic qualification. The qualification method employed for a particular item of instrumentation or electrical equipment is identified in the individual equipment qualification data package.
For active valves, the AP1000 uses a combination of tests and analyses to demonstrate the structural integrity and operability of such components. Other seismic Category I mechanical equipment is qualified by analysis to demonstrate structural integrity.
The methods of load combination and methods of combining dynamic responses for mechanical equipment are discussed in Section 3.9. For instrumentation and electrical equipment, the only dynamic loads considered in testing are seismic loads and hydrodynamic and vibratory loads where applicable. Other dynamic loads to which instrumentation and electrical equipment may be subjected are enveloped by this testing or are addressed by analysis.
3.10-3 Revision 5
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR 3.10.2.1 Seismic Qualification of Instrumentation and Electrical Equipment 3.10.2.1.1 Type Testing For seismic Category I instrumentation and electrical equipment, seismic qualification by test is performed according to IEEE 344-1987. Where testing is used, multifrequency, multiaxis inputs are developed by the general procedures outlined in Appendix 3D. The test results contained in the individual equipment qualification data packages demonstrate that the measured test response spectrum envelops the required response spectrum defined in the equipment qualification data package.
Alternative test methods, such as single-frequency, single-axis inputs for line-mounted equipment, are used in selected cases as permitted by IEEE 344-1987 and Regulatory Guide 1.100. These methods are further described in Appendix 3D.
3.10.2.1.2 Analysis Seismic qualification by the analysis method can be used to demonstrate qualification for equipment where structural integrity or limitations of deformation provide the safety-related function. Seismic analysis is widely used to demonstrate qualification of equipment where testing is impractical, equipment is easily modeled (no secondary structures), and no complex equipment functions are required.
Analysis may complement tests when needed to extrapolate or interpolate experimental data.
Analysis may be used to investigate established failure modes related to structural integrity, fatigue, and stress-strain behavior. Two methods of computation are: (1) static equivalent load, which yields conservative results, and (2) dynamic analysis, which takes into account the dynamic response properties of the structure and which can be suitably represented by linear models.
The analysis method is not recommended for complex equipment that cannot be modeled to adequately predict its response.
3.10.2.1.3 Combination of Test and Analysis The AP1000 uses a combination of test and analysis to qualify seismic Category I instrumentation and electrical equipment. The test methods are similar to those described for type testing. Available test results are employed in combination with the analysis methods described in IEEE 344-1987 to demonstrate seismic qualification. The analytical methods include both static and dynamic techniques, which are described in detail in Appendix 3D.
3.10.2.2 Seismic and Operability Qualification of Active Mechanical Equipment Active mechanical equipment is qualified for both structural integrity and operability for its intended service conditions by a combination of test and analysis. These methods address the applicable loading conditions, such as thermal transients, significant flow loads, and/or degraded flow conditions. The test and analysis methods utilized in qualification of these components provide adequate confidence of operability under required plant conditions.
Qualification methods used for active valves are described in this subsection. The qualification methods used for control rod drive mechanisms and snubbers are described in Section 3.9. The qualification program for valves that are part of the reactor coolant pressure boundary shall include testing or analysis that demonstrate that these valves will not experience leakage beyond the limits defined in the design specification for each valve when subjected to design loading.
3.10-4 Revision 5
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Safety-related active valves, listed in Table 3.11-1, are required to function at the time of an accident.
Tests and analyses are conducted to qualify active valves providing confidence that these valves operate during a seismic event.
The safety-related valves are subjected to a series of type tests or actual tests before service and during the plant life. Before installation, the following tests are performed: body hydrostatic test to ASME Code,Section III, requirements, back-seat and main seat leakage tests, disc hydrostatic tests, and operational tests to verify that the valve opens and closes within stroke time requirements. For the qualification of motor operators for environmental conditions, see Section 3.11. After installation, the valves undergo system level pressure tests, construction acceptance tests, and preoperational tests. Where applicable, periodic in-service inspections and operations are performed in-situ to verify the functional capability of the valve. On active valves, an analysis of the extended structure is performed for static equivalent seismic safe shutdown earthquake loads applied at the center of gravity of the extended structure. The maximum stress limits used for active Class 1, 2, and 3 valves are compared to acceptable standards in the ASME Code. Valve discs are evaluated for maximum design line pressure and maximum differential pressure resulting from plant operating, transient, and accident conditions. Feedwater line valve discs are evaluated, using appropriate ASME Code,Section III limits, for the effect of dynamic loads by considering the effect of an equivalent differential pressure. The equivalent differential pressure is developed from a transient analysis based on wave mechanics that includes consideration of system arrangement and valve closing dynamics. Valve operating conditions are included as part of the valve design specification and are used to evaluate the valve disc. Additional information is provided on the controlled-closure, feedwater check valve in Subsection 10.4.7.2.2.
In addition to these tests and analyses, representative valves of each design type having extended structures are subjected to static pull tests and nozzle load tests as appropriate. These tests verify operability of a rigid valve (natural frequency equaling or exceeding 33 hertz) during a simulated plant faulted-condition event by demonstrating operational capabilities within the specified limits. A representative valve of a specific design type is identified for this testing by the specification (for example, globe valve, motor-operated valve) for that particular type of valve. A further subdivision of design is based upon the valve size, pressure rating, type of operator, and previous operability testing to evaluate the need for additional testing of a particular design type. The testing procedures are described in Appendix 3D.
The accelerations used for the static valve qualification are equivalent, as justified by analysis, to 6.0g in two orthogonal horizontal directions and 6.0g vertical. For testing, the required input motion (RIM) curve shall be consistent with the profile of Figure 6 of IEEE 382-1996 (Reference 2), with the acceleration magnitude increased to 6.0g. The piping design maintains the operator accelerations to these levels. If the natural frequency of the valve is less than 33 hertz, a dynamic analysis of the valve is performed to determine the equivalent loads to be applied during the static test.
Valves that are safety related but are classified as not having an extended structure, such as check valves and safety valves, are considered separately.
Check valves are characteristically simple in design. Their operation is not affected by seismic accelerations or the maximum applied nozzle loads. These valves are designed so that once the structural integrity of the valve is verified using standard methods, the capability of the valve to operate is demonstrated by its design features. The valve also undergoes in-shop hydrostatic and seat leakage tests, and periodic in situ valve exercising and inspection to verify the functional capability of the valve.
The pressurizer safety valves are qualified by the following procedures (these valves are also subjected to tests and analysis similar to check valves): stress and deformation analyses of critical items that affect operability for faulted condition loads, in-shop hydrostatic and seat leakage tests, 3.10-5 Revision 5
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR and periodic in situ valve inspection. In addition to these tests, a static load equivalent to that applied by the faulted condition is applied at the top of the bonnet, and the fluid pressure is increased until the valve mechanism actuates. Successful actuation within the design requirements of the valve demonstrates its over-pressurization safety capabilities during a seismic event.
Safety-related active valves mounted in HVAC ductwork used to isolate main control room areas during design events are listed in Table 3.11-1. These valves are qualified to operate on demand using air operators.
Using these methods, the safety-related valves are qualified for operability during a faulted event.
These methods conservatively simulate the seismic event and demonstrate that the active valves perform their safety-related function when necessary.
3.10.2.3 Valve Operator Qualification Active valve motor operators, position sensors, and solenoid valves are seismically qualified according to IEEE 382-1996, as discussed in the appropriate equipment qualification data packages.
3.10.2.4 Seismic Qualification of Other Seismic Category I Mechanical Equipment For seismic Category I mechanical equipment not defined as active, the AP1000 uses analysis to demonstrate structural integrity. The analysis methods are described in Sections 3.7 and 3.9 and in Appendix 3D.
3.10.3 Method and Procedures for Qualifying Supports of Electrical Equipment, Instrumentation, and Mechanical Components The equipment qualification data packages and seismic analysis report for non-active mechanical equipment (with no environmental qualification requirements) identify the equipment mounting employed for qualification and establish interface requirements for the equipment to provide confidence that subsequent in-plant installation does not degrade the established qualification.
Interface requirements are defined based on the test configuration and other design requirements.
Dynamic coupling effects resulting from mounting the component according to these interface criteria are considered in the qualification program.
Information concerning the structural integrity of pressure-retaining components, their supports, and core supports is presented in Section 3.9.
The following bases are used in the design and analysis of cable tray supports and instrument tubing supports:
The methods used in the seismic analysis of cable tray supports are described in Appendix 3F.
The seismic Category I instrument tubing systems are supported so that the allowable stresses permitted by ASME Code,Section III, are not exceeded when the tubing is subjected to the loads specified in Section 3.9.
3.10.4 Documentation The results of tests and analyses verifying that the criteria established in Subsection 3.10.1 are satisfied, employing the qualification methods described in Subsections 3.10.2 and 3.10.3, are included in the individual equipment qualification data packages, seismic analysis report, and test 3.10-6 Revision 5
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR reports. The upkeep of the equipment qualification file is maintained during the equipment selection and procurement phase is discussed in Subsection 3.11.5.
Seismic qualification of equipment is documented in equipment qualification data packages, seismic analysis report, and test reports. Appendix 3D provides guidance in this area.
3.10.5 Standard Review Plan Evaluation A summary describing the Standard Review Plan differences in regard to seismic and dynamic qualification of mechanical and electrical equipment is provided Subsection 1.9.2.
3.10.6 Combined License Information Item on Experienced-Based Qualification Not used.
3.10.7 References
- 1. IEEE 344-1987, Recommended Practices for Seismic Qualification of Class 1E Equipment for Nuclear Power Generating Stations.
- 2. IEEE 382-1996, IEEE Standard for Qualification of Actuators for Power-Operated Valve Assemblies with Safety-Related Functions for Nuclear Power Plants.
- 3. APP-GW-GLN-144, AP1000 Design Control Document High Frequency Seismic Tier 1 Changes, Westinghouse Electric Company LLC.
3.10-7 Revision 5
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR 3.11 Environmental Qualification of Mechanical and Electrical Equipment This section presents information to demonstrate that the mechanical and electrical portions of the engineered safety features, the reactor protection systems, and selected portions of the post-accident monitoring system are capable of performing their designated functions while exposed to applicable normal, abnormal, test, accident, and post-accident environmental conditions. The information presented includes identification of the equipment required to be environmentally qualified and, for each item of equipment, the designated functional requirements, definition of the applicable environmental parameters, and documentation of the qualification process employed to demonstrate the required environmental capability. The seismic qualification of mechanical and electrical equipment is presented in Section 3.10. The portions of post-accident monitoring equipment required to be environmentally qualified are identified in Table 7.5-1.
3.11.1 Equipment Identification and Environmental Conditions 3.11.1.1 Equipment Identification A complete list of environmentally qualified electrical and mechanical equipment that is essential to emergency reactor shutdown, containment isolation, reactor core cooling, or containment and reactor heat removal, or that is otherwise essential in preventing significant release of radioactive material to the environment, is provided in Table 3.11-1. A list of environmentally qualified electrical and mechanical equipment and a summary of electrical and mechanical equipment qualification results are maintained as part of the equipment qualification file, as outlined in Appendix 3D. The equipment qualification file is maintained during the equipment selection and procurement phase as defined in Subsection 3.11.5.
3.11.1.2 Definition of Environmental Conditions Appendix 3D identifies applicable normal, abnormal, and design basis accident environmental conditions conforming to General Design Criterion 4. These environmental conditions are associated with various plant areas by an environmental zone, as noted in Table 3D.5-1 and Table 3.11-1.
For mild environments, the area conditions do not change as the result of an accident. There are no degrading environmental effects that lead to common mode failure of the equipment. The qualification of mechanical and electrical equipment located in a mild environment is demonstrated by conducting the plant surveillance activities carried out during the operational phase of the plant.
The environmental conditions identified in Appendix 3D are defined as follows.
Normal operating environmental conditions are defined as those conditions existing during routine plant operations for which the equipment is expected to be available on a continuous basis to perform required functions.
Abnormal environmental conditions are those plant conditions for which the equipment is designed to operate for a period of time without accelerating normal periodic tests, inspections, and maintenance schedules for that equipment. The maximum and minimum conditions identified as the abnormal condition are based on the design limits for the affected areas.
Design basis accident (DBA) and post-design basis accident conditions are those plant conditions resulting from various postulated equipment and piping failures during which the equipment identified in Table 3.11-1 must operate without impairment of the function. The design basis accident and post-design basis accident conditions are discussed in Appendix 3D.
Compatibility of equipment with the specified environmental conditions is achieved by the following.
3.11-1 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Systems and components required to mitigate the consequences of a design basis accident or to perform safe shutdown operation are qualified to remain functional after exposure to the environmental conditions in Table 3D.5-5.
Environmentally qualified equipment exposed to a harsh environment has a qualified life goal of 60 years. Demonstration of qualified life by test or test and analysis is provided to address applicable aging effects. For critical components susceptible to aging, a qualified life is established that includes the effects of the total integrated radiation dose experienced at their respective locations within the plant. When a 60-year qualified life is not achievable, a shorter qualified life is established, and a replacement program is implemented.
For equipment located in a mild environment, a design life goal is established by using known significant aging mechanisms and reliability data.
Equipment qualification takes into account the most severe environmental conditions resulting from the design basis high-energy line break. Included in these conditions are the short-term peak transient temperature following a main steam line break (MSLB) and a radiation exposure and temperature due to a loss of coolant accident (LOCA) within the reactor containment.
Postulated high-energy line failures as defined in Subsection 3.6.2.1.2 are assumed in areas where high-energy lines greater than 1 inch are routed. Essential equipment is protected against the effects of jet impingement (Subsection 3.6.2.4.1) and evaluated for spray effects if required (Subsection 3.6.2.7).
Active mechanical equipment is qualified for operability as discussed in Subsection 3.9.3 and Section 3.10. This operability program, combined with the qualification of the electrical appurtenances (valve operators, solenoids, limit switches), demonstrates qualification under required environmental conditions. Active mechanical equipment is defined as equipment that performs a mechanical motion as part of its safety-related function.
Nonactive mechanical equipment whose only safety function is structural integrity is designed according to ASME Code guidelines. The accident and post-accident environmental effects are considered in the design of such structural components as pump casings and valve bodies.
The environmental qualification program is restricted to evaluating the design of critical nonmetallic subcomponents of active devices in a harsh environment, where failure results in loss of the active component.
In the event of potential flooding/wetting, one of the following criteria is applied for protection of equipment for service in such an environment:
Equipment will be qualified for submergence due to flooding/wetting.
Equipment will be protected from wetting due to spray.
Equipment will be evaluated to show that failure of the equipment due to flooding/wetting is acceptable since its safety-related function is not required or has otherwise been accomplished.
3.11.1.3 Equipment Operability Times For the AP1000 Class 1E electrical and active mechanical equipment, post-accident operability times are shown in Table 3D.4-2 in Appendix 3D.
Specific information for each device qualified as part of the IEEE 323-1974 qualification program is contained in the appropriate equipment qualification data package.
3.11-2 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR The active mechanical component is qualified for operability as discussed in Section 3.10, using test, analysis, or a combination of tests and analyses. This operability program, combined with the qualification of the electrical appurtenances (for example, valve operators) discussed in the appropriate equipment qualification data packages, demonstrates qualification.
3.11.1.4 Standard Review Plan Evaluation A discussion of the Standard Review Plan requirements in regard to environmental qualification of mechanical equipment is provided in Subsection 1.9.2.
3.11.2 Qualification Tests and Analysis 3.11.2.1 Environmental Qualification of Electrical Equipment The AP1000 approach for environmental qualification of Class 1E equipment is outlined in Appendix 3D. The Appendix 3D methodology is developed based on the guidelines provided in IEEE 323-1974 (Reference 1) and IEEE 344-1987 (Reference 2).
Qualification for equipment in a harsh environment is based on type testing or testing and analysis.
Analysis may be used to determine significant aging mechanisms in mild environment applications.
Type testing includes thermal and mechanical aging, radiation, and exposure to extremes of environmental, seismic, and vibration effects. Type testing is done with representative samples of the production line equipment according to the sequence indicated in IEEE 323-1974 to the specified service conditions, including margin. The testing takes into account normal and abnormal plant operation and design basis accident and post-design basis accident operations, as required.
When reliable data and proven analytical methods are available, environmental qualification may be based on analysis supported by partial type test data. This method includes justification of the methods, theories, and assumptions used (that is, mathematical or logical proof based on actual test data) that the equipment meets or exceeds its specified performance requirements when subjected to normal, abnormal, and design basis accident environmental conditions.
Regulatory guides providing guidance for meeting the requirements of 10CFR50, Appendix A, General Design Criteria 1, 2, 4, 23, and 50; Appendix B, Criteria III, XI, and XVII to 10CFR50 and 10CFR50.49, include Regulatory Guide 1.89, Regulatory Guide 1.30, Regulatory Guide 1.63, Regulatory Guide 1.73, Regulatory Guide 1.100, and Regulatory Guide 1.131. The maintenance surveillance program follows the guidance of Regulatory Guide 1.33.
Additional information regarding conformance with each of these regulatory guides is given in Section 1.9.
3.11.2.2 Environmental Qualification of Mechanical Equipment AP1000 mechanical components identified in Table 3.11-1 are qualified by design to perform their required functions under the appropriate environmental effects of normal, abnormal, accident, and post-accident conditions as required by General Design Criterion 4 and discussed in Appendix 3D.
For mild environments, the area conditions do not change as a result of an accident. There are no degrading environmental effects that lead to common mode failure of equipment in mild environments. Mechanical equipment located in harsh environmental zones is designed to perform under the appropriate environmental conditions.
For mechanical equipment, there are two categories of components:
3.11-3 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Active equipment - equipment that performs a mechanical motion as part of its safety-related function.
The program for environmental qualification of active mechanical components is based on a combination of design, test, and analysis of critical sub-components, which is supported by maintenance and surveillance programs.
Nonactive equipment - equipment whose only safety-related function is structural integrity.
Nonactive components are designed for structural integrity according to ASME Code,Section III, as discussed in Section 3.9.
3.11.3 Loss of Ventilation The abnormal environmental conditions shown on Tables 3D.5-3 and 3D.5-4 reflect anticipated maximum conditions based on loss of normal ventilation systems.
Normal containment heat removal is provided by the nonsafety-related containment air recirculation cooling system. If this system is out of service for an extended period of time, the passive containment cooling system may be initiated to maintain the temperature and pressure below the limits noted. Environmentally qualified equipment located in containment performs its functions under these conditions until the normal containment cooling system is restored.
Equipment areas outside containment and outside the main control room are maintained at normal environmental conditions by nonsafety-related HVAC systems. If these systems are disabled, the heat generated by this equipment is absorbed by the surrounding passive heat sinks with an ambient temperature rise that does not exceed the abnormal condition. Normal HVAC is restored within 8 hours9.259259e-5 days <br />0.00222 hours <br />1.322751e-5 weeks <br />3.044e-6 months <br /> or ventilation is provided as discussed in Subsection 9.4.1.2.3.2.
If the normal nonsafety-related main control room HVAC is lost, the heat generated by equipment and people is absorbed by the surrounding passive heat sinks. Normal heating, ventilation, and air-conditioning is restored within 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> or ventilation is provided as discussed in Section 6.4.
3.11.4 Estimated Radiation and Chemical Environment The plant-specific estimates of the radiation dose incurred by equipment during normal operation is shown in Table 3D.5-2 and the estimated doses following a loss-of-coolant accident are defined in Table 3D.5-5.
The identified equipment is qualified to perform functions in the radiation environments present during normal and design basis accident conditions. The normal operational exposure is based upon design source terms presented in Chapter 11 and Subsection 12.2.1. The equipment and shielding configurations are presented in Section 12.3. Post-accident monitoring, reactor trip and engineered safety features system and component radiation exposures are dependent on the location of the equipment in the plant. Source terms and other accident parameters are presented in Subsection 12.2.1 and Chapter 15.
The maximum combined integrated radiation dose inside containment is based on the effects of the normally expected radiation environment (gamma) over the equipments installed life plus that associated with the most severe design basis event (gamma and beta) during or following which the equipment is required to remain functional.
The chemical environment following a loss of coolant accident is primarily based on the chemistry of the reactor coolant system fluid since there is no caustic containment spray. Sump pH adjustments are considered for certain qualification tests. This is discussed further in Appendix 3D.
3.11-4 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR 3.11.5 Combined License Information Item for Equipment Qualification File Westinghouse Electric Company LLC will act as the contractor for the COL holder during the equipment design phase, equipment selection and procurement phase, equipment qualification phase, plant construction phase, and ITAAC inspection phases.
The COL holder is responsible for the maintenance of the equipment qualification file upon receipt from the reactor vendor. The documentation necessary to support the continued qualification of the equipment installed in the plant that is within the Environmental Qualification (EQ) Program scope is available in accordance with 10 CFR Part 50 Appendix A, General Design Criterion 1.
EQ files developed by the reactor vendor are maintained as applicable for equipment and certain post-accident monitoring devices that are subject to a harsh environment. The contents of the qualification files are discussed in Section 3D.7. The files are maintained for the operational life of the plant.
For equipment not located in a harsh environment, design specifications received from the reactor vendor are retained. Any plant modifications that impact the equipment use the original specifications for modification or procurement. This process is governed by applicable plant design control or configuration control procedures.
Central to the EQ Program is the EQ Master Equipment List (EQMEL). This EQMEL identifies the electrical and mechanical equipment or components that must be environmentally qualified for use in a harsh environment. The EQMEL consists of equipment that is essential to emergency reactor shutdown, containment isolation, reactor core cooling, or containment and reactor heat removal, or that is otherwise essential in preventing significant release of radioactive material to the environment.
This list is developed from the equipment list provided in Table 3.11-1. The EQMEL and a summary of equipment qualification results are maintained as part of the equipment qualification file for the operational life of the plant.
Administrative programs are in place to control revision to the EQ files and the EQMEL. When adding or modifying components in the EQ Program, EQ files are generated or revised to support qualification. The EQMEL is revised to reflect these new components. To delete a component from the EQ Program, a deletion justification is prepared that demonstrates why the component can be deleted. This justification consists of an analysis of the component, an associated circuit review if appropriate, and a safety evaluation. The justification is released and/or referenced on an appropriate change document. For changes to the EQMEL, supporting documentation is completed and approved prior to issuing the changes. This documentation includes safety reviews and new or revised EQ files. Plant modifications and design basis changes are subject to change process reviews, e.g. reviews in accordance with 10 CFR 50.59 or Section VIII of Appendix D to 10 CFR Part 52, in accordance with appropriate plant procedures. These reviews address EQ issues associated with the activity. Any changes to the EQMEL that are not the result of a modification or design basis change are subject to a separate review that is accomplished and documented in accordance with plant procedures.
Engineering change documents or maintenance documents generated to document work performed on an EQ component, which may not have an impact on the EQ file, are reviewed against the current revision of the EQ files for potential impact. Changes to EQ documentation may be due to, but not limited to, plant modifications, calculations, corrective maintenance, or other EQ concerns.
Table 13.4-201 provides milestones for EQ implementation.
3.11-5 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR 3.11.6 References
- 1. IEEE 323-1974, IEEE Standard for Qualifying Class 1E Equipment for Nuclear Power Generating Stations.
- 2. IEEE 344-1987, IEEE Recommended Practices for Seismic Qualification of Class 1E Equipment for Nuclear Power Generating Stations.
3.11-6 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 1 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
BATTERIES IDSA 125V 60 Cell Battery 1A IDSA-DB-1A 2 RT 5 min E ESF 24 hrs PAMS 24 hrs IDSA 125V 60 Cell Battery 1B IDSA-DB-1B 2 RT 5 min E ESF 24 hrs PAMS 24 hrs IDSB 125V 60 Cell Battery 1A IDSB-DB-1A 2 RT 5 min E ESF 24 hrs PAMS 24 hrs IDSB 125V 60 Cell Battery 1B IDSB-DB-1B 2 RT 5 min E ESF 24 hrs PAMS 24 hrs IDSB 125V 60 Cell Battery 2A IDSB-DB-2A 2 RT 5 min E ESF 24 hrs PAMS 72 hrs IDSB 125V 60 Cell Battery 2B IDSB-DB-2B 2 RT 5 min E ESF 24 hrs PAMS 72 hrs IDSC 125V 60 Cell Battery 1A IDSC-DB-1A 2 RT 5 min E ESF 24 hrs PAMS 24 hrs IDSC 125V 60 Cell Battery 1B IDSC-DB-1B 2 RT 5 min E ESF 24 hrs PAMS 24 hrs IDSC 125V 60 Cell Battery 2A IDSC-DB-2A 2 RT 5 min E ESF 24 hrs PAMS 72 hrs IDSC 125V 60 Cell Battery 2B IDSC-DB-2B 2 RT 5 min E ESF 24 hrs PAMS 72 hrs IDSD 125V 60 Cell Battery 1A IDSD-DB-1A 2 RT 5 min E ESF 24 hrs PAMS 24 hrs IDSD 125V 60 Cell Battery 1B IDSD-DB-1B 2 RT 5 min E ESF 24 hrs PAMS 24 hrs Spare 125V 60 Cell Battery 1A IDSS-DB-1A 2 RT 5 min E ESF 24 hrs PAMS 72 hrs Spare 125V 60 Cell Battery 1B IDSS-DB-1B 2 RT 5 min E ESF 24 hrs PAMS 72 hrs 3.11-7 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 2 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
BATTERY CHARGERS IDSA Battery Charger IDSA-DC-1 2 ISOL 24 hrs E RT 5 min ESF 24 hrs IDSB Battery Charger 1 IDSB-DC-1 2 ISOL 24 hrs E RT 5 min ESF 24 hrs IDSB Battery Charger 2 IDSB-DC-2 2 ISOL 72 hrs E IDSC Battery Charger 1 IDSC-DC-1 2 ISOL 24 hrs E RT 5 min ESF 24 hrs IDSC Battery Charger 2 IDSC-DC-2 2 ISOL 72 hrs E IDSD Battery Charger IDSD-DC-1 2 ISOL 24 hrs E RT 5 min ESF 24 hrs Spare Battery Charger IDSS-DC-1 2 ISOL 72 hrs E DISTRIBUTION PANELS IDSA 250 Vdc Dist Panel IDSA-DD-1 2 ESF 24 hrs E IDSB 250 Vdc Dist Panel IDSB-DD-1 2 ESF 24 hrs E IDSC 250 Vdc Dist Panel IDSC-DD-1 2 ESF 24 hrs E IDSD 250 Vdc Dist Panel IDSD-DD-1 2 ESF 24 hrs E IDSA 120 Vac Dist Panel 1 IDSA-EA-1 2 RT 5 min E ESF 24 hrs PAMS 24 hrs IDSA 120 Vac Dist Panel 2 IDSA-EA-2 2 RT 5 min E ESF 24 hrs PAMS 24 hrs IDSB 120 Vac Dist Panel 1 IDSB-EA-1 2 RT 5 min E ESF 24 hrs PAMS 24 hrs IDSB 120 Vac Dist Panel 2 IDSB-EA-2 2 RT 5 min E ESF 24 hrs PAMS 2 wks IDSB 120 Vac Dist Panel 3 IDSB-EA-3 2 PAMS 2 wks E IDSC 120 Vac Dist Panel 1 IDSC-EA-1 2 RT 5 min E ESF 24 hrs PAMS 24 hrs IDSC 120 Vac Dist Panel 2 IDSC-EA-2 2 RT 5 min E ESF 24 hrs PAMS 2 wks IDSC 120 Vac Dist Panel 3 IDSC-EA-3 2 PAMS 2 wks E IDSD 120 Vac Dist Panel 1 IDSD-EA-1 2 RT 5 min E ESF 24 hrs PAMS 24 hrs 3.11-8 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 3 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
IDSD 120 Vac Dist Panel 2 IDSD-EA-2 2 RT 5 min E ESF 24 hrs PAMS 24 hrs FUSE PANELS IDSA Fuse Panel IDSA-EA-4 2 ISOL 24 hrs E IDSA Battery Monitor Fuse Panel IDSA-EA-5 2 ISOL 24 hrs E IDSB Fuse Panel IDSB-EA-4 2 ISOL 24 hrs E IDSB Fuse Panel IDSB-EA-5 2 ISOL 2 wks E IDSB Fuse Panel IDSB-EA-6 2 ISOL 2 wks E IDSB Battery Monitor Fuse Panel IDSB-EA-7 2 ISOL 24 hrs E IDSB Battery Monitor Fuse Panel IDSB-EA-8 2 ISOL 2 wks E IDSC Fuse Panel IDSC-EA-4 2 ISOL 24 hrs E IDSC Fuse Panel IDSC-EA-5 2 ISOL 2 wks E IDSC Fuse Panel IDSC-EA-6 2 ISOL 2 wks E IDSC Battery Monitor Fuse Panel IDSC-EA-7 2 ISOL 24 hrs E IDSC Battery Monitor Fuse Panel IDSC-EA-8 2 ISOL 2 wks E IDSD Fuse Panel IDSD-EA-4 2 ISOL 24 hrs E IDSD Battery Monitor Fuse Panel IDSD-EA-5 2 ISOL 24 hrs E IDSS Battery Monitor Fuse Panel IDSS-EA-1 2 ISOL 2 wks E STAND-ALONE ELECTRICAL ISOLATION DEVICES Current-to-Current Transmitter 1 WLS-JD-MISX01 2 ISOL 24 hrs E Current-to-Current Transmitter 1 WLS-JD-MISX02 2 ISOL 24 hrs E Current-to-Current Transmitter 1 WLS-JD-MISX03 2 ISOL 24 hrs E TRANSFER SWITCHES IDSA Fused Transfer Switch Box 1 IDSA-DF-1 2 RT 5 min E ESF 24 hrs PAMS 24 hrs IDSB Fused Transfer Switch Box 1 IDSB-DF-1 2 RT 5 min E ESF 24 hrs PAMS 24 hrs IDSB Fused Transfer Switch Box 2 IDSB-DF-2 2 RT 5 min E ESF 24 hrs PAMS 72 hrs IDSC Fused Transfer Switch Box 1 IDSC-DF-1 2 RT 5 min E ESF 24 hrs PAMS 24 hrs IDSC Fused Transfer Switch Box 2 IDSC-DF-2 2 RT 5 min E ESF 24 hrs PAMS 72 hrs IDSD Fused Transfer Switch Box 1 IDSD-DF-1 2 RT 5 min E ESF 24 hrs PAMS 24 hrs 3.11-9 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 4 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
IDSS Fused Transfer Switch Box 1 IDSS-DF-1 2 RT 5 min E (Spare) ESF 24 hrs PAMS 72 hrs IDSS Spare Battery Termination Box IDSS-DF-3 2 RT 5 min E ESF 24 hrs PAMS 72 hrs MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS IDSA 250 Vdc MCC IDSA-DK-1 2 ESF 24 hrs E IDSB 250 Vdc MCC IDSB-DK-1 2 ESF 24 hrs E IDSC 250 Vdc MCC IDSC-DK-1 2 ESF 24 hrs E IDSD 250 Vdc MCC IDSD-DK-1 2 ESF 24 hrs E SWITCHBOARDS IDSA 250 Vdc Switchboard 1 IDSA-DS-1 2 RT 5 min E ESF 24 hrs PAMS 24 hrs IDSB 250 Vdc Switchboard 1 IDSB-DS-1 2 RT 5 min E ESF 24 hrs PAMS 24 hrs IDSB 250 Vdc Switchboard 2 IDSB-DS-2 2 RT 5 min E ESF 24 hrs PAMS 72 hrs IDSC 250 Vdc Switchboard 1 IDSC-DS-1 2 RT 5 min E ESF 24 hrs PAMS 24 hrs IDSC 250 Vdc Switchboard 2 IDSC-DS-2 2 RT 5 min E ESF 24 hrs PAMS 72 hrs IDSD 250 Vdc Switchboard 1 IDSD-DS-1 2 RT 5 min E ESF 24 hrs PAMS 24 hrs TRANSFORMERS IDSA Regulating Transformer 1 IDSA-DT-1 2 ISOL 24 hrs E IDSB Regulating Transformer 1 IDSB-DT-1 2 ISOL 72 hrs E PAMS 2 wks IDSC Regulating Transformer 1 IDSC-DT-1 2 ISOL 72 hrs E PAMS 2 wks IDSD Regulating Transformer 1 IDSD-DT-1 2 ISOL 24 hrs E INVERTERS IDSA Inverter IDSA-DU-1 2 RT 5 min E ESF 24 hrs PAMS 24 hrs IDSB Inverter 1 IDSB-DU-1 2 RT 5 min E ESF 24 hrs PAMS 24 hrs 3.11-10 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 5 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
IDSB Inverter 2 IDSB-DU-2 2 RT 5 min E ESF 24 hrs PAMS 2 wks IDSC Inverter 1 IDSC-DU-1 2 RT 5 min E ESF 24 hrs PAMS 24 hrs IDSC Inverter 2 IDSC-DU-2 2 RT 5 min E ESF 24 hrs PAMS 2 wks IDSD Inverter IDSD-DU-1 2 RT 5 min E ESF 24 hrs PAMS 24 hrs SWITCHGEAR RCP 1A 6900V Switchgear 31 ECS-ES-31 2 ESF 5 min E PAMS 2 wks RCP 1A 6900V Switchgear 32 ECS-ES-32 2 ESF 5 min E PAMS 2 wks RCP 2A 6900V Switchgear 51 ECS-ES-51 2 ESF 5 min E PAMS 2 wks RCP 2A 6900V Switchgear 52 ECS-ES-52 2 ESF 5 min E PAMS 2 wks RCP 1B 6900V Switchgear 41 ECS-ES-41 2 ESF 5 min E PAMS 2 wks RCP 1B 6900V Switchgear 42 ECS-ES-42 2 ESF 5 min E PAMS 2 wks RCP 2B 6900V Switchgear 61 ECS-ES-61 2 ESF 5 min E PAMS 2 wks RCP 2B 6900V Switchgear 62 ECS-ES-62 2 ESF 5 min E PAMS 2 wks Junction Box Division A PMS-EJ-001A 1 RT 5 min E*S ESF 24 hrs PAMS 4 mos Junction Box Division B PMS-EJ-001B 1 RT 5 min E*S ESF 24 hrs PAMS 4 mos Junction Box Division C PMS-EJ-001C 1 RT 5 min E*S ESF 24 hrs PAMS 4 mos Junction Box Division D PMS-EJ-001D 1 RT 5 min E*S ESF 24 hrs PAMS 4 mos Junction Box Division A PMS-EJ-002A 1 RT 5 min E*S ESF 24 hrs PAMS 4 mos 3.11-11 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 6 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
Junction Box Division B PMS-EJ-002B 1 RT 5 min E*S ESF 24 hrs PAMS 4 mos Junction Box Division C PMS-EJ-002C 1 RT 5 min E*S ESF 24 hrs PAMS 4 mos Junction Box Division D PMS-EJ-002D 1 RT 5 min E*S ESF 24 hrs PAMS 4 mos Reactor Trip Switchgear PMS-JD-RTSA01 4 RT 5 min E PAMS 2 wks Reactor Trip Switchgear PMS-JD-RTSA02 4 RT 5 min E PAMS 2 wks Reactor Trip Switchgear PMS-JD-RTSB01 4 RT 5 min E PAMS 2 wks Reactor Trip Switchgear PMS-JD-RTSB02 4 RT 5 min E PAMS 2 wks Reactor Trip Switchgear PMS-JD-RTSC01 4 RT 5 min E PAMS 2 wks Reactor Trip Switchgear PMS-JD-RTSC02 4 RT 5 min E PAMS 2 wks Reactor Trip Switchgear PMS-JD-RTSD01 4 RT 5 min E PAMS 2 wks Reactor Trip Switchgear PMS-JD-RTSD02 4 RT 5 min E PAMS 2 wks LEVEL TRANSMITTERS Core Makeup Tank A Narrow Range PXS-JE-LE011A 1 ESF 24 hrs E*S Upper Level PAMS 4 mos PXS-JE-LT011A 2 ESF 24 hrs E*
PAMS 4 mos Core Makeup Tank A Narrow Range PXS-JE-LE011B 1 ESF 24 hrs E*S Upper Level PAMS 4 mos PXS-JE-LT011B 2 ESF 24 hrs E*
PAMS 4 mos Core Makeup Tank A Narrow Range PXS-JE-LE011C 1 ESF 24 hrs E*S Upper Level PAMS 4 mos PXS-JE-LT011C 2 ESF 24 hrs E*
PAMS 4 mos Core Makeup Tank A Narrow Range PXS-JE-LE011D 1 ESF 24 hrs E*S Upper Level PAMS 4 mos PXS-JE-LT011D 2 ESF 24 hrs E*
PAMS 4 mos Core Makeup Tank B Narrow Range PXS-JE-LE012A 1 ESF 24 hrs E*S Upper Level PAMS 4 mos PXS-JE-LT012A 2 ESF 24 hrs E*
PAMS 4 mos 3.11-12 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 7 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
Core Makeup Tank B Narrow Range PXS-JE-LE012B 1 ESF 24 hrs E*S Upper Level PAMS 4 mos PXS-JE-LT012B 2 ESF 24 hrs E*
PAMS 4 mos Core Makeup Tank B Narrow Range PXS-JE-LE012C 1 ESF 24 hrs E*S Upper Level PAMS 4 mos PXS-JE-LT012C 2 ESF 24 hrs E*
PAMS 4 mos Core Makeup Tank B Narrow Range PXS-JE-LE012D 1 ESF 24 hrs E*S Upper Level PAMS 4 mos PXS-JE-LT012D 2 ESF 24 hrs E*
PAMS 4 mos Core Makeup Tank A Narrow Range PXS-JE-LE013A 1 ESF 24 hrs E*S Lower Level PAMS 4 mos PXS-JE-LT013A 2 ESF 24 hrs E*
PAMS 4 mos Core Makeup Tank A Narrow Range PXS-JE-LE013B 1 ESF 24 hrs E*S Lower Level PAMS 4 mos PXS-JE-LT013B 2 ESF 24 hrs E*
PAMS 4 mos Core Makeup Tank A Narrow Range PXS-JE-LE013C 1 ESF 24 hrs E*S Lower Level PAMS 4 mos PXS-JE-LT013C 2 ESF 24 hrs E*
PAMS 4 mos Core Makeup Tank A Narrow Range PXS-JE-LE013D 1 ESF 24 hrs E*S Lower Level PAMS 4 mos PXS-JE-LT013D 2 ESF 24 hrs E*
PAMS 4 mos Core Makeup Tank B Narrow Range PXS-JE-LE014A 1 ESF 24 hrs E*S Lower Level PAMS 4 mos PXS-JE-LT014A 2 ESF 24 hrs E*
PAMS 4 mos Core Makeup Tank B Narrow Range PXS-JE-LE014B 1 ESF 24 hrs E*S Lower Level PAMS 4 mos PXS-JE-LT014B 2 ESF 24 hrs E*
PAMS 4 mos Core Makeup Tank B Narrow Range PXS-JE-LE014C 1 ESF 24 hrs E*S Lower Level PAMS 4 mos PXS-JE-LT014C 2 ESF 24 hrs E*
PAMS 4 mos Core Makeup Tank B Narrow Range PXS-JE-LE014D 1 ESF 24 hrs E*S Lower Level PAMS 4 mos PXS-JE-LT014D 2 ESF 24 hrs E*
PAMS 4 mos Containment Floodup Level PXS-JE-LE050 1 PAMS 4 mos E*S PXS-JE-LT050 2 PAMS 4 mos E*
Containment Floodup Level PXS-JE-LE051 1 PAMS 4 mos E*S PXS-JE-LT051 2 PAMS 4 mos E*
3.11-13 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 8 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
Containment Floodup Level PXS-JE-LE052 1 PAMS 4 mos E*S PXS-JE-LT052 2 PAMS 4 mos E*
NEUTRON DETECTORS Source Range Neutron Detector RXS-JE-NE001A 1 RT Note 3 E*
ESF Note 3 Source Range Neutron Detector RXS-JE-NE001B 1 RT Note 3 E*
ESF Note 3 Source Range Neutron Detector RXS-JE-NE001C 1 RT Note 3 E*
ESF Note 3 Source Range Neutron Detector RXS-JE-NE001D 1 RT Note 3 E*
ESF Note 3 Intermediate Range RXS-JE-NE002A 1 RT Note 3 E*S Neutron Detector PAMS 4 mos Intermediate Range RXS-JE-NE002B 1 RT Note 3 E*S Neutron Detector PAMS 4 mos Intermediate Range RXS-JE-NE002C 1 RT Note 3 E*S Neutron Detector PAMS 4 mos Intermediate Range RXS-JE-NE002D 1 RT Note 3 E*S Neutron Detector PAMS 4 mos Power Range Neutron RXS-JE-NE003A 1 RT 5 min E*S Detector (Lower)
Power Range Neutron RXS-JE-NE003B 1 RT 5 min E*S Detector (Lower)
Power Range Neutron RXS-JE-NE003C 1 RT 5 min E*S Detector (Lower)
Power Range Neutron RXS-JE-NE003D 1 RT 5 min E*S Detector (Lower)
Power Range Neutron RXS-JE-NE004A 1 RT 5 min E*S Detector (Upper)
Power Range Neutron RXS-JE-NE004B 1 RT 5 min E*S Detector (Upper)
Power Range Neutron RXS-JE-NE004C 1 RT 5 min E*S Detector (Upper)
Power Range Neutron RXS-JE-NE004D 1 RT 5 min E*S Detector (Upper)
RADIATION MONITORS Containment High Range PXS-JE-RE160 1 ESF 24 hrs E*S Area Monitor PAMS 4 mos Containment High Range PXS-JE-RE161 1 ESF 24 hrs E*S Area Monitor PAMS 4 mos Containment High Range PXS-JE-RE162 1 ESF 24 hrs E*S Area Monitor PAMS 4 mos Containment High Range PXS-JE-RE163 1 ESF 24 hrs E*S Area Monitor PAMS 4 mos 3.11-14 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 9 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
Control Room Supply Air Area VBS-JE-RE001A 2 ESF 24 hrs E Radiation Monitor - Particulate Detector Control Room Supply Air Area VBS-JE-RE001B 2 ESF 24 hrs E Radiation Monitor - Particulate Detector Control Room Supply Air Area VBS-JE-RE002A 2 ESF 24 hrs E Radiation Monitor - Iodine Detector Control Room Supply Air Area VBS-JE-RE002B 2 ESF 24 hrs E Radiation Monitor - Iodine Detector Control Room Supply Air Area VBS-JE-RE003A 2 ESF 24 hrs E Radiation Monitor - Noble Gas Detector Control Room Supply Air Area VBS-JE-RE003B 2 ESF 24 hrs E Radiation Monitor - Noble Gas Detector Control Room Supply Air Area VBS-JE-FT011A 2 ESF 24 hrs E Radiation Monitor - Air Flow Transmitter Control Room Supply Air Area VBS-JE-FT011B 2 ESF 24 hrs E Radiation Monitor - Air Flow Transmitter Control Room Supply Air Area VBS-MP-01A 2 ESF 24 hrs E Radiation Monitor - Sample Pump Control Room Supply Air Area VBS-MP-01B 2 ESF 24 hrs E Radiation Monitor - Sample Pump Control Room Supply Air Area VBS-JE-RY001A 2 ESF 24 hrs E Radiation Monitor - Local Radiation Processor Control Room Supply Air Area VBS-JE-RY001B 2 ESF 24 hrs E Radiation Monitor - Local Radiation Processor RESISTANCE TEMPERATURE DETECTORS PRHR HX Outlet Temperature RCS-JE-TE161 1 PAMS 4 mos E*S RCS Cold Leg 1A Narrow Range RCS-JE-TE121A 1 RT 5 min E*S Temperature ESF 5 min RCS Cold Leg 1A Narrow Range RCS-JE-TE121D 1 RT 5 min E*S Temperature ESF 5 min RCS Cold Leg 1B Narrow Range RCS-JE-TE121B 1 RT 5 min E*S Temperature ESF 5 min RCS Cold Leg 1B Narrow Range RCS-JE-TE121C 1 RT 5 min E*S Temperature ESF 5 min RCS Cold Leg 2A Narrow Range RCS-JE-TE122B 1 RT 5 min E*S Temperature ESF 5 min RCS Cold Leg 2A Narrow Range RCS-JE-TE122C 1 RT 5 min E*S Temperature ESF 5 min RCS Cold Leg 2B Narrow Range RCS-JE-TE122A 1 RT 5 min E*S Temperature ESF 5 min RCS Cold Leg 2B Narrow Range RCS-JE-TE122D 1 RT 5 min E*S Temperature ESF 5 min 3.11-15 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 10 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
RCS Hot Leg 1 Narrow Range RCS-JE-TE131A 1 RT 5 min E*S Temperature ESF 5 min RCS Hot Leg 1 Narrow Range RCS-JE-TE131C 1 RT 5 min E*S Temperature ESF 5 min RCS Hot Leg 1 Narrow Range RCS-JE-TE132A 1 RT 5 min E*S Temperature ESF 5 min RCS Hot Leg 1 Narrow Range RCS-JE-TE132C 1 RT 5 min E*S Temperature ESF 5 min RCS Hot Leg 1 Narrow Range RCS-JE-TE133C 1 RT 5 min E*S Temperature ESF 5 min RCS Hot Leg 1 Narrow Range RCS-JE-TE133A 1 RT 5 min E*S Temperature ESF 5 min RCS Hot Leg 2 Narrow Range RCS-JE-TE131B 1 RT 5 min E*S Temperature ESF 5 min RCS Hot Leg 2 Narrow Range RCS-JE-TE131D 1 RT 5 min E*S Temperature ESF 5 min RCS Hot Leg 2 Narrow Range RCS-JE-TE132B 1 RT 5 min E*S Temperature ESF 5 min RCS Hot Leg 2 Narrow Range RCS-JE-TE132D 1 RT 5 min E*S Temperature ESF 5 min RCS Hot Leg 2 Narrow Range RCS-JE-TE133B 1 RT 5 min E*S Temperature ESF 5 min RCS Hot Leg 2 Narrow Range RCS-JE-TE133D 1 RT 5 min E*S Temperature ESF 5 min RCS Cold Leg 1A Dual Range RCS-JE-TE125A 1 RT 5 min E*S Temperature ESF 5 min PAMS 4 mos RCS Cold Leg 1B Dual Range RCS-JE-TE125C 1 RT 5 min E*S Temperature ESF 5 min PAMS 4 mos RCS Cold Leg 2A Dual Range RCS-JE-TE125B 1 RT 5 min E*S Temperature ESF 5 min PAMS 4 mos RCS Cold Leg 2B Dual Range RCS-JE-TE125D 1 RT 5 min E*S Temperature ESF 5 min PAMS 4 mos RCS Hot Leg 1 Wide Range RCS-JE-TE135A 1 PAMS 4 mos E*S Temperature RCS Hot Leg 2 Wide Range RCS-JE-TE135B 1 PAMS 4 mos E*S Temperature PZR Reference Leg Level RCS-JE-TE193A 1 RT 5 min E*S Temperature ESF 5 min PAMS 4 mos 3.11-16 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 11 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
PZR Reference Leg Level RCS-JE-TE193B 1 RT 5 min E*S Temperature ESF 5 min PAMS 4 mos PZR Reference Leg Level RCS-JE-TE193C 1 RT 5 min E*S Temperature ESF 5 min PAMS 4 mos PZR Reference Leg Level RCS-JE-TE193D 1 RT 5 min E*S Temperature ESF 5 min PAMS 4 mos RCP 1A Bearing Water Temperature RCS-JE-TE211A 1 RT Note 3 E*
ESF 5 min RCP 1A Bearing Water Temperature RCS-JE-TE211B 1 RT Note 3 E*
ESF 5 min RCP 1A Bearing Water Temperature RCS-JE-TE211C 1 RT Note 3 E*
ESF 5 min RCP 1A Bearing Water Temperature RCS-JE-TE211D 1 RT Note 3 E*
ESF 5 min RCP 1B Bearing Water Temperature RCS-JE-TE212A 1 RT Note 3 E*
ESF 5 min RCP 1B Bearing Water Temperature RCS-JE-TE212B 1 RT Note 3 E*
ESF 5 min RCP 1B Bearing Water Temperature RCS-JE-TE212C 1 RT Note 3 E*
ESF 5 min RCP 1B Bearing Water Temperature RCS-JE-TE212D 1 RT Note 3 E*
ESF 5 min RCP 2A Bearing Water Temperature RCS-JE-TE213A 1 RT Note 3 E*
ESF 5 min RCP 2A Bearing Water Temperature RCS-JE-TE213B 1 RT Note 3 E*
ESF 5 min RCP 2A Bearing Water Temperature RCS-JE-TE213C 1 RT Note 3 E*
ESF 5 min RCP 2A Bearing Water Temperature RCS-JE-TE213D 1 RT Note 3 E*
ESF 5 min RCP 2B Bearing Water Temperature RCS-JE-TE214A 1 RT Note 3 E*
ESF 5 min RCP 2B Bearing Water Temperature RCS-JE-TE214B 1 RT Note 3 E*
ESF 5 min RCP 2B Bearing Water Temperature RCS-JE-TE214C 1 RT Note 3 E*
ESF 5 min RCP 2B Bearing Water Temperature RCS-JE-TE214D 1 RT Note 3 E*
ESF 5 min Containment Operating Floor VCS-JE-TE052A 1 PAMS 4 mos E*
Temperature Containment Operating Floor VCS-JE-TE052B 1 PAMS 4 mos E*
Temperature 3.11-17 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 12 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
Steam Generator 1 Area Containment VCS-JE-TE054 1 PAMS 4 mos E*
Temperature Pressurizer Area Containment VCS-JE-TE055 1 PAMS 4 mos E*
Temperature CVS Module Containment Temperature VCS-JE-TE056 1 PAMS 4 mos E*
Accumulator Room B Containment VCS-JE-TE057 1 PAMS 4 mos E*
Temperature Steam Generator 2 Area Containment VCS-JE-TE058 1 PAMS 4 mos E*
Temperature Accumulator Room A Containment VCS-JE-TE-059 1 PAMS 4 mos E*
Temperature SPEED SENSORS RCP 1A Pump Speed RCS-JE-ST281 1 RT Note 3 E*
RCP 1B Pump Speed RCS-JE-ST282 1 RT Note 3 E*
RCP 2A Pump Speed RCS-JE-ST283 1 RT Note 3 E*
RCP 2B Pump Speed RCS-JE-ST284 1 RT Note 3 E*
RCP 1A Speed Sensor Preamplifier PMS-JD-MIS01A 2 RT Note 3 E Enclosure RCP 1B Speed Sensor Preamplifier PMS-JD-MIS01B 2 RT Note 3 E Enclosure RCP 2A Speed Sensor Preamplifier PMS-JD-MIS02A 2 RT Note 3 E Enclosure RCP 2B Speed Sensor Preamplifier PMS-JD-MIS02B 2 RT Note 3 E Enclosure THERMOCOUPLES Incore Thermocouples IIS-JE-TE001 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S through IIS-JE-TE042 TRANSMITTERS PCS Water Delivery Flow PCS-JE-FT001 9 PAMS 2 wks E PCS Water Delivery Flow PCS-JE-FT002 9 PAMS 2 wks E PCS Water Delivery Flow PCS-JE-FT003 9 PAMS 2 wks E PCS Water Delivery Flow PCS-JE-FT004 9 PAMS 2 wks E PCS Storage Tank Water Level PCS-JE-LT010 9 PAMS 2 wks E PCS Storage Tank Water Level PCS-JE-LT011 9 PAMS 2 wks E PRHR HX Flow PXS-JE-FT049A 1 PAMS 4 mos E*S PRHR HX Flow PXS-JE-FT049B 1 PAMS 4 mos E*S RCS Hot Leg 1 Flow RCS-JE-FT101A 1 RT Note 3 E*
RCS Hot Leg 1 Flow RCS-JE-FT101B 1 RT Note 3 E*
RCS Hot Leg 1 Flow RCS-JE-FT101C 1 RT Note 3 E*
RCS Hot Leg 1 Flow RCS-JE-FT101D 1 RT Note 3 E*
RCS Hot Leg 2 Flow RCS-JE-FT102A 1 RT Note 3 E*
RCS Hot Leg 2 Flow RCS-JE-FT102B 1 RT Note 3 E*
RCS Hot Leg 2 Flow RCS-JE-FT102C 1 RT Note 3 E*
RCS Hot Leg 2 Flow RCS-JE-FT102D 1 RT Note 3 E*
SG1 Startup Feedwater Flow SGS-JE-FT055A 2 ESF 5 min E 3.11-18 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 13 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
PAMS 2 wks SG1 Startup Feedwater Flow SGS-JE-FT055B 2 ESF 5 min E PAMS 2 wks SG2 Startup Feedwater Flow SGS-JE-FT056A 2 ESF 5 min E PAMS 2 wks SG2 Startup Feedwater Flow SGS-JE-FT056B 2 ESF 5 min E PAMS 2 wks Flexible Hose from SG1 to Upper Tap SGS-PY-Y01A 1 PB 1 yr M*
LT001/LT011 Flexible Hose from SG2 to Upper Tap SGS-PY-Y01B 1 PB 1 yr M*
LT005/LT013 Flexible Hose from SG1 to Lower Tap SGS-PY-Y02A 1 PB 1 yr M*
LT001 Flexible Hose from SG2 to Lower Tap SGS-PY-Y02B 1 PB 1 yr M*
LT005 Flexible Hose from SG1 to Upper Tap SGS-PY-Y03A 1 PB 1 yr M*
LT002/LT015 Flexible Hose from SG2 to Upper Tap SGS-PY-Y03B 1 PB 1 yr M*
LT006/LT014 Flexible Hose from SG1 to Lower Tap SGS-PY-Y04A 1 PB 1 yr M*
LT002 Flexible Hose from SG2 to Lower Tap SGS-PY-Y04B 1 PB 1 yr M*
LT006 Flexible Hose from SG1 to Upper Tap SGS-PY-Y05A 1 PB 1 yr M*
LT003/LT012/LT044 Flexible Hose from SG2 to Upper Tap SGS-PY-Y05B 1 PB 1 yr M*
LT007/LT017/LT046 Flexible Hose from SG1 to Lower Tap SGS-PY-Y06A 1 PB 1 yr M*
LT003 Flexible Hose from SG2 to Lower Tap SGS-PY-Y06B 1 PB 1 yr M*
LT007 Flexible Hose from SG1 to Upper Tap SGS-PY-Y07A 1 PB 1 yr M*
LT004/LT016/LT045 Flexible Hose from SG2 to Upper Tap SGS-PY-Y07B 1 PB 1 yr M*
LT008/LT018/LT047 Flexible Hose from SG1 to Lower Tap SGS-PY-Y08A 1 PB 1 yr M*
LT004 Flexible Hose from SG2 to Lower Tap SGS-PY-Y08B 1 PB 1 yr M*
LT008 Flexible Hose from SG1 to Lower Tap SGS-PY-Y09A 1 PB 1 yr M*
LT011 Flexible Hose from SG2 to Lower Tap SGS-PY-Y09B 1 PB 1 yr M*
LT013 Flexible Hose from SG1 to Lower Tap SGS-PY-Y10A 1 PB 1 yr M*
LT012 Flexible Hose from SG2 to Lower Tap SGS-PY-Y10B 1 PB 1 yr M*
LT014 3.11-19 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 14 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
Flexible Hose from SG1 to Lower Tap SGS-PY-Y11A 1 PB 1 yr M*
LT015/LT044 Flexible Hose from SG2 to Lower Tap SGS-PY-Y11B 1 PB 1 yr M*
LT017/LT046 Flexible Hose from SG1 to Lower Tap SGS-PY-Y12A 1 PB 1 yr M*
LT016/LT045 Flexible Hose from SG2 to Lower Tap SGS-PY-Y12B 1 PB 1 yr M*
LT018/LT047 Flexible Hose from SG1 to Lower Tap SGS-PY-Y13A 1 PB 1 yr M*
FT024 Flexible Hose from SG2 to Lower Tap SGS-PY-Y13B 1 PB 1 yr M*
FT025 Flexible Hose from SG1 to Lower Tap SGS-PY-Y14A 1 PB 1 yr M*
FT021 Flexible Hose from SG2 to Lower Tap SGS-PY-Y14B 1 PB 1 yr M*
FT023 Flexible Hose from SG1 to Lower Tap SGS-PY-Y15A 1 PB 1 yr M*
FT020 Flexible Hose from SG2 to Lower Tap SGS-PY-Y15B 1 PB 1 yr M*
FT022 Flexible Hose from Main Steam Line to SGS-PY-Y16A 1 PB 1 yr M*
Upper Tap FT020 Flexible Hose from Main Steam Line to SGS-PY-Y16B 1 PB 1 yr M*
Upper Tap FT022 Flexible Hose from Main Steam Line to SGS-PY-Y17A 1 PB 1 yr M*
Upper Tap FT021 Flexible Hose from Main Steam Line to SGS-PY-Y17B 1 PB 1 yr M*
Upper Tap FT023 Flexible Hose from Main Steam Line to SGS-PY-Y18A 1 PB 1 yr M*
Upper Tap FT024 Flexible Hose from Main Steam Line to SGS-PY-Y18B 1 PB 1 yr M*
Upper Tap FT025 Flexible Hose from Main Steam Line to SGS-PY-Y19A 1 PB 1 yr M*
PT030 Flexible Hose from Main Steam Line to SGS-PY-Y19B 1 PB 1 yr M*
PT034 Flexible Hose from Main Steam Line to SGS-PY-Y20A 1 PB 1 yr M*
PT032 Flexible Hose from Main Steam Line to SGS-PY-Y20B 1 PB 1 yr M*
PT036 MCR Air Delivery Line Flowrate - A VES-JE-FT003A 3 PAMS 72 hrs E MCR Air Delivery Line Flowrate - B VES-JE-FT003B 3 PAMS 72 hrs E IRWST Wide Range Level PXS-JE-LT046 1 PAMS 4 mos E*S IRWST Wide Range Level PXS-JE-LT047 1 PAMS 4 mos E*S ESF 24 hrs IRWST Wide Range Level PXS-JE-LT048 1 PAMS 4 mos E*S ESF 24 hrs 3.11-20 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 15 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
IRWST Lower Narrow Range Level PXS-JE-LT066 1 ESF 24 hrs E*S PAMS 24 hrs IRWST Lower Narrow Range Level PXS-JE-LT067 1 ESF 24 hrs E*S PAMS 24 hrs IRWST Lower Narrow Range Level PXS-JE-LT068 1 ESF 24 hrs E*S PAMS 24 hrs IRWST Lower Narrow Range Level PXS-JE-LT069 1 ESF 24 hrs E*S PAMS 24 hrs RCS Hot Leg Water Level RCS-JE-LT160A 1 PAMS 2 wks E*S RCS Hot Leg Water Level RCS-JE-LT160B 1 PAMS 2 wks E*S PZR Level RCS-JE-LT195A 1 RT 5 min E*S ESF 5 min PAMS 4 mos PZR Level RCS-JE-LT195B 1 RT 5 min E*S ESF 5 min PAMS 4 mos PZR Level RCS-JE-LT195C 1 RT 5 min E*S ESF 5 min PAMS 4 mos PZR Level RCS-JE-LT195D 1 RT 5 min E*S ESF 5 min PAMS 4 mos SG1 Narrow Range Level SGS-JE-LT001 1 RT 5 min E*S ESF 5 min PAMS 2 wks SG1 Narrow Range Level SGS-JE-LT002 1 RT 5 min E*S ESF 5 min PAMS 2 wks SG1 Narrow Range Level SGS-JE-LT003 1 RT 5 min E*S ESF 5 min PAMS 2 wks SG1 Narrow Range Level SGS-JE-LT004 1 RT 5 min E*S ESF 5 min PAMS 2 wks SG2 Narrow Range Level SGS-JE-LT005 1 RT 5 min E*S ESF 5 min PAMS 2 wks SG2 Narrow Range Level SGS-JE-LT006 1 RT 5 min E*S ESF 5 min PAMS 2 wks SG2 Narrow Range Level SGS-JE-LT007 1 RT 5 min E*S ESF 5 min PAMS 2 wks 3.11-21 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 16 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
SG2 Narrow Range Level SGS-JE-LT008 1 RT 5 min E*S ESF 5 min PAMS 2 wks SG1 Wide Range Level SGS-JE-LT011 1 ESF 5 min E*S PAMS 2 wks SG1 Wide Range Level SGS-JE-LT012 1 ESF 5 min E*S PAMS 2 wks SG1 Wide Range Level SGS-JE-LT015 1 ESF 5 min E*S PAMS 2 wks SG1 Wide Range Level SGS-JE-LT016 1 ESF 5 min E*S PAMS 2 wks SG2 Wide Range Level SGS-JE-LT013 1 ESF 5 min E*S PAMS 2 wks SG2 Wide Range Level SGS-JE-LT014 1 ESF 5 min E*S PAMS 2 wks SG2 Wide Range Level SGS-JE-LT017 1 ESF 5 min E*S PAMS 2 wks SG2 Wide Range Level SGS-JE-LT018 1 ESF 5 min E*S PAMS 2 wks Spent Fuel Pool Level SFS-JE-LT019A 6 ESF 24 hrs E ** S PAMS 2 wks Spent Fuel Pool Level SFS-JE-LT019B 7 ESF 24 hrs E ** S PAMS 2 wks Spent Fuel Pool Level SFS-JE-LT019C 6 ESF 24 hrs E ** S PAMS 2 wks WLS Auxiliary Building RCA Floodup WLS-JE-LT400A 6 (Note 8) 24 hrs E ** S Level WLS Auxiliary Building RCA Floodup WLS-JE-LT400B 6 (Note 8) 24 hrs E ** S Level Containment Pressure PCS-JE-PT005 7 ESF 5 min E*
Normal Range PAMS 4 mos Containment Pressure PCS-JE-PT006 7 ESF 5 min E*
Normal Range PAMS 4 mos Containment Pressure PCS-JE-PT007 7 ESF 5 min E*
Normal Range PAMS 4 mos Containment Pressure PCS-JE-PT008 7 ESF 5 min E*
Normal Range PAMS 4 mos Containment Pressure PCS-JE-PT012 7 PAMS 4 mos E*
Extended Range Containment Pressure PCS-JE-PT013 7 PAMS 4 mos E*
Extended Range Containment Pressure PCS-JE-PT014 7 PAMS 4 mos E*
Extended Range Accumulator A Pressure Transmitter PXS-JE-PT027 1 PAMS 4 mos E*
Accumulator B Pressure Transmitter PXS-JE-PT028 1 PAMS 4 mos E*
3.11-22 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 17 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
Accumulator A Pressure Transmitter PXS-JE-PT029 1 PAMS 4 mos E*
Accumulator B Pressure Transmitter PXS-JE-PT030 1 PAMS 4 mos E*
RCS Wide Range Pressure RCS-JE-PT140A 1 PAMS 4 mos E*S ESF 5 min RCS Wide Range Pressure RCS-JE-PT140B 1 PAMS 4 mos E*S ESF 5 min RCS Wide Range Pressure RCS-JE-PT140C 1 PAMS 4 mos E*S ESF 5 min RCS Wide Range Pressure RCS-JE-PT140D 1 PAMS 4 mos E*S ESF 5 min PZR Pressure RCS-JE-PT191A 1 RT 5 min E*S ESF 5 min PAMS 4 mos PZR Pressure RCS-JE-PT191B 1 RT 5 min E*S ESF 5 min PAMS 4 mos PZR Pressure RCS-JE-PT191C 1 RT 5 min E*S ESF 5 min PAMS 4 mos PZR Pressure RCS-JE-PT191D 1 RT 5 min E*S ESF 5 min PAMS 4 mos Main Steam Line SG1 Pressure SGS-JE-PT030 1 ESF 5 min E*S PAMS 2 wks Main Steam Line SG1 Pressure SGS-JE-PT031 2 ESF 5 min E PAMS 2 wks Main Steam Line SG1 Pressure SGS-JE-PT032 1 ESF 5 min E*S PAMS 2 wks Main Steam Line SG1 Pressure SGS-JE-PT033 2 ESF 5 min E PAMS 2 wks Main Steam Line SG2 Pressure SGS-JE-PT034 1 ESF 5 min E*S PAMS 2 wks Main Steam Line SG2 Pressure SGS-JE-PT035 2 ESF 5 min E PAMS 2 wks Main Steam Line SG2 Pressure SGS-JE-PT036 1 ESF 5 min E*S PAMS 2 wks Main Steam Line SG2 Pressure SGS-JE-PT037 2 ESF 5 min E PAMS 2 wks Main Control Room Differential VES-JE-PDT004A 3 ESF 2 wks E Pressure PAMS 2 wks Main Control Room Differential VES-JE-PDT004B 3 ESF 2 wks E Pressure PAMS 2 wks 3.11-23 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 18 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
PROTECTION AND SAFETY MONITORING SYSTEMS Protection and Safety Monitoring Multiple 2 RT 5 min E System Cabinets (Note 7) ESF 24 hrs PAMS 2 wks MCR/RSR Transfer Switch Panel OCS-JW-001 2 RT 5 min E ESF 24 hrs Bistable Coincident Logic Cabinet 01 PMS-JD-BCCA01 2 RT 5 min E Division A ESF 24 hrs PAMS 2 wks Bistable Coincident Logic Cabinet 02 PMS-JD-BCCA02 2 RT 5 min E Division A ESF 24 hrs PAMS 2 wks Bistable Coincident Logic Cabinet 01 PMS-JD-BCCB01 2 RT 5 min E Division B ESF 24 hrs PAMS 2 wks Bistable Coincident Logic Cabinet 02 PMS-JD-BCCB02 2 RT 5 min E Division B ESF 24 hrs PAMS 2 wks Bistable Coincident Logic Cabinet 01 PMS-JD-BCCC01 2 RT 5 min E Division C ESF 24 hrs PAMS 2 wks Bistable Coincident Logic Cabinet 02 PMS-JD-BCCC02 2 RT 5 min E Division C ESF 24 hrs PAMS 2 wks Bistable Coincident Logic Cabinet 01 PMS-JD-BCCD01 2 RT 5 min E Division D ESF 24 hrs PAMS 2 wks Bistable Coincident Logic Cabinet 02 PMS-JD-BCCD02 2 RT 5 min E Division D ESF 24 hrs PAMS 2 wks Integrated Logic Cabinet 01 Division A PMS-JD-ILCA01 2 ESF 24 hrs E Integrated Logic Cabinet 02 Division A PMS-JD-ILCA02 2 ESF 24 hrs E Integrated Logic Cabinet 03 Division A PMS-JD-ILCA03 2 ESF 24 hrs E Integrated Logic Cabinet 01 Division B PMS-JD-ILCB01 2 ESF 24 hrs E Integrated Logic Cabinet 02 Division B PMS-JD-ILCB02 2 ESF 24 hrs E Integrated Logic Cabinet 03 Division B PMS-JD-ILCB03 2 ESF 24 hrs E Integrated Logic Cabinet 04 Division B PMS-JD-ILCB04 2 ESF 24 hrs E Integrated Logic Cabinet 01 Division C PMS-JD-ILCC01 2 ESF 24 hrs E Integrated Logic Cabinet 02 Division C PMS-JD-ILCC02 2 ESF 24 hrs E Integrated Logic Cabinet 01 Division D PMS-JD-ILCD01 2 ESF 24 hrs E Integrated Logic Cabinet 02 Division D PMS-JD-ILCD02 2 ESF 24 hrs E Integrated Logic Cabinet 03 Division D PMS-JD-ILCD03 2 ESF 24 hrs E Integrated Logic Cabinet 04 Division D PMS-JD-ILCD04 2 ESF 24 hrs E Maintenance and Test Cabinet Division A PMS-JD-MTCA01 2 PAMS 2 wks E Maintenance and Test Cabinet Division B PMS-JD-MTCB01 2 PAMS 2 wks E Maintenance and Test Cabinet Division C PMS-JD-MTCC01 2 PAMS 2 wks E Maintenance and Test Cabinet Division D PMS-JD-MTCD01 2 PAMS 2 wks E 3.11-24 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 19 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
Nuclear Instrumentation Cabinet PMS-JD-NICA01 2 RT 5 min E Division A ESF 24 hrs PAMS 2 wks Nuclear Instrumentation Cabinet PMS-JD-NICB01 2 RT 5 min E Division B ESF 24 hrs PAMS 2 wks Nuclear Instrumentation Cabinet PMS-JD-NICC01 2 RT 5 min E Division C ESF 24 hrs PAMS 2 wks Nuclear Instrumentation Cabinet PMS-JD-NICD01 2 RT 5 min E Division D ESF 24 hrs PAMS 2 wks Qualified Data Processing System PMS-JD-QDPB01 2 ESF 24 hrs E Cabinet Division B PAMS 2 wks Qualified Data Processing System PMS-JD-QDPC01 2 ESF 24 hrs E Cabinet Division C PAMS 2 wks Division A Squib Valve Controller Cabinet PMS-JD-SVCA01 2 ESF 24 hrs E Division B Squib Valve Controller Cabinet PMS-JD-SVCB01 2 ESF 24 hrs E Division C Squib Valve Controller Cabinet PMS-JD-SVCC01 2 ESF 24 hrs E Division D Squib Valve Controller Cabinet PMS-JD-SVCD01 2 ESF 24 hrs E Source Range Neutron Flux PMS-JW-005A 2 RT, ESF Note 3 E Preamplifier Panel A Source Range Neutron Flux PMS-JW-005B 2 RT, ESF Note 3 E Preamplifier Panel B Source Range Neutron Flux PMS-JW-005C 2 RT, ESF Note 3 E Preamplifier Panel C Source Range Neutron Flux PMS-JW-005D 2 RT, ESF Note 3 E Preamplifier Panel D Intermediate Range Neutron Flux PMS-JW-006A 2 RT Note 3 E Preamplifier Panel A PAMS 2 wks Intermediate Range Neutron Flux PMS-JW-006B 2 RT Note 3 E Preamplifier Panel B PAMS 2 wks Intermediate Range Neutron Flux PMS-JW-006C 2 RT Note 3 E Preamplifier Panel C PAMS 2 wks Intermediate Range Neutron Flux PMS-JW-006D 2 RT Note 3 E Preamplifier Panel D PAMS 2 wks MAIN CONTROL ROOM Operator Workstation A N/A 3 RT 5 min E ESF 24 hrs PAMS 2 wks Operator Workstation B N/A 3 RT 5 min E ESF 24 hrs PAMS 2 wks Supervisor Workstation N/A 3 RT 5 min E ESF 24 hrs PAMS 2 wks 3.11-25 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 20 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
Switch Station N/A 3 RT 5 min E (Including Switches) ESF 24 hrs Qualified Safety Display Division A PMS-JD-QSPA01 3 ESF 24 hrs E PAMS 2 wks Qualified Safety Display Division B PMS-JD-QSPB01 3 ESF 24 hrs E PAMS 2 wks Qualified Safety Display Division C PMS-JD-QSPC01 3 ESF 24 hrs E PAMS 2 wks Qualified Safety Display Division D PMS-JD-QSPD01 3 ESF 24 hrs E PAMS 2 wks MCR Load Shed Panel 1 VES-EP-01 2 ESF 24 hrs ES PAMS 2 wks MCR Load Shed Panel 2 VES-EP-02 2 ESF 24 hrs E PAMS 2 wks PENETRATIONS Penetrations (Mechanical) See Table 6.2.3-1 M*S Equipment Hatch CNS-MY-Y01 1, 7, 9 PB 4 mos M*S Maintenance Hatch CNS-MY-Y02 1, 7 PB 4 mos M*S Upper Personnel Hatch - 135'-3 CNS-MY-Y03 1, 7, 9 PB 4 mos M*S Lower Personnel Hatch - 107'-2 CNS-MY-Y04 1, 7 PB 4 mos M*S Penetrations (Electrical) See Figure 3.8.2-4 E*S ACTIVE VALVES Containment Isolation - Air Out CAS-PL-V014 2 ESF 5 min M Solenoid Valve CAS-PL-V014-S 2 ESF 5 min E Limit Switch CAS-PL-V014-L 2 PAMS 2 wks E Containment Isolation - Air In CAS-PL-V015 1 ESF 24 hrs M*S Containment Isolation - Inlet CCS-PL-V200 2 ESF 5 min M Limit Switch CCS-PL-V200-L 2 PAMS 2 wks E Motor Operator CCS-PL-V200-M 2 ESF 5 min E Service Air Supply Inside CAS-PL-V205 1 ESF 24 hrs M*S Containment Isolation Containment Isolation - Inlet CCS-PL-V201 1 ESF 24 hrs M*S Containment Isolation - Outlet CCS-PL-V207 1 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch CCS-PL-V207-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Motor Operator CCS-PL-V207-M 1 ESF 5 min E*S Containment Isolation - Outlet CCS-PL-V208 2 ESF 5 min M Limit Switch CCS-PL-V208-L 2 PAMS 2 wks E Motor Operator CCS-PL-V208-M 2 ESF 5 min E CCS Containment Isolation Relief CCS-PL-V220 1 ESF 24 hrs M*S CCS IRC Relief Valve CCS-PL-V270 1 ESF 24 hrs M* S CCS IRC Relief Valve CCS-PL-V271 1 ESF 24 hrs M* S RCS Purification Stop Valve CVS-PL-V001 1 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch CVS-PL-V001-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Motor Operator CVS-PL-V001-M 1 ESF 5 min E*S 3.11-26 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 21 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
RCS Purification Stop Valve CVS-PL-V002 1 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch CVS-PL-V002-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Motor Operator CVS-PL-V002-M 1 ESF 5 min E*S RCS Letdown Stop Valve CVS-PL-V003 1 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch CVS-PL-V003-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Motor Operator CVS-PL-V003-M 1 ESF 5 min E*S Demineralizer Flush Line Relief Valve CVS-PL-V042 1 ESF 24 hrs M*S WLS Letdown IRC Isolation CVS-PL-V045 1 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch CVS-PL-V045-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Solenoid Valve CVS-PL-V045-S1 1 ESF 5 min E*S Letdown Flow ORC Isolation CVS-PL-V047 7 ESF 5 min M ** S Limit Switch CVS-PL-V047-L 7 PAMS 2 wks E ** S Solenoid Valve CVS-PL-V047-S1 7 ESF 5 min E ** S Letdown Line Containment Isolation CVS-PL-V058 1 ESF 24 hrs M*S Thermal Relief CVS Makeup Line Bypass Check Valve CVS-PL-V067 1 ESF 5 min M* S RCS Purification Check Valve CVS-PL-V080 1 ESF 5 min M*S RCS Purification Stop Valve CVS-PL-V081 1 ESF 5 min M*S RCS Purification Check Valve CVS-PL-V082 1 ESF 5 min M*S Auxiliary PZR Spray Isolation CVS-PL-V084 1 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch CVS-PL-V084-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Solenoid Valve CVS-PL-V084-S 1 ESF 5 min E*S Auxiliary PZR Spray Isolation CVS-PL-V085 1 ESF 5 min M*S Makeup Line Containment Isolation CVS-PL-V090 7 ESF 5 min M ** S Limit Switch CVS-PL-V090-L 7 PAMS 2 wks E ** S Motor Operator CVS-PL-V090-M 7 ESF 5 min E ** S Makeup Line Containment Isolation CVS-PL-V091 1 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch CVS-PL-V091-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Motor Operator CVS-PL-V091-M 1 ESF 5 min E*S Zinc Injection Containment CVS-PL-V092 10 ESF 5 min M*S Isolation Limit Switch CVS-PL-V092-L 10 PAMS 2 wks E*S Solenoid Valve CVS-PL-V092-S 10 ESF 5 min E*S Zinc Injection Containment CVS-PL-V094 1 ESF 5 min M*S Isolation IRC Limit Switch CVS-PL-V094-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Solenoid Valve CVS-PL-V094-S 1 ESF 5 min E*S Zinc Injection Containment Isolation CVS-PL-V098 1 ESF 24 hrs M*S Thermal Overpressurization Relief Valve Makeup Containment Isolation CVS-PL-V100 1 ESF 24 hrs M*S Demineralizer Water System Isolation CVS-PL-V136A 7 ESF 5 min M **
Limit Switch CVS-PL-V136A-L 7 PAMS 2 wks E **
Solenoid Valve CVS-PL-V136A-S 7 ESF 5 min E **
3.11-27 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 22 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
Demineralized Water System Isolation CVS-PL-V136B 7 ESF 5 min M **
Limit Switch CVS-PL-V136B-L 7 PAMS 2 wks E **
Solenoid Valve CVS-PL-V136B-S 7 ESF 5 min E **
Hydrogen Injection Containment CVS-PL-V217 1 ESF 24 hrs M*S Isolation Check IRC Hydrogen Injection Containment CVS-PL-V219 10 ESF 5 min M*S Isolation Limit Switch CVS-PL-V219-L 10 PAMS 2 wks E*S Solenoid Valve CVS-PL-V219-S 10 ESF 5 min E*S DWS Containment Penetration DWS-PL-V241 1 ESF 24 hrs M*S Thermal Relief Valve Demin Water Supply Containment DWS-PL-V245 1 ESF 24 hrs M*S Isolation - Inside Fuel Transfer Tube Gate Valve FHS-PL-V001 11 ESF 2 wks M **
Fire Water Containment Supply FPS-PL-V052 1 ESF 24 hrs M*S Isolation - Inside FPS Containment Penetration FPS-PL-V702 1 ESF 24 hrs M*S Thermal Relief Valve PCCWST Isolation Valve PCS-PL-V001A 9 ESF 5 min M **
Limit Switch PCS-PL-V001A-L 9 PAMS 2 wks E **
Solenoid Valve PCS-PL-V001A-S1 9 ESF 5 min E **
PCCWST Isolation Valve PCS-PL-V001B 9 ESF 5 min M **
Limit Switch PCS-PL-V001B-L 9 PAMS 2 wks E **
Solenoid Valve PCS-PL-V001B-S1 9 ESF 5 min E **
PCCWST Isolation Valve PCS-PL-V001C 9 ESF 5 min M **
Limit Switch PCS-PL-V001C-L 9 PAMS 2 wks E **
Motor Operator PCS-PL-V001C-M 9 ESF 5 min E **
PCCWST Isolation Valve PCS-PL-V002A 9 ESF 5 min M **
Limit Switch PCS-PL-V002A-L 9 PAMS 2 wks E **
Motor Operator PCS-PL-V002A-M 9 ESF 5 min E **
PCCWST Isolation Valve PCS-PL-V002B 9 ESF 5 min M **
Limit Switch PCS-PL-V002B-L 9 PAMS 2 wks E **
Motor Operator PCS-PL-V002B-M 9 ESF 5 min E **
PCCWST Isolation Valve PCS-PL-V002C 9 ESF 5 min M **
Limit Switch PCS-PL-V002C-L 9 PAMS 2 wks E **
Motor Operator PCS-PL-V002C-M 9 ESF 5 min E **
PCCWST Fire Protection Isolation PCS-PL-V005 10 ESF 72 hrs M*S PCCWST Emergency Spent Fuel Pool PCS-PL-V009 9 ESF 2 wks M **
Makeup Isolation Water Bucket Makeup Line Drain PCS-PL-V015 10 ESF 2 wks M*S Valve Water Bucket Makeup Line Isolation PCS-PL-V020 10 ESF 2 wks M*S Valve PCS Recirculation Isolation PCS-PL-V023 10 ESF 72 hrs M*S PCCWST Long-Term Makeup Check PCS-PL-V039 10 ESF 2 wks M*S Valve 3.11-28 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 23 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
PCCWST Long Term Makeup Isolation PCS-PL-V042 10 ESF 2 wks M*S Drain Valve PCCWST Long Term Makeup Isolation PCS-PL-V044 10 ESF 2 wks M*S Valve Emergency Makeup to the Spent Fuel PCS-PL-V045 7 ESF 2 wks M Pool Isolation Valve PCCWST Recirculation Return PCS-PL-V046 10 ESF 2 wks M*S Isolation Valve Emergency Makeup to the Spent Fuel PCS-PL-V049 7 ESF 2 wks M Pool Drain Isolation Valve Spent Fuel Pool Long Term Makeup PCS-PL-V050 10 ESF 2 wks M*S Isolation Valve Spent Fuel Pool Emergency Makeup PCS-PL-V051 7 ESF 2 wks M Lower Isolation Valve Containment Isolation - Air Sample PSS-PL-V008 1 ESF 4 mos M*S Line Limit Switch PSS-PL-V008-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Solenoid Operator PSS-PL-V008-S 1 ESF 5 min E*S Voltage Control Box PSS-DJ-05 2 ESF 5 min E Containment Isolation - Liquid PSS-PL-V010A 1 ESF 4 mos M*S Sample Line Limit Switch PSS-PL-V010A-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Solenoid Operator PSS-PL-V010A-S 1 ESF 5 min E*S Voltage Control Box PSS-DJ-03 2 ESF 5 min E Containment Isolation - Liquid PSS-PL-V010B 1 ESF 4 mos M*S Sample Line Limit Switch PSS-PL-V010B-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Solenoid Operator PSS-PL-V010B-S 1 ESF 5 min E*S Voltage Control Box PSS-DJ-04 2 ESF 5 min E Containment Isolation - Liquid PSS-PL-V011A 6 ESF 2 wks M **
Sample Line Limit Switch PSS-PL-V011A-L 6 PAMS 2 wks E **
Solenoid Valve PSS-PL-V011A-S 6 ESF 5 min E **
Containment Isolation - Liquid PSS-PL-V011B 6 ESF 2 wks M **
Sample Line Limit Switch PSS-PL-V011B-L 6 PAMS 2 wks E **
Solenoid Valve PSS-PL-V011B-S 6 ESF 5 min E **
Containment Isolation - Sample Return PSS-PL-V023 6 ESF 2 wks M **
Line Limit Switch PSS-PL-V023-L 6 PAMS 2 wks E **
Solenoid Valve PSS-PL-V023-S 6 ESF 5 min E **
Containment Isolation - Sample Return PSS-PL-V024 1 ESF 4 mos M*S Line Limit Switch PSS-PL-V024-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Solenoid Operator PSS-PL-V024-S 1 ESF 5 min E*S Voltage Control Box PSS-DJ-06 2 ESF 5 min E 3.11-29 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 24 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
Containment Isolation - Air Sample PSS-PL-V046 6 ESF 2 wks M **
Line Limit Switch PSS-PL-V046-L 6 PAMS 2 wks E **
Solenoid Valve PSS-PL-V046-S 6 ESF 2 wks E **
PWS MCR Isolation Valve PWS-PL-V418 2 ESF 5 min M PWS MCR Isolation Valve PWS-PL-V420 3 ESF 5 min M PWS MCR Vacuum Relief PWS-PL-V498 3 ESF 5 min M Core Makeup Tank A Discharge PXS-PL-V014A 1 ESF 5 min M*S Isolation Limit Switch PXS-PL-V014A-L 1 PAMS 1 yr (Note 9) E*S Solenoid Valve PXS-PL-V014A-S1 1 ESF 5 min E*S Core Makeup Tank B Discharge PXS-PL-V014B 1 ESF 5 min M*S Isolation Limit Switch PXS-PL-V014B-L 1 PAMS 1 yr (Note 9) E*S Solenoid Valve PXS-PL-V014B-S1 1 ESF 5 min E*S Core Makeup Tank A Discharge PXS-PL-V015A 1 ESF 5 min M*S Isolation Limit Switch PXS-PL-V015A-L 1 PAMS 1 yr (Note 9) E*S Solenoid Valve PXS-PL-V015A-S1 1 ESF 5 min E*S Core Makeup Tank B Discharge PXS-PL-V015B 1 ESF 5 min M*S Isolation Limit Switch PXS-PL-V015B-L 1 PAMS 1 yr (Note 9) E*S Solenoid Valve PXS-PL-V015B-S1 1 ESF 5 min E*S Core Makeup Tank A Discharge PXS-PL-V016A 1 ESF 5 min M*S Core Makeup Tank B Discharge PXS-PL-V016B 1 ESF 5 min M*S Core Makeup Tank A Discharge PXS-PL-V017A 1 ESF 5 min M*S Core Makeup Tank B Discharge PXS-PL-V017B 1 ESF 5 min M*S Accumulator A Pressure Relief PXS-PL-V022A 1 ESF 5 min M*S Accumulator B Pressure Relief PXS-PL-V022B 1 ESF 5 min M*S Accumulator A Discharge PXS-PL-V028A 1 ESF 5 min M*S Accumulator B Discharge PXS-PL-V028B 1 ESF 5 min M*S Accumulator A Discharge PXS-PL-V029A 1 ESF 5 min M*S Accumulator B Discharge PXS-PL-V029B 1 ESF 5 min M*S Nitrogen Supply Outside PXS-PL-V042 2 ESF 5 min M Containment Isolation Limit Switch PXS-PL-V042-L 2 PAMS 2 wks E Solenoid Valve PXS-PL-V042-S 2 ESF 5 min E Nitrogen Supply Containment Isolation PXS-PL-V043 1 ESF 24 hrs M*S IRC Check Valve PRHR HX Discharge Isolation PXS-PL-V108A 1 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch PXS-PL-V108A-L 1 PAMS 1 yr (Note 10) E*S Solenoid Valve PXS-PL-V108A-S1 1 ESF 5 min E*S PRHR HX Discharge Isolation PXS-PL-V108B 1 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch PXS-PL-V108B-L 1 PAMS 1 yr (Note 10) E*S Solenoid Valve PXS-PL-V108B-S1 1 ESF 5 min E*S 3.11-30 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 25 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
Recirc Sump A Isolation PXS-PL-V118A 1 ESF 72 hrs M*S Limit Switch PXS-PL-V118A-L 1 PAMS 1 yr (Note 9) E*S Squib Operator PXS-PL-V118A-T 1 ESF 72 hrs E*S Recirc Sump B Isolation PXS-PL-V118B 1 ESF 72 hrs M*S Limit Switch PXS-PL-V118B-L 1 PAMS 1 yr (Note 9) E*S Squib Operator PXS-PL-V118B-T 1 ESF 72 hrs E*S Recirc Sump A PXS-PL-V119A 1 ESF 1 yr M*S Recirc Sump B PXS-PL-V119B 1 ESF 1 yr M*S Recirc Sump A PXS-PL-V120A 1 ESF 72 hrs M*S Limit Switch PXS-PL-V120A-L 1 PAMS 1 yr (Note 9) E*S Squib Operator PXS-PL-V120A-T 1 ESF 72 hrs E*S Recirc Sump B PXS- PL-V120B 1 ESF 72 hrs M*S Limit Switch PXS-PL-V120B-L 1 PAMS 1 yr (Note 9) E*S Squib Operator PXS-PL-V120B-T 1 ESF 72 hrs E*S IRWST Injection A PXS-PL-V122A 1 ESF 1 yr M*S IRWST Injection B PXS-PL-V122B 1 ESF 1 yr M*S IRWST Injection A PXS-PL-V123A 1 ESF 72 hrs M*S Limit Switch PXS-PL-V123A-L 1 PAMS 1 yr (Note 9) E*S Squib Operator PXS-PL-V123A-T 1 ESF 72 hrs E*S IRWST Injection B PXS-PL-V123B 1 ESF 72 hrs M*S Limit Switch PXS-PL-V123B-L 1 PAMS 1 yr (Note 9) E*S Squib Operator PXS-PL-V123B-T 1 ESF 72 hrs E*S IRWST Injection A PXS-PL-V124A 1 ESF 1 yr M*S IRWST Injection B PXS-PL-V124B 1 ESF 1 yr M*S IRWST Injection A PXS-PL-V125A 1 ESF 72 hrs M*S Limit Switch PXS-PL-V125A-L 1 PAMS 1 yr (Note 9) E*S Squib Operator PXS-PL-V125A-T 1 ESF 72 hrs E*S IRWST Injection B PXS-PL-V125B 1 ESF 72 hrs M*S Limit Switch PXS-PL-V125B-L 1 PAMS 1 yr (Note 9) E*S Squib Operator PXS-PL-V125B-T 1 ESF 72 hrs E*S IRWST Gutter Drain Isolation A PXS-PL-V130A 1 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch PXS-PL-V130A-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Solenoid Valve PXS-PL-V130A-S1 1 ESF 5 min E*S IRWST Gutter Drain Isolation B PXS-PL-V130B 1 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch PXS-PL-V130B-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Solenoid Valve PXS-PL-V130B-S1 1 ESF 5 min E*S First Stage ADS RCS-PL-V001A 1 ESF 24 hrs M*S Limit Switch RCS-PL-V001A-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Motor Operator RCS-PL-V001A-M 1 ESF 24 hrs E*S First Stage ADS RCS-PL-V001B 1 ESF 24 hrs M*S Limit Switch RCS-PL-V001B-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Motor Operator RCS-PL-V001B-M 1 ESF 24 hrs E*S 3.11-31 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 26 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
Second Stage ADS RCS-PL-V002A 1 ESF 24 hrs M*S Limit Switch RCS-PL-V002A-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Motor Operator RCS-PL-V002A-M 1 ESF 24 hrs E*S Second Stage ADS RCS-PL-V002B 1 ESF 24 hrs M*S Limit Switch RCS-PL-V002B-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Motor Operator RCS-PL-V002B-M 1 ESF 24 hrs E*S Third Stage ADS RCS-PL-V003A 1 ESF 24 hrs M*S Limit Switch RCS-PL-V003A-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Motor Operator RCS-PL-V003A-M 1 ESF 24 hrs E*S Third Stage ADS RCS-PL-V003B 1 ESF 24 hrs M*S Limit Switch RCS-PL-V003B-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Motor Operator RCS-PL-V003B-M 1 ESF 24 hrs E*S Fourth Stage ADS RCS-PL-V004A 1 ESF 72 hrs M*S Limit Switch RCS-PL-V004A-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Squib Operator RCS-PL-V004A-T 1 ESF 72 hrs E*S Fourth Stage ADS RCS-PL-V004B 1 ESF 72 hrs M*S Limit Switch RCS-PL-V004B-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Squib Operator RCS-PL-V004B-T 1 ESF 72 hrs E*S Fourth Stage ADS RCS-PL-V004C 1 ESF 72 hrs M*S Limit Switch RCS-PL-V004C-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Squib Operator RCS-PL-V004C-T 1 ESF 72 hrs E*S Fourth Stage ADS RCS-PL-V004D 1 ESF 72 hrs M*S Limit Switch RCS-PL-V004D-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Squib Operator RCS-PL-V004D-T 1 ESF 72 hrs E*S PZR Safety Valve RCS-PL-V005A 1 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch RCS-PL-V005A-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S PZR Safety Valve RCS-PL-V005B 1 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch RCS-PL-V005B-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S ADS Discharge Header A Relief RCS-PL-V010A 1 ESF 24 hrs M*S ADS Discharge Header B Relief RCS-PL-V010B 1 ESF 24 hrs M*S First Stage ADS Isolation RCS-PL-V011A 1 ESF 24 hrs M*S Limit Switch RCS-PL-V011A-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Motor Operator RCS-PL-V011A-M 1 ESF 24 hrs E*S First Stage ADS Isolation RCS-PL-V011B 1 ESF 24 hrs M*S Limit Switch RCS-PL-V011B-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Motor Operator RCS-PL-V011B-M 1 ESF 24 hrs E*S Second Stage ADS Isolation RCS-PL-V012A 1 ESF 24 hrs M*S Limit Switch RCS-PL-V012A-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Motor Operator RCS-PL-V012A-M 1 ESF 24 hrs E*S Second Stage ADS Isolation RCS-PL-V012B 1 ESF 24 hrs M*S Limit Switch RCS-PL-V012B-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Motor Operator RCS-PL-V012B-M 1 ESF 24 hrs E*S 3.11-32 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 27 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
Third Stage ADS Isolation RCS-PL-V013A 1 ESF 24 hrs M*S Limit Switch RCS-PL-V013A-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Motor Operator RCS-PL-V013A-M 1 ESF 24 hrs E*S Third Stage ADS Isolation RCS-PL-V013B 1 ESF 24 hrs M*S Limit Switch RCS-PL-V013B-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Motor Operator RCS-PL-V013B-M 1 ESF 24 hrs E*S Reactor Vessel Head Vent RCS-PL-V150A 1 ESF 1 yr M*S Limit Switch RCS-PL-V150A-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Solenoid Operator RCS-PL-V150A-S 1 ESF 1 yr E*S Voltage Control Box RCS-DJ-01 2 ESF 1 yr E Reactor Vessel Head Vent RCS-PL-V150B 1 ESF 1 yr M*S Limit Switch RCS-PL-V150B-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Solenoid Operator RCS-PL-V150B-S 1 ESF 1 yr E*S Voltage Control Box RCS-DJ-02 2 ESF 1 yr E Reactor Vessel Head Vent RCS-PL-V150C 1 ESF 1 yr M*S Limit Switch RCS-PL-V150C-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Solenoid Operator RCS-PL-V150C-S 1 ESF 1 yr E*S Voltage Control Box RCS-DJ-03 2 ESF 1 yr E Reactor Vessel Head Vent RCS-PL-V150D 1 ESF 1 yr M*S Limit Switch RCS-PL-V150D-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Solenoid Operator RCS-PL-V150D-S 1 ESF 1 yr E*S Voltage Control Box RCS-DJ-04 2 ESF 1 yr E RCS Inner Suction Isolation RNS-PL-V001A 1 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch RNS-PL-V001A-L 1 PAMS 1 yr (Note 9) E*S Motor Operator RNS-PL-V001A-M 1 ESF 5 min E*S RCS Inner Suction Isolation RNS-PL-V001B 1 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch RNS-PL-V001B-L 1 PAMS 1 yr (Note 9) E*S Motor Operator RNS-PL-V001B-M 1 ESF 5 min E*S RCS Outer Suction Isolation RNS-PL-V002A 1 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch RNS-PL-V002A-L 1 PAMS 1 yr (Note 9) E*S Motor Operator RNS-PL-V002A-M 1 ESF 5 min E*S RCS Outer Suction Isolation RNS-PL-V002B 1 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch RNS-PL-V002B-L 1 PAMS 1 yr (Note 9) E*S Motor Operator RNS-PL-V002B-M 1 ESF 5 min E*S RCS Thermal Relief RNS-PL-V003A 1 ESF 24 hrs M*S RCS Thermal Relief RNS-PL-V003B 1 ESF 24 hrs M*S RHR Control/Isolation Valve RNS-PL-V011 6 ESF 5 min M **
Limit Switch RNS-PL-V011-L 6 PAMS 2 wks E **
Motor Operator RNS-PL-V011-M 6 ESF 5 min E **
RNS Discharge Containment Isolation RNS-PL-V012 6 ESF 1 yr M **
Valve Test Connection RNS Discharge Containment Isolation RNS-PL-V013 1 ESF 24 hrs M*S RNS Discharge RCS Pressure Boundary RNS-PL-V015A 1 ESF 5 min M*S RNS Discharge RCS Pressure Boundary RNS-PL-V015B 1 ESF 5 min M*S 3.11-33 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 28 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
RNS Discharge RCS Pressure Boundary RNS-PL-V017A 1 ESF 5 min M*S RNS Discharge RCS Pressure Boundary RNS-PL-V017B 1 ESF 5 min M*S RNS Hot Leg Suction Relief RNS-PL-V020 1 ESF 24 hrs M*S RNS Hot Leg Suction Relief RNS-PL-V021 1 ESF 24 hrs M*S RNS Suction Header Containment RNS-PL-V022 6 ESF 5 min M **
Isolation Limit Switch RNS-PL-V022-L 6 PAMS 2 wks E **
Motor Operator RNS-PL-V022-M 6 ESF 5 min E **
IRWST Suction Line Isolation RNS-PL-V023 1 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch RNS-PL-V023-L 1 PAMS 1 yr (Note 9) E*S Motor Operator RNS-PL-V023-M 1 ESF 5 min E*S RNS - CVS Containment Isolation RNS-PL-V061 1 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch RNS-PL-V061-L 1 PAMS 1 yr (Note 9) E*S Air Operator RNS-PL-V061-S 1 ESF 5 min E*S SDS MCR Vent Isolation Valve SDS-PL-V001 3 ESF 24 hrs M Limit Switch SDS-PL-V001-L 3 PAMS 2 wks E Motor Operator SDS-PL-V001-M 3 ESF 5 min E SDS MCR Vent Isolation Valve SDS-PL-V002 3 ESF 24 hrs M Limit Switch SDS-PL-V002-L 3 PAMS 2 wks E Motor Operator SDS-PL-V002-M 3 ESF 5 min E SFS Suction Line Containment Isolation SFS-PL-V034 1 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch SFS-PL-V034-L 1 PAMS 1 yr (Note 9) E*S Motor Operator SFS-PL-V034-M 1 ESF 5 min E*S SFS Suction Line Containment Isolation SFS-PL-V035 6 ESF 5 min M **
Limit Switch SFS-PL-V035-L 6 PAMS 2 wks E **
Motor Operator SFS- PL-V035-M 6 ESF 5 min E **
SFS Discharge Containment SFS-PL-V037 1 ESF 24 hrs M*S Isolation SFS Discharge Line SFS-PL-V038 6 ESF 5 min M **
Containment Isolation Limit Switch SFS-PL-V038-L 6 PAMS 2 wks E **
Motor Operator SFS-PL-V038-M 6 ESF 5 min E **
SFS Cask Loading Pit to SFS Pump SFS-PL-V042 6 ESF 2 wks M **
SFS Pump to Cask Loading Pit SFS-PL-V045 6 ESF 2 wks M **
Cask Loading Pit to WLS SFS-PL-V049 6 ESF 2 wks M **
Spent Fuel Pool to Cask SFS-PL-V066 6 ESF 2 wks M **
Washdown Pit Isolation SFS Containment Isolation Relief SFS-PL-V067 1 ESF 24 hrs M*S Cask Washdown Pit Drain Isolation SFS-PL-V068 6 ESF 2 wks M **
Refueling Cavity to SG Compartment SFS-PL-V071 1 ESF 2 wks M*S Refueling Cavity to SG Compartment SFS-PL-V072 1 ESF 2 wks M*S PORV Block Valve SGS-PL-V027A 5 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch SGS-PL-V027A-L 5 PAMS 2 wks E*S Motor Operator SGS-PL-V027A-M 5 ESF 5 min E*S 3.11-34 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 29 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
PORV Block Valve SGS-PL-V027B 5 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch SGS-PL-V027B-L 5 PAMS 2 wks E*S Motor Operator SGS-PL-V027B-M 5 ESF 5 min E*S Main Steam Safety Valve SG01 SGS-PL-V030A 5 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch SGS-PL-V030A-L 5 PAMS 2 wks E*S Main Steam Safety Valve SG02 SGS-PL-V030B 5 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch SGS-PL-V030B-L 5 PAMS 2 wks E*S Main Steam Safety Valve SG01 SGS-PL-V031A 5 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch SGS-PL-V031A-L 5 PAMS 2 wks E*S Main Steam Safety Valve SG02 SGS-PL-V031B 5 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch SGS-PL-V031B-L 5 PAMS 2 wks E*S Main Steam Safety Valve SG01 SGS-PL-V032A 5 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch SGS-PL-V32A-L 5 PAMS 2 wks E*S Main Steam Safety Valve SG02 SGS-PL-V032B 5 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch SGS-PL-V032B-L 5 PAMS 2 wks E*S Main Steam Safety Valve SG01 SGS-PL-V033A 5 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch SGS-PL-V033A-L 5 PAMS 2 wks E*S Main Steam Safety Valve SG02 SGS-PL-V033B 5 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch SGS-PL-V033B-L 5 PAMS 2 wks E*S Main Steam Safety Valve SG01 SGS-PL-V034A 5 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch SGS-PL-V034A-L 5 PAMS 2 wks E*S Main Steam Safety Valve SG02 SGS-PL-V034B 5 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch SGS-PL-V034B-L 5 PAMS 2 wks E*S Main Steam Safety Valve SG01 SGS-PL-V035A 5 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch SGS-PL-V035A-L 5 PAMS 2 wks E*S Main Steam Safety Valve SG02 SGS-PL-V035B 5 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch SGS-PL-V035B-L 5 PAMS 2 wks E*S Steam Line Condensate Drain Isolation SGS-PL-V036A 5 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch SGS-PL-V036A-L 5 PAMS 2 wks E*S Solenoid Valve SGS-PL-V036A-S 5 ESF 5 min E*S Steam Line Condensate Drain Isolation SGS-PL-V036B 5 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch SGS-PL-V036B-L 5 PAMS 2 wks E*S Solenoid Valve SGS-PL-V036B-S 5 ESF 5 min E*S Main Steam Line Isolation SGS-PL-V040A 5 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch SGS-PL-V040A-L 5 PAMS 2 wks E*S Solenoid Valve SGS-PL-V040A-S1 5 ESF 5 min E*S Solenoid Valve SGS-PL-V040A-S2 5 ESF 5 min E*S Solenoid Valve SGS-PL-V040A-S3 5 ESF 5 min E*S Solenoid Valve SGS-PL-V040A-S4 5 ESF 5 min E*S 3.11-35 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 30 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
Main Steam Line Isolation SGS-PL-V040B 5 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch SGS-PL-V040B-L 5 PAMS 2 wks E*S Solenoid Valve SGS-PL-V040B-S1 5 ESF 5 min E*S Solenoid Valve SGS-PL-V040B-S2 5 ESF 5 min E*S Solenoid Valve SGS-PL-V040B-S3 5 ESF 5 min E*S Solenoid Valve SGS-PL-V040B-S4 5 ESF 5 min E*S Main Feedwater Isolation SGS-PL-V057A 5 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch SGS-PL-V057A-L 5 PAMS 2 wks E*S Solenoid Valve SGS-PL-V057A-S1 5 ESF 5 min E*S Solenoid Valve SGS-PL-V057A-S2 5 ESF 5 min E*S Solenoid Valve SGS-PL-V057A-S3 5 ESF 5 min E*S Solenoid Valve SGS-PL-V057A-S4 5 ESF 5 min E*S Main Feedwater Isolation SGS-PL-V057B 5 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch SGS-PL-V057B-L 5 PAMS 2 wks E*S Solenoid Valve SGS-PL-V057B-S1 5 ESF 5 min E*S Solenoid Valve SGS-PL-V057B-S2 5 ESF 5 min E*S Solenoid Valve SGS-PL-V057B-S3 5 ESF 5 min E*S Solenoid Valve SGS-PL-V057B-S4 5 ESF 5 min E*S Startup Feedwater Isolation SGS-PL-V067A 5 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch SGS-PL-V067A-L 5 PAMS 2 wks E*S Motor Operator SGS-PL-V067A-M 5 ESF 5 min E*S Startup Feedwater Isolation SGS-PL-V067B 5 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch SGS-PL-V067B-L 5 PAMS 2 wks E*S Motor Operator SGS-PL-V067B-M 5 ESF 5 min E*S SG Blowdown Isolation SGS-PL-V074A 10 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch SGS-PL-V074A-L 10 PAMS 2 wks E*S Solenoid Valve SGS-PL-V074A-S 10 ESF 5 min E*S SG Blowdown Isolation SGS-PL-V074B 10 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch SGS-PL-V074B-L 10 PAMS 2 wks E*S Solenoid Valve SGS-PL-V074B-S 10 ESF 5 min E*S SG Series Blowdown Isolation SGS-PL-V075A 10 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch SGS-PL-V075A-L 10 PAMS 2 wks E*S Solenoid Valve SGS-PL-V075A-S 10 ESF 5 min E*S SG Series Blowdown Isolation SGS-PL-V075B 10 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch SGS-PL-V075B-L 10 PAMS 2 wks E*S Solenoid Valve SGS-PL-V075B-S 10 ESF 5 min E*S Steam Line Condensate Drain SGS-PL-V086A 5 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch SGS-PL-V086A-L 5 PAMS 2 wks E*S Isolation Solenoid Valve SGS-PL-V086A-S 5 ESF 5 min E*S Steam Line Condensate Drain SGS-PL-V086B 5 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch SGS-PL-V086B-L 5 PAMS 2 wks E*S Isolation Solenoid Valve SGS-PL-V086B-S 5 ESF 5 min E*S 3.11-36 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 31 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
Power Operated Relief Valve SGS-PL-V233A 5 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch SGS-PL-V233A-L 5 PAMS 2 wks E*S Solenoid Valve SGS-PL-V233A-S 5 ESF 5 min E*S Power Operated Relief Valve SGS-PL-V233B 5 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch SGS-PL-V233B-L 5 PAMS 2 wks E*S Solenoid Valve SGS-PL-V233B-S 5 ESF 5 min E*S MSIV Bypass Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V240A 5 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch SGS-PL-V240A-L 5 PAMS 2 wks E*S Solenoid Valve SGS-PL-V240A-S1 5 ESF 5 min E*S Solenoid Valve SGS-PL-V240A-S2 5 ESF 5 E*S MSIV Bypass Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V240B 5 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch SGS-PL-V240B-L 5 PAMS 2 wks E*S Solenoid Valve SGS-PL-V240B-S1 5 ESF 5 min E*S Solenoid Valve SGS-PL-V240B-S2 5 ESF 5 min E*S Main Feedwater Control Valve SGS-PL-V250A 5 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch SGS-PL-V250A-L 5 PAMS 2 wks E*S Solenoid Valve SGS-PL-V250A-S 5 ESF 5 min E*S Main Feedwater Control Valve SGS-PL-V250B 5 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch SGS-PL-V250B-L 5 PAMS 2 wks E*S Solenoid Valve SGS-PL-V250B-S 5 ESF 5 min E*S Startup Feedwater Control Valve SGS-PL-V255A 5 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch SGS-PL-V255A-L 5 PAMS 2 wks E*S Solenoid Valve SGS-PL-V255A-S 5 ESF 5 min E*S Startup Feedwater Control Valve SGS-PL-V255B 5 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch SGS-PL-V255B-L 5 PAMS 2 wks E*S Solenoid Valve SGS-PL-V255B-S 5 ESF 5 min E*S Main Feedwater Thermal Relief Valve SGS-PL-V257A 5 ESF 24 hrs M*S Main Feedwater Thermal Relief Valve SGS-PL-V257B 5 ESF 24 hrs M*S Startup Feedwater Thermal Relief Valve SGS-PL-V258A 5 ESF 24 hrs M*S Startup Feedwater Thermal Relief Valve SGS-PL-V258B 5 ESF 24 hrs M*S MCR Isolation Valve VBS-PL-V186 3 ESF 24 hrs M Limit Switch VBS-PL-V186-L 3 PAMS 2 wks E Motor Operator VBS-PL-V186-M 3 ESF 24 hrs E MCR Isolation Valve VBS-PL-V187 3 ESF 24 hrs M Limit Switch VBS-PL-V187-L 3 PAMS 2 wks E Motor Operator VBS-PL-V187-M 3 ESF 24 hrs E MCR Isolation Valve VBS-PL-V188 3 ESF 24 hrs M Limit Switch VBS-PL-V188-L 3 PAMS 2 wks E Motor Operator VBS-PL-V188-M 3 ESF 24 hrs E MCR Isolation Valve VBS-PL-V189 3 ESF 24 hrs M Limit Switch VBS-PL-V189-L 3 PAMS 2 wks E Motor Operator VBS-PL-V189-M 3 ESF 24 hrs E 3.11-37 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 32 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
MCR Isolation Valve VBS-PL-V190 3 ESF 24 hrs M Limit Switch VBS-PL-V190-L 3 PAMS 2 wks E Motor Operator VBS-PL-V190-M 3 ESF 24 hrs E MCR Isolation Valve VBS-PL-V191 3 ESF 24 hrs M Limit Switch VBS-PL-V191-L 3 PAMS 2 wks E Motor Operator VBS-PL-V191-M 3 ESF 24 hrs E Air Delivery Isolation Valve VES-PL-V001 3 ESF 2 wks M Pressure Regulator Valve A VES-PL-V002A 7 ESF 2 wks M Pressure Regulator Valve B VES-PL-V002B 7 ESF 2 wks M Air Delivery Isolation Valve A VES-PL-V005A 3 ESF 2 wks M Limit Switch VES-PL-V005A-L 3 PAMS 2 wks E Solenoid Operator VES-PL-V005A-S 3 ESF 2 wks E Voltage Control Box VES-DJ-01 2 ESF 2 wks E Air Delivery Isolation Valve B VES-PL-V005B 3 ESF 2 wks M Limit Switch VES-PL-V005B-L 3 PAMS 2 wks E Solenoid Operator VES-PL-V005B-S 3 ESF 2 wks E Voltage Control Box VES-DJ-02 2 ESF 2 wks E Temporary Instrument Isolation Valve A VES-PL-V018 7 ESF 2 wks M Temporary Instrument Isolation Valve B VES-PL-V019 7 ESF 2 wks M Relief Isolation Valve A VES-PL-V022A 3 ESF 2 wks M Limit Switch VES-PL-V022A-L 3 PAMS 2 wks E Solenoid Valve VES-PL-V022A-S 3 ESF 2 wks E Relief Isolation Valve B VES-PL-V022B 3 ESF 2 wks M Limit Switch VES-PL-V022B-L 3 PAMS 2 wks E Solenoid Valve VES-PL-V022B-S 3 ESF 2 wks E Air Tank Safety Relief Valve A VES-PL-V040A 7 ESF 2 wks M Air Tank Safety Relief Valve B VES-PL-V040B 7 ESF 2 wks M Air Tank Safety Relief Valve C VES-PL-V040C 7 ESF 2 wks M Air Tank Safety Relief Valve D VES-PL-V040D 7 ESF 2 wks M Main Air Flow Path Isolation Valve VES-PL-V044 3 ESF 2 wks M Eductor Flow Path Isolation Valve VES-PL-V045 3 ESF 2 wks M Eductor Bypass Isolation Valve VES-PL-V046 3 ESF 2 wks M Containment Purge Inlet Isolation VFS-PL-V003 7 ESF 5 min M Limit Switch VFS-PL-V003-L 7 PAMS 2 wks E Solenoid Valve VFS-PL-V003-S1 7 ESF 5 min E Containment Purge Inlet Isolation VFS-PL-V004 1 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch VFS-PL-V004-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Solenoid Valve VFS-PL-V004-S1 1 ESF 5 min E*S Containment Purge Discharge Isolation VFS-PL-V009 1 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch VFS-PL-V009-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Solenoid Valve VFS-PL-V009-S1 1 ESF 5 min E*S Containment Purge Discharge Isolation VFS-PL-V010 6 ESF 5 min M **
Limit Switch VFS-PL-V010-L 6 PAMS 2 wks E **
Solenoid Valve VFS-PL-V010-S1 6 ESF 5 min E **
3.11-38 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 33 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
Vacuum Relief Containment Isolation VFS-PL-V800A 7 ESF 24 hrs M Valve A - ORC Limit Switch VFS-PL-V800A-L 7 PAMS 1 yr E Motor Operator VFS-PL-V800A-M 7 ESF 24 hrs E Vacuum Relief Containment Isolation VFS-PL-V800B 7 ESF 24 hrs M Valve B - ORC Limit Switch VFS-PL-V800B-L 7 PAMS 1 yr E Motor Operator VFS-PL-V800B-M 7 ESF 24 hrs E Vacuum Relief Containment Isolation VFS-PL-V803A 1 ESF 24 hrs M* S Check Valve A - IRC Vacuum Relief Containment Isolation VFS-PL-V803B 1 ESF 24 hrs M* S Check Valve B - IRC VWS Containment Penetration VWS-PL-V053 1 ESF 24 hrs M* S Thermal Relief Valve VWS Containment Penetration VWS-PL-V057 1 ESF 24 hrs M* S Thermal Relief Valve Fan Cooler Supply Isolation VWS-PL-V058 2 ESF 5 min M Limit Switch VWS-PL-V058-L 2 PAMS 2 wks E Solenoid Valve VWS-PL-V058-S 2 ESF 5 min E Fan Coolers Supply Containment VWS-PL-V062 1 ESF 24 hrs M*S Isolation Check Valve VWS Containment Isolation Relief VWS-PL-V080 1 ESF 24 hrs M*S Fan Cooler Return Isolation VWS-PL-V082 1 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch VWS-PL-V082-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Solenoid Valve VWS-PL-V082-S 1 ESF 5 min E*S Fan Cooler Return Isolation VWS-PL-V086 2 ESF 5 min M Limit Switch VWS-PL-V086-L 2 PAMS 2 wks E Solenoid Valve VWS-PL-V086-S 2 ESF 5 min E Sump Containment Isolation IRC WLS-PL-V055 1 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch WLS-PL-V055-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Solenoid Valve WLS-PL-V055-S1 1 ESF 5 min E*S Sump Containment Isolation ORC WLS-PL-V057 7 ESF 5 min M ** S Limit Switch WLS-PL-V057-L 7 PAMS 2 wks E **
Solenoid Valve WLS-PL-V057-S1 7 ESF 5 min E ** S WLS Containment Isolation Relief WLS-PL-V058 1 ESF 24 hrs M ** S RCDT Gas Containment Isolation WLS-PL-V067 1 ESF 5 min M*S Limit Switch WLS-PL-V067-L 1 PAMS 1 yr (Note 9) E*S Solenoid Valve WLS-PL-V067-S 1 ESF 5 min E*S RCDT Gas Containment Isolation WLS-PL-V068 7 ESF 5 min M ** S Limit Switch WLS-PL-V068-L 7 PAMS 2 wks E **
Solenoid Valve WLS-PL-V068-S 7 ESF 5 min E ** S CVS To Sump WLS-PL-V071 A 1 ESF 2 wks M*S PXS A To Sump WLS-PL-V071 B 1 ESF 2 wks M*S PXS B To Sump WLS-PL-V071 C 1 ESF 2 wks M*S CVS To Sump WLS-PL-V072 A 1 ESF 2 wks M*S 3.11-39 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 34 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
PXS A To Sump WLS-PL-V072 B 1 ESF 2 wks M*S PXS B To Sump WLS-PL-V072 C 1 ESF 2 wks M*S MISCELLANEOUS Non-Active Valves Containment Penetration Test CAS-PL-V027 1 PB 1 yr M* S Connection Isolation Service Air Supply Outside CAS-PL-V204 2 PB 1 yr M Containment Isolation Containment Penetration Test CAS-PL-V219 1 PB 1 yr M*S Connection Isolation Containment Isolation Valve CCS-PL-V209 1 PB 1 yr M*S Test Connection - Outlet Line CCS Supply Containment Isolation - IRC CCS-PL-V214 1 PB 1 yr M* S CCS Supply Containment Isolation Valve CCS-PL-V215 1 PB 1 yr M* S Test Connection - IRC Containment Leak Test Outlet Line - IRC CCS-PL-V216 1 PB 1 yr M* S Containment Isolation Valve V207 Body CCS-PL-V217 1 PB 1 yr M* S Test Connection Valve Containment Isolation Valve CCS-PL-V257 2 PB 1 yr M Test Connection - Inlet Line Resin Flush IRC Isolation CVS-PL-V040 1 PB 1 yr M*S Resin Flush ORC Isolation CVS-PL-V041 7 PB 1 yr M ** S Letdown PZR Instrument Root CVS-PL-V046 7 PB 1 yr M ** S Zinc Addition - IRC Shutoff CVS-PL-V065 1 PB 1 yr M*S Zinc Add Cont Isolation Test Connection CVS-PL-V095 1 PB 1 yr M*S Zinc Addition Containment Isolation Test CVS-PL-V096 10 PB 1 yr M*S Connection Hydrogen Injection - IRC Shutoff CVS-PL-V215 1 PB 1 yr M*S Hydrogen Addition Containment Isolation CVS-PL-V216 1 PB 1 yr M*S Test Connection Hydrogen Addition Containment Isolation CVS-PL-V218 1 PB 1 yr M*S Test Connection Demin Water Supply Containment DWS-PL-V244 10 PB 1 yr M*S Isolation - Outside Containment Penetration Test DWS-PL-V248 10 PB 1 yr M*S Connection Isolation Fire Water Containment Supply FPS-PL-V050 10 PB 1 yr M*S Isolation Fire Water Containment Test FPS-PL-V051 10 PB 1 yr M*S Connection Isolation Flow Transmitter FT001 Root Valve PCS-PL-V010A 9 PB 1 yr M Flow Transmitter FT001 Root Valve PCS-PL-V010B 9 PB 1 yr M Flow Transmitter FT002 Root Valve PCS-PL-V011A 9 PB 1 yr M Flow Transmitter FT002 Root Valve PCS-PL-V011B 9 PB 1 yr M Flow Transmitter FT003 Root Valve PCS-PL-V012A 9 PB 1 yr M Flow Transmitter FT003 Root Valve PCS-PL-V012B 9 PB 1 yr M 3.11-40 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 35 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
Flow Transmitter FT004 Root Valve PCS-PL-V013A 9 PB 1 yr M Flow Transmitter FT004 Root Valve PCS-PL-V013B 9 PB 1 yr M PCCWST Drain Isolation Valve PCS-PL-V016 9 PB 1 yr M Makeup to Distr. Bucket Isolation Valve PCS-PL-V026 6 ESF 2 wks M PCCWST Isolation Valve Leakage PCS-PL-V029 9 PB 1 yr M Detection Drain PCCWST Isolation Valve Leakage PCS-PL-V030 9 PB 1 yr M Detection Crossconn PCCWST Level Instrument Root PCS-PL-V031A 9 PB 1 yr M Valve PCCWST Level Instrument Root PCS-PL-V031B 9 PB 1 yr M Valve Recirculation Pump Suction from PCS-PL-V033 10 ESF 2 wks M*S Long Term Makeup Isolation Valve Spent Fuel Pool Emergency Makeup PCS-PL-V052 7 PB 1 yr M Isolation Shutoff Valve for Leakage Sensor PCS-PL-V060A 9 PB 1 yr M Shutoff Valve for Leakage Sensor PCS-PL-V060B 9 PB 1 yr M Recirculation Header Discharge to SFS PCS-PL-V303 10 PB 1 yr M*S Pool Vent Isolation Valve Recirculation Header Discharge to SFS PCS-PL-V304 7 PB 1 yr M Pool Drain Isolation Valve PCCWST Recirculation Return Drain PCS-PL-V305 10 PB 1 yr M*S Isolation Valve Hot Leg 1 Sample Isolation PSS-PL-V001A 1 PB 1 yr M*S Limit Switch PSS-PL-V001A-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Solenoid Valve PSS-PL-V001A-S 1 ESF 24 hrs E*S Voltage Control Box PSS-DJ-01 2 ESF 24 hrs E Hot Leg 2 Sample Isolation PSS-PL-V001B 1 PB 1 yr M*S Limit Switch PSS-PL-V001B-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Solenoid Valve PSS-PL-V001B-S 1 ESF 24 hrs E*S Voltage Control Box PSS-DJ-02 2 ESF 24 hrs E Pressurizer Sample Isolation PSS-PL-V003 1 PB 1 yr M*S PXS Accumulator Sample Isolation PSS-PL-V004A 1 PB 1 yr M*S PXS Accumulator Sample Isolation PSS-PL-V004B 1 PB 1 yr M*S PXS CMT A Sample Isolation PSS-PL-V005A 1 PB 1 yr M*S PXS CMT B Sample Isolation PSS-PL-V005B 1 PB 1 yr M*S PXS CMT A Sample Isolation PSS-PL-V005C 1 PB 1 yr M*S PXS CMT B Sample Isolation PSS-PL-V005D 1 PB 1 yr M*S Liquid Sample Isolation Valve PSS-PL-V012A 1 PB 1 yr M*S Liquid Sample Check Valve PSS-PL-V012B 1 PB 1 yr M*S RCS Pressurizer Sample Isolation Valve PSS-PL-V013 1 PB 1 yr M*S RCS Hot Leg 1 Sample Isolation Valve PSS-PL-V014A 1 PB 1 yr M*S RCS Hot Leg 2 Sample Isolation Valve PSS-PL-V014B 1 PB 1 yr M*S PXS Accumulator Sample Isolation Valve PSS-PL-V015A 1 PB 1 yr M*S 3.11-41 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 36 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
PXS Accumulator Sample Isolation Valve PSS-PL-V015B 1 PB 1 yr M*S PXS CMT A Sample Isolation Valve PSS-PL-V016A 1 PB 1 yr M*S PXS CMT B Sample Isolation Valve PSS-PL-V016B 1 PB 1 yr M*S PXS CMT A Sample Isolation Valve PSS-PL-V016C 1 PB 1 yr M*S PXS CMT B Sample Isolation Valve PSS-PL-V016D 1 PB 1 yr M*S Containment Testing Boundary PSS-PL-V076A 1 PB 1 yr M*S Isolation Valve Containment Testing Boundary PSS-PL-V076B 1 PB 1 yr M*S Isolation Valve Containment Isolation Test PSS-PL-V082 1 PB 1 yr M*S Connection Isolation Valve Containment Isolation Test PSS-PL-V083 1 PB 1 yr M*S Connection Isolation Valve Containment Isolation Test PSS-PL-V085 1 PB 1 yr M*S Connection Isolation Valve Containment Isolation Test PSS-PL-V086 1 PB 1 yr M*S Connection Isolation Valve Core Makeup Tank A CL Inlet PXS-PL-V002A 1 PB 1 yr M*S Isolation Limit Switch PXS-PL-V002A-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Motor Operator PXS-PL-V002A-M 1 ESF 5 min E*S Core Makeup Tank B CL Inlet PXS-PL-V002B 1 PB 1 yr M*S Isolation Limit Switch PXS-PL-V002B-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Motor Operator PXS-PL-V002B-M 1 ESF 5 min E*S Core Makeup Tank A Upper Sample PXS-PL-V010A 1 PB 1 yr M*S Core Makeup Tank B Upper Sample PXS-PL-V010B 1 PB 1 yr M*S Core Makeup Tank A Lower Sample PXS-PL-V011A 1 PB 1 yr M*S Core Makeup Tank B Lower Sample PXS-PL-V011B 1 PB 1 yr M*S Core Makeup Tank A Drain PXS-PL-V012A 1 PB 1 yr M*S Core Makeup Tank B Drain PXS-PL-V012B 1 PB 1 yr M*S Core Makeup Tank A Discharge PXS-PL-V013A 1 PB 1 yr M*S Manual Isolation Core Makeup Tank B Discharge PXS-PL-V013B 1 PB 1 yr M*S Manual Isolation RNS to CMT Injection Line A Drain PXS-PL-V019A 1 PB 1 yr M*S RNS to CMT Injection Line B Drain PXS-PL-V019B 1 PB 1 yr M*S IRWST Injection Line A Drain PXS-PL-V020A 1 PB 1 yr M*S IRWST Injection Line B Drain PXS-PL-V020B 1 PB 1 yr M*S Accumulator A N2 Vent PXS-PL-V021A 1 PB 1 yr M*S Accumulator B N2 Vent PXS-PL-V021B 1 PB 1 yr M*S Accumulator A PZR Transmitter PXS-PL-V023A 1 PB 1 yr M*S Isolation Accumulator B PZR Transmitter PXS-PL-V023B 1 PB 1 yr M*S Isolation 3.11-42 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 37 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
Accumulator A PZR Transmitter PXS-PL-V024A 1 PB 1 yr M*S Isolation Accumulator B PZR Transmitter PXS-PL-V024B 1 PB 1 yr M*S Isolation Accumulator A Sample PXS-PL-V025A 1 PB 1 yr M*S Accumulator B Sample PXS-PL-V025B 1 PB 1 yr M*S Accumulator A Drain PXS-PL-V026A 1 PB 1 yr M*S Accumulator B Drain PXS-PL-V026B 1 PB 1 yr M*S Accumulator A Discharge Isolation PXS-PL-V027A 1 PB 1 yr M*S Accumulator B Discharge Isolation PXS-PL-V027B 1 PB 1 yr M*S Core Makeup Tank A Highpoint Vent PXS-PL-V030A 1 PB 1 yr M*S Core Makeup Tank B Highpoint Vent PXS-PL-V030B 1 PB 1 yr M*S Core Makeup Tank A Highpoint Vent PXS-PL-V031A 1 PB 1 yr M*S Core Makeup Tank B Highpoint Vent PXS-PL-V031B 1 PB 1 yr M*S Accumulator A Check Valve Drain PXS-PL-V033A 1 PB 1 yr M*S Accumulator B Check Valve Drain PXS-PL-V033B 1 PB 1 yr M*S Accumulator N2 Containment PXS-PL-V052 1 PB 1 yr M*S Penetration Test Connection CMT A Wide Level Upper Root PXS-PL-V080A 1 PB 1 yr M*S CMT B Wide Level Upper Root PXS-PL-V080B 1 PB 1 yr M*S CMT A Wide Level Lower Root PXS-PL-V081A 1 PB 1 yr M*S CMT B Wide Level Lower Root PXS-PL-V081B 1 PB 1 yr M*S CMT A Upper Level A Isolation 1 PXS-PL-V082A 1 PB 1 yr M*S CMT B Upper Level A Isolation 1 PXS-PL-V082B 1 PB 1 yr M*S CMT A Upper Level A Isolation 2 PXS-PL-V083A 1 PB 1 yr M*S CMT B Upper Level A Isolation 2 PXS-PL-V083B 1 PB 1 yr M*S CMT A Upper Level A Vent PXS-PL-V084A 1 PB 1 yr M*S CMT B Upper Level A Vent PXS-PL-V084B 1 PB 1 yr M*S CMT A Upper Level A Drain PXS-PL-V085A 1 PB 1 yr M*S CMT B Upper Level A Drain PXS-PL-V085B 1 PB 1 yr M*S CMT A Upper Level B Isolation 1 PXS-PL-V086A 1 PB 1 yr M*S CMT B Upper Level B Isolation 1 PXS-PL-V086B 1 PB 1 yr M*S CMT A Upper Level B Isolation 2 PXS-PL-V087A 1 PB 1 yr M*S CMT B Upper Level B Isolation 2 PXS-PL-V087B 1 PB 1 yr M*S CMT A Upper Level B Vent PXS-PL-V088A 1 PB 1 yr M*S CMT B Upper Level B Vent PXS-PL-V088B 1 PB 1 yr M*S CMT A Upper Level B Drain PXS-PL-V089A 1 PB 1 yr M*S CMT B Upper Level B Drain PXS-PL-V089B 1 PB 1 yr M*S CMT A Lower Level A Isolation 1 PXS-PL-V092A 1 PB 1 yr M*S CMT B Lower Level A Isolation 1 PXS-PL-V092B 1 PB 1 yr M*S CMT A Lower Level A Isolation 2 PXS-PL-V093A 1 PB 1 yr M*S CMT B Lower Level A Isolation 2 PXS-PL-V093B 1 PB 1 yr M*S CMT A Lower Level A Vent PXS-PL-V094A 1 PB 1 yr M*S CMT B Lower Level A Vent PXS-PL-V094B 1 PB 1 yr M*S 3.11-43 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 38 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
CMT A Lower Level A Drain PXS-PL-V095A 1 PB 1 yr M*S CMT B Lower Level A Drain PXS-PL-V095B 1 PB 1 yr M*S CMT A Lower Level B Isolation 1 PXS-PL-V096A 1 PB 1 yr M*S CMT B Lower Level B Isolation 1 PXS-PL-V096B 1 PB 1 yr M*S CMT A Lower Level B Isolation 2 PXS-PL-V097A 1 PB 1 yr M*S CMT B Lower Level B Isolation 2 PXS-PL-V097B 1 PB 1 yr M*S CMT A Lower Level B Vent PXS-PL-V098A 1 PB 1 yr M*S CMT B Lower Level B Vent PXS-PL-V098B 1 PB 1 yr M*S CMT A Lower Level B Drain PXS-PL-V099A 1 PB 1 yr M*S CMT B Lower Level B Drain PXS-PL-V099B 1 PB 1 yr M*S PRHR HX Inlet Isolation PXS-PL-V101 1 PB 1 yr M*S Limit Switch PXS-PL-V101-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Motor Operator PXS-PL-V101-M 1 ESF 5 min E*S PRHR HX Inlet Head Vent PXS-PL-V102A 1 PB 1 yr M*S PRHR HX Inlet Head Drain PXS-PL-V102B 1 PB 1 yr M*S PRHR HX Outlet Head Vent PXS-PL-V103A 1 PB 1 yr M*S PRHR HX Outlet Head Drain PXS-PL-V103B 1 PB 1 yr M*S PRHR HX Flow Transmitter A PXS-PL-V104A 1 PB 1 yr M*S Isolation PRHR HX Flow Transmitter B PXS-PL-V104B 1 PB 1 yr M*S Isolation PRHR HX Flow Transmitter A PXS-PL-V105A 1 PB 1 yr M*S Isolation PRHR HX Flow Transmitter B PXS-PL-V105B 1 PB 1 yr M*S Isolation Containment Recirculation A Highpoint PXS-PL-V106 1 PB 1 yr M*S Vent Containment Recirculation A Highpoint PXS-PL-V107 1 PB 1 yr M*S Vent PRHR HX/RCS Return Isolation PXS-PL-V109 1 PB 1 yr M*S PRHR HX Highpoint Vent PXS-PL-V111A 1 PB 1 yr M*S PRHR HX Highpoint Vent PXS-PL-V111B 1 PB 1 yr M*S PRHR HX Pressure Transmitter PXS-PL-V113 1 PB 1 yr M*S Isolation Containment Recirculation A Drain PXS-PL-V115A 1 PB 1 yr M*S Containment Recirculation B Drain PXS-PL-V115B 1 PB 1 yr M*S Containment Recirculation A Drain PXS-PL-V116A 1 PB 1 yr M*S Containment Recirculation B Drain PXS-PL-V116B 1 PB 1 yr M*S Recirc Sump A Isolation PXS-PL-V117A 1 ESF 24 hrs M*S Limit Switch PXS-PL-V117A-L 1 PAMS 1 yr (Note 9) E*S Motor Operator PXS-PL-V117A-M 1 ESF 24 hrs E*S Recirc Sump B Isolation PXS-PL-V117B 1 ESF 24 hrs M*S Limit Switch PXS-PL-V117B-L 1 PAMS 1 yr (Note 9) E*S Motor Operator PXS-PL-V117B-M 1 ESF 24 hrs E*S 3.11-44 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 39 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
IRWST Line A Isolation PXS-PL-V121A 1 PB 1 yr M*S IRWST Line B Isolation PXS-PL-V121B 1 PB 1 yr M*S IRWST Injection Check Test PXS-PL-V126A 1 PB 1 yr M*S IRWST Injection Check Test PXS-PL-V126B 1 PB 1 yr M*S IRWST Injection Line A Drain PXS-PL-V127 1 PB 1 yr M*S IRWST Injection Check Test PXS-PL-V128A 1 PB 1 yr M*S IRWST Injection Check Test PXS-PL-V128B 1 PB 1 yr M*S IRWST Injection Check Test PXS-PL-V129A 1 PB 1 yr M*S IRWST Injection Check Test PXS-PL-V129B 1 PB 1 yr M*S IRWST Injection Line A Drain PXS-PL-V131A 1 PB 1 yr M*S IRWST Injection Line B Drain PXS-PL-V131B 1 PB 1 yr M*S IRWST Injection Line A Drain PXS-PL-V132A 1 PB 1 yr M*S IRWST Injection Line B Drain PXS-PL-V132B 1 PB 1 yr M*S IRWST Injection Line A Highpoint Vent PXS-PL-V133A 1 PB 1 yr M*S IRWST Injection Line B Highpoint Vent PXS-PL-V133B 1 PB 1 yr M*S IRWST Injection Line A Highpoint Vent PXS-PL-V134A 1 PB 1 yr M*S IRWST Injection Line B Highpoint Vent PXS-PL-V134B 1 PB 1 yr M*S IRWST Injection Line A Highpoint Vent PXS-PL-V135A 1 PB 1 yr M*S Isolation IRWST Injection Line B Highpoint Vent PXS-PL-V135B 1 PB 1 yr M*S Isolation RNS Suction Pump Line Drain PXS-PL-V149 1 PB 1 yr M*S IRWST Wide Range Level Transmitter B PXS-PL-V151B 1 PB 1 yr M*S Isolation IRWST Wide Range Level Transmitter C PXS-PL-V151C 1 PB 1 yr M*S Isolation IRWST Wide Range Level Transmitter D PXS-PL-V151D 1 PB 1 yr M*S Isolation IRWST Lower Narrow Range Level PXS-PL-V161A 1 PB 1 yr M*S Transmitter A Isolation IRWST Lower Narrow Range Level PXS-PL-V161B 1 PB 1 yr M*S Transmitter B Isolation IRWST Lower Narrow Range Level PXS-PL-V161C 1 PB 1 yr M*S Transmitter C Isolation IRWST Lower Narrow Range Level PXS-PL-V161D 1 PB 1 yr M*S Transmitter D Isolation IRWST Lower Narrow Range Level PXS-PL-V162A 1 PB 1 yr M*S Transmitter A Reference Leg Isolation IRWST Lower Narrow Range Level PXS-PL-V162B 1 PB 1 yr M*S Transmitter B Reference Leg Isolation IRWST Lower Narrow Range Level PXS-PL-V162C 1 PB 1 yr M*S Transmitter C Reference Leg Isolation IRWST Lower Narrow Range Level PXS-PL-V162D 1 PB 1 yr M*S Transmitter D Reference Leg Isolation PRHR Flow Transmitter A Vent PXS-PL-V170A 1 PB 1 yr M*S PRHR Flow Transmitter B Vent PXS-PL-V170B 1 PB 1 yr M*S 3.11-45 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 40 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
PRHR Flow Transmitter A Vent PXS-PL-V171A 1 PB 1 yr M*S PRHR Flow Transmitter B Vent PXS-PL-V171B 1 PB 1 yr M*S Accumulator A Leak Test PXS-PL-V201A 1 PB 1 yr M*S Accumulator B Leak Test PXS-PL-V201B 1 PB 1 yr M*S Accumulator A Leak Test PXS-PL-V202A 1 PB 1 yr M*S Accumulator B Leak Test PXS-PL-V202B 1 PB 1 yr M*S RNS Discharge Leak Test PXS-PL-V205A 1 PB 1 yr M*S RNS Discharge Leak Test PXS-PL-V205B 1 PB 1 yr M*S RNS Discharge Leak Test PXS-PL-V206 1 PB 1 yr M*S RNS Suction Leak Test PXS-PL-V207A 1 PB 1 yr M*S RNS Suction Leak Test PXS-PL-V207B 1 PB 1 yr M*S RNS Suction Leak Test PXS-PL-V208A 1 PB 1 yr M*S Core Makeup Tank A Fill Isolation PXS-PL-V230A 1 PB 1 yr M*S Core Makeup Tank B Fill Isolation PXS-PL-V230B 1 PB 1 yr M*S Core Makeup Tank A Fill Check PXS-PL-V231A 1 PB 1 yr M*S Core Makeup Tank B Fill Check PXS-PL-V231B 1 PB 1 yr M*S Accumulator A Fill/Drain Isolation PXS-PL-V232A 1 PB 1 yr M*S Accumulator B Fill/Drain Isolation PXS-PL-V232B 1 PB 1 yr M*S CMT A Check Valve Test Valve PXS-PL-V250A 1 PB 1 yr M*S CMT B Check Valve Test Valve PXS-PL-V250B 1 PB 1 yr M*S CMT A Check Valve Test Valve PXS-PL-V251A 1 PB 1 yr M*S CMT B Check Valve Test Valve PXS-PL-V251B 1 PB 1 yr M*S CMT A Check Valve Test Valve PXS-PL-V252A 1 PB 1 yr M*S CMT B Check Valve Test Valve PXS-PL-V252B 1 PB 1 yr M*S ADS Test Valve RCS-PL-V007A 1 PB 1 yr M*S ADS Test Valve RCS-PL-V007B 1 PB 1 yr M*S ADS Test Valve RCS-PL-V007C 1 PB 1 yr M*S ADS Valve Leakage Check Valve RCS-PL-V008 1 PB 1 yr M*S Fourth Stage ADS Isolation RCS-PL-V014A 1 PB 1 yr M*S Limit Switch RCS-PL-V014A-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Motor Operator RCS-PL-V014A-M 1 ESF 24 hrs E*S Fourth Stage ADS Isolation RCS-PL-V014B 1 PB 1 yr M*S Limit Switch RCS-PL-V014B-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Motor Operator RCS-PL-V014B-M 1 ESF 24 hrs E*S Fourth Stage ADS Isolation RCS-PL-V014C 1 PB 1 yr M*S Limit Switch RCS-PL-V014C-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Motor Operator RCS-PL-V014C-M 1 ESF 24 hrs E*S Fourth Stage ADS Isolation RCS-PL-V014D 1 PB 1 yr M*S Limit Switch RCS-PL-V014D-L 1 PAMS 1 yr E*S Motor Operator RCS-PL-V014D-M 1 ESF 24 hrs E*S Hot Leg 2 Level Instrument Root RCS-PL-V095 1 PB 1 yr M*S Hot Leg 2 Level Instrument Root RCS-PL-V096 1 PB 1 yr M*S Hot Leg 1 Level Instrument Root RCS-PL-V097 1 PB 1 yr M*S Hot Leg 1 Level Instrument Root RCS-PL-V098 1 PB 1 yr M*S 3.11-46 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 41 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
Hot Leg 1 Flow RCS-PL-V101A 1 PB 1 yr M*S Instrument Root Hot Leg 1 Flow RCS-PL-V101B 1 PB 1 yr M*S Instrument Root Hot Leg 1 Flow RCS-PL-V101C 1 PB 1 yr M*S Instrument Root Hot Leg 1 Flow RCS-PL-V101D 1 PB 1 yr M*S Instrument Root Hot Leg 1 Flow RCS-PL-V101E 1 PB 1 yr M*S Instrument Root Hot Leg 1 Flow RCS-PL-V101F 1 PB 1 yr M*S Instrument Root Hot Leg 2 Flow RCS-PL-V102A 1 PB 1 yr M*S Instrument Root Hot Leg 2 Flow RCS-PL-V102B 1 PB 1 yr M*S Instrument Root Hot Leg 2 Flow RCS-PL-V102C 1 PB 1 yr M*S Instrument Root Hot Leg 2 Flow RCS-PL-V102D 1 PB 1 yr M*S Instrument Root Hot Leg 2 Flow RCS-PL-V102E 1 PB 1 yr M*S Instrument Root Hot Leg 2 Flow RCS-PL-V102F 1 PB 1 yr M*S Instrument Root PRHR HX Outlet Line Drain RCS-PL-V103 1 PB 1 yr M*S Hot Leg 1 Sample Isolation RCS-PL-V108A 1 PB 1 yr M*S Hot Leg 2 Sample Isolation RCS-PL-V108B 1 PB 1 yr M*S PZR Spray Valve RCS-PL-V110A 1 PB 1 yr M*S PZR Spray Valve RCS-PL-V110B 1 PB 1 yr M*S PZR Spray Block Valve RCS-PL-V111A 1 PB 1 yr M*S PZR Spray Block Valve RCS-PL-V111B 1 PB 1 yr M*S Cold Leg 1A Bend Instrument Root RCS-PL-V171A 1 PB 1 yr M*S Cold Leg 1A Bend Instrument Root RCS-PL-V171B 1 PB 1 yr M*S Cold Leg 1B Bend Instrument Root RCS-PL-V172A 1 PB 1 yr M*S Cold Leg 1B Bend Instrument Root RCS-PL-V172B 1 PB 1 yr M*S Cold Leg 2A Bend Instrument Root RCS-PL-V173A 1 PB 1 yr M*S Cold Leg 2A Bend Instrument Root RCS-PL-V173B 1 PB 1 yr M*S Cold Leg 2B Bend Instrument Root RCS-PL-V174A 1 PB 1 yr M*S Cold Leg 2B Bend Instrument Root RCS-PL-V174B 1 PB 1 yr M*S PZR Manual Vent RCS-PL-V204 1 PB 1 yr M*S PZR Manual Vent RCS-PL-V205 1 PB 1 yr M*S PZR Spray Bypass RCS-PL-V210A 1 PB 1 yr M*S PZR Spray Bypass RCS-PL-V210B 1 PB 1 yr M*S 3.11-47 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 42 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
PZR Level Steam Space RCS-PL-V225A 1 PB 1 yr M*S Instrument Root PZR Level Steam Space RCS-PL-V225B 1 PB 1 yr M*S Instrument Root PZR Level Steam Space RCS-PL-V225C 1 PB 1 yr M*S Instrument Root PZR Level Steam Space RCS-PL-V225D 1 PB 1 yr M*S Instrument Root PZR Level Liquid Space RCS-PL-V226A 1 PB 1 yr M*S Instrument Root PZR Level Liquid Space RCS-PL-V226B 1 PB 1 yr M*S Instrument Root PZR Level Liquid Space RCS-PL-V226C 1 PB 1 yr M*S Instrument Root PZR Level Liquid Space RCS-PL-V226D 1 PB 1 yr M*S Instrument Root Pressurizer Level Reference Leg Tubing RCS-PL-V227A 1 PB 1 yr M*
Instrument Root Pressurizer Level Reference Leg Tubing RCS-PL-V227B 1 PB 1 yr M*
Instrument Root Pressurizer Level Reference Leg Tubing RCS-PL-V227C 1 PB 1 yr M*
Instrument Root Pressurizer Level Reference Leg Tubing RCS-PL-V227D 1 PB 1 yr M*
Instrument Root Wide Range PZR Level RCS-PL-V228 1 PB 1 yr M*S Steam Space Instrument Root Wide Range PZR Level RCS-PL-V229 1 PB 1 yr M*S Liquid Space Instrument Root Manual Head Vent RCS-PL-V232 1 PB 1 yr M*S Head Vent Isolation RCS-PL-V233 1 PB 1 yr M*S ADS Valve Discharge Header RCS-PL-V241 1 PB 1 yr M*S Drain Isolation ADS Discharge Line Isolation RCS-PL-V250 1 PB 1 yr M*S RCP 1A Vent RCS-PL-V260A 1 PB 1 yr M*S RCP 1B Vent RCS-PL-V260B 1 PB 1 yr M*S RCP 2A Vent RCS-PL-V260C 1 PB 1 yr M*S RCP 2B Vent RCS-PL-V260D 1 PB 1 yr M*S RCP 1A Drain RCS-PL-V261A 1 PB 1 yr M*S RCP 1B Drain RCS-PL-V261B 1 PB 1 yr M*S RCP 2A Drain RCS-PL-V261C 1 PB 1 yr M*S RCP 2B Drain RCS-PL-V261D 1 PB 1 yr M*S RCS Pressure Boundary Valve RNS-PL-V004A 1 PB 1 yr M*S Thermal Relief Isolation RCS Pressure Boundary Valve RNS-PL-V004B 1 PB 1 yr M*S Thermal Relief Isolation 3.11-48 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 43 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
RNS Pump A Suction Isolation RNS-PL-V005A 6 PB 1 yr M ** S RNS Pump B Suction Isolation RNS-PL-V005B 6 PB 1 yr M ** S RNS HX A Outlet Flow Control RNS-PL-V006A 6 PB 1 yr M ** S RNS HX B Outlet Flow Control RNS-PL-V006B 6 PB 1 yr M ** S RNS Pump A Discharge Isolation RNS-PL-V007A 6 PB 1 yr M ** S RNS Pump B Discharge Isolation RNS-PL-V007B 6 PB 1 yr M ** S RNS HX A Bypass Flow Control RNS-PL-V008A 6 PB 1 yr M ** S RNS HX B Bypass Flow Control RNS-PL-V008B 6 PB 1 yr M ** S RNS Discharge Containment RNS-PL-V010 6 PB 1 yr M ** S Isolation Valve Test RNS Discharge Containment RNS-PL-V014 1 PB 1 yr M*S Isolation Valve Test Connection RNS Discharge Containment RNS-PL-V016 1 PB 1 yr M*S Penetration Isolation Valves Test RNS Discharge to IRWST Isolation RNS-PL-V024 1 PB 1 yr M*S RNS Suction from IRWST - Bonnet Relief RNS-PL-V025 1 PB 1 yr M*S Isolation RNS Suction from IRWST - Containment RNS-PL-V026 1 PB 1 yr M*S Isolation Test RNS Discharge to CVS RNS-PL-V029 1 PB 1 yr M*S RNS Train A Discharge Flow RNS-PL-V031A 6 PB 1 yr M ** S Instrument Isolation RNS Train B Discharge Flow RNS-PL-V031B 6 PB 1 yr M ** S Instrument Isolation RNS Train A Discharge Flow RNS-PL-V032A 6 PB 1 yr M ** S Instrument Isolation RNS Train B Discharge Flow RNS-PL-V032B 6 PB 1 yr M ** S Instrument Isolation RNS Pump A Suction Pressure RNS-PL-V033A 6 PB 1 yr M **
Instrument Isolation RNS Pump B Suction Pressure RNS-PL-V033B 6 PB 1 yr M **
Instrument Isolation RNS Pump A Discharge Pressure RNS-PL-V034A 6 PB 1 yr M ** S Instrument Isolation RNS Pump B Discharge Pressure RNS-PL-V034B 6 PB 1 yr M ** S Instrument Isolation RNS Pump A Suction Piping RNS-PL-V036A 6 PB 1 yr M ** S Drain Isolation RNS Pump B Suction Piping RNS-PL-V036B 6 PB 1 yr M ** S Drain Isolation RNS Pump Discharge Relief RNS-PL-V045 6 PB 1 yr M **
RNS Pump Seal Cooler A Vent Isolation RNS-PL-V048A 6 PB 1 yr M** S RNS Pump Seal Cooler B Vent Isolation RNS-PL-V048B 6 PB 1 yr M** S RNS Pump Seal Cooler A Drain Isolation RNS-PL-V049A 6 PB 1 yr M** S RNS Pump Seal Cooler B Drain Isolation RNS-PL-V049B 6 PB 1 yr M** S 3.11-49 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 44 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
RNS Pump A Casing Drain Isolation RNS-PL-V050 6 PB 1 yr M ** S RNS Pump B Casing Drain Isolation RNS-PL-V051 6 PB 1 yr M ** S RNS Suction from SFP Isolation RNS-PL-V052 6 PB 1 yr M **
RNS Discharge to SFP Isolation RNS-PL-V053 6 PB 1 yr M **
RNS Suction from Cask Loading Pit RNS-PL-V055 6 PB 1 yr M **
Isolation Valve RNS Pump Suction to Cask Loading Pit RNS-PL-V056 6 PB 1 yr M **
Isolation RNS Train A Miniflow Isolation Valve RNS-PL-V057A 6 PB 1 yr M **
RNS Train B Miniflow Isolation Valve RNS-PL-V057B 6 PB 1 yr M ** S RNS Pump Suction Containment RNS-PL-V059 6 PB 1 yr M ** S Isolation Test Connection RNS Discharge Drain Valve RNS-PL-V065 6 PB 1 yr M** S RNS Discharge to DVI Line A Drain RNS-PL-V066A 1 PB 1 yr M*S RNS Discharge to DVI Line B Drain RNS-PL-V066B 1 PB 1 yr M*S RNS Discharge to DVI Line A Drain RNS-PL-V067A 1 PB 1 yr M*S RNS Discharge to DVI Line B Drain RNS-PL-V067B 1 PB 1 yr M*S RNS Discharge to IRWST Drain RNS-PL-V068 1 PB 1 yr M*S RNS HX A Channel Head Drain Isolation RNS-PL-V071A 6 PB 1 yr M**
RNS HX B Channel Head Drain Isolation RNS-PL-V071B 6 PB 1 yr M**
RNS HX A Channel Head Drain Isolation RNS-PL-V072A 6 PB 1 yr M**
RNS HX B Channel Head Drain Isolation RNS-PL-V072B 6 PB 1 yr M**
RNS HX A Channel Head Drain Isolation RNS-PL-V073A 6 PB 1 yr M**
RNS HX B Channel Head Drain Isolation RNS-PL-V073B 6 PB 1 yr M**
RNS HX A Channel Head Drain Isolation RNS-PL-V074A 6 PB 1 yr M**
RNS HX B Channel Head Drain Isolation RNS-PL-V074B 6 PB 1 yr M**
RNS HX A Channel Head Drain Isolation RNS-PL-V075A 6 PB 1 yr M**
RNS HX B Channel Head Drain Isolation RNS-PL-V075B 6 PB 1 yr M**
RNS Cask Loading Pit Suction Line Vent RNS-PL-V081 6 PB 1 yr M*
RNS Discharge Drain RNS-PL-V082 1 PB 1 yr M* S LT019A Root Isolation Valve SFS-PL-V024A 6 PB 1 yr M **
LT019B Root Isolation Valve SFS-PL-V024B 6 PB 1 yr M **
LT019C Root Isolation Valve SFS-PL-V024C 6 PB 1 yr M **
LT020 Root Isolation Valve SFS-PL-V028 6 PB 1 yr M **
SFS Refueling Cavity Drain to SFS-PL-V031 1 PB 1 yr M*S SGS Compartment Isolation Limit Switch SFS-PL-V031-L 1 PAMS 1 yr (Note 10) E
- S SFS Refueling Cavity Suction SFS-PL-V032 1 PB 1 yr M*S Isolation SFS Refueling Cavity Drain to SFS-PL-V033 1 PB 1 yr M*S Containment Sump Isolation Limit Switch SFS-PL-V033-L 1 PAMS 1 yr (Note 10) E
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 45 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
SFS Fuel Transfer Canal Suction SFS-PL-V040 6 PB 1 yr M **
Isolation SFS Cask Loading Pit Suction SFS-PL-V041 6 PB 1 yr M **
Isolation Cask Loading Pit Level Transmitter SFS-PL-V043 6 PB 1 yr M **
Root Isolation Valve SFS Containment Penetration SFS-PL-V048 6 PB 1 yr M **
Test Connection SFS Containment Penetration SFS-PL-V056 1 PB 1 yr M*S Test Connection Isolation SFS Containment Isolation SFS-PL-V058 1 PB 1 yr M*S Valve V034 Test SFS Containment Floodup Isolation Valve SFS-PL-V075 1 PB 1 yr M*S Limit Switch SFS-PL-V075-L 1 PAMS 1 yr (Note 10) E
- S Refueling Cavity Drain Line Test SFS-PL-V117 1 PB 1 yr M*S Connection LT001, LT011 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V001A 1 PB 1 yr M*S LT005, LT013 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V001B 1 PB 1 yr M*S LT001 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V002A 1 PB 1 yr M*S LT005 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V002B 1 PB 1 yr M*S LT002, LT012 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V003A 1 PB 1 yr M*S LT006, LT014 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V003B 1 PB 1 yr M*S LT002 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V004A 1 PB 1 yr M*S LT006 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V004B 1 PB 1 yr M*S LT003, LT015, LT044 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V005A 1 PB 1 yr M*S LT007, LT017, LT046 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V005B 1 PB 1 yr M*S LT003 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V006A 1 PB 1 yr M*S LT007 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V006B 1 PB 1 yr M*S LT004, LT016, LT045 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V007A 1 PB 1 yr M*S LT008, LT018, LT047 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V007B 1 PB 1 yr M*S LT004 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V008A 1 PB 1 yr M*S LT008 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V008B 1 PB 1 yr M*S LT011 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V010A 1 PB 1 yr M*S LT013 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V010B 1 PB 1 yr M*S LT011 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V011A 1 PB 1 yr M*S LT013 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V011B 1 PB 1 yr M*S LT012 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V012A 1 PB 1 yr M*S LT014 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V012B 1 PB 1 yr M*S LT012 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V013A 1 PB 1 yr M*S LT014 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V013B 1 PB 1 yr M*S FT021 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V015A 1 PB 1 yr M*S FT023 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V015B 1 PB 1 yr M*S FT020 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V016A 1 PB 1 yr M*S FT022 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V016B 1 PB 1 yr M*S 3.11-51 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 46 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
FT021 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V017A 1 PB 1 yr M*S FT023 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V017B 1 PB 1 yr M*S FT020 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V018A 1 PB 1 yr M*S FT022 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V018B 1 PB 1 yr M*S Main Steam Line Vent Isolation SGS-PL-V019A 1 PB 1 yr M*S Main Steam Line Vent Isolation SGS-PL-V019B 1 PB 1 yr M*S FT024 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V020A 1 PB 1 yr M*S FT025 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V020B 1 PB 1 yr M*S FT024 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V021A 1 PB 1 yr M*S FT025 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V021B 1 PB 1 yr M*S PT030 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V022A 1 PB 1 yr M*S PT034 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V022B 1 PB 1 yr M*S PT031 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V023A 2 PB 1 yr M PT035 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V023B 2 PB 1 yr M PT032 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V024A 1 PB 1 yr M*S PT036 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V024B 1 PB 1 yr M*S PT033 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V025A 2 PB 1 yr M PT037 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V025B 2 PB 1 yr M Steam Line 1 Nitrogen SGS-PL-V038A 5 PB 1 yr M*S Supply Isolation Steam Line 2 Nitrogen SGS-PL-V038B 5 PB 1 yr M*S Supply Isolation MSIV Bypass Control Isolation SGS-PL-V042A 5 PB 1 yr M*S MSIV Bypass Control Isolation SGS-PL-V042B 5 PB 1 yr M*S MSIV Bypass Control Isolation SGS-PL-V043A 5 PB 1 yr M*S MSIV Bypass Control Isolation SGS-PL-V043B 5 PB 1 yr M*S SG1 Condensate Pipe Drain Valve SGS-PL-V045A 5 PB 1 yr M*S SG2 Condensate Pipe Drain Valve SGS-PL-V045B 5 PB 1 yr M*S LT015 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V046A 1 PB 1 yr M*S LT017 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V046B 1 PB 1 yr M*S LT015, LT044 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V047A 1 PB 1 yr M*S LT017, LT046 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V047B 1 PB 1 yr M*S LT016 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V048A 1 PB 1 yr M*S LT018 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V048B 1 PB 1 yr M*S LT016, LT045 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V049A 1 PB 1 yr M*S LT018, LT047 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V049B 1 PB 1 yr M*S LT044 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V050A 1 PB 1 yr M*S LT046 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V050B 1 PB 1 yr M*S LT044 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V051A 1 PB 1 yr M*S LT046 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V051B 1 PB 1 yr M*S LT045 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V052A 1 PB 1 yr M*S LT047 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V052B 1 PB 1 yr M*S LT045 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V053A 1 PB 1 yr M*S LT047 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V053B 1 PB 1 yr M*S 3.11-52 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 47 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
PT062 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V056A 5 PB 1 yr M*S PT063 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V056B 5 PB 1 yr M*S Main Feedwater Check SGS-PL-V058A 5 PB 1 yr M*S Main Feedwater Check SGS-PL-V058B 5 PB 1 yr M*S FT055A Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V062A 5 PB 1 yr M*S FT056A Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V062B 5 PB 1 yr M*S FT055A Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V063A 5 PB 1 yr M*S FT056A Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V063B 5 PB 1 yr M*S FT055B Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V064A 5 PB 1 yr M*S FT056B Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V064B 5 PB 1 yr M*S FT055B Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V065A 5 PB 1 yr M*S FT056B Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V065B 5 PB 1 yr M*S FT055 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V066A 5 PB 1 yr M*S FT056 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V066B 5 PB 1 yr M*S FT055 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V068A 5 PB 1 yr M*S FT056 Root Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V068B 5 PB 1 yr M*S SG 1 Blowdown Vent Line Isolation SGS-PL-V076A 10 PB 1 yr M*
SG 2 Blowdown Vent Line Isolation SGS-PL-V076B 10 PB 1 yr M*
SG1 Nitrogen Sparging Isolation SGS-PL-V084A 1 PB 1 yr M*S SG2 Nitrogen Sparging Isolation SGS-PL-V084B 1 PB 1 yr M*S Orifice Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V093A 5 PB 1 yr M*S Orifice Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V093B 5 PB 1 yr M*S Orifice Cleanout Line Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V094A 5 PB 1 yr M*S Orifice Cleanout Line Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V094B 5 PB 1 yr M*S Orifice Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V095A 5 PB 1 yr M*S Orifice Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V095B 5 PB 1 yr M*S Steam Line Condensate Drain Level SGS-PL-V096A 5 PB 1 yr M*S Isolation Valve Steam Line Condensate Drain Level SGS-PL-V096B 5 PB 1 yr M*S Isolation Valve Steam Line Condensate Drain Level SGS-PL-V097A 5 PB 1 yr M*S Isolation Valve Steam Line Condensate Drain Level SGS-PL-V097B 5 PB 1 yr M*S Isolation Valve Startup Feedwater Drain Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V100A 5 PB 1 yr M*S Startup Feedwater Drain Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V100B 5 PB 1 yr M*S Main Feedwater Drain Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V101A 5 PB 1 yr M*S Main Feedwater Drain Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V101B 5 PB 1 yr M*S Startup Feedwater Vent Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V102A 5 PB 1 yr M*S Startup Feedwater Vent Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V102B 5 PB 1 yr M*S Main Feedwater Vent Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V103A 5 PB 1 yr M*S Main Feedwater Vent Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V103B 5 PB 1 yr M*S Main Feedwater Drain Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V104A 5 PB 1 yr M*S Main Feedwater Drain Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V104B 5 PB 1 yr M*S 3.11-53 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 48 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
Startup Feedwater Check Valve SGS-PL-V256A 5 PB 1 yr M*S Startup Feedwater Check Valve SGS-PL-V256B 5 PB 1 yr M*S SG 1 NR LT001 Upper Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V300 1 PB 1 yr M*
SG 1 NR LT001 Lower Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V301 1 PB 1 yr M*
SG 1 NR LT002 Upper Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V302 1 PB 1 yr M*
SG 1 NR LT002 Lower Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V303 1 PB 1 yr M*
SG 1 NR LT003 Upper Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V304 1 PB 1 yr M*
SG 1 NR LT003 Lower Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V305 1 PB 1 yr M*
SG 1 NR LT004 Upper Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V306 1 PB 1 yr M*
SG 1 NR LT004 Lower Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V307 1 PB 1 yr M*
SG 1 WR LT011 Lower Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V308 1 PB 1 yr M*
SG 1 WR LT012 Lower Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V309 1 PB 1 yr M*
SG 1 WR LT015 Lower Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V310 1 PB 1 yr M*
SG 1 WR LT016 Lower Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V311 1 PB 1 yr M*
SG 1 Main Steam FT020 Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V312 1 PB 1 yr M*
SG 1 Main Steam FT021 Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V313 1 PB 1 yr M*
SG 1 Main Steam FT024 Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V314 1 PB 1 yr M*
SG 2 NR LT005 Upper Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V320 1 PB 1 yr M*
SG 2 NR LT005 Lower Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V321 1 PB 1 yr M*
SG 2 NR LT006 Upper Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V322 1 PB 1 yr M*
SG 2 NR LT006 Lower Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V323 1 PB 1 yr M*
SG 2 NR LT007 Upper Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V324 1 PB 1 yr M*
SG 2 NR LT007 Lower Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V325 1 PB 1 yr M*
SG 2 NR LT008 Upper Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V326 1 PB 1 yr M*
SG 2 NR LT008 Lower Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V327 1 PB 1 yr M*
SG 2 WR LT013 Lower Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V328 1 PB 1 yr M*
SG 2 WR LT014 Lower Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V329 1 PB 1 yr M*
SG 2 WR LT017 Lower Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V330 1 PB 1 yr M*
SG 2 WR LT018 Lower Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V331 1 PB 1 yr M*
SG 2 Main Steam FT022 Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V332 1 PB 1 yr M*
SG 2 Main Steam FT023 Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V333 1 PB 1 yr M*
SG 2 Main Steam FT025 Isolation Valve SGS-PL-V334 1 PB 1 yr M*
VBS-PDT-032A Isolation Valve VBS-PL-V184A 3 PB 1 yr M VBS-PDT-032B Isolation Valve VBS-PL-V184B 3 PB 1 yr M VBS-PDT-032C Isolation Valve VBS-PL-V184C 3 PB 1 yr M Air Delivery Line Pressure Instrument VES-PL-V006A 7 PB 1 yr M Isolation Valve A Air Delivery Line Pressure Instrument VES-PL-V006B 7 PB 1 yr M Isolation Valve B Air Delivery Line Maintenance Isolation VES-PL-V010A 7 PB 1 yr M Valve A Air Delivery Line Maintenance Isolation VES-PL-V010B 7 PB 1 yr M Valve B Air Delivery Line Maintenance Isolation VES-PL-V011A 7 PB 1 yr M Valve A 3.11-54 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 49 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
Air Delivery Line Maintenance Isolation VES-PL-V011B 7 PB 1 yr M Valve B Temporary Instrument VES-PL-V016 7 PB 1 yr M Isolation Valve A Temporary Instrument VES-PL-V020 7 PB 1 yr M Isolation Valve B Air Bank 1 Isolation Valve A VES-PL-V024A 7 PB 1 yr M Air Bank 2 Isolation Valve B VES-PL-V024B 7 PB 1 yr M Air Bank 3 Isolation Valve C VES-PL-V024C 7 PB 1 yr M Air Bank 4 Isolation Valve D VES-PL-V024D 7 PB 1 yr M Air Bank 1 Isolation Valve A VES-PL-V025A 7 PB 1 yr M Air Bank 2 Isolation Valve B VES-PL-V025B 7 PB 1 yr M Air Bank 3 Isolation Valve C VES-PL-V025C 7 PB 1 yr M Air Bank 4 Isolation Valve D VES-PL-V025D 7 PB 1 yr M Air Bank 1 Fill/Vent Isolation Valve A VES-PL-V026A 7 PB 1 yr M Air Bank 2 Fill/Vent Isolation Valve B VES-PL-V026B 7 PB 1 yr M Air Bank 3 Fill/Vent Isolation Valve C VES-PL-V026C 7 PB 1 yr M Air Bank 4 Fill/Vent Isolation Valve D VES-PL-V026D 7 PB 1 yr M DP Instrument Line Isolation Valve A VES-PL-V043A 3 PB 1 yr M DP Instrument Line Isolation Valve B VES-PL-V043B 3 PB 1 yr M Containment Isolation Test Connection VFS-PL-V006 1 PB 1 yr M*
RCS Ejector Discharge Isolation VFS-PL-V007 1 PB 1 yr M*
Containment Isolation Test Connection VFS-PL-V008 6 PB 1 yr M **
Containment Isolation Test Connection VFS-PL-V012 1 PB 1 yr M*S Containment Isolation Test Connection VFS-PL-V015 1 PB 1 yr M*S Containment Air Supply Line Test VFS-PL-V101 1 PB 1 yr M*
Connection Containment Atmosphere to Filtration VFS-PL-V202 1 PB 1 yr M*
Units Isolation Filtration Units to Containment VFS-PL-V587 1 PB 1 yr M*
Atmosphere Manual Isolation Main Equipment Hatch Test Connection VUS-PL-V013 1 PB 1 yr M*
Maintenance Equipment Hatch Test VUS-PL-V014 1 PB 1 yr M*
Connection Main Equipment Hatch Test Connection VUS-PL-V015 1 PB 1 yr M*
Maintenance Equipment Hatch VUS-PL-V016 1 PB 1 yr M*
Test Connection Personnel Hatch Test Connection VUS-PL-V017 7 PB 1 yr M Personnel Hatch Test Connection VUS-PL-V018 7 PB 1 yr M Personnel Hatch Test Connection VUS-PL-V019 7 PB 1 yr M Personnel Hatch Test Connection VUS-PL-V020 7 PB 1 yr M Personnel Hatch Test Connection VUS-PL-V021 7 PB 1 yr M Personnel Hatch Test Connection VUS-PL-V022 7 PB 1 yr M Fuel Transfer Tube Test Connection VUS-PL-V023 1 PB 1 yr M*S Spare Penetration Test Connection VUS-PL-V140 1 PB 1 yr M*
Spare Penetration Test Connection VUS-PL-V141 1 PB 1 yr M*
3.11-55 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 50 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
Spare Penetration Test Connection VUS-PL-V142 1 PB 1 yr M*
VWS Supply Containment VWS-PL-V424 1 PB 1 yr M*S Penetration IRC Test Connection/Vent VWS Return Containment VWS-PL-V425 2 PB 1 yr M Penetration ORC Test Connection/Vent WWS Main Control Room Isolation Valve WWS-PL-V506 3 PB 1 yr M Heat Exchangers Normal Residual Heat Removal RNS-ME-01A 6 PB 1 yr M **
Heat Exchanger A Normal Residual Heat Removal RNS-ME-01B 6 PB 1 yr M **
Heat Exchanger B Tanks Spent Fuel Pool FHS-MT-01 11 ESF 1 yr M **
Fuel Transfer Canal FHS-MT-02 11 ESF 1 yr M **
Refueling Cavity FHS-MT-03 11 ESF 1 yr M **
Spent Fuel Cask Loading Pit FHS-MT-05 6 ESF 1 yr M **
Spent Fuel Cask Washdown Pit FHS-MT-06 6 ESF 1 yr M **
Spent Fuel Transfer Gate FHS-MY-Y01 6, 11 ESF (Note 11) 1 wk M ** S Spent Fuel Cask Loading Pit Gate FHS-MY-Y02 11 ESF (Note 11) 1 wk M ** S Passive Containment Cooling PCS-MT-01 9 ESF 1 yr M Water Storage Tank Water Distribution Bucket PCS-MT-03 9 ESF 1 yr M Water Collection Troughs PCS-MT-04 9 ESF 1 yr M Passive RHR Heat Exchanger PXS-ME-01 1 ESF 1 yr M*S Accumulator Tank A PXS-MT-01A 1 ESF 1 yr M*S Accumulator Tank B PXS-MT-01B 1 ESF 1 yr M*S Core Makeup Tank A PXS-MT-02A 1 ESF 1 yr M*S Core Makeup Tank B PXS-MT-02B 1 ESF 1 yr M*S In-Containment Refueling Water PXS-MT-03 1 ESF 1 yr M*S Storage Tank Emergency Air Storage Tank 01 VES-MT-01 7 ESF 1 yr M Emergency Air Storage Tank 02 VES-MT-02 7 ESF 1 yr M Emergency Air Storage Tank 03 VES-MT-03 7 ESF 1 yr M Emergency Air Storage Tank 04 VES-MT-04 7 ESF 1 yr M Emergency Air Storage Tank 05 VES-MT-05 7 ESF 1 yr M Emergency Air Storage Tank 06 VES-MT-06 7 ESF 1 yr M Emergency Air Storage Tank 07 VES-MT-07 7 ESF 1 yr M Emergency Air Storage Tank 08 VES-MT-08 7 ESF 1 yr M Emergency Air Storage Tank 09 VES-MT-09 7 ESF 1 yr M Emergency Air Storage Tank 10 VES-MT-10 7 ESF 1 yr M Emergency Air Storage Tank 11 VES-MT-11 7 ESF 1 yr M Emergency Air Storage Tank 12 VES-MT-12 7 ESF 1 yr M Emergency Air Storage Tank 13 VES-MT-13 7 ESF 1 yr M 3.11-56 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3.11-1 (Sheet 51 of 51)
Environmentally Qualified Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Operating Envir. Time Qualification AP1000 Zone Function Required Program Description Tag No. (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 5) (Note 6)
Emergency Air Storage Tank 14 VES-MT-14 7 ESF 1 yr M Emergency Air Storage Tank 15 VES-MT-15 7 ESF 1 yr M Emergency Air Storage Tank 16 VES-MT-16 7 ESF 1 yr M Emergency Air Storage Tank 17 VES-MT-17 7 ESF 1 yr M Emergency Air Storage Tank 18 VES-MT-18 7 ESF 1 yr M Emergency Air Storage Tank 19 VES-MT-19 7 ESF 1 yr M Emergency Air Storage Tank 20 VES-MT-20 7 ESF 1 yr M Emergency Air Storage Tank 21 VES-MT-21 7 ESF 1 yr M Emergency Air Storage Tank 22 VES-MT-22 7 ESF 1 yr M Emergency Air Storage Tank 23 VES-MT-23 7 ESF 1 yr M Emergency Air Storage Tank 24 VES-MT-24 7 ESF 1 yr M Emergency Air Storage Tank 25 VES-MT-25 7 ESF 1 yr M Emergency Air Storage Tank 26 VES-MT-26 7 ESF 1 yr M Emergency Air Storage Tank 27 VES-MT-27 7 ESF 1 yr M Emergency Air Storage Tank 28 VES-MT-28 7 ESF 1 yr M Emergency Air Storage Tank 29 VES-MT-29 7 ESF 1 yr M Emergency Air Storage Tank 30 VES-MT-30 7 ESF 1 yr M Emergency Air Storage Tank 31 VES-MT-31 7 ESF 1 yr M Emergency Air Storage Tank 32 VES-MT-32 7 ESF 1 yr M Eductor Bypass Isol. Discharge Silencer VES-PY-N02 3 ESF 2 wks M DVI-B Inline Expansion Joint PXS-PY-E01 1 PB 1 yr M*
Notes:
- 1. RT (Reactor Trip), ESF (Engineered Safeguards Feature), PAMS (Post-Accident Monitoring), ISOL (Isolation), PB (Pressure Boundary); all active valves in this table have PB-1 yr in addition to any other requirements.
- 2. Zones identified in Table 3D.5-1
- 3. Not required post-accident
- 4. Note deleted
- 5. Reference Table 3D.4-2. The operating time presented is a conservatively established qualification time enveloping the actual operating time for component function.
- 6. E = Electrical Equipment Program M = Mechanical Equipment Program
- = Harsh Environment
- = Radiation-Harsh Environment (See Appendix 3D, Subsection 3D.4.3.)
+ = Seismic Qualification not required S = Qualified for submergence or operation with spray
- 7. The Protection and Safety Monitoring Cabinets will be qualified to meet the function operating times identified in this table.
- 8. Provides the function of floodup level indication to the operator in the main control room (MCR), including during a seismic event.
- 9. Operating time required while submerged is 4 months.
- 10. Operation while submerged is not required.
- 11. Not required unless irradiated fuel is stored in the spent fuel pool. ESF leakage prevention from the spent fuel pool may also be met by maintaining equivalent water pressure (level) on the opposite side of the gate seal.
3.11-57 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Appendix 3A HVAC Ducts and Duct Supports This appendix provides the design criteria for seismic Category I and II HVAC ducts and their supports. These design criteria maintain structural integrity for seismic Category I and II ducts and functional capability for seismic Category I duct.
The structural components of a typical HVAC duct system include the sheet metal ducts, stiffeners for the ducts, duct supports, and other inline components such as duct heaters, dampers, etc.
3A.1 Codes and Standards The design of the HVAC ducts and their supports conform to the following codes and standards:
ASME N509-1989(R1996), Nuclear Power Plants Air Cleaning Units and Components ASME/ANSI AG-1-1997, Code on Nuclear Air and Gas Treatment American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC), Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Steel Safety Related Structures for Nuclear Facilities, ANSI/AISC N690-1994.
American Welding Society (AWS), Structural Welding Code - Steel, AWS D1.1-2000 provides an acceptable alternative for ANSI/AISC N690 for weld requirements as described in Subsections 3.8.3.2 and 3.8.4.2.
American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI), Specification for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members, 1996 Edition and Supplement No. 1, July 30, 1999 SMACNA, HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, Second Edition 1995.
3A.2 Loads and Load Combinations 3A.2.1 Loads 3A.2.1.1 Dead Load (D)
Dead load includes the weight of the duct sheet, stiffeners and inline components such as duct heaters and dampers. It also includes permanently attached items such as insulation and fireproofing, where applicable, and the weight of the duct supports. Temporary items used during construction or maintenance are removed prior to operation.
3A.2.1.2 Construction Live Load (L)
Live load consists of a load of 250 pounds to be applied only during construction or maintenance on an area of 10 square inches on the duct at a critical location to maximize flexural and shear stresses.
This load is not combined with seismic loads.
3A.2.1.3 Pressure (P)
The duct metal thickness and stiffener requirements are based on maximum system design pressures. SMACNA or ASME guidelines, as applicable, are used in the design of duct metal thickness and stiffener requirements.
The pressure loads occur during normal plant operation, including plant start up testing, damper closure and normal airflow. Occasionally, overpressure transient loads such as rapid damper closure may also produce short duration pressure differential.
3A-1 Revision 3
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR 3A.2.1.4 Safe Shutdown Earthquake (Es)
Seismic response of the HVAC ductwork and its support system are produced due to seismic excitation of the supports.
3A.2.1.5 Wind Loads (W)
Ductwork within partially or fully vented buildings is subject to wind effects. Design wind loads are discussed in Section 3.3.
3A.2.1.6 Tornado Loads (Wt)
Ductwork within partially or fully vented buildings is subject to tornado differential pressure effects.
Tornado loads are discussed in Section 3.3. Seismic Category I HVAC ductwork is protected from impact by tornado missiles.
3A.2.1.7 External Pressure Differential Loads (PA)
Seismic Category I HVAC ductwork and its supports are designed to withstand dynamic external pressure differential loads resulting from postulated accident conditions. Usually HVAC ducts are routed outside the areas of potential pipe break.
3A.2.1.8 Thermal (TO/TA)
Stresses on the supports resulting from the ductwork expansion due to temperature changes are avoided by designing the system to take care of the expansion or by utilizing expansion joints. For ducts of gasketed companion angle construction, thermal loads are negligible. For ducts exposed to higher temperatures during a postulated accident condition, an evaluation is performed on a case by case basis for its effect.
3A.2.2 Load Combinations The load combinations for various service levels are as follows:
Service Level Load Combination A (Construction / maintenance) D + L + P + TO A (Normal Operating Condition) D + P + TO B (Severe Condition) D + W + P + TO C (Extreme Condition) D + Es + P + TO C (Extreme Condition) D + Wt + P + TO D (Abnormal Condition) D + P + PA + Es + TA 3A.3 Analysis and Design The HVAC duct support system is designed to maintain structural integrity of the duct. Function is not required for the seismic Category II ductwork. The stresses are maintained within the allowable limits specified in Subsection 3A.3.4. Section properties and masses are calculated in accordance with SMACNA standard.
The damping values for seismic analysis are as follows:
3A-2 Revision 3
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Welded HVAC Ductwork 4 percent Bolted HVAC Ductwork 7 percent The duct design due to pressure loads is based on ASME/ANSI AG-1 for seismic Category I ducts and SMACNA for seismic Category II ducts.
The global behavior of the duct is determined from the overall bending of the duct between the supports. It is similar to the beam type bending. The dead load is combined with the seismic inertial load to determine the maximum bending moment. For determining the section modulus, the corners of the duct are considered effective. The corner length in each direction equals 32 times the thickness of the duct (t) for this purpose.
3A.3.1 Response Due to Seismic Loads The methodology for seismic analysis is provided in Subsection 3.7.3. Seismic loads are determined by either using the equivalent static load method of analysis or by performing dynamic analysis.
Stresses are determined for the seismic excitation in two horizontal and one vertical direction. The stresses in the three directions are combined using the square root of sum of the squares (SRSS) method or the 100-40-40 method as described in Subsection 3.7.3.6.
3A.3.2 Deflection Criteria Deflections for panels and stiffeners conform to the limits stated in the Code on Nuclear Air and Gas Treatment.
3A.3.3 Relative Movement Clearances are provided for allowing relative movement between equipment, other commodities, and HVAC system.
3A.3.4 Allowable Stresses The basic stress allowables for the HVAC ducts are in accordance with paragraph SA-4220 of ASME/
ANSI AG-1.
The basic stress allowables for duct supports utilizing rolled structural shapes are in accordance with ANSI/AISC N690 and the supplemental requirements described in Subsection 3.8.4.5.2. The basic stress allowables for supports utilizing light gage cold rolled channel type sections are based on the manufacturer's published catalog values.
Service Level A and B Basic Allowable Service Level C and D 1.6 times basic allowable for tension and 1.4 times basic allowable for compression 3A.3.5 Connections Connections are designed in accordance with the applicable codes and standards listed in Section 3A.1. For connections used with light gage cold rolled channel type sections, design is based on the manufacturer's published catalog values. Supports are attached to the building structure by bolted or welded connections. Fastening of the supports to concrete structures meets the supplemental requirements given in Subsection 3.8.4.5.1.
3A-3 Revision 3
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Appendix 3B Leak-Before-Break Evaluation of the AP1000 Piping General Design Criterion 4 requires that structures, systems, and components important to safety be designed to accommodate the effects of conditions associated with normal operation, anticipated transients, and postulated accident conditions. However, the dynamic effects associated with pipe rupture may be excluded when analysis demonstrates that the probability of fluid system pipe rupture is extremely low. Dynamic effects are not considered for those segments of piping that are shown mechanistically, with a large margin, not to be susceptible to a pipe rupture.
The dynamic effects associated with pipe rupture include effects such as pipe break reaction loads, jets and jet impingement, subcompartment pressurization loads, and transient pipe rupture depressurization loads on other components.
The use of mechanistic pipe break to eliminate evaluation of dynamic effects of pipe rupture includes material selection, inspection, leak detection, and analysis. Subsection 3.6.3 outlines considerations relative to material selection, inspections, and leak detection. Subsection 5.2.5 describes the leak detection system inside containment. This appendix describes the analysis methods used to support the application of mechanistic pipe break to high-energy piping in the AP1000.
The analysis and criteria to eliminate dynamic effects of pipe breaks are encompassed in a methodology called leak-before-break (LBB). This methodology has been validated by theoretical investigations and test demonstrations sponsored by the industry and the NRC.
The primary regulatory documents for leak-before-break analyses are General Design Criterion No. 4 (GDC-4), Draft Standard Review Plan 3.6.3 (SRP 3.6.3) (Reference 1), and NUREG-1061, Volume 3 (Reference 2). Although SRP 3.6.3 has been issued only as a draft, its provisions are followed as guidelines to leak-before-break analyses.
Leak-before-break methodology has been applied to the reactor coolant loop and high-energy auxiliary line piping in operating nuclear power plants. The leak-before-break analysis used to support the piping design of the AP1000 is an application of the same methodology used in leak-before-beak evaluations previously accepted by the NRC.
In the AP1000, leak-before-break evaluations are performed for the reactor coolant loop, the surge line, selected other branch lines containing reactor coolant down to and including 6-inch diameter nominal pipe size, and portions of the main steam line. Those lines not qualified to the leak-before-break criteria are evaluated using the pipe rupture protection criteria outlined in Subsections 3.6.1 and 3.6.2.
This appendix provides a leak-before-break analysis for the applicable piping systems. Table 3B-1 provides a list of AP1000 leak-before-break piping systems.
3B.1 Leak-before-Break Criteria for AP1000 Piping The methodology used for leak-before-break analysis is consistent with that set forth in GDC-4, SRP 3.6.3 (Reference 1) and NUREG-1061, Volume 3 (Reference 2). The steps are:
Evaluate potential failure mechanisms Perform bounding analysis 3B-1 Revision 4
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR 3B.2 Potential Failure Mechanisms for AP1000 Piping In high-energy piping, there are material degradation mechanisms that could adversely affect the integrity of the system as well as its suitability for leak-before-break analysis. The following lists potential degradation (or "failure") mechanisms:
Erosion-corrosion induced wall thinning Stress corrosion cracking (SCC)
Water hammer Fatigue Thermal aging Thermal stratification Other mechanisms The stainless steel piping is fabricated of SA312TP316LN or SA312TP304L material. The type 304L material is used in the accumulator discharge lines. The main steam piping is fabricated of SA335 Grade P11. The welds are made by the gas tungsten arc welding (GTAW) method.
The various degradation mechanisms are discussed in the following subsections.
3B.2.1 Erosion-Corrosion Induced Wall Thinning Primary Loop Piping Wall thinning by erosion and erosion-corrosion effects does not occur in the primary loop piping because Series 300 austenitic stainless steel material is highly resistant to these effects. The coolant velocity in the AP1000 primary loop is about 76 feet per second. This flow velocity is not expected to create erosion-corrosion effects since stainless steels are considered to be virtually immune (Reference 3). A review of erosion-corrosion in nuclear power systems (Reference 4) reported that "stainless steels are increasingly being used due to their excellent resistance to erosion-corrosion, even at high water velocities, 40 m/s (131 ft/sec)." The bend radii in the AP1000 hot and cold legs are greater than the bend radii used in the crossover legs of operating plants. There is no record of erosion-corrosion induced wall thinning in the primary loops of operating plants.
Auxiliary Stainless Steel Piping Wall thinning by erosion-corrosion effects does not occur in the auxiliary stainless steel piping because Series 300 austenitic stainless materials are highly resistant to these effects. The coolant velocity in these systems is lower than in comparable systems in operating Westinghouse-designed pressurized water reactors. There is no record of erosion-corrosion induced wall thinning in the stainless steel piping of operating plants.
Main Steam Line Main steam lines in the AP1000 are fabricated from SA335 Grade P11 Alloy steel. Erosion-corrosion induced wall thinning is not expected in the main steam line. Extensive work has been done investigating erosion-corrosion in carbon steel pipes. The main steam line has low susceptibility to erosion due to the pipe material composition, which has sufficient levels of chromium to preclude erosion-corrosion material loss. Susceptibility is also low due to the relatively high operating temperature and the high quality steam in the main steam line.
Based on the above discussion, erosion-corrosion induced wall thinning does not have an adverse effect on the integrity of the AP1000 leak-before-break piping systems.
3B-2 Revision 4
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR 3B.2.2 Stress Corrosion Cracking Stress corrosion cracking is not expected to occur in the AP1000 piping systems because the three conditions necessary for stress corrosion cracking to take place are not present. If any of these three conditions is not present, stress corrosion cracking will not take place. The three conditions are:
There must be a corrosive environment.
The material itself must be susceptible.
Tensile stresses must be present in the material.
Primary Loop Piping During plant operation, the reactor coolant water chemistry is monitored and maintained within specific limits (see Subsection 5.2.3 for a discussion of reactor coolant chemistry). Contaminant concentrations are kept below the thresholds known to be conducive to stress corrosion cracking.
The major water chemistry control standards are included in the plant operating procedures as a condition for plant operation.
The key to avoidance of a corrosive environment is control of oxygen. During normal power operation, oxygen concentration in the reactor coolant system is controlled to extremely low levels by controlling charging flow chemistry and maintaining a hydrogen overpressure in the reactor coolant at specified concentrations. Halogen concentration is controlled by maintaining concentrations of chlorides and fluorides within the specified limits. During plant operations, the likelihood of stress corrosion cracking in the primary loop piping systems is very low.
The elements of a water environment known to increase the susceptibility of austenitic stainless steel to stress corrosion are oxygen, fluorides, chlorides, hydroxides, hydrogen peroxide, and reduced forms of sulfur (for example, sulfides, sulfites, and thionates). Pipe cleaning standards prior to operation and careful water chemistry control during plant operation are applied to prevent the occurrence of a corrosive environment. Before being placed in service the piping is cleaned. During flushes and preoperational testing, water chemistry is controlled according to written specifications.
Standards on chlorides, fluorides, conductivity, and pH are included in the guidelines for water for cleaning the piping.
Series 300 stainless steel materials have been chosen for the AP1000 due to their proven operating experience. These materials have operated in low-oxygen or no-oxygen environments with no incidents for a number of years. The requirements of Regulatory Guide 1.44, with the exceptions as stated in Subsection 1.9.1, will be used to maintain the experiences of the PWR applications for the use of Series 300 stainless steel materials.
Design tensile stresses in the reactor coolant loop are within the ASME Code,Section III allowables.
Residual tensile stresses are expected in the welds and such stresses are not considered when designing by the ASME Code,Section III because these stresses are self-equilibrating and do not affect the failure loads. The residual stresses should not be more severe than for the operating Westinghouse pressurized water reactor plants (which have not experienced stress corrosion cracking in the primary loop).
The material used for buttering nozzles at the stainless-to-carbon steel safe ends is a high nickel alloy. The nickel-chromium-iron alloy selected and qualified for this application is not susceptible to primary water stress corrosion cracking.
Auxiliary Stainless Steel Piping The discussion above regarding the necessary conditions for primary loop piping stress corrosion cracking is also applicable to the other stainless steel piping of the primary system.
3B-3 Revision 4
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Series 300 stainless steel materials have been chosen for the AP1000 due to their proven operating experience. These materials have operated in low-oxygen or no-oxygen environments with no incidents for a number of years. The requirements of Regulatory Guide 1.44, with the exceptions as stated in Subsection 1.9.1, will be used to maintain the experiences of the PWR applications for the use of Series 300 stainless steel materials.
Design tensile stresses in the other stainless steel piping are within the ASME Code,Section III allowables. Residual tensile stresses are expected in the welds; however, the residual stresses should not be more severe than for the operating Westinghouse pressurized water reactor plants (which have not experienced stress corrosion cracking in the auxiliary stainless steel piping).
Main Steam Line The main steam piping is constructed from ferritic steel. Stress corrosion cracking in ferritic steels commonly result from a caustic environment. A source of a caustic environment in the main steam piping would be moisture carryover from the steam generator. However, the secondary side water treatment utilizes all volatile treatment. All volatile treatment effectively precludes causticity in the steam generator bulk liquid environment. For some operating plants prior to implementing all volatile treatment, the phosphate water treatment caused a caustic chemical imbalance resulting in stress corrosion cracking of steam generator tubing. Under all volatile treatment water treatment conditions, there is no instance of caustic stress corrosion cracking on the ferritic steam lines indicating no significant caustic carryover. The operating secondary side chemistry precludes stress corrosion cracking on the ferritic main steam line.
Based on the above discussion, stress corrosion cracking does not have an adverse effect on the integrity of AP1000 leak-before-break piping systems.
3B.2.3 Water Hammer Primary Loop Piping The reactor coolant loop is designed to operate at a pressure greater than the saturation pressure of the coolant, thus precluding the voiding conditions necessary for water hammer to occur. The reactor coolant primary system is designed for Level A, B, C, and D (normal, upset, emergency, and faulted) service condition transients. The design requirements are conservative relative to both the number of transients and their severity. Relief valve actuation and the associated hydraulic transients following valve opening have been considered in the system design. Other valve and pump actuations cause relatively slow transients with no significant effect on the system dynamic loads.
To provide dynamic system stability, reactor coolant parameters are controlled. Temperature during normal operation is maintained within a narrow range by control rod positioning. Pressure is controlled within a narrow range for steady-state conditions by pressurizer heaters and pressurizer spray. The flow characteristics of the system remain constant during a fuel cycle. The operating transients of the reactor coolant system primary loop piping are such that significant water hammer loads are not expected to occur.
Auxiliary Stainless Steel Piping The passive core cooling system and automatic depressurization system are designed to minimize the potential for water hammer induced dynamic loads. Design features include:
Continuously sloping core makeup tank and passive residual heat exchanger inlet lines to eliminate local high points Inlet diffusers in the core makeup tanks to preclude adverse steam and water interactions 3B-4 Revision 4
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Vacuum breakers in the discharge lines of the automatic depressurization valves connected to the pressurizer The AP1000 pressurizer spray control valve is similar to what is used in the operating plants. There is no history of water hammer caused by the spray control valve.
The normal residual heat removal system isolation valves are slow closing valves, identical to operating plants, and therefore would not be a source of water hammer.
These features minimize the potential of water hammer in the auxiliary stainless steel piping system.
Main Steam Line The steam lines are not subject to water hammer by the nature of the fluid transported. The following system design provisions address concerns regarding steam hammer within the main steam line and identify the significant dynamic loads included in the main steam piping design.
Design features that prevent water slug formations are included in the system design and layout. In the main steam system, these include the use of drain pots and the proper sloping of lines.
The operating and maintenance procedures that protect against a potential occurrence of steam hammer include system operating procedures that provide for slowly heating up (to avoid condensate formation from hotter steam on colder surfaces), operating procedures that caution against fast closing of the main steam isolation valves except when necessary, and operating and maintenance procedures that emphasize proper draining.
The stress analyses for the safety-related portion of the main steam system piping and components include the dynamic loads from rapid valve actuations, including actuation of the main steam isolation valves and the safety valves.
Based on the above discussion, water hammer does not have an adverse effect on the integrity of AP1000 leak-before-break piping systems.
3B.2.4 Fatigue Low-Cycle Fatigue Low-cycle fatigue due to normal operation and anticipated transients is accounted for in the design of the piping system. The Class 1 piping systems comply with the fatigue usage requirements of the ASME Code,Section III. The Class 2 and 3 piping systems comply with the stress range reduction factors of the ASME Code,Section III.
Due to the nature of operating parameters, main steam line piping (Class 2) and the Class 3 portion of the accumulator piping, are not subjected to any significant transients to cause low-cycle fatigue.
Based on the above discussion, low-cycle fatigue is not a concern of AP1000 leak-before-break piping systems.
High-Cycle Fatigue High-cycle fatigue loads in the system result primarily from pump vibrations. The steam generator is designed so that flow-induced vibrations in the tubes are avoided (see Subsection 5.4.2). The loads from reactor coolant pump vibrations are minimized by criteria for pump shaft vibrations during hot functional testing and operation. During operation, an alarm signals when the reactor coolant pump vibration is greater than the limits.
3B-5 Revision 4
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR With these precautions taken, the likelihood of leakage due to fatigue in piping systems evaluated for leak-before-break is very small.
3B.2.5 Thermal Aging Stainless Steel Piping Piping used in the reactor coolant loop and other auxiliary lines are wrought stainless steel materials, rather than cast materials, so that thermal aging concerns are not expected for the AP1000 piping and fittings. The welds used in the assembly of the AP1000 are gas tungsten arc welds (GTAW).
These welds are essentially as resistant to the effects of thermal aging as the base metal materials.
This is due to the typically low ferrite content in welds which results in minimal impact from thermal aging. Based on this information, thermal aging of weld materials and piping used in the AP1000 is not an issue.
Main Steam Lines The main steam piping system does not have cast materials. The welding process used on these lines is also gas tungsten arc weld (GTAW).
There are no thermal aging concerns for the carbon steel piping of the main steam line and the alloy steel of the main feedwater piping.
The material used for the main steam piping system is not susceptible to dynamic strain aging effects.
3B.2.6 Thermal Stratification Leak-before-break analyses include consideration of the loads and stresses due to thermal stratification.
Thermal stratification occurs only in a pipe that has a susceptible geometry and low flow velocities. A temperature difference between the flowing fluid and stagnant fluid is also a prerequisite.
The design of piping and component nozzles in the AP1000 includes provisions to minimize the potential for and the effects of thermal stratification, cycling, and striping, pursuant to actions requested in several NRC bulletins, as discussed below.
Primary Loop Piping Thermal stratification in the reactor coolant loops resulting from actuation of passive safety features is evaluated as a design transient. Stratification effects due to both Level B and Level D service conditions are considered. The criteria used in the evaluation of the stress in the loop piping due to stratification is the same as that applicable for other Level B and Level D service conditions.
Auxiliary Stainless Steel Piping Pursuant to the actions requested in NRC Bulletin 88-11, the pressurizer surge line is analyzed to demonstrate that the applicable requirements of the ASME Code,Section III are met. This analysis includes consideration of plant operation, thermal stratification, and thermal striping using temperature distributions and transients developed from experience on existing plant monitoring programs.
Pursuant to the actions requested in NRC Bulletin 88-08 (cracking in piping connected to reactor coolant systems due to isolation valve leakage), a systems review of the AP1000 piping was performed in accordance with the criteria provided in Subsection 3.9.3.1.2.
3B-6 Revision 4
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR The unisolable sections of the following lines which are evaluated for leak-before-break have been reviewed and are not susceptible to adverse stresses as described in NRC Bulletin 88-08:
Passive residual heat removal (PRHR) line from the hot leg, through the passive residual heat removal heat exchanger, and to the steam generator channel head The potential for leakage through the isolation valves is not a concern for the piping extending from the reactor coolant system hot leg connection to the passive residual heat removal heat exchanger inlet, since hot leakage from the reactor coolant system would be entering a hot section of piping.
Leakage exiting the passive residual heat removal heat exchanger would not be a concern since the cooled leakage would be entering a cold section of piping. This leakage would then heat up in the piping directly below the steam generator. Any amount of leakage is expected to be small, since the pressure differential across the isolation valves is about 50 psi (the difference between the hot leg and reactor coolant pump suction pressures). Activation of the passive residual heat removal system following a plant scram is not a concern, since stratification will not occur due to the high flow velocity in the passive residual heat removal return flow line.
Automatic depressurization stage 4 lines from the hot legs to the stage 4 depressurization valves Leakage is not a concern since the squib valves are leaktight and other potential leakage flow paths have double isolation.
Pressurizer safety line from the pressurizer to the safety valve This line is steam filled and will not experience stratified loadings.
Automatic depressurization stage 2 and 3 lines from the pressurizer to the depressurization valves Leakage is not a concern since double isolation exists in all potential leakage flow paths.
Normal residual heat removal suction lines from the hot legs to the isolation valves Thermal stratification in the normal residual heat removal suction lines, including leakage through the isolation valves, is considered in the ASME pipe stress and fatigue analysis of these lines.
Direct vessel injection lines Thermal stratification in the direct vessel injection lines, including leakage through the isolation valves, is considered in the ASME Code pipe stress and fatigue analysis of these lines.
Main Steam Line The steam lines are not subjected to thermal stratification by the nature of fluid transported.
Based on the above discussion, thermal stratification does not have an adverse effect on the integrity of AP1000 leak-before-break piping systems.
3B.2.7 Other Mechanisms The pipe evaluated for leak-before-break does not operate at temperature for which creep fatigue must be considered. Creep fatigue is a concern for ferritic steel piping operation at temperatures above 700°F and for austenitic stainless steel operation above 800°F.
Pipe degradation or failure by indirect causes such as fires, missiles, and component support failures is precluded by criteria for design, fabrication, inspection, and separation of potential hazards in the vicinity of the safety-related piping. The structures, larger pipe, and components in the vicinity of pipe evaluated for leak-before-break are safety-related and seismically designed or are seismically supported if nonsafety-related.
3B-7 Revision 4
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Cleavage type failures are not a concern for systems operating temperature and material used in the stainless steel piping systems. The material used in the main steam line is highly ductile and resistant to cleavage type failure at operating temperatures. The resistance to failure have been demonstrated by material fracture toughness tests.
3B.3 Leak-before-Break Bounding Analysis The methodology used for performing the bounding analysis is consistent with that set forth in GDC-4, SRP 3.6.3 (Reference 1) and NUREG-1061, Volume 3 (Reference 2).
Bounding leak-before-break analysis for the applicable AP1000 piping systems is performed. The analysis criteria and development techniques of the bounding analysis curves (BAC) are described below. The bounding analysis curve allows for the evaluation of the piping system in advance of the final piping analysis, incorporating leak-before-break considerations early in the piping design process. The leak-before-break bounding analysis curve is used to evaluate critical points in the piping system. A minimum of two points are required to develop the bounding analysis curve. One point for the low normal stress case and the other point for the high normal stress case. If variations in pipe size, material, pressure or temperature occur for a specific piping system, an additional bounding analysis curve is generated. These points meet the following margins for leak-before-break analysis: (References 1 and 2).
Margin of 10 on leak detection capability Margin of 2 on flaw size Establish margin of 1 on load by using absolute combination method of maximum loads The calculations to establish the bounding analysis curves use minimum values for wall thickness at the weld counterbore and ASME Code material properties. For the main steam line lower bound material property values determined from tests of the material are used. The use of the minimum values bounds the results of larger values. Since the piping is designed and analyzed using ASME Code minimum material properties, these are used conservatively in a consistent manner for evaluation of leak-before-break evaluations. The as-built material properties are expected to be higher than the ASME Code minimum properties. Using minimum thickness instead of a nominal thickness is conservative for the stability analysis and was also used for leak-before-break in operating plants. The use of one thickness (either nominal or minimum) for both leak rate and stability calculation gives comparable overall margins for typical plant loads. The bounding analysis curves are established using the axial load from internal pressure and neglecting other axial loads. This is an appropriate approximation because experience with leak-before-break calculations has shown that the axial load due to pressure is the dominant axial load.
3B.3.1 Procedure for Stainless Steel Piping 3B.3.1.1 Pipe Geometry, Material and Operating Conditions The following information is identified for each of the lines:
Piping materials - 316LN/304L, Type 304L is used for the accumulator discharge line Normal operating temperature Normal operating pressure Pipe outside diameter Pipe thickness The number of bounding analysis curves needed for each analyzable piping system is determined by a review of the combinations of the following parameters:
3B-8 Revision 4
- Pipe size
- Pipe schedule
- Operating pressures (100 percent power and maximum stress condition)
- Operating temperatures (100 percent power and maximum stress condition) 3B.3.1.2 Pipe Physical Properties The physical and metallurgical properties for each of the lines are determined in the following manner Minimum wall thickness is calculated at the weld counterbore The area (A) and section modulus (Z) are calculated using minimum wall thickness The yield strength is the ASME Code,Section II (Reference 5) minimum value, at temperature of interest The ultimate strength is the ASME Code,Section II (Reference 5) minimum value, at temperature of interest The modulus of elasticity is the ASME Code,Section II (Reference 5) at temperature of interest 3B.3.1.3 Low Normal Stress Case (Case 1)
To determine the first point of the bounding analysis curve the following steps are used.
Calculate axial force Fp (for normal operating pressure)
Assume a lower magnitude of bending stress. The magnitude selected is a very small number that is lower than the expected minimum bending stress.
Calculate bending moment = (bending stress) x (section modulus)
Calculate the leakage flaw size at 100 percent power condition for 10 times the leak detection capability (for 0.5 gpm leak detection capability, this is 10 x 0.5 = 5 gpm)
Perform the stability analysis using the limit load methodology to obtain the critical flaw size.
For AP1000 piping systems, there is no cast material and the weld process is gas tungsten arc welds (Z factor is 1.0 since weld process is gas tungsten arc welds, Reference 1.)
- Determine the maximum loads for a critical flaw size of twice the leakage flaw size. The margin of 2 on flaw size is satisfied.
Calculate the low normal stress and corresponding maximum stress by using:
Axial Force Bending Mo ent Stress = + (3B-1)
Area Section Modulus 3B.3.1.4 High Normal Stress Case (Case 2)
To determine the other endpoint of the bounding analysis curve the following steps are used.
Axial force Fp is calculated as above for normal operating pressure 3B-9 Revision 4
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Assume a higher magnitude of bending stress to get higher bending moment. The magnitude of bending is selected such that the corresponding maximum stress generated is close to the flow stress.
Calculate bending moment = (bending stress) x (section modulus)
Repeat leakage flaw size and stability calculations as outlined for the low normal stress case above Note: For an intermediate point, calculation steps are the same as low normal or the high normal case.
3B.3.1.5 Develop the Bounding Analysis Curve For Case 1, normal and maximum stresses are established.
For Case 2, normal and maximum stresses are established.
Plot these two points with normal versus maximum stress. The curve is generated by joining these two points in a straight line. More than two points may be used if desired, to obtain a smooth curve fit between the calculated points. A typical curve is shown in Figure 3B-1.
3B.3.2 Procedure for Non-stainless Steel Piping The procedure to develop the bounding analysis curve for the carbon steel for main steam lines is similar to that for the stainless steel and is described below.
3B.3.2.1 Pipe Geometry, Material and Operating Conditions The following information is identified for each of the lines:
Piping materials Normal operating temperature Normal operating pressure Pipe outside diameter Piping thickness The number of bounding analysis curves needed for each analyzable piping system is determined by a review of the combinations of the following parameters:
- Pipe size
- Pipe schedule
- Operating pressures (100 percent power and maximum stress condition)
- Operating temperatures (100 percent power and maximum stress condition) 3B.3.2.2 Calculations Steps The minimum wall thickness is calculated at the weld counterbore The area (A) and section modulus (Z) are calculated using minimum wall thickness The material yield strength, ultimate strength, modulus of elasticity, stress-strain curves, and J-R curves are determined from the material tests 3B-10 Revision 4
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR 3B.3.2.3 Low Normal Stress Case (Case 1)
To determine the first point of the bounding analysis curve the following steps are used.
Calculate axial force Fp (for normal operating pressure)
Assume a lower magnitude of bending stress Calculate bending moment = (bending stress) x (section modulus)
Calculate the leakage flaw size at 100 percent power condition for 10 times the leak detection capability (for 0.5 gpm leak detection capability, this is 10 x 0.5 = 5 gpm)
Stability analysis
- Perform J-integral analysis
- Determine the maximum loads for a critical flaw size of twice the leakage flaw size by satisfying the stability criteria. The margin of 2 on flaw size is satisfied.
Stability criteria
- Japplied JIC
- If Japplied > JIC, then Japplied < Jmax and Tapplied < Tmat Calculate the low normal stress and corresponding maximum stress by using:
Axial Force Bending Mo ent Stress = +
Area Section Modulus 3B.3.2.4 High Normal Stress Case (Case 2)
To determine the other endpoint of the bounding analysis curve the following steps are used.
Axial force Fp is calculated above (for normal operating pressure)
Assume a higher magnitude of bending stress to get higher bending moment Calculate bending moment = (bending stress) x (section modulus)
Repeat leakage flaw size and stability calculations as outlined for the low normal stress case above Note: For an intermediate point, calculation steps are the same as low normal or the high normal case.
3B.3.2.5 Develop the Bounding Analysis Curve Follow steps as outlined for the stainless steel case in Subsection 3B.3.1.5.
3B-11 Revision 4
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR 3B.3.3 Evaluation of Piping System Using Bounding Analysis Curves To evaluate the applicability of leak-before-break, the results of the pipe stress analysis are compared to the bounding analysis curve. The critical location is the location of highest maximum stress as determined by the pipe stress results. A comparison is made with the applicable bounding analysis curves for the analyzable piping systems. As outlined in 3B.3.1.1 and 3B.3.2.1, bounding analysis curves are calculated for different combinations of pipe size, pipe schedule, operating pressures, operating temperatures.
The bounding analysis curves are used during the layout and design of the piping systems to provide a design that satisfies leak-before-break criteria. In addition, the results of the as-built piping analysis reconciliation to the bounding analysis curves to verify that the fabricated piping systems satisfy leak-before-break criteria. See Subsection 3.6.4 for the Combined License information item associated with this verification.
At the critical location, the load combination for the maximum stress calculation uses the absolute sum method. The load combination is as follows:
(1) Pressure + Deadweight + Thermal (100% Power)* + Safe Shutdown Earthquake (2) Pressure + Deadweight + Maximum Stratification (Additional Case for Surge Line)
The normal stress is calculated using the algebraic sum method at critical location and the following load combination.
(1) Pressure + Deadweight + Thermal (100% Power*)
- Includes applicable 100% Power stratification loads.
3B.3.3.1 Calculation of Stresses The stresses due to axial loads and moments are calculated by the following equation:
where:
F M
= + (3B-2)
A Z
= stress F = axial load M = moment A = cross-sectional area Z = section modulus The moments for the desired loading combinations are calculated by the following equation:
M = M 2X + M 2Y + M 2Z (3B-3)
- where, M = moment for required loading 3B-12 Revision 4
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR MX = torsional moment MY = Y component of bending moment MZ = Z component of bending moment The Y and Z-axes are lateral axes to the X-axis which is the axial axis The axial load and moments for the normal case and maximum case are computed by the methods shown below.
3B.3.3.2 Normal Loads The normal operating loads are calculated by the following equations:
The subscripts of the above equations represent the following load cases:
DW = deadweight Th = normal thermal expansion (100 percent power, including applicable stratification loads)
P = load due to internal pressure The method of combining loads is often referred to as the algebraic sum method.
Calculate the normal stress at the critical location.
3B.3.3.3 Maximum Loads For the maximum case, the absolute summation method of load combination is applied which results in higher magnitude of the combined loads. Since stability is demonstrated using these loads, the leak-before-break margin on loads is satisfied. An example of the absolute summation expressions are shown below:
F = FDW + FTh + FP + FSSEINERTIA + FSSEAM (3B-8)
MX = (MX)DW + (MX)Th + (MX)SSEINERTIA + (MX)SSEAM (3B-9)
MY = (MY)DW + (MY)Th + (MY)SSEINERTIA + (MY)SSEAM (3B-10)
MZ = (MZ)DW + (MZ)Th + (MZ)SSEINERTIA + (MZ)SSEAM (3B-11) where subscripts SSE, Inertia and AM mean safe shutdown earthquake, inertia and anchor motion respectively.
Note: For the surge line, see Subsection 3B.3.3 for additional case.
3B-13 Revision 4
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR 3B.3.3.4 Bounding Analysis Curve Comparison - LBB Criteria To compare the stress results with the bounding analysis curve the following process is followed. The normal and maximum stress at the critical location are calculated by using the loads defined in Subsection 3B.3.3. Plot the normal stress versus maximum stress on the bounding analysis curve for the specified system. If the point is on or below the bounding analysis curve, the leak-before-break analysis and margins are satisfied. If the point falls above the bounding analysis curve, the leak-before-break analysis criteria are not satisfied and the pipe layout or support configuration needs to be revised to meet the leak-before-break bounding analysis. Figure 3B-1 shows a typical bounding analysis curve.
3B.3.4 Bounding Analysis Results Table 3B-1 shows a summary of piping systems and corresponding bounding analysis figures.
Figures 3B-1 to 3B-22 show the bounding analysis curves. The curves satisfy the margins as indicated in Section 3B.3.
3B.4 Differences in Leak-before-Break Analysis for Stainless Steel and Ferritic Steel Pipe The significant difference between leak-before-break analysis performed for the stainless steel (Class 1 and Class 3) systems and the ferritic steel in the Class 2 systems is in the stability analysis.
In the case of stainless steel systems, stability analyses are performed by limit load approach. In the ferritic steel systems, stability analyses are performed by J-integral approach.
3B.5 Differences in Inspection Criteria for Class 1, 2, and 3 Systems Class 1, 2 and 3 systems are subjected to in-service inspection requirements from ASME Code,Section XI. For Class 1 piping, terminal ends and dissimilar metal welds are volumetrically inspected, along with other locations, to total 25 percent of the welds. For Class 2 piping, the requirement is to volumetrically inspect the terminal ends and other locations to total 7.5 percent of the welds. For Class 3 systems (the only Class 3 piping is in the accumulator line which is always at room temperature), the system receives periodic visual examinations in conjunction with pressure testing.
These requirements were developed by ASME Code,Section XI consistent with the different safety classes of these systems.
The leak-before-break evaluations are based on the ability to detect a potential leaking crack; not the ability to find cracks by inservice inspections. The criteria or methods of the leak-before-break evaluations are the same for ASME Code Class 1, 2, and 3.
3B.6 Differences in Fabrication Requirements of ASME Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 Piping The significant difference among Class 1, 2 and 3 seamless pipe occurs in the nondestructive examination requirements. The Class 1 seamless pipe examination requirements include an ultrasonic testing examination, whereas Class 2 and 3 do not. In addition, the Class 1 examination requirements for a circumferential butt welded joint include radioagraphic testing and magnetic particle or liquid penetrant examination where Class 2 does not. The examination requirements for Class 2 pipe require radiographic examination of the welds and normally Class 3 pipe does not. As noted in Subsection 3.2.2.5, for Class 3 lines required for emergency core cooling functions, radiography will be conducted on a random sample of welds. The Class 3 leak-before-break lines are included in the lines that are radiographed. In addition see Subsection 3.6.3.2 for augmented inspection of Class 3 leak-before-break lines.
3B-14 Revision 4
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR For the fabrication of welds in the Class 1, Class 2 and Class 3 pipes there is no significant differences.
The differences in fabrication and nondestructive examination requirements do not affect the leak-before-break analyses assumptions, criteria, or methods.
3B.7 Sensitivity Study for the Constraint Effect on LBB Westinghouse performed a sensitivity study on a 6-inch diameter pipe to demonstrate that the leak-before-break evaluation margins are not significantly affected when constraint effects of pressure induced bending are included. The analysis used a finite element model of a 6-inch diameter pipe welded to a nozzle with a fixed end condition. This conservatively represents the bounding conditions for AP1000 piping. The normal and maximum stresses were used from a representative AP600 6-inch line bounding analysis curve. The material properties for the base metal and TIG weld were considered in the analysis. The stability analysis was performed using the J-integral method. This analysis was developed in consultation with the NRC.
The conclusion of this sensitivity study is that the leak-before-break margins for 6-inch and larger piping on AP1000 are not significantly affected by the constraint effect and application of leak-before-break to such piping is acceptable.
3B.8 References
- 1. Standard Review Plan 3.6.3, "Leak Before Break Evaluation Procedures," Federal Register, Volume 52, Number 167, Friday, August 28, 1987; Notice (Public Comment Solicited), pp. 32626-32633.
- 2. NUREG-1061, "Evaluation of Potential for Pipe Breaks, Report of the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission Piping Review Committee," Volume 3, (prepared by the Pipe Break Task Group), November 1984.
- 3. "Erosion-Corrosion in Nuclear Plant Steam Piping: Causes and Inspection Program Guidelines," EPRI NP-3944, April 1985.
- 4. G. Cragnolino, "Erosion-Corrosion in Nuclear Power Systems-An Overview," Corrosion
'87, Paper No. 86, March 1987.
- 5. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,Section II, "Materials," 1998 Edition through 2000 Addenda.
3B-15 Revision 4
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3B-1 (Sheet 1 of 2)
AP1000 Leak-Before-Break Bounding Analysis Systems and Parameters Nominal Diameter Temp Pressure System Subsystem Line No(s). (Inches) Material (°F) (psig) Figure No.
(1) SA-376 TP316LN 610.0 2247.0 3B-2 RCS Primary Loop Hot Leg L001A, B 31 (ID)
RCS Primary Loop Cold Leg L002A, B, C, D 22 (ID)(1) SA-376 TP316LN 537.2 2323.0 3B-3 SGS Main Steam Line L006A, B 38 SA-335 GR P11 523.0 821.0 3B-4 RCS Normal Residual Heat Removal L139 20 SA-312 TP316LN 610.0 2247.0 3B-5 RCS Surge Line L003 18 SA-312 TP316LN 653.0 2248.0 3B-6 (Sheet 1)
RCS Surge Line L003 18 SA-312 TP316LN 653.0(2) 2248.0(2) 3B-6 455.0(2) 430.0(2) (Sheet 2)
RCS Passive Residual Heat Removal Supply/ L135A,B; L136A,B 18 SA-312 TP316LN 610.0 2247.0 3B-7 ADS 4 RCS Passive Removal Heat Removal Supply/ L133A, B; L137A, B; L134 14 SA-312 TP316LN 610.0 2247.0 3B-8 ADS 4 PXS Passive Residual Heat Removal Supply to L102, L107 14 SA-312 TP316LN 610.0 2235.0 3B-8 Cold Trap and Vent Line PXS Passive Residual Heat Removal Supply L102 14 SA-312 TP316LN 120.0 2235.0 3B-9 after Cold Trap to PRHR HX PXS Return - PRHR HX to Isolation Valve L103 14 SA-312 TP316LN 120.0 2235.0 3B-9 RCS Automatic Depressurization System L004A,B; L006A,B; L020A,B; 14 SA-312 TP316LN 653.0 2234.0 3B-10 Stage 2, 3 L030A, B; L131 (Sheets 1 and 2)
PXS Passive Residual Heat Removal Return - L104A, B; L105 14 SA-312 TP316LN 537.0 2202.0 3B-11 after Isolation Valve 3B-16 Revision 4
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3B-1 (Sheet 2 of 2)
AP1000 Leak-Before-Break Bounding Analysis Systems and Parameters Nominal Diameter Temp Pressure System Subsystem Line No(s). (Inches) Material (°F) (psig) Figure No.
RCS Passive Residual Heat Removal Return L113 14 SA-312 TP316LN 537.0 2202.0 3B-11 PXS Passive Residual Heat Removal Vent Line L107 12 SA-312 TP316LN 610.0 2248.0 3B-12 (Not Used)
PXS Accumulator to Isolation Valve L029A, B 8 SA-312 TP304L 120.0 700.0 3B-13 RCS Balance Line from Cold Leg to CMT L118A, B 8 SA-312 TP316LN 537.0 2323.0 3B-14 Isolation Valve PXS Balance Line from CMT Isolation Valve to L007A, B; L070A, B 8 SA-312 TP316LN 537.0 2332.0 3B-14 CMT PXS Direct Vessel Injection Line to RV, IRWST L021A, B; 8 SA-312 TP316LN 537.0 2332.0 3B-14 Injection L125A, B PXS Core Makeup Tank (Injection Line, RV Side L015, L016, L017, L018, 8 SA-312 TP316LN 120.0 2332.0 3B-15 of Isolation Valve, Core Makeup Tank Side L020, L025, L123, of Isolation Valve), Direct Vessel Injection L125, L127, L133, L134 (Accumulator Connection to Cold Trap),
IRWST Injection (All A, B)
PXS Direct Vessel Injection Line to RV L021A, B 8 SA-312-TP316LN 135.0 2332.0 3B-15 RCS Automatic Depressurization System L021A,B; L031A,B 8 SA-312 TP316LN 653.0 2235.0 3B-16 (Not Stage 2, 3 Used)
PXS Accumulator after Isolation Valve L027A, B 8 SA-312 TP304L 120.0 700.0 3B-17 PXS RNS Discharge L019A, B 6 SA-312 TP316LN 120.0 2332.0 3B-18 RCS Automatic Depressurization System Header L005A, B 6 SA-312 TP316LN 653.0 2234.0 3B-19 to RCS Safety Valve (Sheets 1 and 2)
RCS Normal Residual Heat Removal L140 12 SA-312 TP316LN 610.0 2247.0 3B-20 RNS Normal Residual Heat Removal L001, L002A, B 10 SA-312 TP316LN 610.0 2235.0 3B-21 RCS Automatic Depressurization System L021A, B; L031A, B 8 SA-312TP316LN 100.0 2234.0 3B-22 Stage 2, 3 (Cold Trap)
Note:
- 1. ID = Inside diameter
- 2. Temperature and Pressure at normal and maximum stress cases as indicated in Figure 3B-6 sheet 2.
3B-17 Revision 4
$3
7\SLFDO%RXQGLQJ$QDO\VLV&XUYH %$&
/LQH1XPEHU V
3RLQW%
0D[LPXP6WUHVV NVL 3RLQW
3RLQW 3RLQW
3RLQW$ 3RLQW
1RUPDO6WUHVV NVL 3LSH'HVLJQDWRU 1RUPDO2SHUDWLQJ3UHVVXUH SVLJ 6\VWHP 1RUPDO2SHUDWLQJ7HPSHUDWXUH )
1RPLQDO'LDPHWHU LQFK &ULWLFDO)ODZ6L]H [/HDNDJH)ODZ6L]H
3LSH6FKHGXOH /RDG0DUJLQ
2XWVLGH'LDPHWHU LQFK /HDN5DWH0DUJLQ 7\SLFDOIRU$OO&XUYHV 3LSH0DWHULDO
0LQLPXP:HOG7KLFNQHVV
1RWHVIRU7\SLFDO%RXQGLQJ$QDO\VLV&XUYH
3RLQW$IRUORZQRUPDOFDVHWRJHQHUDWH%$&
3RLQW%IRUKLJKQRUPDOFDVHWRJHQHUDWH%$&
3RLQW$DQG3RLQW%DUHMRLQHGE\DVWUDLJKWOLQH
3RLQWDQDO\]HGFULWLFDOSRLQWZKLFKPHHWV/%%FULWHULD6WUHVV3RLQWRQWKH%$&LVDOVRDFFHSWDEOHIRU/%%
3RLQWDQDO\]HGFULWLFDOSRLQWZKLFKIDLOV/%%FULWHULD
Figure 3B-1 Typical Bounding Analysis Curve (BAC) 3B-18 Revision 4
$3
%RXQGLQJ$QDO\VLV&XUYHIRU3ULPDU\/RRS+RW/HJ
/LQH1XPEHU V /$%
0D[LPXP6WUHVV NVL
1RUPDO6WUHVV NVL 3LSH'HVLJQDWRU %7$ 1RUPDO2SHUDWLQJ3UHVVXUH SVLJ 6\VWHP 5&6 1RUPDO2SHUDWLQJ7HPSHUDWXUH )
,QVLGH'LDPHWHU LQFK &ULWLFDO)ODZ6L]H [/HDNDJH)ODZ6L]H
3LSH6FKHGXOH 6SHFLDO /RDG0DUJLQ
2XWVLGH'LDPHWHU LQFK 3LSH0DWHULDO 6$73/1 0LQLPXP:HOG7KLFNQHVV LQFK Figure 3B-2 Bounding Analysis Curve for Primary Loop Hot Leg 3B-19 Revision 4
$3
%RXQGLQJ$QDO\VLV&XUYHIRU3ULPDU\/RRS&ROG/HJ
/LQH1XPEHU V /$%&'
0D[LPXP6WUHVV NVL
1RUPDO6WUHVV NVL 3LSH'HVLJQDWRU %7$ 1RUPDO2SHUDWLQJ3UHVVXUH SVLJ 6\VWHP 5&6 1RUPDO2SHUDWLQJ7HPSHUDWXUH )
,QVLGH'LDPHWHU LQFK &ULWLFDO)ODZ6L]H [/HDNDJH)ODZ6L]H
3LSH6FKHGXOH 6SHFLDO /RDG0DUJLQ
2XWVLGH'LDPHWHU LQFK 3LSH0DWHULDO 6$73/1 0LQLPXP:HOG7KLFNQHVV LQFK Figure 3B-3 Bounding Analysis Curve for Primary Loop Cold Leg 3B-20 Revision 4
$3
%RXQGLQJ$QDO\VLV&XUYHIRU0DLQ6WHDP/LQH
/LQH1XPEHU V /$%
0D[LPXP6WUHVV NVL
1RUPDO6WUHVV NVL 3LSH'HVLJQDWRU ($% 1RUPDO2SHUDWLQJ3UHVVXUH SVLJ 6\VWHP 6*6 1RUPDO2SHUDWLQJ7HPSHUDWXUH )
1RPLQDO'LDPHWHU LQFK &ULWLFDO)ODZ6L]H [/HDNDJH)ODZ6L]H
3LSH6FKHGXOH 6SHFLDO /RDG0DUJLQ
2XWVLGH'LDPHWHU LQFK 3LSH0DWHULDO 6$3
0LQLPXP:HOG7KLFNQHVV LQFK Figure 3B-4 Bounding Analysis Curve for 38 Main Steam Line 3B-21 Revision 4
$3
%RXQGLQJ$QDO\VLV&XUYHIRU1RUPDO5+5
/LQH1XPEHU V /
0D[LPXP6WUHVV NVL
1RUPDO6WUHVV NVL 3LSH'HVLJQDWRU %7$ 1RUPDO2SHUDWLQJ3UHVVXUH SVLJ 6\VWHP 5&6 1RUPDO2SHUDWLQJ7HPSHUDWXUH )
1RPLQDO'LDPHWHU LQFK &ULWLFDO)ODZ6L]H [/HDNDJH)ODZ6L]H
3LSH6FKHGXOH /RDG0DUJLQ
2XWVLGH'LDPHWHU LQFK 3LSH0DWHULDO 6$73/1 0LQLPXP:HOG7KLFNQHVV LQFK Figure 3B-5 Bounding Analysis Curve for 20 Normal RHR 3B-22 Revision 4
$3
%RXQGLQJ$QDO\VLV&XUYHIRU6XUJH/LQH
/LQH1XPEHU V /
0D[LPXP6WUHVV NVL
1RUPDO6WUHVV NVL 3LSH'HVLJQDWRU %7$ 1RUPDO2SHUDWLQJ3UHVVXUH SVLJ 6\VWHP 5&6 1RUPDO2SHUDWLQJ7HPSHUDWXUH )
1RPLQDO'LDPHWHU LQFK &ULWLFDO)ODZ6L]H [/HDNDJH)ODZ6L]H
3LSH6FKHGXOH /RDG0DUJLQ
2XWVLGH'LDPHWHU LQFK 3LSH0DWHULDO 6$73/1 0LQLPXP:HOG7KLFNQHVV LQFK Figure 3B-6 (Sheet 1 of 2)
Bounding Analysis Curve for 18 Surge Line 3B-23 Revision 4
$3
%RXQGLQJ$QDO\VLV&XUYHIRU6XUJH/LQH
/LQH1XPEHU V /
0D[LPXP6WUHVV NVL
1RUPDO6WUHVV NVL 3LSH'HVLJQDWRU %7$ 1RUPDO2SHUDWLQJ3UHVVXUH SVLJ 6\VWHP 5&6 1RUPDO2SHUDWLQJ7HPSHUDWXUH )
1RPLQDO'LDPHWHU LQFK &ULWLFDO)ODZ6L]H [/HDNDJH)ODZ6L]H
3LSH6FKHGXOH /RDG0DUJLQ
2XWVLGH'LDPHWHU LQFK 3LSH0DWHULDO 6$73/1 SVLJ 3UHVVXUHIRU0D[6WUHVV&DVH
0LQLPXP:HOG7KLFNQHVV LQFK )
7HPSHUDWXUHIRU0D[6WUHVV&DVH
Figure 3B-6 (Sheet 2 of 2)
Bounding Analysis Curve for 18 Surge Line 3B-24 Revision 4
$3
%RXQGLQJ$QDO\VLV&XUYHIRU35+56XSSO\$'6
/LQH1XPEHU V /$% /$%
0D[LPXP6WUHVV NVL
1RUPDO6WUHVV NVL 3LSH'HVLJQDWRU %7$ 1RUPDO2SHUDWLQJ3UHVVXUH SVLJ 6\VWHP 5&6 1RUPDO2SHUDWLQJ7HPSHUDWXUH )
1RPLQDO'LDPHWHU LQFK &ULWLFDO)ODZ6L]H [/HDNDJH)ODZ6L]H
3LSH6FKHGXOH /RDG0DUJLQ
2XWVLGH'LDPHWHU LQFK 3LSH0DWHULDO 6$73/1 0LQLPXP:HOG7KLFNQHVV LQFK Figure 3B-7 Bounding Analysis Curve for 18 PRHR Supply/ADS 4 3B-25 Revision 4
$3
%RXQGLQJ$QDO\VLV&XUYHIRU35+56XSSO\WR&ROG7UDS 35+56XSSO\$'6
/LQH1XPEHU V / /$% / /$% /
0D[LPXP6WUHVV NVL
1RUPDO6WUHVV NVL 3LSH'HVLJQDWRU %7$ 1RUPDO2SHUDWLQJ3UHVVXUH /$% / /$% SVLJ 6\VWHP 5&63;6 1RUPDO2SHUDWLQJ3UHVVXUH / / SVLJ 1RPLQDO'LDPHWHU LQFK 1RUPDO2SHUDWLQJ7HPSHUDWXUH )
3LSH6FKHGXOH &ULWLFDO)ODZ6L]H [/HDNDJH)ODZ6L]H
2XWVLGH'LDPHWHU LQFK /RDG0DUJLQ
3LSH0DWHULDO 6$73/1 0LQLPXP:HOG7KLFNQHVV LQFK Figure 3B-8 Bounding Analysis Curve for 14 PRHR Supply to Cold Trap, PRHR Supply/ADS4 3B-26 Revision 4
$3
%RXQGLQJ$QDO\VLV&XUYHIRU35+56XSSO\DIWHU&ROG7UDS5HWXUQWR,VRODWLRQ9DOYH
/LQH1XPEHU V / /
0D[LPXP6WUHVV NVL
1RUPDO6WUHVV NVL 3LSH'HVLJQDWRU %7$ 1RUPDO2SHUDWLQJ3UHVVXUH SVLJ 6\VWHP 3;6 1RUPDO2SHUDWLQJ7HPSHUDWXUH )
1RPLQDO'LDPHWHU LQFK &ULWLFDO)ODZ6L]H [/HDNDJH)ODZ6L]H
3LSH6FKHGXOH /RDG0DUJLQ
2XWVLGH'LDPHWHU LQFK 3LSH0DWHULDO 6$73/1 0LQLPXP:HOG7KLFNQHVV LQFK Figure 3B-9 Bounding Analysis Curve for 14 PRHR Supply after Cold Trap, Return - to Isolation Valve 3B-27 Revision 4
$3
%RXQGLQJ$QDO\VLV&XUYHIRU$'66WDJH
/LQH1XPEHU V /$% /$% /$% /$% /
0D[LPXP6WUHVV NVL
1RUPDO6WUHVV NVL
- DWHU&RQGLWLRQ 3LSH'HVLJQDWRU %7$ 1RUPDO2SHUDWLQJ3UHVVXUH SVLJ 6\VWHP 5&6 1RUPDO2SHUDWLQJ7HPSHUDWXUH )
1RPLQDO'LDPHWHU LQFK &ULWLFDO)ODZ6L]H [/HDNDJH)ODZ6L]H
3LSH6FKHGXOH /RDG0DUJLQ
2XWVLGH'LDPHWHU LQFK 3LSH0DWHULDO 6$73/1 0LQLPXP:HOG7KLFNQHVV LQFK Figure 3B-10 (Sheet 1 of 2)
Bounding Analysis Curve for 14 ADS Stage 2, 3 3B-28 Revision 4
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR AP1000 Bounding Analysis Curve for 14" ADS Stage 2, 3 Line Number(s): L004A,B ; L006A,B ; L020A,B ; L030A, B ; L131 60 50 40 Maximum Stress (ksi) 30 20 10 0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 Normal Stress (ksi)
Steam Condition:
Pipe Designator: BTA Normal Operating Pressure: 2234.0 psig System: RCS Normal Operating Temperature: 653.0 F Nominal Diameter: 14 inch Critical Flaw Size = 2 x Leakage Flaw Size Pipe Schedule: 160 Load Margin = 1.0 Outside Diameter: 14.000 inch Pipe Material: SA-312 TP316LN Minimum Weld Thickness: 1.254 inch Figure 3B-10 (Sheet 2 of 2)
Bounding Analysis Curve for 14 ADS Stage 2, 3 3B-29 Revision 4
$3
%RXQGLQJ$QDO\VLV&XUYHIRU35+55HWXUQDIWHU,VRODWLRQ9DOYH35+55HWXUQ
/LQH1XPEHU V /$% / /
0D[LPXP6WUHVV NVL
1RUPDO6WUHVV NVL 3LSH'HVLJQDWRU %7$ 1RUPDO2SHUDWLQJ3UHVVXUH SVLJ 6\VWHP 5&63;6 1RUPDO2SHUDWLQJ7HPSHUDWXUH )
1RPLQDO'LDPHWHU &ULWLFDO)ODZ6L]H [/HDNDJH)ODZ6L]H
LQFK 3LSH6FKHGXOH /RDG0DUJLQ
2XWVLGH'LDPHWHU LQFK 3LSH0DWHULDO 6$73/1 0LQLPXP:HOG7KLFNQHVV LQFK Figure 3B-11 Bounding Analysis Curve for 14 PRHR Return -
after Isolation Valve, 14 PRHR Return 3B-30 Revision 4
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Figure 3B-12 Not Used 3B-31 Revision 4
$3
%RXQGLQJ$QDO\VLV&XUYHIRU$FFXPXODWRUWR,VRODWLRQ9DOYH
/LQH1XPEHU V / $%
0D[LPXP6WUHVV NVL
1RUPDO6WUHVV NVL 3LSH'HVLJQDWRU (%& 1RUPDO2SHUDWLQJ3UHVVXUH SVLJ 6\VWHP 3;6 1RUPDO2SHUDWLQJ7HPSHUDWXUH )
1RPLQDO'LDPHWHU &ULWLFDO)ODZ6L]H [/HDNDJH)ODZ6L]H
LQFK 3LSH6FKHGXOH /RDG0DUJLQ
6 2XWVLGH'LDPHWHU LQFK 3LSH0DWHULDO 6$73/
0LQLPXP:HOG7KLFNQHVV LQFK Figure 3B-13 Bounding Analysis Curve for 8 Accumulator to Isolation Valve 3B-32 Revision 4
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR AP1000 Bounding Analysis Curve for 8" CMT Cold Leg Balance Line and Vent, DVI Cold Trap to RV Line Number(s): L007A, B ; L021A, B ; L070A, B ; L118A, B ; L125A, B 60 50 40 Maximum Stress (ksi) 30 20 10 0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 Normal Stress (ksi)
Pipe Designator: BTA Normal Operating Pressure: (L007A, B; L021A, B; L070A, B; L125A, B) 2332.0 psig System: RCS, PXS Normal Operating Pressure: (L118A, B) 2323.0 psig Nominal Diameter: 8 inch Normal Operating Temperature: 537.0 F Pipe Schedule: 160 Critical Flaw Size = 2 x Leakage Flaw Size Outside Diameter: 8.625 inch Load Margin = 1.0 Pipe Material: SA-312 TP316LN Minimum Weld Thickness: 0.817 inch Figure 3B-14 Bounding Analysis Curve for 8 CMT Cold Leg Balance Line and Vent, DVI Cold Trap to RV 3B-33 Revision 4
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR AP1000 Bounding Analysis Curve for 8" CMT, DVI, IRWST (Various Sections)
Line Number(s): L015, L016, L017, L018, L020, L021, L025, L123, L125, L127, L133, L134 (All A, B) 60 50 Maximum Stress (ksi) 40 30 20 10 0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 Normal Stress (ksi)
Normal Operating Pressure: 2332.0 psig Pipe Designator: BTA Normal Operating Temperature: 120.0 F System: PXS Normal Operating Temperature (L021A, B) 135.0 F Nominal Diameter: 8 inch Critical Flaw Size = 2 x Leakage Flaw Size Pipe Schedule: 160 Load Margin = 1.0 Outside Diameter: 8.625 inch Pipe Material: SA-312 TP316LN Minimum Weld Thickness: 0.817 inch Figure 3B-15 Bounding Analysis Curve for 8 CMT, DVI IRWST (Various Sections) 3B-34 Revision 4
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Figure 3B-16 Not Used 3B-35 Revision 4
$3
%RXQGLQJ$QDO\VLV&XUYH$FFXPXODWRUDIWHU,VRODWLRQ9DOYH
/LQH1XPEHU V /$%
0D[LPXP6WUHVV NVL
1RUPDO6WUHVV NVL 3LSH'HVLJQDWRU %%& 1RUPDO2SHUDWLQJ3UHVVXUH SVLJ 6\VWHP 3;6 1RUPDO2SHUDWLQJ7HPSHUDWXUH )
1RPLQDO'LDPHWHU &ULWLFDO)ODZ6L]H [/HDNDJH)ODZ6L]H
LQFK 3LSH6FKHGXOH /RDG0DUJLQ
2XWVLGH'LDPHWHU LQFK 3LSH0DWHULDO 6$73/
0LQLPXP:HOG7KLFNQHVV LQFK Figure 3B-17 Bounding Analysis Curve for Accumulator after Isolation Valve 3B-36 Revision 4
$3
%RXQGLQJ$QDO\VLV&XUYHIRU516'LVFKDUJH
/LQH1XPEHU V / $%
0D[LPXP6WUHVV NVL
1RUPDO6WUHVV NVL 3LSH'HVLJQDWRU %7$ 1RUPDO2SHUDWLQJ3UHVVXUH SVLJ 6\VWHP 3;6 1RUPDO2SHUDWLQJ7HPSHUDWXUH )
1RPLQDO'LDPHWHU &ULWLFDO)ODZ6L]H [/HDNDJH)ODZ6L]H
LQFK 3LSH6FKHGXOH /RDG0DUJLQ
2XWVLGH'LDPHWHU LQFK 3LSH0DWHULDO 6$73/1 0LQLPXP:HOG7KLFNQHVV LQFK Figure 3B-18 Bounding Analysis Curve for RNS Discharge 3B-37 Revision 4
$3
%RXQGLQJ$QDO\VLV&XUYHIRU$'6+HDGHUWR5&66DIHW\9DOYH
/LQH1XPEHU V /$%
0D[LPXP6WUHVV NVL
1RUPDO6WUHVV NVL 3LSH'HVLJQDWRU %7$ :DWHU&RQGLWLRQ 6\VWHP 5&6 1RUPDO2SHUDWLQJ3UHVVXUH SVLJ 1RPLQDO'LDPHWHU 1RUPDO2SHUDWLQJ7HPSHUDWXUH )
LQFK 3LSH6FKHGXOH &ULWLFDO)ODZ6L]H [/HDNDJH)ODZ6L]H
2XWVLGH'LDPHWHU LQFK /RDG0DUJLQ
3LSH0DWHULDO 6$73/1 0LQLPXP:HOG7KLFNQHVV LQFK Figure 3B-19 (Sheet 1 of 2)
Bounding Analysis Curve for ADS Header to RCS Safety Valve 3B-38 Revision 4
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR AP1000 Bounding Analysis Curve for ADS Header to RCS Safety Valve Line Number(s): L005A, B 60 50 40 Maximum Stress (ksi) 30 20 10 0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 Normal Stress (ksi)
Steam Condition:
Pipe Designator: BTA Normal Operating Pressure: 2234.0 psig System: RCS Normal Operating Temperature: 653.0 F Nominal Diameter: 6 inch Critical Flaw Size = 2 x Leakage Flaw Size Pipe Schedule: 160 Load Margin = 1.0 Outside Diameter: 6.625 inch Pipe Material: SA-312 TP316LN Minimum Weld Thickness: 0.651 inch Figure 3B-19 (Sheet 2 of 2)
Bounding Analysis Curve for ADS Header to RCS Safety Valve 3B-39 Revision 4
$3
%RXQGLQJ$QDO\VLV&XUYHIRU1RUPDO5+5
/LQH1XPEHU V /
0D[LPXP6WUHVV NVL
1RUPDO6WUHVV NVL 3LSH'HVLJQDWRU %7$ 1RUPDO2SHUDWLQJ3UHVVXUH SVLJ 6\VWHP 5&6 1RUPDO2SHUDWLQJ7HPSHUDWXUH )
1RPLQDO'LDPHWHU LQFK &ULWLFDO)ODZ6L]H [/HDNDJH)ODZ6L]H
3LSH6FKHGXOH /RDG0DUJLQ
2XWVLGH'LDPHWHU LQFK 3LSH0DWHULDO 6$73/1 0LQLPXP:HOG7KLFNQHVV LQFK Figure 3B-20 Bounding Analysis Curve for 12 Normal RHR 3B-40 Revision 4
$3
%RXQGLQJ$QDO\VLV&XUYHIRU1RUPDO5+5
/LQH1XPEHU V / /$%
0D[LPXP6WUHVV NVL
1RUPDO6WUHVV NVL 3LSH'HVLJQDWRU %7$ 1RUPDO2SHUDWLQJ3UHVVXUH SVLJ 6\VWHP 516 1RUPDO2SHUDWLQJ7HPSHUDWXUH )
1RPLQDO'LDPHWHU LQFK &ULWLFDO)ODZ6L]H [/HDNDJH)ODZ6L]H
3LSH6FKHGXOH /RDG0DUJLQ
2XWVLGH'LDPHWHU LQFK 3LSH0DWHULDO 6$73/1 0LQLPXP:HOG7KLFNQHVV LQFK Figure 3B-21 Bounding Analysis Curve for 10 Normal RHR 3B-41 Revision 4
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR AP1000 Bounding Analysis Curve for 8" ADS Stage 2, 3 Line Number(s): L021A,B ; L031A,B 60 50 40 Maximum Stress (ksi) 30 20 10 0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 Normal Stress (ksi)
Pipe Designator: BTA Normal Operating Pressure: 2234.0 psig System: RCS Normal Operating Temperature: 100.0 F Nominal Diameter: 8 inch Critical Flaw Size = 2 x Leakage Flaw Size Pipe Schedule: 160 Load Margin = 1.0 Outside Diameter: 8.625 inch Pipe Material: SA-312 TP316LN Minimum Weld Thickness: 0.817 inch Figure 3B-22 Bounding Analysis Curve for 8 ADS Stage 2, 3 3B-42 Revision 4
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Appendix 3C Reactor Coolant Loop Analysis Methods The AP1000 reactor coolant loop (RCL) model consists of three-dimensional finite elements such as pipes, beams, elbows, masses, and springs. The structural model is subjected to internal pressure, thermal expansion, weight, seismic, and pipe break loadings with imposed boundary conditions. The finite element displacement method is used for the analysis. The stiffness matrix for each element is assembled into a system of simultaneous linear equations for the entire structure. This set of equations is then solved by a variation of the Gaussian elimination method, known as the wave-front technique. This technique makes it possible to solve systems of equations with a large number of degrees of freedom using a minimum amount of computer memory.
3C.1 Reactor Coolant Loop Model Description The piping model of the reactor coolant loop consists of a number of elements of given dimensions, sizes, and physical properties that mathematically simulate the structural response of the physical system. The system model contains the reactor pressure vessel (RPV), two steam generators (SGs),
four reactor coolant pumps (RCPs), the reactor coolant loop piping, and the primary equipment supports. A two-loop model is developed for the AP1000 reactor coolant loop system.
The stiffness and mass effects of branch piping connected to the primary loop piping are considered when significant (Subsection 3.7.3.8.1).
3C.1.1 Steam Generator Model 3C.1.1.1 Steam Generator Mass and Geometrical Model The steam generator is represented by discrete masses. The geometry of the steam generator vessel is used to determine the properties of the equivalent piping elements that join the steam generator masses for sections of the steam generator above the tubesheet. For the steam generator channel head, a super element is used to represent the stiffness characteristics that link the steam generator lower shell with the steam generator supports and nozzles. The modulus of elasticity and coefficient of thermal expansion corresponding to the thermal conditions are applied to the steam generator equivalent piping elements.
3C.1.1.2 Steam Generator Supports The values of the steam generator support stiffnesses and locations of the supports are determined from the finite element models of the support members. The stiffness of the upper lateral supports include the steam generator shell flexibility. The local concrete building flexibility is included in the support stiffness.
3C.1.2 Reactor Coolant Pump Model 3C.1.2.1 Static Model The reactor coolant pump is represented by a super element to represent the mass and stiffness characteristics of the pump. For a thermal expansion analysis, rigid links are modeled in parallel with a super element with the thermal expansion coefficient incorporated.
3C.1.2.2 Seismic Model The reactor coolant pump is represented by a super element to represent the mass and stiffness characteristics of the pump. The reactor coolant pump model is a detailed model similar to that used to qualify the pump.
3C-1 Revision 2
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR 3C.1.2.3 Reactor Coolant Pump Supports There are no reactor coolant pump supports. Two reactor coolant pumps are attached to the steam generator channel head in each of the reactor coolant loops.
3C.1.3 Reactor Pressure Vessel Model 3C.1.3.1 Mass and Geometrical Model The reactor pressure vessel model consists of equivalent pipe, stiffness, and mass elements. The elements represent the vessel shell, the vessel core barrel, the fuel assemblies, and the integrated head lift package.
The reactor pressure vessel is modeled with equivalent pipe elements and connecting stiffnesses.
The equivalent pipe element properties of the vessel and barrel are those of the cylindrical structures.
The beam properties of the reactor internals are adjusted to simulate their fundamental frequency.
The appropriate modulus of elasticity and coefficient of thermal expansion are used for the equivalent pipe elements representing the reactor pressure vessel.
3C.1.3.2 Reactor Pressure Vessel Supports The reactor pressure vessel is supported at the four reactor pressure vessel inlet nozzles. Each support consists of a vertical stiffness and a lateral tangential stiffness. The support is represented by a stiffness matrix. The reactor pressure vessel supports are active for the analyzed loading conditions. The reactor pressure vessel model includes the effects of the vessel shell flexibility at the inlet and outlet nozzles. The local concrete building flexibility is included in the support stiffness.
3C.1.4 Containment Interior Building Structure Model A containment interior building structure finite element model is not required because the seismic inputs to the reactor coolant loop model are provided at all of the building attachments to the reactor coolant loop.
3C.1.5 Reactor Coolant Loop Piping Model The reactor coolant loop piping model consists of piping elements and bends. Each reactor coolant loop has two cold legs and one hot leg. The straight runs and bends of the cold leg and hot leg are input with the nominal dimensions. Each reactor coolant loop branch connection is represented by a node point. The reactor coolant loop piping model contains distributed masses of the hot and cold leg piping for static deadweight analysis and lumped masses representing the hot and cold leg piping for dynamic analysis.
3C.2 Design Requirements The reactor coolant piping is qualified to the requirements of the ASME Code as defined in Subsection 5.2.1.1.
The loadings for ASME Code,Section III, Class 1 components are defined in Subsection 3.9.3. The following loadings are considered in the reactor coolant loop piping analysis:
Design pressure (P)
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Thermal expansion during normal operating condition Thermal expansion during other transient conditions (not part of this appendix)
Safe shutdown earthquake (SSE)
Design basis pipe break (DBPB)
Building motions due to automatic depressurization system sparger discharge into the IRWST Thermal stratification during transient conditions In addition to the analyses of these loads, the reactor coolant piping is analyzed for the effect of cyclic fatigue due to the design transients and earthquakes smaller than SSE.
3C.3 Static Analyses 3C.3.1 Deadweight Analysis The reactor coolant loop piping system is analyzed for the effect of deadweight. The deadweight analysis is performed without considering the dry weight of the directly supported equipment. The effects of the auxiliary branch piping on the reactor coolant loop are generally negligible by the design of the auxiliary supports. A deadweight analysis is performed to include the total weight of the reactor coolant loop piping and the water weight in the components.
The reactor coolant loop deadweight model includes the corresponding active reactor coolant loop supports - reactor pressure vessel supports, and the steam generator column and lower and intermediate lateral strut supports. The steam generator upper lateral snubber supports are considered as inactive.
3C.3.2 Internal Pressure Analysis The effects of the internal primary coolant pipe pressure are used in the calculations of forces and moments for both the reactor coolant loop piping and equipment supports. The moment stress due to pressure is considered negligible for the ASME Code pipe stress equations.
3C.3.3 Thermal Expansion Analysis The reactor coolant loop piping is analyzed for the effects of thermal expansion. The thermal expansion analysis model considers the expansion of the reactor coolant loop piping, reactor pressure vessel, steam generator, reactor coolant pump, and the equipment supports. The stiffness effects of the auxiliary piping on the reactor coolant loop expansion are generally negligible by the design of the auxiliary lines supports.
3C.4 Seismic Analyses The reactor coolant loop piping is analyzed for the dynamic effects of a safe shutdown earthquake (SSE).
The model used in the static analysis is modified for the dynamic analysis by including the lumped mass characteristics of the piping and equipment. The effect of the equipment motion on the reactor coolant loop piping and support system is obtained by modeling the mass and stiffness characteristics of the equipment in the overall system model. The reactor coolant loop seismic 3C-3 Revision 2
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR analysis is performed at normal full-power operation. This operating condition is considered based on the lower probability of occurrence of the earthquake at reactor coolant loop temperatures below full power.
The time history integration method of analysis is used for the reactor coolant loops. The seismic input considers the soil profiles described in Subsection 3.7.1. This input is obtained from the nuclear island seismic analysis with time history input generated from the enveloped basemat response spectra of the soil cases described in Subsection 3.7.1. The duration of the input is between 12 to 20 seconds, depending on the duration needed to envelop the design response spectra. Three runs were performed based on the envelope of the soil profiles, the building model at nominal stiffness, and at stiffness varied by + or - 30 percent to account for uncertainties. The reactor coolant loop uses separate time history displacement input from the building analysis at the primary support locations.
Full direct integration is used with Rayleigh damping for loop components at 4 percent of critical damping. The steam generator snubbers have different stiffnesses in tension and compression. The mean value of the tension and compression stiffness is used in order to keep the model linear. The reactor pressure vessel vertical supports are acting downward only and are preloaded by deadweight, pressure, and thermal expansion loadings. The time history analysis is performed to evaluate the effect of lift-off of the vessel at the location of these supports.
3C.5 Reactor Coolant Loop Piping Stresses To prevent gross rupture of the reactor coolant loop piping system, the general and local primary membrane stress criteria must be satisfied. This is accomplished by satisfying Equation (9) in paragraph NB-3652 of the ASME Code,Section III. The secondary stress caused by thermal expansion is qualified by satisfying Equation (12) in paragraph NB-3653 of the ASME Code,Section III. When the simplified requirements of ASME Section III, NB-3640 and NB-3650 are not satisfied, the more detailed methods of NB-3200 may be used as stated in NB-3630.
3C.6 Description of Computer Programs This section provides a list of computer codes used for the AP1000 reactor coolant loop system analysis. Brief descriptions of the functions of each computer code are the following:
ANSYS - Performs Structural Analysis Using Finite Element Analysis Method. Displacements and loads are calculated at the pipe elements, supports, and equipment nozzles for pressure, deadweight, thermal, and seismic loadings.
3C-4 Revision 2
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Appendix 3D Methodology for Qualifying AP1000 Safety-Related Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Safety-related electrical equipment is tested under the environmental conditions expected to occur in the event of a design basis event. This testing provides a high degree of confidence in the safety-related system performance under the limiting environmental conditions. Qualification criteria were revised by IEEE 323-1974 (Reference 1) and by Regulatory Guide 1.89, which endorses this IEEE standard. The concept of aging was highlighted in IEEE 323-1974, and interpretation of the scope of aging and implementation methods were subsequently developed. 10 CFR 50.49 provides the NRC requirements for qualification of equipment located in potentially harsh environments. Therefore, the guidance provided by IEEE 323-1974 is the evolutionary root of requirements, recommended methods, and qualification procedures described in this appendix.
Specific treatment of seismic qualification, part of the qualification test sequence recommended in IEEE 323-1974, is addressed in IEEE 344-1987 (Reference 2). This appendix bases technical guidance, recommendations, and requirements for seismic qualification on IEEE 344-1987.
The AP1000 Equipment Qualification methodology addresses the expanded scope of IEEE 627-1980 (Reference 3), which encompasses the qualification of Class 1E electrical and safety-related mechanical equipment. IEEE 627 generalizes the principles and technical guidance of IEEE 323 and 344. Compliance with the IEEE 323-1974 and 344-1987 is the specific means of compliance with the intent of IEEE 627-1980 for safety-related electrical and mechanical equipment.
Safety-related electrical and mechanical equipment is typically qualified using analysis, testing, or a combination of these methods. The specific method or methods used depend on the safety-related function of the equipment type to be qualified. Safety-related mechanical equipment, such as tanks and valves, is typically qualified by analysis, with supplementary functional testing when functional operability is demonstrated only through testing, as is the case for active valves. Either testing or testing combined with analysis is the method used for environmental and seismic qualification of safety-related (Class 1E) electrical equipment.
To the extent practical, the technical discussions of this appendix follow the format headings of the equipment qualification data packages (EQDPs) to be issued as specific qualification program documentation. This formatting (see Section 3D.7) permits easy cross-reference between the methodology defined in this report and the detailed plans contained in the equipment qualification data packages. Attachment A of this appendix is the format generally used for the equipment qualification data package.
Attachment B of this appendix, "Aging Evaluation Program," describes methods for addressing potential age-related, common-mode failure mechanisms used in AP1000 equipment qualification programs. The approach conforms with current industry positions and makes maximum use of available data and experience in the evaluation, test, and analysis of aging mechanisms.
Attachment C, "Effects of Gamma Radiation Doses Below 104 rads on the Mechanical Properties of Materials," provides the basis that radiation aging below 104 rads is not a significant factor in the ability of the equipment to perform properly during a seismic event. For some devices, electrical properties are degraded above 103 rads. Radiation aging for safety-related equipment which is subject to lifetime doses of less than 104 rads (103 rads for certain electrical components) and not subject to a high-energy line break environment is not required to be addressed in AP1000 qualification programs.
Attachment D, "Accelerated Thermal Aging Parameters," describes the methodology employed in calculating the accelerated thermal aging parameters used in this program.
3D-1 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Attachment E, "Seismic Qualification Techniques," discusses available methods for establishing a seismic qualification basis, by either test or analysis, and its application to the qualification of safety-related equipment for the AP1000.
3D.1 Purpose The basic objectives of qualification of safety-related electrical and mechanical equipment follow:
To reduce the potential for common cause failures due to specified environmental and seismic events To demonstrate that safety-related electrical and mechanical equipment is capable of performing its designated safety-related functions.
This appendix describes the methodology that has been adopted to qualify equipment according to IEEE 627-1980, "IEEE Standard for Design Qualification of Safety System Equipment Used in Nuclear Power Generating Stations." The two standards primarily used to demonstrate compliance with this standard are IEEE 323-1974, "IEEE Standard for Qualifying Class 1E Equipment for Nuclear Power Generating Stations," and IEEE 344-1987, "IEEE Recommended Practice for Seismic Qualification of Class 1E Equipment for Nuclear Power Generating Stations."
3D.2 Scope The qualification criteria, methods, and environmental conditions described constitute the methodology that is adopted to comply with the standards for the AP1000. This methodology applies to safety-related, seismic Category I electrical and mechanical equipment and is also used for certain monitoring equipment. Seismic Category II equipment is also within the scope of this program. The criteria used for the design of seismic Category II structures, systems, and components are discussed in Section 3.7.
Performance during abnormal environmental conditions, while not specifically designated as an industry or a regulatory qualification requirement, is also addressed by this appendix. Performance during normal service conditions is demonstrated by tests and inspections addressed by the equipment specification. Electromagnetic interference (EMI) testing or analysis is not included in the qualification process and is addressed on an individual equipment basis, as necessary.
3D.3 Introduction This appendix identifies qualification methods used for the AP1000 to demonstrate the performance of safety-related electrical and mechanical equipment when subjected to abnormal and accident environmental conditions including loss of ventilation systems, feedline, steam line and reactor coolant system breaks, and seismic events. This appendix provides the expected conditions for various locations in the AP1000. General requirements for the development of plans/procedures/
reports are also provided. Section 3D.4 identifies the various industry and regulatory criteria upon which the program is based. Section 3D.5 defines the design specifications and applicable test environments. Section 3D.6 defines the basis for the qualification method selection. Section 3D.7 outlines the general format and content of the equipment qualification data packages.
3D.4 Qualification Criteria The environmental requirements considered in the design of safety-related equipment are embodied in GDC 2, "Design Bases for Protection Against Natural Phenomena"; GDC 4, "Environmental and Missile Design Bases"; and GDC 23, "Protection System Failure Modes." GDC 1, "Quality Standards and Records," and Criterion III, "Design Control," Criterion XI, "Test Control," and Criterion XVII, 3D-2 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR "Quality Assurance Record" of 10 CFR Part 50, Appendix B, "Quality Assurance Criteria for Nuclear Power Plants and Fuel Reprocessing Plants," to require that the environmental design of safety-related equipment is verified, documented, and controlled.
The qualification methods described in this appendix are used to verify the environmental design basis and capability of the safety-related electrical and mechanical equipment supplied for the AP1000. The results of the verification, as well as the design basis for each equipment, are documented in an equipment qualification data package (see Attachment A for sample format) and seismic analysis report for non-active mechanical equipment (with no environmental qualification requirements). Design control, test control, and quality assurance record keeping is performed through the AP1000 Quality Assurance Program. (See Chapter 17.)
3D.4.1 Qualification Guides IEEE 323-1974 and 344-1987 serve as the basis upon which the AP1000 equipment qualification methodology demonstrates compliance with IEEE 627-1980. NRC regulations stated in 10 CFR 50.49, "Environmental Qualification of Electrical Equipment Important to Safety for Nuclear Power Plants," and NRC guidance provided in Regulatory Guide 1.89, and Regulatory Guide 1.100, endorse IEEE 323-1974 and IEEE 344-1987, respectively. The intent of the more general IEEE 627-1980 is addressed through conformance with IEEE 323 and 344.
3D.4.1.1 IEEE Standards The following lists additional standards and guides used in developing the methodology:
IEEE 98-1984, "IEEE Standard for the Preparation of Test Procedures for the Thermal Evaluation of Solid Electrical Insulating Materials" IEEE 100-1996, "IEEE Standard Dictionary of Electrical and Electronic Terms" IEEE 308-1991, "IEEE Standard Criteria for Class 1E Power System for Nuclear Power Generating Stations" IEEE 317-1983, "IEEE Standard for Electric Penetration Assemblies in Containment Structure for Nuclear Power Generating Stations" IEEE 381-1977, "IEEE Standard Criteria for Type Tests of Class 1E Modules Used in Nuclear Power Generating Stations" IEEE 382-1996, "IEEE Standard for Qualification of Actuators for Power-Operated Valve Assemblies with Safety-Related Functions for Nuclear Power Generating Stations" IEEE 383-1974, "IEEE Standard for Type Test of Class 1E Electric Cables, Field Splices, and Connections for Nuclear Power Generating Stations" IEEE 420-1982, "IEEE Standard Design and Qualification of Class 1E Control Boards, Panels, and Racks Used in Nuclear Powered Generating Stations" IEEE 494-1974, "IEEE Standard Method for Identification of Documents Related to Class 1E Equipment and Systems for Nuclear Power Generating Stations" IEEE 535-1986, "IEEE Standard for Qualification of Class 1E Lead Storage Batteries for Nuclear Power Generating Stations" 3D-3 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR IEEE 572-1985, "IEEE Standard for Qualification of Class 1E Connection Assemblies for Nuclear Power Generating Stations" IEEE 603-1991, "IEEE Standard Criteria for Safety Systems for Nuclear Power Generating Stations" IEEE 649-1991, "IEEE Standard for Qualifying Class 1E Motor Control Centers for Nuclear Power Generating Stations" IEEE 650-1990, "IEEE Standard for Qualification of Class 1E Static Battery Chargers and Inverters for Nuclear Power Generating Stations" IEEE-741-1997, "IEEE Standard Criteria for the Protection of Class 1E Power Systems and Equipment in Nuclear Power Generating Stations" ANSI/IEEE C37.98-1987, "IEEE Standard for Seismic Testing of Relays."
3D.4.1.2 NRC Regulatory Guides In the area of seismic and environmental qualification of safety-related electrical and mechanical equipment, the NRC has issued the following Regulatory Guides:
Regulatory Guide 1.33, "Quality Assurance Program Requirements (Operation)" - The guide endorses ANS and ANSI standards for quality assurance programs, but is considered here specifically for guidance in determining documentation adequacy. Appendix A of the guide, Item 9, "Procedures for Performing Maintenance," addresses procedural and documentation requirements for maintenance of safety-related equipment, preventive maintenance, repair, and replacement. This guide is a source in the development of qualification in the on-going qualification programs discussed in Subsection 3D.6.4.
Regulatory Guide 1.61, "Damping Values for Seismic Design of Nuclear Power Plants" - The guide prescribes acceptable values of damping used in elastic modal dynamic seismic analysis of seismic Category I structures, systems, and components. The AP1000 equipment qualification program is based on Regulatory Guide 1.61 and on values considered to be acceptable based on past NRC acceptances. The safe shutdown earthquake (SSE) damping values used for the qualification of mechanical and electrical equipment are listed in Table 3.7.1-1 of Chapter 3.
Regulatory Guide 1.63, "Electric Penetration Assemblies in Containment Structures for Nuclear Power Plants" - The guide endorses, with certain qualifications, IEEE 317-1983. External circuit protection of electric penetration assemblies should meet the provisions of Section 5.4 of IEEE 741-1986, "Criteria for Protection of Class 1E Power Systems and Equipment in Nuclear Generating Stations," as these are beyond the scope of IEEE 317. The AP1000 design complies with IEEE 741-1997. The AP1000 equipment qualification program employs the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.63, Revision 3, in specifying qualification plans as a means of supplementing the guidance of IEEE 317 and 323.
Regulatory Guide 1.73, "Qualification Tests of Electric Valve Operators Installed Inside the Containment of Nuclear Power Plants" - The guide endorses, with certain qualifications, IEEE 382-1972. The AP1000 equipment qualification program employs recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.73, but gives preference to the guidance of IEEE 382-1996, where it is necessary to supplement the guidance of IEEE 323 or 344 in specifying qualification plans for electric valve operators.
3D-4 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Regulatory Guide 1.89, "Environmental Qualification of Certain Electric Equipment Important to Safety for Nuclear Power Plants" - The guide provides guidance for conformance with 10 CFR 50.49, and endorses the procedures of IEEE 323-1974 as an acceptable means for qualifying Class 1E equipment. Implicit in the endorsement of IEEE 323 is the reference to seismic qualification methods of IEEE 344 as a part of the qualification test sequence. (See Regulatory Guide 1.100 later in this discussion.) The AP1000 equipment qualification methodology addresses the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.89 by the following:
The recommendations of IEEE 323-1974 are met by the methods discussed in this appendix The radiation source terms used in qualification differ from those of Regulatory Guide 1.89, and are described in Section 3D.5 of this appendix The seismic qualification requirements employ the recommendations of IEEE 344-1987 as described in Attachment E of this appendix.
Regulatory Guide 1.92, "Combining Modal Responses and Spatial Components in Seismic Response Analysis" - The guide describes methods and procedures for the following:
Combining the values of the response of individual modes in a response spectrum modal dynamic analysis to find the representative maximum value of a particular response of interest for each of the three orthogonal seismic spatial components Combining the maximum values (or representative maximum values) of the responses for a given element of a system or item of equipment, determined for each of the three orthogonal spatial components.
The AP1000 equipment qualification program employs methods consistent with the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.92 when combining individual modal response values or the response of three independent spatial components in seismic analyses.
Regulatory Guide 1.97, Revision 3, Instrumentation for Light-Water-Cooled Nuclear Power Plants to Assess Plant and Environs Conditions During and Following an Accident. The guide describes a method acceptable to provide instrumentation to monitor plant variables and systems during and following an accident in a light-water-cooled nuclear power plant. The AP1000 program, identified as the post-accident monitoring instrumentation system (PAMS), provides the capability to monitor plant variables and systems operating status during and following an accident. PAMS includes those instruments provided to indicate system operating status and furnish information regarding the release of radioactive materials.
Regulatory Guide 1.100, "Seismic Qualification of Electric and Mechanical Equipment for Nuclear Power Plants" - The guide endorses IEEE 344-1987. Regulatory Guide 1.100 particularly notes that IEEE 344-1987 is applied in the qualification of safety-related mechanical equipment, as well as Class 1E electrical equipment. The AP1000 equipment qualification methodology employs the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.100, as described in Attachment E of this appendix.
Regulatory Guide 1.122, "Development of Floor Design Response Spectra for Seismic Design of Floor-Supported Equipment or Components" - The guide describes specific methods for developing floor (and other equipment mounting locations) response spectra. Included are specific criteria for the broadening frequency amplitude peaks and smoothing of the frequency amplitude spectrum to incorporate conservatism in the seismic requirements. This is to compensate for other uncertainties of analysis. The AP1000 equipment qualification program employs methods consistent with the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.122.
3D-5 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Regulatory Guide 1.131, "Qualification Tests of Electrical Cables, Field Splices, and Connections for Light-Water Cooled Nuclear Power Plants" - The guide endorses IEEE 383-1974. The AP1000 equipment qualification program employs the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.131 in specifying the qualification program plans where this guide supplements the guidance of IEEE 383 and to further demonstrate conformance with the guidance of IEEE 323.
Regulatory Guide 1.156, "Environmental Qualification of Connection Assemblies for Nuclear Power Plants" - The guide endorses IEEE 572-1985. The AP1000 equipment qualification program employs the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.156 in specifying the qualification program plans where this guide supplements the guidance of IEEE 572 to demonstrate conformance with the guidance of IEEE 323.
Regulatory Guide 1.158, "Qualification of Safety-Related Lead Storage Batteries for Nuclear Power Plants" - The guide endorses IEEE 535-1986. The AP1000 equipment qualification program employs the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.158 in specifying the qualification program plans where this guide supplements the guidance of IEEE 535 to demonstrate conformance with the guidance of IEEE 323.
Regulatory Guide 1.180, Guidelines for Evaluating Electromagnetic and Radio-Frequency Interference in Safety-Related Instrumentation and Control Systems. Regulatory Guide 1.180 provides guidance to evaluate electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference in safety-related instrumentation and control systems. The AP1000 equipment qualification program employs methods consistent with the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.180, where applicable.
Regulatory Guide 1.183, Alternate Radiological Source Terms for Evaluating Design Basis Accidents at Nuclear Power Reactor. The radiation dose rates and integrated doses applicable for AP1000 following a design basis accident are determined based on the criteria of NUREG-1465 and this regulatory guide.
3D.4.2 Definitions Definitions of terms used in this appendix are contained in the referenced standards and IEEE 100, "IEEE Standard Dictionary of Electrical and Electronic Terms, Sixth Edition." Subsection 3D.4.5 clarifies the definitions of "life" (that is, design, shelf, and qualified life) as used in this methodology.
The terms "design life" and "qualified life" have the meanings set forth in IEEE 323 and are used in the context of that standard.
3D.4.3 Mild Versus Harsh Environments Qualification requirements differ for equipment located in mild and harsh environments.
IEEE 323 defines a mild environment as an environment expected as a result of normal service conditions and the extremes of abnormal service conditions where a safe shutdown earthquake is the only design basis event of consequence or conditions where thresholds of material degradation are reached. The following limits are established as the delimiting environmental parameter values for mild and harsh environments.
Typically a mild environment conforms with the environmental parameter limits of Table 3D.4-1, though others may apply to specific equipment applications or locations.
The scope of 10 CFR 50.49 is limited exclusively to equipment located in a harsh environment. The AP1000 equipment qualification program conforms with the requirements of 10 CFR 50.49 for the qualification of harsh environment equipment. A radiation-harsh environment is defined for equipment designed to operate above certain radiation thresholds where other environmental 3D-6 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR parameters remain bounded by normal or abnormal conditions. Any equipment that is above 104 rads gamma (103 for electronics) will be evaluated to determine if a sequential test which includes aging, radiation, and the applicable seismic event is required or if sufficient documentation exists to preclude such a test.
3D.4.4 Test Sequence Where the test sequence deviates from that recommended by IEEE 323-1974, the deviation is justified. The test sequence employed for a given hardware item is specified in the equipment qualification data package Sections 2.1 and 3.6 (see Attachment A for example). Note that for this reference and subsequent references to Attachment A the information in Attachment A will be completed in accordance with Subsection 3.11.5. Clarifications to the IEEE 323-1974 recommended test sequence are discussed in the following:
- 1. Burn-In Test For electronic equipment, a burn-in test is completed, before operational testing of the equipment, to eliminate infant failures. The test consists of energizing the equipment for a minimum of 50 hours5.787037e-4 days <br />0.0139 hours <br />8.267196e-5 weeks <br />1.9025e-5 months <br /> at nominal voltage and frequency under ambient temperature conditions.
Any malfunction observed during these tests are repaired, and the 50-hour burn-in test is repeated for the repaired portion of the equipment.
- 2. Performance Extremes Test For equipment where seismic testing has previously been completed employing the recommended methods of IEEE 344-1987, seismic testing is not repeated. Testing of the equipment to demonstrate qualification at performance extremes is separately performed as permitted by IEEE 323-1974, Subsection 6.3.2(3). Additional discussion is provided in Subsection 3D.6.5.1.
- 3. Aging Simulation and Testing For equipment located in a mild environment, aging is addressed as described in Subsection 3D.6.4 and Attachment B. If there are no known aging mechanisms that significantly degrades the equipment during its service life, it is acceptable to perform seismic testing of unaged equipment. Separate testing or analysis (or both) is provided to demonstrate that the aging of components is not significant during the projected service or qualified life of the equipment.
- 4. Synergistic Effects An important consideration in the aging of equipment for harsh environment service is the possible existence of synergistic effects when multiple stress environments are applied simultaneously. This potential is addressed by conservatism inherent in the determination and use of the worst-case aging sequence and conservative accelerated aging parameters.
The combination of effects from pressure, temperatures, humidity, and chemistry are addressed by the high-energy line break (HELB) tests. Since the test item is not exposed to radiation during this test, the effects of this parameter are conservatively addressed by subjecting the test items to the required total integrated dose before the high-energy line break. Specifically for instruments, the summing of errors for the irradiation and high-energy line break portions of the test sequence is a means of achieving conservatism.
3D-7 Revision 10
- 5. Visual Inspections/Disassembly The results of post-test visual inspections are not necessarily documented unless problems are discovered. Disassembly is performed only when test results or visual inspections require further investigation.
3D.4.5 Aging 3D.4.5.1 Design Life The AP1000 equipment qualification program relies on the IEEE 323 definition for design life, particularly its distinction with respect to qualified life.
Instead of determining a qualified life for mild environment equipment for which the seismic event is the exclusive design basis event to be addressed, a design life is determined. Design lives offered in manufacturers' literature are accepted cautiously, particularly where the equipment is typically used for applications outside the nuclear industry.
An application of the design life is substantiated by sound bases in reliability theory and relevant industry standards, or experience data sources within the nuclear industry. Analyses treat the applicability and similarity of the equipment and conditions relevant for the AP1000 safety-related application. These analyses, and documentation of such, conform with guidelines of IEEE standards, as applicable, and with Sections 3D.6 and 3D.7 of this appendix.
3D.4.5.2 Shelf Life Based on recommended storage environments, the shelf life of an equipment item is not typically a significant portion of the defined qualified life. For example, ambient temperatures during storage are typically less than the operating temperatures assumed for aging calculations. Therefore, as long as equipment is in storage and is not energized (not experiencing self-heating), a reduction in qualified life is not appropriate. However, if storage conditions differ significantly from those recommended or the storage time becomes dramatically extended, the impact to the qualified life is determined by application of the Arrhenius time-temperature relationship.
3D.4.5.3 Qualified Life A qualified life is established for each item of safety-related equipment that is exposed to a harsh environment based on the conditions postulated at the equipment location with consideration of the equipment operability requirements.
The determination of qualified life considers potential aging mechanisms resulting from significant in-service thermal, radiation, and vibration sources, and the effects of operational cycling (mechanical or electrical or both). Generally, all aging mechanisms do not apply to each item of equipment. Relevant aging mechanisms addressed or simulated are determined jointly with the identification of the equipment's critical components, functional modes, and material characteristics, and the assessment of tolerable limits in degradation of the components. An a priori consideration in selecting equipment to qualify is the evaluation of the equipment's inherent capability to survive and operate under the conditions for which it is qualified.
Since past qualification tests have provided a substantial basis for this assessment (indeed, some may provide sufficient basis to preclude any new testing as part of the AP1000 program) specific guidance on each equipment type is not provided here. Application of the lessons of past tests, insights provided in generic industry communications (for example, technical bulletins, NRC 3D-8 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Information Notices), and sound judgment in the development of test plans and analysis procedures are addressed in the documentation of qualification for each equipment type, as applicable.
Qualified life is established by the most limiting of the five aging mechanisms. Qualified life may be limited by the tolerable degradation of a single component or material critical to the equipment's capability to perform its safety function. Aging is subject to the requirement for margin. See Subsection 3D.4.8 of this appendix.
For some equipment, qualified life is established on the basis of periodic replacement of certain short-lived, age-sensitive components. The user complies with the mandatory replacement practices documented in the equipment qualification data packages (see Subsection 3D.7.2.5) to affirm the equipment qualified life.
The objective of thermal and irradiation qualified life testing is to simulate, according to the available empirical material data, the degradation effects such that the equipment is in its end-of-life condition before the application of the design basis event conditions testing.
Thermal qualified life is evaluated using the Arrhenius time-temperature relationship. (See more detailed discussions in Attachments B and D of this appendix.) The activation energy is the exclusive material-dependent parameter input into the Arrhenius time-temperature relationship. The activation energy is an empirically determined parameter indicative of the thermal degradation of a physical property of a material (for example, elasticity of silicone rubbers or insulation resistance of cross-linked polyethylene cable insulation). Each material may have more than one physical property that may be subject to thermal degradation over time. Consequently, it may have different activation energies with respect to each property. Thus, the selection of activation energy considers the material property most germane to the safety-related function of the material or component. (Also see Subsection 3D.4.5.4.)
Common practice for the evaluation of irradiation-induced degradation is to consider the sum of estimated life and the accident radiation doses before design basis event testing. When testing, the total dose is applied during the radiation aging simulation portion of the qualification test sequences.
This is considered conservative because the equipment has accumulated an exposure, or total integrated dose, before the initiation of the seismic and accident environment testing. Further bases for test dose determination are provided in Subsection 3D.5.1.2. Sufficient margin must be included in test parameters (see Subsection 3D.4.8). The same margins are applied in an analysis of radiation life or design basis event radiation dosage.
The simulation of age also includes the effects of operational cycling, both electrical and mechanical.
Generally, these considerations are applied specifically to electromechanical equipment such as valve operators, limit switches, motors, relays, switches, and circuit breakers. Furthermore, the simulation of these effects is waived where existing data demonstrates equipment durability greatly in excess of estimated number of operating cycles for Class 1E service. Analysis or justification is provided for any case where operational cycling is omitted in the test sequence.
It is not practicable to simultaneously simulate the aspects of aging. Development of each test plan considers known synergies and sequences the simulation of the various applicable aging mechanisms with regard for conservatism of the overall effect on the test specimens.
3D.4.5.4 Qualified Life Reevaluation It may be possible to extend the qualified life of a particular piece of equipment at some future date by comparing the actual in-plant environments and conditions during the equipment's installed life to the values assumed for the AP1000 in establishing the qualified life. For example, the thermal qualified life might be extended by performing an analysis of actual internal or external temperatures 3D-9 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR (or both) experienced. Continuous temperature monitoring or use of sample devices for testing and trending materials aging may be used. These efforts reveal the conservatism of the original thermal life calculation, which assumes that the maximum value specified for the normal plant operating environment endured at all times.
Although a strict Arrhenius calculation may yield an extended qualified life, care is taken in using this extrapolation because of uncertainties in the methodology. The Arrhenius time-temperature relationship relies on empirically determined activation energies of materials. This parameter has been determined for a number of materials to at least a good approximation for small temperature extrapolations. Extrapolation of the Arrhenius model to time periods of temperature beyond the range of materials test data is questionable and may result in large errors.
Calculated qualified lives based on this methodology should be limited to 20 years unless sound technical bases can be cited. This position is consistent with industry guidelines such as IEEE 98-1984, NUREG/CR-3156 (Reference 4), and EPRI NP-1558 (Reference 5).
3D.4.6 Operability Time The post-accident operability times specified in Section 1.7 of each equipment qualification data package (see Attachment A) are conservatively established based on the safety-related function performed by that equipment for the spectrum of design basis event conditions. These include the following:
Trip and/or monitoring functions of sensors and instruments Operability requirements for electromechanical equipment Duration of required operability for active valves.
This evaluation also considers what consequences the failure of the device has on the operator's action or decisions and the mitigation of the event. Table 3D.4-2 lists and explains typical operability times.
For monitoring functions, simulated aging techniques are employed to shorten the test time following a high-energy line break. These also comply with the margin guidelines of Subsection 3D.4.8.
Margins for trip function requirements are contained in the high-energy line break envelopes that encompass a full spectrum of break sizes. The defined margins are also justified by the fact that the signal generated by the sensor is locked in by the protection system and does not reset should the sensor fail after completion of its designated trip time requirement.
3D.4.7 Performance Criterion The basic performance criterion is that the qualification test program demonstrates the capability of the equipment to meet the safety-related performance requirements defined in the equipment qualification data package, Section 1.7, while subjected to the environmental conditions specified in the equipment qualification data package, Section 1.8. Where three or more specimens are tested, failure of one of three may be considered a random failure, subject to an investigation concluding that the observed failure is not indicative of a common-mode occurrence.
For equipment for which aging is addressed by evaluation of appropriate mechanism(s) through a review of available material and component information, the basic acceptance criterion is that the evaluation of test data demonstrates that the effect of aging is minor and does not affect the capability of the aged equipment to perform specified functions.
3D-10 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR 3D.4.8 Margin IEEE 323 (Subection 6.3.1.5) recommends that margin be applied to the most severe specified service conditions in order to establish the conditions for qualification. This margin is provided in order to account for normal variations in commercial production of equipment and for reasonable errors in defining satisfactory performance. Further guidance for determining the acceptability of margin with respect to application-specific or location-specific requirements is provided by the NRC in NUREG-0588 and Regulatory Guide 1.89, Revision 1. Margins are included in addition to conservatisms applied during the derivation of the local environmental conditions of the equipment, unless the conservatism is quantified and specifically shown to meet or exceed the guidance of IEEE 323, NUREG-0588, and Regulatory Guide 1.97.
Consistent with IEEE 323, margin is incorporated into the specification of the generic qualification parameters by either increasing the test levels, number of test cycles, test duration, or a combination of these options as appropriate. The AP1000 generic qualification parameters are selected to envelop a range of loss of coolant accident and high-energy line break sizes, and equipment locations. Margin in seismic conditions for test and analysis are addressed in Subsection 3D.4.8.4.
The margins available for a specific application may be larger than the generic equipment qualification test objective for seismic events and some events outside containment and are verified on an application-specific basis.
In defining qualification parameters, the AP1000 equipment qualification program incorporates margin as described in the following subsections. Table 3D.4-3 lists margin requirements applied.
For generic testing, margin is applied at the time of testing to cover known safety-related applications of the equipment. Generally, this results in a worst-case test that provides substantial margin for applications where lesser environments apply. Application of margin for seismic qualification addresses several cases unique to the qualification approach. (See Subsection 3D.4.8.4.)
3D.4.8.1 Normal and Abnormal Extremes As indicated in Section 7 of IEEE 323, the application of margin is directed at specifying adequate qualification requirements for the most severe service conditions represented by the design basis events (that is, high-energy line break accidents and seismic events). Consequently, the AP1000 equipment qualification methodology does not apply any systematic margin to the normal and abnormal environment parameters in defining the qualification conditions.
For electronic equipment not required to operate in a high-energy line break environment, additional margin is included by requiring that the equipment operate through the conservative normal and abnormal service conditions indicated in Figure 3D.5-1. The environmental parameters at least equal the specified range of service condition parameters. An exception occurs for transmitters where a performance verification is completed at 130°F on each transmitter to encompass the specified maximum abnormal conditions. For equipment to be qualified to operate in a high-energy line break environment, qualification to the severe high-energy line break conditions demonstrates ample margin for acceptable performance under certain specified normal and abnormal service conditions.
3D.4.8.2 Aging No specific margin is applied to the time component in deriving appropriate aging parameters, if margin is included in deriving the accelerated aging parameters employed for simulating each applicable aging mechanism.
Margin may be addressed by demonstrating the adequacy of the aging simulated by test through the calculation of time-temperature equivalence (See Attachment B of this appendix) or the comparison 3D-11 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR of simulated parameters with those applicable to the intended service of the equipment. The installed life of equipment must not exceed the thermal qualified life demonstrated by this calculation.
Additionally, the selection and use of the thermal aging parameters both for test and subsequent calculations are subject to criteria, including the following:
Test temperature must endure for at least 100 hours0.00116 days <br />0.0278 hours <br />1.653439e-4 weeks <br />3.805e-5 months <br /> Test temperature must exceed any application temperature (that is, the normal or abnormal environment in which the equipment is to be used, and for which the life is calculated)
Test temperature must be less than state-change temperature for materials critical to the equipment safety-related function or capability to endure the subsequent design basis event testing A conservative activation energy is used. Activation energies for materials critical to the equipment safety-related function or capability to endure the subsequent design basis event testing are considered. Materials may have several activation energies, each for a different material property. Relevant material properties are considered.
If margin is not demonstrated through conservatism in the aging parameters or calculation, then a
+10 percent time margin is included.
A margin of 10 percent in the other parameters (for example, irradiation, operational cycling) applies to both the aging simulation and the post-accident simulated aging, with few exceptions.
For equipment required by design to perform its safety-related function within a short time period into the design basis event (that is, within seconds or minutes), and having completed its function, subsequent failure is shown not to be detrimental to plant safety, margin by percentage of additional time or equivalent time-temperature is not applied. Margins for trip function requirements are contained in the worst-case high-energy line break envelope. Test parameters are simulated on a real-time basis with the transient condition margins listed in Table 3D.4-3. Trip signals, once generated by the sensors, are locked in by the protection system and do not reset in the event of subsequent sensor failure.
3D.4.8.3 Radiation An additional 10 percent is added to the calculated total integrated dose in specifying the test requirements.
3D.4.8.4 Seismic Conditions Required response spectra included in Subsection 3.7.2 or other AP1000 program specifications are the conditions to be enveloped. No amplitude margin is added to these conditions. Peak broadening is also discussed in Subsection 3.7.2. Seismic qualification by analysis addresses margin requirements by other methods of conservatism while using the same sets of requirements - no amplitude margin is included. For qualification tests, the test facility increases the amplitude of seismic profiles by 10 percent to incorporate margin.
For most applications, considerable margin exists with respect to the acceleration levels employed and the width of the response spectra. Further details are addressed in Attachment E.
3D-12 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR 3D.4.8.5 High-Energy Line Break Conditions The envelopes specified for high-energy line breaks are selected to encompass the transients resulting from a spectra of loss of coolant accidents and high-energy line break sizes and locations, and various nodes in the containment. As a consequence, these design envelopes already contain significant margin with respect to any transient corresponding to a single break.
The AP1000 equipment qualification methodology requires that the qualification envelopes be derived with a margin of 15°F and 10 psi with respect to the design envelopes in Figure 3D.5-8. The margin on dose is identified by comparing the location specific dose requirements and the AP1000 equipment qualification parameters.
Margin on chemistry is 10 percent on the bounding concentration of the chemical additives. For fluids with acidic pH, the margin is applied in chemicals that increase the acidity of the fluid. For fluids with basic pH, the margin is applied in chemicals that increase the alkalinity of the solution. Solutions simulating post-accident containment sump chemistry reflect the influence of the buffering agent and change over time from acidic to alkaline. Margin in the initial acidic sump chemistry does not have to be explicitly modeled because it is accomplished through continued low pH fluid injection. Required pH of chemistries is met or bounded in a conservative fashion.
3D.4.9 Treatment of Failures The primary purpose of equipment qualification is to reduce the potential for common mode failures due to anticipated environmental and seismic conditions. The redundancy, diversity, and periodic testing of nuclear power plant safety-related equipment are designed to accommodate random failures of individual components.
Where an adequate test sample is available, the failure of one component or device together with a successful test of two identical components or devices indicates a random failure mechanism, subject to an investigation concluding that the observed failure is not common mode. Where insufficient test samples prevent such a conclusion, any failures are investigated to ascertain whether the failure mechanism is of common mode origin. Should a common mode failure mechanism be identified as causing the failure, either a design change is implemented to eliminate the problem or a repeat test completed to demonstrate compliance with the criteria.
For those mild environment equipment items that, through a review of available documentation, are subject to failure during a seismic event due to significant aging mechanisms, the material or component is replaced or monitored through a maintenance/surveillance program.
3D.4.10 Traceability A system of baseline design documentation is instituted to control the design, procurement, and manufacturing of safety-related products. As part of this quality control program, critical parts are identified and assigned a level of control to reflect the estimate of potential qualification or procurement problems. In addition, levels of quality inspection are also assigned to each part. The baseline design documentation describes the equipment in sufficient detail (drawing number, part number, manufacturer) to establish traceability between equipment shipped and equipment tested in the qualification program.
3D.4.10.1 Auditable Link Document The purchaser of equipment referencing this program requires an auditable link document that provides a tie between the specific equipment and documentation of qualification reviewed for 3D-13 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR acceptance under this program. This auditable link document includes one or more of the following sections, as applicable.
3D.4.10.1.1 Equipment Link This documentation certifies that the plant specific equipment is covered by the applicable equipment test reports. This link reflects a comparison of the as-built drawings, baseline design document or other documentation of the tested equipment to the specific equipment.
3D.4.10.1.2 Component Link This documentation certifies that the components (for example, replacement parts) used in the specific equipment are represented in the applicable test reports or via analysis under a component aging program, such as that described in Attachment B. This link applies only to equipment whose equipment qualification data package references a component testing program. This link reflects a comparison of the as-built drawings, baseline design document, or other documentation of the specific equipment to the component program listing.
3D.4.10.1.3 Material Link This documentation certifies that the materials used in the equipment are represented in a materials aging analysis, such as that described in Attachment B. This link applies only to equipment whose equipment qualification data package references the materials aging analysis and reflects a comparison of the as-built drawings, baseline design document, or other documentation of the plant specific equipment to the materials aging analysis listing.
3D.4.10.2 Similarity Where differences exist between items of equipment, analysis may be employed to demonstrate that the test results obtained for one piece of equipment are applicable to a similar piece of equipment.
Documentation of this analysis conforms with guidelines in IEEE 323 and 627, and Subsection 3D.6.2.1 and Section 3D.7 of this appendix.
3D.5 Design Specifications The conditions and parameters considered in the environmental and seismic qualification of AP1000 safety-related equipment are separated into three categories: normal, abnormal, and design basis event. Normal conditions are those sets and ranges of plant conditions that are expected to occur regularly and for which plant equipment is expected to perform its safety-related function, as required, on a continuous, steady-state basis. Abnormal conditions refer to the extreme ranges of normal plant conditions for which the equipment is designed to operate for a period of time without any special calibration or maintenance effort. Design basis event conditions refers to environmental parameters to which the equipment may be subjected without impairment of its defined operating characteristics for those conditions.
The following subsections define the basis for the normal, abnormal, design basis event, and post-design basis event environmental conditions specified for the qualification of safety-related equipment in the AP1000 equipment qualification program. (These are cited in Section 1.7 of each equipment qualification data package; See Attachment A.)
The service conditions simulated by the test plan are identified in equipment qualification data package Section 3.7. (See Subsection 3D.7.4.6 and Attachment A.) In general, the parameters employed are selected to be equal to (normal and abnormal) or have margin (design basis event and post-design basis event) with respect to the specified service conditions of equipment qualification 3D-14 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR data package, Section 1.7, as recommended by IEEE 323. These conditions are conservatively derived to allow for possible alternative locations of equipment within the plant.
3D.5.1 Normal Operating Conditions Equipment not subject to high-energy line break environments is qualified for normal and abnormal conditions, as applicable, employing a cyclic test sequence of environmental and electrical extremes.
A typical test profile, including voltage and frequency cycling, is shown in Figure 3D.5-1.
3D.5.1.1 Pressure, Temperature, Humidity The calculated values for temperature, pressure, and humidity during normal operation are specified in Table 3D.5-1 as a function of in-plant location.
3D.5.1.2 Radiation Dose The normal operating dose rates and consequent 60-year design expectation doses at various locations inside containment are specified in Table 3D.5-2. These values have been derived from theoretical calculations assuming an expected 60 years of continuous operation with a reactor power of 3468 MWth (including 2-percent power uncertainty) and steady-state operating conditions.
Equivalent data at various locations outside containment are also specified in Table 3D.5-2.
The total integrated dose employed for testing is a combination of normal and accident doses (where applicable), and is defined to equal or exceed the maximum radiation dose contained in the equipment qualification data package. (See Section 3D.7 and Attachment A.) A margin of 10 percent is included in defining the total integrated doses for testing. Normal operating and accident gamma doses are simulated using a cobalt-60 or spent fuel source. The test dose is applied at a rate approximate to the maximum accident dose rate. Irradiation dose rates less than the maximum are considered where there is significant shielding (greater than two mm of steel) or where the peak in-containment design basis event dose rate is not expected to affect the equipment's electrical performance.
Low radiation dose rates encountered during normal operation for most equipment are not considered critical parameters because of the resultant low total integrated dose (104 to 105 rads) achieved. For equipment not required post-accident, material can be selected based on previous test results. Another test on the completed assembly is not required.
If equipment is located in an environment where the normal total integrated dose exceeds the threshold for radiation damage, then testing is required. For equipment required post-accident, the dose received during normal operation is usually an insignificant part of the total integrated dose, including accident conditions effects. The supposition that a concern over low dose rate effects diminishes as the total integrated dose decreases is supported by Sandia National Laboratories tests (References 6 and 7) on selected materials over a range of dose rates. These studies indicate that reduction in original properties is about the same (and not significant) for dose rates up to a total integrated dose in the megarad range. Although these tests were not performed at dose rates as low as those expected in a nuclear power plant and electrical properties were not evaluated, they do give some indication of the effect of varying the rate.
Based on results of research programs to date and low total integrated dose reached during normal operation, the AP1000 equipment qualification program does not consider degradation due to low dose rate effects to be a significant concern. Therefore, the program does not include any action other than inspecting organic material degradation in the plant through normal maintenance.
3D-15 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR 3D.5.2 Abnormal Operating Conditions Abnormal environments are defined to recognize possible plant service abnormalities that lead to short-term changes in environments at various equipment locations.
For equipment located inside containment, several abnormal environment types are considered in Subsection 3D.5.2.1. Equipment located outside containment is addressed in Subsection 3D.5.2.2.
3D.5.2.1 Abnormal Environments Inside Containment In the AP1000 equipment qualification program there are multiple events postulated at least once over the 60 year design expectation which cause abnormal environmental conditions in the containment. These are divided into two groups of events, based on peak containment temperatures expected.
Group 1: 150°F Events Loss of a fan cooler Loss of all ac for up to 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> Pressurizer safety valve open/close during reactor coolant system transient.
Group 2: 250°F Events Spurious automatic depressurization system (ADS) actuation Passive residual heat removal (PRHR) system use (long-term)
Reactor coolant system depressurization via pressurizer safety valve Small loss of coolant accident.
Only the vapor conditions (containment air temperature, pressure, and humidity) associated with these events are considered in the abnormal, group 2 environmental conditions. Other environmental conditions resulting from these events (such as submergence, or radiation) are not included in the group 2 environmental conditions, but are part of or bounded by the accident condition qualification.
Table 3D.5-3 presents the conditions associated with these abnormal environments. Best estimate analyses of AP1000 plant behavior are used to determine abnormal environmental conditions. Plant recovery occurs after each event with varying degrees of time and maintenance efforts. Thus, the conditions resulting from these events are considered in the development of aging test parameters.
Event frequency, conditions, and duration are accounted for within the context of the qualified life objective of each equipment type test program.
3D.5.2.2 Abnormal Environments Outside Containment Figure 3D.5-1 represents the assumptions made in defining potential abnormal environments due to loss of air-conditioning or ventilation systems.
Table 3D.5-4 defines the abnormal environments as a function of equipment location. The assumed durations of the abnormal conditions specified in Table 3D.5-4 are consistent with operating practices and technical specification limits. For certain plant applications, qualification for abnormal environments is not necessary when equipment is located in environmental zones that do not exceed manufacturer's design limits for equipment operation, or for flooding/wetting if qualified in accordance with applicable criteria in Subsection 3.11.1.2.
3D-16 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR 3D.5.3 Seismic Events See Attachment E.
3D.5.4 Containment Test Environment The ASME Code,Section III, Paragraph NE-6321 specifies that containment integrity is demonstrated at not less than 1.1 times design pressure. The design pressure of the AP1000 containment is 59 psig. Consequently, the minimum pressure specified for the containment test is 59 x 1.1 = 64.9 psig. Other environmental parameters (such as temperature and humidity) of the containment test are adequately enveloped by the parameters specified for normal or abnormal plant conditions.
3D.5.5 Design Basis Event Conditions Performance requirements are specified for those design basis events for which the equipment performs a safety-related function and which have a potential for changing the equipment environment due to increased temperature, pressure, humidity, radiation, or seismic effects. The environmental conditions for each applicable design basis event are summarized in Table 3D.5-5 and are defined in the equipment qualification data package (see Section 1.8 of Attachment A) based on considerations and assumptions described in the following subsections. The radiological conditions presented in Table 3D.5-5 represent the maximum one year TID expected to occur in that zone.
Dosages used for equipment qualification will be evaluated on a room-by-room basis and may be less than this maximum dose.
3D.5.5.1 High-Energy Line Break Accidents Inside Containment 3D.5.5.1.1 Radiation Environment - Loss of Coolant Accident The radiation dose rates and integrated doses following a design basis loss-of-coolant accident (LOCA) are determined based on the criteria and guidance provided in NUREG 1465, Accident Source Terms for Light-Water Nuclear Power Plants - Final Report (Reference 8) and Regulatory Guide 1.183, Alternative Radiological Source Terms for Evaluating Design Basis Accidents at Nuclear Power Reactors (Reference 9).
The radiation exposure inside the containment is conservatively estimated by considering the dose in the middle of the AP1000 containment. Radioactive sources are assumed to be uniformly distributed throughout the containment atmosphere, and plate out of non-gaseous activity on containment surfaces is considered. No credit is taken for the shielding provided by internal structures and equipment.
Sources are based on the emergency safeguards system core thermal power rating and the following analytical assumptions:
Power Level (including 2-percent power uncertainty) .................... 3,468 MWt Fraction of total core inventory released to the containment atmosphere:
Noble Gases (Xe, Kr)...................................................................................... 1.0 Halogens (I, Br)............................................................................................... 0.40 Alkali Metals (Cs, Rb) ..................................................................................... 0.30 Tellurium Group (Te, Sb, Se)........................................................................... 0.05 3D-17 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Barium, Strontium (Ba, Sr).............................................................................. 0.02 Noble Metals (Ru, Rh, Pd, Mo, Tc, Co) ........................................................... 0.0025 Lanthanides (La, Zr, Nd, Eu, Nb, Pm, Pr, Sm, Y, Cm, Am) ............................. 0.0002 Cerium Group (Ce, Pu, Np) ............................................................................ 0.0005 The radionuclide groups and elemental release fractions listed above are consistent with the accident source term information presented in NUREG-1465 and Regulatory Guide 1.183.
The timing of the releases are based on NUREG-1465 assumptions. The release scenario assumed in the calculations is described below.
An initial release of activity from the gaps of a number of failed fuel rods at 10 minutes into the accident is considered. The release of 3 percent of the core inventory of the volatile species (defined as noble gases, halogens, and alkali metals) is assumed. An additional release period occurs over the next 30 minutes, that is, from 10 to 40 minutes into the accident. At this point, 5 percent of the total core inventory of volatile species has been considered to be released.
Over the next 1.3 hours3.472222e-5 days <br />8.333333e-4 hours <br />4.960317e-6 weeks <br />1.1415e-6 months <br />, releases associated with an early in-vessel release period are assumed to occur, that is, from 40 minutes to 1.97 hours0.00112 days <br />0.0269 hours <br />1.603836e-4 weeks <br />3.69085e-5 months <br /> into the accident. This source term is a time-varying release in which the release rate is assumed to be constant during the duration time. Additional releases during the early in-vessel release period include 95 percent of the noble gases, 35 percent of the halogens, and 25 percent of the alkali metals, as well as the fractions of the tellurium group, barium and strontium, noble metals, lanthanides, and cerium group as listed above.
There is no additional release of activity to the containment atmosphere after the in-vessel release phase. Activity removal by natural mechanisms as described in Chapter 15 Subsection 15.6.5.3.2 and Appendix B are considered only during the first 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> following the accident.
The above source terms are consistent with the guidance provided by the NRC in Regulatory Guide 1.183 for design basis accident (DBA) loss-of-coolant accident (LOCA) evaluations.
Based on these assumptions the instantaneous and integrated gamma and beta doses for the containment atmosphere following a loss of coolant accident are shown in Figures 3D.5-2 and 3D.5-3, respectively.
The total integrated dose of radiation employed for testing is a combination of normal and design basis event dose, as applicable. It is defined to equal or exceed the maximum radiation dose contained in the specification (Attachment A, Section 1.8). A margin of 10 percent is included in defining the total integrated dose for testing. Normal operating and design basis event gamma doses are simulated using a cobalt-60 source. The test dose is applied at a rate approximate to the initial phase of the design basis event dose rate shown in Figure 3D.5-2 as modified by shielding effects (typically 0.2 to 0.25 Mr/hr).
Where exposed organic material is evaluated by test for the effect of (accident) beta radiation, a beta source is employed. Or a cobalt-60 or spent fuel source is used to impart the same dose using gamma radiation. When doing beta equivalent testing, the total integrated dose using gamma is conservatively equal to the beta total integrated dose, or the resulting bremsstrahlung is calculated and the test item is exposed to an equivalent gamma dose.
Radiation conditions for loss of coolant accident envelop other scenarios, such as rod ejection.
3D-18 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR 3D.5.5.1.2 Radiation Environment - Steam Line Break Accident Sources associated with a steam line break accident are based on the release of reactor coolant system activity, assuming operation with the design basis fuel defect level of 0.25 percent. It is further assumed that an event-initiated iodine activity spike occurs, which increases the reactor coolant activity during the accident based on a rate of increase that is 500 times the normal activity appearance rate in the reactor coolant.
The activity inventory is instantaneously released into the containment atmosphere. The dose is conservatively estimated by considering the dose rate in the middle of the containment, with no credit for the shielding provided by the internal structures, components, and equipment. The instantaneous and integrated gamma and beta doses for the containment atmosphere following a steam line break are shown in Figures 3D.5-4 and 3D.5-5, respectively.
3D.5.5.1.3 Radiation Environment - Feedline Break For convenience and simplicity, it is conservatively assumed that the radiation doses resulting from a feedline break are equal to the values specified in Figures 3D.5-4 and 3D.5-5 for a steam line break.
3D.5.5.1.4 Total Integrated Dose Specification The applicable accident doses specified in equipment qualification data package Section 1.8 of Attachment A, have been derived based upon the time required to perform the specified safety function in the accident environment (Attachment A, Section 1.7) and the dose calculations described previously, subject to the following modifications:
For equipment only required to provide trip or activation functions after accidents involving no release of radioactive material for at least one hour, the radiation dose is based on the normal dose rates (Table 3D.5-2).
3D.5.5.1.5 Temperature/Pressure Environments The design basis events addressed are the loss of coolant accident, steam line break and feedwater line break. The WGOTHIC code is utilized to calculate the temperature and pressure conditions resulting from these breaks. To retain the option of qualifying equipment for each of these high-energy line break conditions, as applicable, separate environmental containment envelopes are specified for the higher irradiation/lower saturated temperature conditions of the loss of coolant accident as against the lower irradiation/short-term superheated temperature conditions associated with the steam line break. To limit the number of basic envelopes, this latter envelope is conservatively employed to define the containment environmental envelope following a feedline break.
Additionally, to facilitate AP1000 generic qualification and testing, the environmental envelopes have been combined to a single high-energy line break profile depicted in Figure 3D.5-8. This combined profile encompasses locations inside containment on the basis of the containment analyses for the AP1000 design. The profile, or a similar combined profile considering localized conditions resulting from the same events, is used to qualify equipment for any application or location for the AP1000 consistent with the NRC requirements in 10 CFR 50.49 and IEEE 308, 323, 603, and 627 when margin is added and via conformance with IEEE 323 guidelines.
Qualification tests to high-energy line break conditions are designed to address the applicable specified environment(s) with a margin of 15°F and 10 psi. Separate envelopes with margin are employed, or a combined loss of coolant accident/steam line break/feedwater line break envelope (Figure 3D.5-8, or its localized equivalent) may be employed for in-containment equipment 3D-19 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR qualification tests. Figure 3D.5-8 does not include margin from IEEE 323-1974, which will be incorporated in the environmental qualification programs. The simulated post-design basis event aging time-temperature profile (Figure 3D.5-8, or its localized equivalent from 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> to test conclusion) is defined consistent with the smallest value of activation energy applicable to the thermal aging sensitive components composing the test equipment or by a demonstrably conservative activation energy, as described in Attachment D.
3D.5.5.1.6 Chemical Environment The high-energy line break qualification test for safety-related components will include chemical injection during the first 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> of the test, as appropriate, to simulate the reactor coolant system fluid. Initial pH is from 4 to 4.5, with the solution consisting primarily of boric acid. Components situated in locations that will not be exposed to reactor coolant fluid are not required to be subjected to chemical injection during testing.
Since there is no caustic containment spray in the AP1000, subsequent adjustments in pH may not be necessary for all tests. Sump solution chemistry is adjusted by release of alkaline chemistry, which will rise to 7.0 to 9.5 within a few hours of containment flooding. Conditions, representative of expected sump solution chemistry, are simulated for submerged equipment.
Margin in low pH value is not included, but is addressed by the continued injection through the first 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br />. Margin in alkaline pH, where adjustment is necessary, is incorporated by a 10 percent increase in alkalinity.
3D.5.5.1.7 Submergence Performance of equipment in a submerged condition is verified by a test that replicates the actual conditions with appropriate margin.
3D.5.5.2 High-Energy Line Break Accidents Outside Containment For the majority of equipment located outside containment, the normal operating environment remains unchanged by a high-energy line break accident. As a consequence, qualification for such events is covered by qualification for normal conditions.
A limited amount of equipment located outside containment, near high-energy lines, could be subject to local hostile environmental conditions because of a high-energy line break outside containment. In this case, the equipment is qualified for the conditions resulting from events affecting its location and for which it is required to operate. Figure 3D.5-9 shows the design conditions for equipment that is required to perform throughout postulated events. Figure 3D.5-9 does not include margin from IEEE 323-1974, which will be incorporated in the environmental qualification programs. The maximum pressure for any event outside containment is 6 psi, with the exception of the MSIV compartments, which are designed for a 6.5 psi pressurization load.
3D.6 Qualification Methods The recognized methods available for qualifying safety-related electrical equipment are established in IEEE 323. These are type testing, analysis, on-going qualification, or a combination of these methods. The choice of qualification method for a particular item of equipment is based upon many factors. These factors include practicability, size and complexity of equipment, economics, and availability of previous qualification to earlier standards.
The qualification method employed for each equipment type included under the AP1000 equipment qualification program is identified in the individual equipment qualification data packages whether by 3D-20 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR test (Attachment A, Section 3), analysis (Attachment A, Section 4), or by a combination of these methods. The AP1000 equipment qualification program may employ on-going qualification through the use of maintenance and surveillance. Guidance for such an approach is not included in this appendix.
3D.6.1 Type Test The preferred method of environmental and seismic qualification of safety-related electrical and electromechanical equipment for the AP1000 equipment qualification program is type testing according to the guidelines and requirements of IEEE 323-1974 and 344-1987. Development of type test requirements are discussed in Section 3D.5. Documentation requirements and test plan development are addressed in Section 3D.7.
Additionally, qualification based on type tests performed according to IEEE 323 and 344, but not specifically for the AP1000, may be used as a qualification basis. Subsection 3D.6.5 of this appendix discusses the combination of qualification methods as they apply to the AP1000 equipment qualification program. (See Subsection 3D.6.5.1.)
3D.6.2 Analysis The AP1000 equipment qualification program uses analysis for seismic qualification of equipment if the primary requirement is the demonstration of structural integrity during a seismic event. For equipment that performs an active or dynamic function, seismic qualification by analysis may also be used. (See Section E.3 of Attachment E.) However, the similarity between a qualified test unit and an as-supplied unit must be demonstrated unless otherwise justified. Subsection 3.9.2.2 describes the qualification requirements for safety-related mechanical equipment where a fluid pressure boundary is involved. For those mechanical components that are not pressure boundaries, analysis is performed in compliance with the applicable industry design standard. Where age-sensitive materials, such as gaskets and packing, are used in the assembly of mechanical equipment, the aging of these materials is normally evaluated based on an item-by-item review of the aging characteristics of the material. (See Subsection 3D.6.2.3.)
Requirements for documentation of the analysis are further treated in Section 3D.7.
3D.6.2.1 Similarity Similarities among manufacturer's models provides several options for extending qualification to equipment without the need for a complete qualification test program.
A model series, such as that for a solenoid valve design, consists of numerous models that are identical in materials of construction and manufacturing process, but have minor variance in size, functional mode, operating voltage, electrical termination type, and mechanical interface sizing. Such variances in most cases have no impact on or relevance to the capability of the various models to perform acceptably under environmental or seismic (or both) qualification test conditions.
Furthermore, the design basis document may apply equally to each member of the model series. In such cases, all members of the model series can be qualified by reference to the same testing or analysis.
There may be sufficient similarities between different model series to justify the case for similarity. A documented comparison addressing differences in the design for each, or apparent physical differences between members of each model series, may be sufficient to preclude the testing of one model series based on the testing of the other.
3D-21 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Similarly, different models of a manufacturer's transmitters may be identical in some respects but different in others. The justification of similarity addresses the degree of similarity for critical characteristics. Differences that are not significant to qualification are also addressed for completeness. The mechanical and electrical functional modes and configurations must be the same. The materials of construction may be different, but must demonstrate equivalent performance.
Other means of assuring accuracy may be necessary. When the devices are sufficiently similar in all attributes affecting qualification, qualification testing of one item can adequately cover another.
3D.6.2.2 Substitution The objectives are to establish a degree of similarity and equivalence of performance for parts and materials that are different and, ultimately, to preclude the need for testing. For example, a gasket material is changed or a new type of capacitor is used because the original is no longer available, economical, or inadequate. Substitution of parts and materials is acceptable if comparison or analysis supports the conclusion that equipment performance is the same or better as a result. Consideration is given to characteristics of materials and the relative degree to which each is affected (or degraded) by the environmental parameters of qualification.
3D.6.2.3 Analysis of Safety-Related Mechanical Equipment Environmental qualification of safety-related mechanical equipment is required to preclude common mode failures due to environmental effects of a design basis accident. Requirements are based on GDC 4 and 10 CFR 50, Appendix B. These criteria mandate that safety-related structures, systems, and components be designed to accommodate both normal and accident environmental effects.
3D.6.2.3.1 Equipment Identification Safety-related mechanical equipment to be qualified is identified through the review of design basis documentation or the requirements of each safety-related fluid system. Only nonmetallic parts or subcomponents within the safety-related mechanical equipment are addressed for the effects of the postulated environments. The principal scope is typically valve "soft parts" that are critical to the valve safety-related function or pressure boundary integrity.
The types of components most frequently encountered in the mechanical equipment evaluations are discussed in Subsection 3D.6.2.3.3. Properties of materials that are assessed to provide confidence in safety-related function performance are also identified.
3D.6.2.3.2 Safety-Related Function Safety-related functions and performance criteria are identified based on system and component classification. Structure, system, and component design basis documentation is reviewed to determine the specific safety functions. Components and subcomponents not involved in the equipment's safety-related function(s) are excluded from the qualification process if it is shown that their failures have no effect on the safety-related functions.
3D.6.2.3.3 Performance Criteria Comprehensive performance criteria are established to satisfy the fundamental qualification requirements. The criterion for qualification is that the property of the nonmetallic material with regard to its application is not degraded during the specified qualified life to the point that the component is unable to perform its intended safety-related function. Properties for the component types listed in Table 3D.6-1 are discussed as examples.
3D-22 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Gaskets and O-Rings The capability of gaskets and O-rings to keep their shapes determines their ability to maintain pressure boundaries. When an O-ring or gasket loses its dimensional memory, it does not exert the necessary force on the confining surfaces. This could result in leakage. Compression set and elongation are good indicators of the dimensional memory of a material. They also reflect the extent of thermal aging and radiation-induced cross-linking. A compression set of 50 percent is chosen as a conservative end-of-life criterion even though leakage is unlikely to occur until the component takes a compression set of greater than 75 percent. When compression set data is not available for a gasket or O-ring, elongation at break is the material property evaluated because like compression set, it is an indication of dimensional memory and cross-link.
Diaphragms Diaphragms must remain flexible yet maintain their dimensional memory throughout the estimated mechanical cycles. Retention of elongation or tensile strength is evaluated for radiation and thermal aging.
Diaphragm Support Sheets The diaphragm support sheet prevents puncture and tearing of the diaphragm. It is not considered critical to the operability of diaphragm valves. The best indication of radiation damage and thermal aging to diaphragm support materials is retention of elongation.
Lubricants One of the primary functions of oils and greases is to maintain a thin film barrier between moving parts to reduce friction and wear. Irradiation reduces the capability of a lubricant to perform this function by decreasing viscosity in oils and increasing penetration in greases and finally converting lubricants to hard, brittle solids if exposure is severe.
Worm Gears Worm gears must be capable of transmitting forces without excessive deformation. Flexural strength is the material property chosen to evaluate radiation and thermal aging resistance of worm gears.
3D.6.2.3.4 Identification of Service Conditions Service conditions are identified for the normal and accident conditions. The general design of equipment permits exemption of environmental parameters such as pressure and humidity. Where critical parts are totally enclosed and not directly exposed to potentially harsh environments, the effects of humidity and chemical spray are not addressed. The degradation of mechanical equipment due to thermal and radiation aging is typically more severe than the possible degradation due to other environments. Since most mechanical equipment interfaces with process fluid, the effect of the fluid on the environmental conditions (temperature, radiation, and chemical) is considered.
3D.6.2.3.5 Description of Potential Failure Where applicable, potential failure modes are identified and assessed for the equipment.
Assessment of equipment aging mechanisms is essential to determine if aging has a significant effect on operability. This assessment provides confidence that significant aging mechanisms are unlikely to contribute to common-mode failures adverse to the safety-related function of equipment.
3D.6.2.3.6 Qualification Procedure The nonmetallic materials identified are evaluated to the normal and accident environmental parameters. The evaluation procedure includes the following steps:
3D-23 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Identification of the environmental effect on the material properties Performance of a thermal aging analysis Determination of the environmental effects on the equipment safety-related function.
These are detailed in the equipment qualification data package of Attachment A, Section 4.
3D.6.2.3.7 Performance Criteria The nonmetallic subcomponents of the mechanical equipment:
- a. are acceptable for the plant environment by exhibiting threshold radiation values above the postulated environmental condition, and
- b. are acceptable for the plant environment by exhibiting a maximum service temperature above the maximum postulated environmental, and
- c. does exhibit a service life sufficient to survive the accident duration, or
- d. instead of a, b, and c, are acceptable for the plant environment by analysis that demonstrates that the safety-related function of the component is not compromised.
The mechanical equipment is considered qualified if subcomponents important to the safety function are acceptable.
Nonmetallic subcomponents not meeting the criteria must have a replacement interval specified to maintain the qualification of the affected equipment. The replacement interval is determined by analysis and documented.
3D.6.2.3.8 Equipment Qualification Maintenance Requirements The maintenance requirements resulting from the activities described herein are identified. The qualification maintenance requirements are based on the following:
Qualification evaluation results (for example, periodic replacement of age-susceptible parts before the end of their qualified lives)
Equipment qualification-related maintenance activities derived from the qualification report(s)
Vendor recommended equipment qualification maintenance. Vendor recommended maintenance is included if it is required in order to maintain qualification.
3D.6.2.3.9 Qualification Documentation The qualification of the mechanical equipment to the postulated environments is documented in an auditable form. See Section 3D.7.
3D.6.3 Operating Experience Qualification by experience is not employed in the AP1000 equipment qualification program as a method of qualification.
3D-24 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR 3D.6.4 On-Going Qualification The AP1000 equipment qualification program may employ on-going qualification through special maintenance and surveillance activities. However, this method of qualification is not suitable as a sole means for qualifying equipment for design basis event conditions. On-going qualification, as a method, is used exclusively for safety-related equipment located in a mild environment area. Such use requires supplementary test, or analysis to address equipment operability and performance during and after a seismic design basis event.
Documentation requirements for qualification that includes on-going qualification as a method are developed to conform with NRC guidance provided in Regulatory Guide 1.33, Revision 2.
3D.6.5 Combinations of Methods Qualification by a combination of the preceding methods may be used under the AP1000 equipment qualification program.
3D.6.5.1 Use of Existing Qualification Reports Pre-existing qualification programs and documents are used only if the seismic test program satisfies the guidelines of IEEE 344-1987 and the environmental qualification program satisfies the guidelines of IEEE 323-1974.
Qualification test and analysis reports conforming to those IEEE Standards, but not specifically performed to the AP1000 equipment qualification program parameters, may be acceptable as qualification bases. In such cases, supplementary qualification efforts described in Subsections 3D.6.2, 3D.6.3, and 3D.6.4 of this appendix may be required to validate acceptability under the AP1000 equipment qualification program. Justifications are documented as analyses, and appear in equipment qualification data package, Section 4. (See Attachment A.)
3D.6.5.1.1 Aging Past qualification tests may provide sufficient basis to preclude new aging simulation testing as part of the AP1000 program. Also, simulation of both electrical and mechanical operational cycling may be waived where existing data demonstrates equipment durability greatly in the excess of the estimated number of operating cycles for Class 1E service. Application of past qualification and other tests is considered in the development of test plans and analysis procedures. The bases and justification is provided in qualification documentation for cases where applicable aging parameters are omitted from the test sequence.
3D.6.5.1.2 Seismic Seismic qualification generally relies on analyses and justification to verify the adequacy or applicability of generic testing to a particular installed configuration of similar equipment. Analytical methods and documentation guidelines of IEEE 344-1987, as supplemented by Regulatory Guide 1.100, Revision 2, address these needs. Attachment E of this appendix provides the AP1000 equipment qualification program requirements regarding seismic qualification.
3D.6.5.1.3 High-Energy Line Break Conditions Typically, existing qualification tests address conditions of high-energy line break environments occurring inside containment. These are used where it is demonstrated that the qualification envelops the applicable requirements.
3D-25 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR 3D.7 Documentation The AP1000 equipment qualification program documentation consists principally of four types of documents:
"Methodology for Qualifying AP1000 Safety-Related Electrical and Mechanical Equipment" is the generic program "parent" document. It describes the methods and practices employed in the AP1000 equipment qualification program.
Equipment qualification data packages are "daughter" documents to the methodology. Each is a summary of the qualification program for a specific equipment type (for example, a particular model or design series of a manufacturer, an as-provided system, or a family of equipment tested as a set). The equipment qualification data package defines the qualification program objectives, methods, applicable equipment performance specifications, and the qualification plan. It provides a summary of the results. Other engineering tests that are outside the scope of 10 CFR 50.49, such as Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) testing and ASME QME-1 qualification testing of power-operated active valves, may be included in the EQDPs for convenience, but are not addressed further in this Appendix.
Equipment Qualification Summary Reports (EQSRs) are the reports that present specific methods used during the qualification process and the results of that process.
Seismic analysis reports for seismic Category I and Category II mechanical equipment that is qualified by analysis only are not required to be documented in the EQDP format.
Environmental qualification of this equipment is not required due to non-existence of age-sensitive components as identified in Table 3D.6-1. The seismic qualification documentation is required to meet the documentation requirements of IEEE-344-1987 or applicable industry standard, which is the basis of qualification (i.e., ASME Section III). The seismic analysis documentation should include the purpose of the analysis, general equipment description, equipment mounting and interface requirements, analysis methods and codes, acceptance criteria, seismic loading conditions, assumptions, and conclusions.
The equipment qualification data packages are developed separate from the parent document.
Similarly, the equipment qualification summary reports are developed separate from the equipment qualification data packages. Equipment qualification summary reports used in the AP1000 equipment qualification program may include existing reports of testing or analysis that comply with the relevant aspects of this methodology. Information necessary to demonstrate the equipment's capability to perform its intended safety-related function(s) while exposed to normal, abnormal, accident, and post-accident environments is provided in or referenced by the equipment qualification data package.
If maintenance, refurbishment, or replacement of the equipment is necessary to provide confidence in the equipment's capability to perform its safety function, this information is also included in the equipment qualification data package. Data, in raw form, cited in the equipment qualification data packages or equipment qualification summary reports is available for audit for the life of the plant.
3D.7.1 Equipment Qualification Data Package Attachment A contains a general example of the equipment qualification data package format. To the extent practical, each equipment qualification data package consists of the following elements:
Section 1 - Specifications Section 2 - Qualification Program Section 3 - Qualification by Test Section 4 - Qualification by Analysis Section 5 - Qualification Program Conclusions 3D-26 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Some organization and numbering differences are adopted where appropriate to accommodate the unique attributes of the equipment and the specific qualification requirements and methods to demonstrate the objective of the qualification program. The following paragraphs discuss the general content contained in the equipment qualification data packages.
3D.7.2 Specifications Section 1 of Attachment A contains the performance specification of the equipment. This specification establishes the necessary parameters for which qualification is demonstrated. The basic criterion for qualification is that the safety-related functional requirements defined in Section 1 are successfully demonstrated, with margin, under the specified environmental conditions.
The following sections define the bases on which the parameters contained in Section 1 are selected.
3D.7.2.1 Equipment Identification Equipment is identified in Section 1.1 of Attachment A by manufacturer, model or model series, and reference to other documents describing or depicting its construction, configuration, and modifications that are uniquely necessary after manufacture to its application in the AP1000 plant design. Model series (for example, a limit switch design family) and other pertinent details on items making up the equipment type qualified are compiled as a table and referenced from this section.
3D.7.2.2 Installation Requirements So that the qualification represents the in-plant condition, the method of installation, as specified in Section 1.2 of Attachment A, is in accordance with the supplier's installation instructions. Differences unique to safety-related applications in the AP1000 design are included, with appropriate reference to drawings, technical manual supplements, or mandatory modification packages.
3D.7.2.3 Electrical Requirements The pertinent electrical requirements are specified (for example, voltage, frequency, load) in this section. Also included is any variation in the defined parameters for which the equipment is to perform its specified functions (Section 1.3 of Attachment A).
3D.7.2.4 Auxiliary Devices Sometimes the equipment qualified relies upon the operation of auxiliary devices in order to perform the specified safety-related functions. These devices are identified in Section 1.4 of Attachment A.
Auxiliary devices include items such as electrical conductor seal assemblies that, in service, become part of the qualified equipment's pressure boundary. The applicable equipment qualification data package for the auxiliary device(s) is specified, if known.
3D.7.2.5 Preventive Maintenance Preventive maintenance (Section 1.5 of Attachment A) to be performed includes maintenance or periodic activities assumed as part of the qualification program or necessary to support qualification.
Only those activities that are required in order to support qualification or the qualified life are specified. The manufacturer's recommended maintenance activities are considered to determine that there is no adverse impact to qualification or the maintenance of qualified life. Likewise, manufacturer's recommendations for maintenance, replacement, or surveillance activities necessary to support operability are identified, or reference is made to the appropriate technical manual or supplements.
3D-27 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR "None" means that maintenance is not essential to qualification or the qualified life of the equipment.
However, this should not preclude development of a preventive maintenance program designed to enhance equipment performance and to identify unanticipated equipment degradation as long as such a program does not compromise the qualification status of the equipment. Surveillance activities may also be considered to support a basis for and a possible extension of the qualified life.
3D.7.2.6 Safety Functions Section 1.6 of Attachment A addresses the known safety functions of the equipment, including summarizing the basis for the aspects of the safety functions that are relevant to demonstrating the equipments qualification. This section should address the plant conditions under which the safety function is performed, the transients or accidents required for equipment performance, a characterization of the equipment function (e.g., how the safety function is performed, whether the equipment performs an active or passive function, etc.), and other information relevant to the qualification, as applicable.
3D.7.2.7 Performance Requirements Section 1.7 of Attachment A contains a tabulation of performance requirements for each safety-related function for which the equipment is qualified. Several such sections or tables may be necessary when the equipment is qualified for applications where the performance requirements vary. Performance requirements are stated regarding the normal and abnormal environmental conditions applicable at the location where the equipment is installed. Similarly, each design basis event and the subsequent post-event period is included in the table.
Margin is not included in the performance requirements except by conservatism in their determination.
3D.7.2.8 Environmental Conditions Within each set of performance requirements, a set of environmental parameters is specified in Section 1.8 of Attachment A, also in tabular form. Parameters are based on the equipment location and function and include those addressed in other sections of this appendix.
Margin is not included in the environmental parameters except by conservatism in their determination. The objective is to provide the baseline reference onto which margin is added.
3D.7.3 Qualification Program An overview of the qualification program and its objective is presented in narrative form in Section 2.
Attachment A includes a table to be completed as a graphic reference. As it is assumed that tests, analyses, or some combination of the two are the principal methods of qualification, columns are included for each. Other methods, when used, are summarized in brief notes appended to the table.
References to reports of testing, analysis, or other information considered in support of the qualification program are compiled in Section 2 of Attachment A. This includes any technical manuals, drawings, and supporting material cited or referenced by text throughout the equipment qualification data package.
3D.7.4 Qualification by Test Qualification by test is selected as the primary method of qualification for complex equipment not readily amenable to analysis or for equipment required to perform a safety-related function in a high-energy line break environment. The proposed test plan is identified in Section 3 of Attachment A.
3D-28 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Where supportive analysis is claimed as an integral part of the qualification program, cross reference is provided to Attachment A, Section 4 for those aspects of the qualification not covered by the test plan. The following sections establish the basis on which the information specified in Section 3 is selected.
3D.7.4.1 Specimen Description The equipment qualified is identified, including the baseline design document number/reference, where applicable, the equipment type, manufacturer and model number, in Section 3.1 of Attachment A. When testing a model series (or equipment families), the representative items tested are clearly identified. The basis of their representation should be included.
Section 3.1 is primarily intended to identify test specimens used in a test supporting the qualification program. But it also discusses the specimens considered for other methods used in the qualification program.
3D.7.4.2 Number Tested The test program is based upon selectively testing a representative number of components according to type, size, or other appropriate classification, on a prototype basis. The number of items of equipment representative of the equipment type that are tested is defined in Section 3.2 of Attachment A.
3D.7.4.3 Mounting The method of mounting the equipment for the test is identified in Section 3.3 of Attachment A. The in-plant installation requirements, as specified by the supplier under Section 1.2 of Attachment A, are fully represented.
3D.7.4.4 Connections The equipment connections necessary to demonstrate safety-related functional operability during testing are identified in Section 3.4 of Attachment A. This includes items that are part of the installed configuration, but are not part of the test apparatus.
Particularly important are items that are included by "practice of good workmanship," such as pipe thread sealant. Another example is the use of electrical connection sealing materials. Where these items are included in the testing, they become factors in the performance of the equipment, especially under aggressive or adverse environmental conditions. Their thermal degradation and sensitivity to irradiation and chemistry environments are considered in the qualification program, both for impact to equipment performance under harsh conditions and for their contribution to equipment qualified life.
3D.7.4.5 Test Sequence The preferred test sequence specified in Attachment A, Section 3.5 is the one recommended by IEEE 323-1974. The qualification test sequence used is specified in Section 3.6 of Attachment A.
Justification for departures or additions to the preferred test sequence are included. Also, any portion of the test sequence that is supplemented by analysis or other methods is identified for completeness.
3D-29 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR 3D.7.4.6 Simulated Service Conditions The service conditions simulated by the test plan are identified in Attachment A, Section 3.7. In general, the parameters employed are selected to be equal to (normal and abnormal) or have margin (accident and post-accident) with respect to the specified service conditions of Attachment A, Section 1.8. Criteria for margin is detailed in Subsection 3D.4.8.
3D.7.4.7 Measured Variables The parameters measured during the specified test sequence in order to demonstrate qualification for the performance specification (Attachment A, Section 1) are individually listed in Section 3.8 of Attachment A. This section is formatted to include parameters relevant to the test environment and the electrical and mechanical characteristics of equipment operation. Other characteristics unique to a particular test or equipment type are included, when applicable.
3D.7.4.8 Type Test Summary Section 3.9 of Attachment A provides a narrative summary of the qualification tests and results. The applicable test reports are provided as references in Attachment A, Section 2. Test data is available for audit throughout the operation of the plant.
Each test report referenced by the equipment qualification data package should contain information cited in the preceding section, as well as the following:
The test facility, location, and a description of the test equipment used. Monitoring equipment should have current calibration traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST).
Test setup and specimen installation details.
Description of the mounting conditions simulated during the test program and any difference between them and the mounting details shown on the equipment drawings, with qualification of any differences found.
Description of limitations on the use and mounting of the qualified equipment found as a result of the qualification test program.
Description of the test method and the justification that the method meets the specification test requirements.
Description of operational settings used to demonstrate functional operability and any limitation imposed on them.
Test records (for example, test response spectra, time history; accident transient parameters - temperature, pressure). This includes performance and operability test results, inspection results, and the monitored test and specimen and calibration records of instruments used.
Record of compliance of test results with the seismic qualification criteria.
Description of anomalies found during the test program, and their resolution(s).
Potential aging mechanisms resulting from significant in-service thermal, electrical, mechanical, radiation, and vibration sources are identified in Section 3.9 of Attachment A. When aging is 3D-30 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR addressed as part of the test sequence, the method employed for aging the equipment is indicated and is chosen to conservatively simulate the potential aging effects resulting from the operating cycles and environmental conditions specified in Attachment A, Section 1. The methods employed to address each of the potential aging mechanisms are discussed.
3D.7.5 Qualification by Analysis Qualification by this methodology does not rely solely on analyses. Generally, analysis is permitted to support qualification testing or to establish that testing of other sufficiently similar equipment can be cited to establish or extend the qualification of equipment covered by the equipment qualification data package.
Section 4 of Attachment A is formatted to conform with the recommendations of IEEE 323-1974.
Each subsection addresses a particular analysis if more than one is performed to support qualification. Not all subsections identified in the sample format apply to any particular analysis.
Documentation of analyses demonstrating or supporting seismic qualification conforms with the guidelines of Attachment E and the recommendations of IEEE 344-1987.
3D.7.6 Qualification by Experience This method of qualification is not used.
3D.7.7 Qualification Program Conclusions Section 5 of Attachment A summarizes the conclusions of the qualification program, including and addressing methods employed and conditions upon which qualification of the equipment is based.
Details regarding each aspect of simulated aging are addressed distinctly, with conclusions as to the life-limiting aspects clearly stated.
Conclusions for each design basis event are summarized. Generally, these are combined as either design basis event seismic and design basis event environmental.
3D.7.8 Combined License Information Not used.
3D.8 References
- 1. IEEE-323-1974, "IEEE Standard for Qualifying Class 1E Equipment for Nuclear Power Generating Stations."
- 2. IEEE-344-1987, "IEEE Recommended Practice for Seismic Qualification of Class 1E Equipment for Nuclear Power Generating Stations."
- 3. IEEE-627-1980, "IEEE Standard for Design Qualification of Safety System Equipment Used in Nuclear Power Generating Stations."
- 4. NUREG/CR-3156, "A Survey of the State-of-the-Art in Aging of Electronics with Application to Nuclear Plant Instrumentation."
- 5. EPRI NP-1558, Project 890-1, "A Review of Equipment Aging Theory and Technology."
- 6. NUREG/CR 2156, "Radiation Thermal Degradation of PE and PVC: Mechanism of Synergism and Dose Rate Effects," Clough and Gillen, June 1981.
3D-31 Revision 10
- 7. NUREG/CR 2157, "Occurrence and Implication of Radiation Dose Rate Effects for Material Aging Studies," Clough and Gillen, June 1981.
- 8. NUREG-1465, "Accident Source Terms for Light-Water Nuclear Power Plants - Final Report," L. Soffer, et al., February 1995.
- 9. Regulatory Guide 1.183, Alternative Radiological Source Terms for Evaluating Design Basis Accidents at Nuclear Power Reactors, July 2000.
Note: See Subsection 3D.4.1.1 for other IEEE references.
3D-32 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3D.4-1 Typical Mild Environment Parameter Limits Parameter Limit Notes Temperature 120°F Pressure Atmospheric (Nominal)
Humidity 30 - 65% (Typical) 95% (Abnormal)
Radiation 104 rads gamma 103 rads gamma (IC electronics and microprocessors)
Chemistry None Submergence None 3D-33 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3D.4-2 Equipment Post-Accident Operability Times Equipment Required Post-Accident Operability Equipment necessary to perform trip 5 minutes (Envelops trip time requirements) functions Equipment located outside containment, 2 weeks is accessible, and can be repaired, replaced, or recalibrated Equipment located inside containment 4 months (This number is based on an acceptable that is inaccessible and is required for amount of time to be repaired, replaced, or post-accident monitoring recalibrated, or for an equivalent indication to be obtained.)
Equipment located inside containment, is 1 year (The required post-accident operability time inaccessible, or cannot be repaired, during submergence may be shorter if the replaced, recalibrated or equivalent consequences of equipment failure after indication cannot be obtained submergence are deemed acceptable and/or the monitored component is administratively controlled.)
Equipment in a location that will have a Various (Specific as to function, maximum of 1 year) mild environment following an accident or equipment that does not provide information for a Type A, B, or C primary post-accident monitoring parameter 3D-34 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3D.4-3 AP1000 EQ Program Margin Requirements Required Condition Parameter Margin Notes NORMAL: Aging +10% +10% time margin, +10% radiation and/or selection of conservative test parameters. Comply with guidance of Subsection 3D.4.8.2 ABNORMAL: Temperature/ Margin is in "time" at abnormal test extremes.
Humidity Pressure None Nominally atmospheric.
Radiation +10% Include in aging doses, if applicable.
Voltage & +/- 10% Simulated during temperature/humidity test.
Frequency ACCIDENT: Transient Temperature (+15°F) and pressure (+10 psig peak)
Temperature and margins added to transient profile.
Pressure Chemical effects +10% Bounding concentration of chemical additives +10%.
Containment sump chemistry conditions reflect change over time from acidic to alkaline. (See Subsection 3D.4.8.5)
Radiation +10% Added to calculated total integrated dose.
Submergence Note 1 Generally, precluded by design.
Seismic/ +10% Of acceleration at equipment mounting point for either Vibration SSE or line-mounted equipment vibration. (See Subsection 3D.4.8.4.)
Post-accident +10% In time demonstrated via Arrhenius time/temperature Aging relationship calculation.
Note:
- 1. Margin in submergence conditions is achieved by increases in temperature (+15°F), pressure (+10%), and chemistry.
3D-35 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3D.5-1 (Sheet 1 of 3)
Normal Operating Environments (Notes 1 and 2)
Location/Parameter Normal Range Notes Zone 1 - Containment (Room numbers: 11000 through 11999)
Temperature 50 - 120°F (All rooms except 11105 and 11205) 50 - 135°F (Rooms 11105 and 11205)
Pressure -0.2 - +1.0 psig Humidity 0 - 100%
Radiation see Table 3D.5-2 Chemistry None Zone 2 - Auxiliary Building - Non-Radiological - I&C, DC Equipment, RCP Switchgear & Battery rooms, etc.
(Room numbers: 12101, 12102, 12103, 12104, 12105, 12111, 12112, 12113, 12201, 12202, 12203, 12204, 12205, 12207, 12211, 12212, 12213, 12300, 12301, 12302, 12303, 12304, 12305, 12311, 12312, 12313, 12405, 12411, 12412, 12501, Stairwell S05, and 12505)
Temperature 67 - 77°F (All rooms except 12405, 12501, and 12505) 50 - 85°F (Rooms 12405, 12501, Stairwell S05, and 12505)
Pressure Slightly positive to slightly negative Humidity 10 - 60%
Radiation <103 rads gamma Chemistry None Zone 3 - Auxiliary Building - Non-Radiological - Main Control Room (Room number: 12400, 12401)
Temperature 67 - 78°F Pressure Slightly positive Humidity 25 - 60%
Radiation <103 rads gamma Chemistry None Zone 4 - Auxiliary Building - Non-Radiological - Accessible (Room numbers: 12321, 12421, 12422, 12423)
Temperature 50 - 85°F (Rooms 12321, 12421) 50 - 105°F (Rooms 12422, 12423)
Pressure Slightly positive Humidity 10 - 60%
Radiation <103 rads gamma Chemistry None 3D-36 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3D.5-1 (Sheet 2 of 3)
Normal Operating Environments (Notes 1 and 2)
Location/Parameter Normal Range Notes Zone 5 - Auxiliary Building - Non-Radiological - MSIV Compartments (Room numbers: 12404, 12406, 12504, 12506)
Temperature 50 - 130°F Pressure Atmospheric Humidity 10 - 100%
Radiation <104 rads gamma Chemistry None Zone 6 - Auxiliary Building - Radiological - Inaccessible (Room numbers: 12154, 12158, 12162, 12163, 12166, 12167, 12171, 12172, 12254, 12255, 12256, 12258, 12262, 12264, 12265, 12354, 12362, 12363, 12365, 12371, 12372, 12373, 12374, 12454, 12462, 12463)
Temperature 50 - 130°F Pressure Slightly negative to atmospheric Humidity 10 - 100%
Radiation See Table 3D.5-2 Chemistry None Zone 7 - Auxiliary Building - Radiological - Accessible (Room numbers: 12151, 12152, 12153, 12155, 12156, 12161, 12168, 12169, 12241, 12242, 12244, 12251, 12252, 12261, 12268, 12271, 12272, 12273, 12274, 12275, 12341, 12343, 12344, 12345, 12351, 12352, 12361, 12451, 12452, 12461, 12553, 12554, 12555, 12556, 12561, 12651)
Temperature 50 - 104°F (All rooms except 12555) 60 - 80°F (Room 12555)
Pressure Slightly negative Humidity 10 - 100%
Radiation See Table 3D.5-2 Chemistry None Zone 8 - Turbine Building (Room numbers: 20300 through 20799)
Temperature 50 - 105°F Pressure Atmospheric Humidity 10 - 100%
Radiation <103 rads gamma Chemistry None 3D-37 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3D.5-1 (Sheet 3 of 3)
Normal Operating Environments (Notes 1 and 2)
Location/Parameter Normal Range Notes Zone 9 - Auxiliary Building - PCS Valve Room and Upper Annulus (Room number: 12541, 12701)
Temperature 70 - 120°F (Room 12701) 115°F (Room 12541)
Pressure Atmospheric Humidity 10 - 100%
Radiation See Table 3D.5-2 Chemistry None Zone 10 - Auxiliary Building - Non-Radiological - Valve/Piping Penetration Room with SG Blowdown (Room number: 12306)
Temperature 50 - 105°F Pressure Slightly positive Humidity 10 - 60%
Radiation <103 rads gamma Chemistry None Zone 11 - Auxiliary Building - Radiological - Fuel Handling Area (Room numbers: 12472, 12562, 12563, 12564)
Temperature 50 - 105°F Pressure Slightly negative Humidity 10 - 100%
Radiation See Table 3D.5-2 Chemistry None Notes:
- 1. Room numbers - see Section 1.2, General Arrangement drawings.
- 2. Relative humidity is not controlled except in the main control room.
3D-38 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3D.5-2 60-Year Normal Operating Doses Gamma Dose Rate 60-Year Gamma Dose Location (Rad air hour) (Rads air)
Inside Containment:
RCS Pipe - Center 1.9x103 1.0x109 RCS Pipe - ID 1.1x103 5.7x108 RCS Pipe - OD (contact) 7.8x101 4.1x107 RCS Pipe - General Area(b) 4.0x101 2.1x107 Outside CA01 Excluding Rooms 11104 and <0.45 <2.4x105 11204 Adjacent to Reactor Vessel Wall 3.6x104 1.9x1010(a)
Spent Resin and Spent Fuel Handling Areas(c) -- <1x109 IRWST 4.2x101 2.2x107 Outside Containment:
Penetration Area -- <2x107 Pump Cubicles -- <2x107 Radioactive Waste Area -- <2x107 Radwaste Tank Cubicles -- <5x107 Other General Areas Not Under Radiation -- <1x104 Control Spent Resin and Spent Fuel Handling Areas(c) -- <1x109 Notes:
- a. 60-year neutron fluence for E>1 MeV is 4.6x1018 n/cm2
- c. Total gamma dose outside of tanks 3D-39 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3D.5-3 Abnormal Operating Environments Inside Containment Conditions/Parameter Abnormal Extreme Duration Notes Group 1 (150°F) Abnormal Events Temperature 150°F 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> Note 1 Pressure 2 psig 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> Note 1 Humidity 100% 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> Note 1 Radiation Same as normal Chemistry None Submergence None Group 2 (250°F) Abnormal Events Temperature 250°F 30 days Note 1 Pressure 18 psig 30 days Note 1 Humidity 100% 30 days Note 1 Radiation Note 2 Chemistry None Submergence None Notes:
- 1. Parameter value is not maximum for full duration.
- 2. Minor increase over normal radiation conditions expected.
3D-40 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3D.5-4 (Sheet 1 of 3)
Abnormal Operating Environments Outside Containment Conditions/Parameter Abnormal Extreme Duration Notes Zone 2 Temperature (Rooms 12101, 120°F max 7 days Note 3 12102, 12103, 12104, 12105, 12202, 12204)
Temperature (Rooms 12113, 120°F max 7 days Note 3 12201, 12203, 12205, 12207, 12212, 12301, 12302, 12303, 12304, 12305, 12312, 12313, 12411, 12412)
Temperature (Rooms 12111, 120°F max 7 days 12112, 12211, 12213, 12300, 12311)
Temperature (Rooms 12405, 120°F max 7 days 12501, 12505, Stairwell S05)
Pressure Atmospheric Humidity 40 - 95% Note 2 Radiation Same as normal Chemistry/Submergence None Zone 3 Temperature Figure 3D.5-1 (Sheet 1) 7 days Pressure Atmospheric Note 1 Humidity 5 - 95% Note 2 Radiation Same as normal Chemistry/Submergence None Zone 4 Temperature 120°F max 10x4 hrs Pressure Slightly positive Humidity Same as normal Radiation Same as normal Chemistry/Submergence None Zone 5 Temperature 150°F max 10x4 hrs Pressure Atmospheric Humidity Same as normal Radiation Same as normal Chemistry/Submergence None Piping Rupture Note 6 Submergence and Spray 12504, 12506 0" 2 weeks Notes 5, 7, 8 12404, 12406 36" 3D-41 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3D.5-4 (Sheet 2 of 3)
Abnormal Operating Environments Outside Containment Conditions/Parameter Abnormal Extreme Duration Notes Zone 6 Temperature 150°F max (Room 12256) 10x4 hrs 140°F max (Other Rooms)
Pressure Atmospheric Humidity Same as normal Radiation Same as normal Chemistry/Submergence None Pipe Rupture Note 6 Submergence and Spray 12259 3" 2 weeks Notes 5, 7, 8 12255 36" 12258 132" Submergence 12262 36" 2 weeks Notes 7, 8 12254 60" 12158 76.5" 12154, 12162, 12163, 168" 12171, 12172 12264 249" 12265 288" Zone 7 Temperature 200°F max (Rooms 12241, 12341, 10x4 hrs 12343, 12344, 12345) 155°F max (Room 12252) 150°F max (Rooms 12451, 12554) 130°F max (Room 12561) 114°F max (Other Rooms)
Pressure Slightly negative Humidity Same as normal Radiation Same as normal Chemistry/Submergence None Pipe Rupture Note 6 Submergence and Spray 12241, 12244 36" 2 weeks Notes 5, 7, 8 Submergence 12452 30" 2 weeks Notes 7, 8 12242, 12251, 12252, 36" 12261, 12271, 12272, 12273, 12274, 12275 12268 54" 12168 90" 12341 93" 12151, 12153, 12155 168" 12156 12169 173.5" 12152, 12161 180" 3D-42 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3D.5-4 (Sheet 3 of 3)
Abnormal Operating Environments Outside Containment Conditions/Parameter Abnormal Extreme Duration Notes Zones 8 Temperature Same as normal Pressure Same as normal Humidity Same as normal Radiation Same as normal Chemistry/Submergence None Zone 9 Temperature (Room 12701) 40 to 120°F 3 days Temperature (Room 12541) -40 to 150°F Pressure Same as normal Humidity Same as normal Radiation Same as normal Chemistry/Submergence None Zone 10 Temperature 140°F max 10x4 hrs Pressure Same as normal Humidity Same as normal Radiation Same as normal Chemistry/Submergence None Pipe Rupture Note 6 Submergence and Spray 12306 36" 2 weeks Notes 5, 7, 8 Zone 11 Temperature 212°F max 7 days Pressure Atmospheric Note 4 Humidity 100%
Radiation Same as normal Chemistry/Submergence None Notes:
- 1. Main control room air pressure is maintained above a nominal value of atmospheric during accident conditions to prevent radioactive contaminant entry.
- 2. Figure 3D.5-1 Sheets 1 and 2 have two curves post-72 hours. The high curve represents the introduction of outside air that is high temperature, low humidity. The low curve represents the introduction of outside air that is low temperature, high humidity.
The EQ Programs will include both of these extremes.
- 3. Test environments resulting from rooms with equipment supplied by 24- and 72-hour batteries are shown on Figure 3D.5-1, Sheet 2, for the dc equipment rooms 12203 and 12207 and for the I&C rooms 12302 and 12304. The 24-hour battery is disconnected at 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br />. The 72-hour battery is not disconnected. Environments resulting from rooms with equipment supplied by 24-hour batteries only, - that is, dc equipment rooms 12201 and 12205 and I&C rooms 12301 and 12305 - are enveloped by the environments shown on Figure 3D.5-1, Sheet 2. The environments shown on Figure 3D.5-1, Sheet 2 also apply to the dc equipment rooms containing batteries (i.e., the IDS battery rooms 12101, 12102, 12103, 12104, 12105, 12202 and 12204).
- 4. A relief panel is designed to open when the fuel handling area temperature exceeds 165°F.
- 5. This room may also be subjected to spray or wetting above the submergence elevation as a result of pipe ruptures.
- 6. Equipment in these areas is addressed using the criteria outlined in Subsection 3.11.1.2.
- 7. Submergence in this table is specified for various rooms, and the distances tabulated represent the bounding flood height above the floor elevation in a given zone or room.
- 8. Spray and submergence as applicable, based upon the methods described in Subsection 3.4.1 and Section 3.6. Equipment affected by spray or submergence required to undergo qualification is reflected in the requirements contained in Table 3.11-1.
3D-43 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3D.5-5 Accident Environments (See Table 3D.5-1 for environmental zones)
Zone 1 - Inside Containment Temperature and pressure See Figure 3D.5-8 for most locations. Other locations may use a Submergence as applicable up to elevation 110'-6" localized equivalent of this figure.
Radiation See Figures 3D.5-2 through 3D.5-5.
Zones 2, 4 - Outside Containment Temperature (Zone 2) Maximum: Same as Abnormal. See Table 3D.5-4.
Rooms 12111, 12112, 12211, 12213, 12300, 12311 Minimum: 60°F Temperature (Zone 4) Same as Abnormal. See Table 3D.5-4.
Pressure Same as Abnormal. See Table 3D.5-4.
Radiation TID 1 year 1E+04 Rads maximum.
Zones 3, 8 - Outside Containment Temperature and pressure Same as Abnormal. See Table 3D.5-4.
Radiation TID 1 year 1E+03 Rads maximum.
Zone 5 - Outside Containment - MSIV Compartments Temperature See Figure 3D.5-9.
Radiation TID 1 year 3E+05 Rads maximum.
See also Figures 3D.5-4 and 3D.5-5.
Zones 6, 11 - Outside Containment Temperature (Zone 6) Same as Abnormal. See Table 3D.5-4.
Temperature (Zone 11) Maximum: Same as Abnormal. See Table 3D.5-4.
Minimum: 40°F Pressure Same as Abnormal. See Table 3D.5-4.
Radiation Same as Abnormal. See Table 3D.5-4.
Zone 7 - Outside Containment Temperature Rooms 12241, 12341, 12343, 12344, and 12345 200°F max Rooms 12156, 12244 135°F max Other Rooms Same as Abnormal with exceptions identified below. See Table 3D.5-4.
Room 12555 Minimum: 50°F Room 12151 Maximum: 120°F Pressure Same as Abnormal. See Table 3D.5-4.
Radiation TID 1 year 2E+07 Rads maximum.
Zone 9 - Outside Containment Pressure Same as Abnormal. See Table 3D.5-4.
Temperature Room 12541 180°F Room 12701 40 - 125°F Radiation TID 1 year 6E+06 Rads maximum.
Zone 10 - Outside Containment Temperature See Figure 3D.5-9.
Radiation See Figures 3D.5-4 and 3D.5-5.
3D-44 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3D.6-1 Mechanical Equipment Components Requiring Environmental Qualification Component Material Property Gaskets Compression set/elongation O-rings Compression set/elongation Diaphragms Elongation/tensile strength Diaphragm support sheets Tensile strength/elongation Lubricant Viscosity/penetration Worm gear Flexural strength 3D-45 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR MAIN CONTROL ROOM 110 105 TIME: 72 TO 168 HRS RELATIVE HUMIDITY: 35%
100 95 90 TIME: 0 TO 72 HRS RELATIVE HUMIDITY: 60%
85 TEMPERATURE (F) 80 TIME: 72 TO 168 HRS RELATIVE HUMIDITY: 95%
75 70 TIME: -12 TO 0 HRS RELATIVE HUMIDITY: 60%
65 60
-12 12 36 60 84 108 132 156 TIME (HR)
Figure 3D.5-1 (Sheet 1 of 3)
Typical Abnormal Environmental Test Profile:
Main Control Room 3D-46 Revision 10
, &DQG'&(TXLSPHQW5RRPV
7HPSHUDWXUH )
7LPH WRKUV
7LPH WRKUV 5HODWLYH+XPLGW\
5HODWLYH+XPLGW\
7LPH WRKUV 7LPH WRKUV 5HODWLYH+XPLGW\ 5HODWLYH+XPLGW\
7LPH KU Figure 3D.5-1 (Sheet 2 of 3)
Typical Abnormal Environmental Test Profile:
I&C and DC Equipment Rooms 3D-47 Revision 10
1RPLQDO9 9PD[
1RPLQDO9 9PLQ 9ROWDJH
3DUDPHWHU([WUHPHV
1RPLQDOI IPD[
1RPLQDOI IPLQ
)UHTXHQF\
7LPH KUV Figure 3D.5-1 (Sheet 3 of 3)
Typical Abnormal Environmental Test Profile:
Voltage and Frequency Variations 3D-48 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Figure 3D.5-2 Gamma Dose and Dose Rate Inside Containment After a LOCA 3D-49 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Figure 3D.5-3 Beta Dose and Dose Rate Inside Containment After a LOCA 3D-50 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Figure 3D.5-4 Gamma Dose and Dose Rate Inside Containment After a Steam Line Break 3D-51 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Figure 3D.5-5 Beta Dose and Dose Rate Inside Containment After a Steam Line Break 3D-52 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Figures 3D.5-6-3D.5-7 Not Used 3D-53 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Figure 3D.5-8 (Sheet 1 of 2)
Typical Combined LOCA/SLB/FLB EQ Design Envelope for Inside Containment Temperature(1)
Note:
- 1. Refer to Section 6.2 for detailed post-accident containment response. This figure represents only the Environmental Qualification profile, which bounds the actual containment response.
3D-54 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Figure 3D.5-8 (Sheet 2 of 2)
Typical Combined LOCA/SLB/FLB EQ Design Envelope for Inside Containment Pressure(1)
Note:
- 1. Refer to Section 6.2 for detailed post-accident containment response. This figure represents only the Environmental Qualification profile, which bounds the actual containment response.
3D-55 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR 06,9&RPSDUWPHQWDQG9DOYH5RRP5HVSRQVHWR06/% 6KRUW7HUP
7HPSHUDWXUH )
7LPH VHFRQGV 06,9&RPSDUWPHQW 9DOYH5RRP Figure 3D.5-9 (Sheet 1 of 2)
MSIV Compartment Response to MSLB (Short Term) 3D-56 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR 06,9&RPSDUWPHQWDQG9DOYH5RRP5HVSRQVHWR06/% /RQJ7HUP
7HPSHUDWXUH )
7LPH KRXUV Figure 3D.5-9 (Sheet 2 of 2)
MSIV Compartment Response to MSLB (Long Term) 3D-57 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR ATTACHMENT A SAMPLE EQUIPMENT QUALIFICATION DATA PACKAGE (EQDP)
To the extent practical, the equipment qualification data packages consist of the following elements:
Section 1 - Specifications Section 2 - Qualification Program Section 3 - Qualification by Test Section 4 - Qualification by Analysis Section 5 - Qualification Program Conclusions 3D-58 Revision 10
Rev. _______
{date issued}
EQUIPMENT QUALIFICATION DATA PACKAGE Equipment __________________________________________
Manufacturer __________________________________________
Model __________________________________________
Application __________________________________________
Environment: ____ Harsh ____ Mild Prepared by: __________________________________________
{name}
Reviewed by: __________________________________________
{name}
Approved by: __________________________________________
{name}
This document provides or summarizes the seismic and environmental qualification of the equipment identified above in accordance with the AP1000 EQ Program Methodology.
3D-59 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR 1 SPECIFICATIONS 1.1 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION: {create table(s) for details if a model series is to be qualified.}
Manufacturer ___________________________________
Model ___________________________________
Technical Manual ___________________________________
Drawings ___________________________________
Specification No. ___________________________________
Modifications ___________________________________
1.2 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS: {Cite vendor technical manual; details of mounting used for seismic test specimen(s);
include any special requirements unique to Class 1E service}
1.3 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
1.3.1 Voltage
1.3.2 Frequency
__________ {if powered by AC}
1.3.3 Load: __________ {as applicable}
1.3.4 Other
__________ {identify and address as needed}
1.4 AUXILIARY DEVICES: {These are devices required to be interfaced with the subject equipment to provide qualification or operability but not specifically included or addressed in this document.}
1.5 PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE: {Identify manufacturer recommended maintenance activities required as part of the qualification program. Identify activities that are required to support qualification or the qualified life. "None" shall mean that maintenance is not essential to qualification or the qualified life. The following statement may be used in cases where qualification is not contingent upon maintenance or surveillance activities:
"No preventive maintenance is required to support the equipment qualified life. This does not preclude development of a preventive maintenance program designed to enhance equipment performance and identify unanticipated equipment degradation as long as this program does not compromise the qualification status of the equipment. Surveillance activities may also be considered to support the basis for, and a possible extension, of the qualified life."}
1.6 SAFETY FUNCTIONS
{Specify known safety functions for which qualification is intended to apply.}
1.7 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS(a) for: {RCS Loop RTDs}
Containment DBE(b) Conditions Normal Abnormal Test Parameter Conditions Conditions Abnormal Seismic LOCA 1.7.1 Time requirement 1.7.2 Performance 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS(a) for Same Function 1.8.1 Temperature (°F) 1.8.2 Pressure (psig) 1.8.3 Humidity (%RH) 1.8.4 Radiation (Rads) 3D-60 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR 1.8.5 Chemicals 1.8.6 Vibration 1.8.7 Acceleration (g)
Notes: a: Test margin is not included in the parameters of this section.
b: DBE is the Design Basis Event.
{If more than one set of performance requirements and/or associated environmental conditions are to be specified, replicate these sections in pairs as "1.8 Performance ..." and "1.9 Environment ...", etc.}
3D-61 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR 2 QUALIFICATION PROGRAM 2.1 PROGRAM OBJECTIVE The objective of this qualification program is to demonstrate, employing the recommended practices of Regulatory Guides 1.89 and 1.100 and IEEE 323-1974, 344-1987, {cite others as applicable} capability of the {Equipment description} to perform its/their safety related function(s) described in EQDP Section 1.7 while exposed to the applicable conditions and events defined in EQDP Section 1.8.
{Narrative should introduce an outline of the program plan. Table below to be completed as graphic reference. Table shall not be abbreviated; items must appear and be addressed by direct response.}
2.2 REFERENCES
{List test report(s) and information sources cited in this document}
3D-62 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Qualification Method(s)
CONDITION TEST ANALYSIS OTHER Aging:
Thermal Radiation Vibrational Operational Cycling Electrical Mechanical Abnormal Environment Inadvertent ADS Actuation Seismic LOCA HELB Inside Containment HELB Outside Containment Post-accident Aging NOTES:
{All spaces above to be noted as "Yes," "No," or "Note #." Notes will be appended to the table. Notes will also include items "Not Applicable" with terse explanation and/or forwarding reference.}
3D-63 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR 3 QUALIFICATION BY TEST (TEST PLAN AND
SUMMARY
)
3.1 SPECIMEN DESCRIPTION
{Identify the item or items to be tested}
3.2 NUMBER TESTED
{If more than one type is to be tested, identify how many of each. Subsequent Sections should clarify specifics for each.}
3.3 MOUNTING
{Identify specific seismic mounting details, referencing applicable drawings, instructions, documents. Note existence of differences from manufacturer recommendations}
3.4 CONNECTIONS
{Identify interfaces, both electrical and mechanical, identify any connectors or sealing assemblies used which are not provided with the equipment, or are not covered by this qualification.
3.5 TEST SEQUENCE PREFERRED This section identifies the preferred test sequences as specified in IEEE 323-1974.
3.5.1 Inspection of Test Item 3.5.2 Operation (Normal Condition) 3.5.3 Operation (Performance Specifications Extremes: Section 1) 3.5.4 Simulated Aging 3.5.5 Vibration/Seismic 3.5.6 Operation (Simulated High Energy Line Break Conditions) 3.5.7 Operation (Simulated Post-HELB Conditions) 3.5.8 Inspection 3.6 TEST SEQUENCE ACTUAL This section identifies the actual test sequence which constitutes the qualification program for this equipment. A justification for anything other than the preferred sequence is provided.
Test Sequence (from Section 3.5):
{List and explain; provide forwarding references to subsequent subsections as necessary}
3D-64 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR 3.7 SERVICE CONDITIONS TO BE SIMULATED BY TEST(1)
Normal Abnormal Seismic HELB Post-HELB 3.7.1 Temperature (°F) 3.7.2 Pressure (psig) 3.7.3 Humidity (% RH) 3.7.4 Radiation (Rads) 3.7.5 Chemicals 3.7.6 Vibration 3.7.7 Seismic (g)
(1) Test parameter margins are included for the worst-case known requirements applicable to the equipment type. Margin for a specific parameter is dependent on the requirements of each application or location for the equipment; these may vary.
(2) Post-accident operability addressed through simulated thermal aging. Temperature and other parameters are selected to envelop the requirements.
3D-65 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR 3.8 MEASURED VARIABLES This section tabulates the variables and parameters required to be measured during each of the following tests in the qualification test sequence.
Tests: {example}
A: Thermal Aging B: Mechanical Cycling C: Irradiation D: Seismic Test E: HELB Test 3.8.1 Category I - Environment Required Not Required 3.8.1.1 Temperature ... ...
3.8.1.2 Pressure ... ...
3.8.1.3 Moisture ... ...
3.8.1.4 Gas Composition ... ...
3.8.1.5 Vibration ... ...
3.8.1.6 Time ... ...
3.8.2 Category II - Input Electrical Characteristics 3.8.2.1 Voltage ... ...
3.8.2.2 Current ... ...
3.8.2.3 Frequency ... ...
3.8.2.4 Power ... ...
3.8.2.5 Other ... ...
3.8.3 Category III - Fluid Characteristics 3.8.3.1 Chemical Composition ... ...
3.8.3.2 Flowrate ... ...
3.8.3.3 Spray ... ...
3.8.3.4 Temperature ... ...
3.8.4 Category IV - Radiological Features 3.8.4.1 Energy Type ... ...
3.8.4.2 Energy Level ... ...
3.8.4.3 Dose Rate ... ...
3.8.4.4 Integrated Dose ... ...
3.8.5 Category V - Electrical Characteristics 3.8.5.1 Insulation Resistance ... ...
3.8.5.2 Output Voltage ... ...
3.8.5.3 Output Current ... ...
3.8.5.4 Output Power ... ...
3.8.5.5 Response Time ... ...
3.8.5.6 Frequency Characteristics ... ...
3.8.5.7 Simulated Load ... ...
3D-66 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Required Not Required 3.8.6 Category VI - Mechanical Characteristics 3.8.6.1 Thrust ... ...
3.8.6.2 Torque ... ...
3.8.6.3 Time ... ...
3.8.6.4 Load Profile ... ...
3.8.7 Category VII - Auxiliary Equipment 3.8.7.1 {as applicable, also see ... ...
Section 1.4 of EQDP}
3D-67 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR 3.9 TYPE TEST
SUMMARY
3.9.1 Normal Environment Testing Operation of the {equipment} under normal conditions is demonstrated by {discuss test, checks, et. al. which provide baseline performance data} ... , as reported in Reference .
3.9.2 Abnormal Environment Testing Operation of the {equipment} under abnormal conditions is demonstrated by {discuss test, checks, et. al. which provide baseline performance data} ... , as reported in Reference .
3.9.3 Aging Simulation Procedure
{Describe the aging mechanisms simulated and the sequence, including justifications as necessary.}
The test units were pre-conditioned to simulate an aged condition prior to subjecting them to the Design Basis Event (DBE) seismic and environmental conditions/simulation. The aged condition was achieved by separate phases of {accelerated thermal aging, thermal cycling, and radiation exposure to a total integrated gamma dose equivalent to a twenty-year normal dose plus the design basis accident dose, and accelerated flow induced and pipe vibration simulation}. Through all the pre-conditioning phases, the {equipment, performance} were monitored to verify {continuous operation}.
3.9.3.1 Design Life: {Also, justification of the bases for a design life goal should be provided, when used in mild-environment programs. Generally inapplicable to harsh-environment programs.}
3.9.3.2 Shelf Life: {Though not typically applicable, state any limitation in life, as well as conditions which may be detrimental if known.}
3.9.3.3 Thermal Aging: The qualified life is years based on an ambient temperature of { °C ( °F) and a °C temperature rise due to }. Calculations are based on a test temperature of , test duration of hours, and an activation of eV (See References x, et al.)}.
3.9.3.4 Radiation Aging: The qualified life is limited by the expected radiation during the -year life and the Design Basis Event. {Subtract accident TID from qualified TID; account for margin, remainder is to be compared to normal/abnormal radiation requirements to yield life limits.}
3.9.3.5 Operating Cycles: {Expected number of electrical and/or mechanical cycles, or numbers of actuations, as applicable.
Estimated on the basis of the expected for the design, qualified, installed life of the equipment. Specification may be on a per annum or a per fuel cycle basis. Compare to cycle life data from test.}
3.9.3.6 Vibration Aging: {present bases; refer to test profile and/or Subsection 3.9.4}.
3.9.4 Seismic Tests The seismic testing reported in Reference x was completed on aged equipment employing {method(s)} in accordance with Regulatory Guide 1.100 and IEEE 344-1987. ... {Summarize equipment condition and/or performance versus the acceptance criteria.} ... Actual margin should be determined for each application/location throughout the plant and verified to meet or exceed the margin requirements.
{Discuss or reference discussion of test anomalies.}
3D-68 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR 3.9.5 High Energy Line Break/Post HELB Simulation The {equipment} were subjected to the HELB simulation temperature/pressure profile of Figure x. Following the °F temperature peak, the temperature gradually declines to °F and is held at saturated steam conditions for days, simulating a period of Post-HELB operation. The test data and activation energy specified in Subsection 3.9.3.3 can be used to determine margin in post-accident aging for each application/location of the equipment.
{Summarize equipment condition and/or performance versus the criteria}
{Discuss or reference discussion of test anomalies.}
3D-69 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR 4 QUALIFICATION BY ANALYSIS The AP1000 EQ Program does permit qualification solely on the basis of analyses for equipment outside the scope of 10CFR50.49.
The following subsections discuss each of the analyses preformed, its test basis and justification, and summarizes conclusions documented in References x; et. al., which provided detailed accounts of each analysis.
{Each subsection will address a particular analysis, if more than one is performed to support qualification.}
4.x (EXAMPLE)
{The purpose and objective will be identified here. Subsections will provide necessary details per the following format.}
4.x.1 {Equipment, Characteristic or Aspect} Analyzed
{A general description of the equipment and its function based on applicable equipment and mounting drawings, and purchase orders.}
4.x.2 Equipment Specification(s)
{The applicable design standards shall be documented including any limitations imposed by the equipment specification. Installation detail considered or represented are to be included.}
4.x.3 Methods and Codes
{Description of analytical methods or techniques, computer program, mathematical model(s) used, and the method(s) of verification}
4.x.4 Acceptance Criteria
{The specific safety function(s), postulated failure modes, or the failure effects to be demonstrated by analysis.}
4.x.5 Model
{Description of mathematical model of equipment or feature analyzed.}
4.x.6 Assumptions and Justifications
{EXAMPLES: Description of the loading conditions to be used. Summary of stresses to be considered.}
4.x.7 Impact to Safety Function
{Summarize analytically established performance characteristics and their acceptability. Discussion and summary of the analytical results which demonstrate equipment structural integrity and, where appropriate, operability. Particular to cabinets, critical deflections should be determined and included in mounting requirements for spacing with respect to other equipment and structures.}
4.x.8 Conclusions
{Descriptive summary, including any conditions imposed on qualification or use; qualified life, limitations, surveillance/maintenance requirements, et. al.} Further discussion of this analysis is presented in Reference x.
4.Y ENVIRONMENTAL QUALIFICATION ANALYSIS FOR {VALVE SOFT PARTS}
{purpose and objective}
4.Y.1 Equipment Identification
{Per Subsection '6.2.3.1}
3D-70 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR 4.Y.2 Component Identification
{Per Subsection '6.2.3.1}
4.Y.3 Safety Related Functions
{Per Subsection '6.2.3.2}
4.Y.4 Component Acceptance Criteria
{Per Subsection '6.2.3.3}
4.Y.5 Service Conditions
{Per Subsection '6.2.3.4}
4.Y.6 Potential Failure Modes
{Per Subsection '6.2.3.5}
4.Y.7 Identify the Environmental Effects on Material Properties Each non-metallic, including lubricants, is evaluated to determine the effect of the environmental conditions on the material properties.
For each non-metallic, a radiation threshold level and maximum service temperature is identified.
The radiation threshold level and the maximum service temperature are identified using materials handbooks, textbooks, government and industry reports, and laboratory data. If the evaluation indicates that the lowest levels may be exceeded for certain equipment, higher levels are identified at which varying degrees of material degradation may occur.
Mechanical equipment is highly resistive to degradation due to elevated humidity levels: therefore, relative humidity is not included as a parameter to be evaluated for environmental qualification. Pressure can be discounted for most equipment types, as there are no foreseen failures due to elevated pressure levels for most mechanical equipment. However, pressure must be addressed in the evaluation.
The susceptibility of the non-metallic material to the chemicals due to the design basis accident and exposure to the process fluid is evaluated. The material information in the chemical handbooks is an acceptable source of qualification documentation.
4.Y.7.1 Perform Thermal Aging Analysis Aging analysis is performed for organic materials. Mineral-based subcomponents are not considered to be sensitive to thermal aging during the design life of a plant and, therefore, are not analyzed.
Aging in mechanical components is associated with corrosion, erosion, particle deposits and embrittlement. In new construction, corrosion and erosion are considered by providing additional material thickness as a corrosion or erosion allowance above the required design. The other aging phenomena are considered during inservice inspections of operating components in accordance with ASME Code,Section XI. Aging qualification of metallic parts of equipment except for corrosion and erosion is in compliance with ASME Code,Section XI, therefore aging effects on metallic components are not addressed herein.
The non-metallic material analysis for determining the expected qualified thermal life is performed using Arrhenius methodology. The thermal input during the operating time, as explained below, is deducted from the tested thermal aging of the material at service temperature to obtain the qualified life.
The component is evaluated for the specified post-accident operating time. The thermal input from the postulated accident profile (i.e., LOCA/MSLB) for the duration of the specified operating time is compared to the material thermal aging data. The Arrhenius model is used to perform this comparison. The component is evaluated for the maximum post-accident operating time unless a system analysis is performed to justify shorter operating times.
3D-71 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Analysis of the non-metallics should also take into account any degradation of the part due to its use in dynamic modes (i.e., moving part).
4.Y.7.2 Evaluate the Environmental Effects on Equipment Safety-Related Function A conservative initial screening of the non-metallic subcomponents is made by comparison of the material capabilities (threshold radiation level and maximum service temperature) with the maximum postulated environmental conditions. If the threshold radiation values and the maximum service temperatures are above the maximum postulated environmental conditions, and if the material aging analysis demonstrates a service life sufficient to survive the accident duration, then the material is considered acceptable.
Those items which are not shown to be acceptable based on the above comparison are evaluated in further detail regarding:
- extent of material degradation
- material properties affected
- equipment/subcomponent function
- extent of equipment functional degradation
- location-specific environmental conditions 4.Y.8 Conclusions
{Per subsection 3D.6.2.3.7}
4.Y.9 EQ Maintenance Requirements
{Per subsection 3D.6.2.3.8}
3D-72 Revision 10
QUALIFICATION PROGRAM CONCLUSIONS
.1 AGING
{Discuss specifics and state on limitations or requirements; specifics with respect to:
- Design Life Goal
- Thermal Aging
- Radiation Aging
- Operating Cycles
- Vibration Aging}
.2 DBE QUALIFICATIONS
.3 PROGRAM CONCLUSIONS The qualification of the {equipment} is demonstrated by the completion of the simulated aging and Design Basis Event testing described herein and reported in Reference {1}.
{State any conditions imposed on qualification or qualified life, cite any lessons learned which necessitate future user actions to preserve continued qualification}
{Refer to 48$/),&$7,216800$5<7$%/(}
3D-73 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR QUALIFICATION
SUMMARY
7$%/(
SYSTEM {RPS}
CATEGORY Category(1) {a}
LOCATION {Containment bldg.}
STRUCTURE/AREA {Zone Number}
EQUIPMENT TYPE {pressure transmitter }
MANUFACTURER { }
MODEL { }
QUAL ENVIRONMENTAL EXTREMES PARAMETER METHOD(2) QUALIFIED(3) SPECIFIED(4) NOTES NORMAL ABNORMAL QUALIFIED LIFE {5}
SEISMIC {Both} Figure x {Ref; Fig.}
ACCIDENT Figure x {Ref; Fig.}
Temperature {Test} °F Pressure {Test} psig Rel. humidity {Test} %
Radiation {Both} E+06 R()
{Both} E+06 R()
Chemistry {Test} {Note 6}
Operability {Both}
Accuracy {Test}
NOTES:
- 1. Equipment category as per NUREG-0588, Appendix E, Section 2.
- 2. Qual. Methods are: Test, Analysis, Both (Test & Anal.), or Other.
- 3. Qualified values are test extremes which include margin.
- 4. Environmental parameters for the plant location are to be inserted. If more than one applicable, most extreme are to be cited
- 5. Qualified life estimated on basis of maximum normal temperature of °C ( °F) and a temperature rise of °C
( °F).
- 6. Chemistry Conditions: {pH and composition}.
3D-74 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR ATTACHMENT B AGING EVALUATION PROGRAM B.1 Introduction As stated in IEEE 323, aging of Class 1E equipment during normal service is considered as an integral part of the qualification program. The objective is not to address random age-induced failures that occur in-service and are detected by periodic testing and maintenance programs. The objective is to address the concern that some aging mechanisms, when considered in conjunction with the specified design basis events (DBE), may have the potential for common mode failure.
The AP1000 equipment qualification program addresses the aging concern and makes maximum use of available data and experience on aging mechanisms. This approach places primary emphasis on common mode failures due to enveloping design basis events. For example, reasonable assurance against common mode failures being induced because of a loss of heating, ventilation, and air conditioning (HVAC) is provided by adequate design, normal maintenance, and calibration procedures.
B.2 Objectives The objectives of the aging evaluation program follow:
To establish, where possible, the effects of the degradation due to aging mechanisms that occur before the occurrence of an accident, when safety-related equipment is called upon to function To provide increased confidence that safety-related equipment performs its safety-related function under the specified service condition.
B.3 Basic Approach The general approach to addressing aging allocates equipment to one of two categories.
Harsh environment includes electrical equipment required to perform a safety-related function in a high-energy line break (HELB) environment. For this equipment an aging simulation is included as part of the equipment qualification test sequence. The equipment is energized during the aging simulation.
Mild environment includes equipment required to mitigate high-energy line breaks but which, due to its location, is isolated from any adverse external environment resulting from the accident. For equipment in a mild environment the single design basis event capable of producing an adverse environment at the equipment location is the seismic event. Aging, for mild environment, is not included in the equipment qualification test sequence. Significant aging mechanisms are determined by evaluation of available test data. Generally, this data is from separate programs conducted to demonstrate that aged components continue to meet manufacturer's performance specifications under applicable seismic design basis event conditions and that seismic testing of unaged equipment is not invalidated by anticipated aging mechanisms.
B.4 Harsh Environment Electrical equipment required to perform a safety-related function in a high-energy line break (such as a loss of coolant accident, feed line break, or steam line break) environment is included in the 3D-75 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR harsh environment category. This category provides for an aging simulation to be included in the equipment's qualification test sequence.
B.4.1 Scope An example of equipment scope and the aging mechanisms applied under harsh environment are shown in Tables 3D.B-1 and 3D.B-2, respectively. The equipment selected is that Class 1E equipment qualified to operate in a high-energy line break environment. The aging mechanisms discussed next are those to which the equipment may be potentially sensitive in its installed location.
B.4.2 Aging Mechanisms The aging mechanisms that could potentially affect electrical equipment in a harsh environment are discussed under the following headings:
Time, in conjunction with:
Operational stresses (current, voltage, operating cycles, Joulean self-heating)
(External stresses (thermal, vibration, radiation, humidity, seismic).
The aging mechanisms considered potentially significant and to be simulated are identified in Table 3D.B-2 for each item of equipment in a harsh environment. Where applied, the aging mechanisms are simulated as described in the following discussions.
B.4.3 Time For equipment subject to high-energy line break conditions, the most significant in-service aging mechanisms (that is, radiation and thermal) come into effect during reactor operation. Consequently, it can be assumed that the "aging clock" starts on plant startup.
B.4.4 Operational Stresses Electrical Cycling Electrical supplies to safety-related equipment are, in general, highly stable. So aging effects due to supply cycling during service are not anticipated. Where the equipment is anticipated to experience multiple startup and shutdown cycles, the equipment is electrically cycled to simulate the number of anticipated startup and shutdown cycles plus 10 percent.
Mechanical Cycling Aging effects resulting from anticipated mechanical cycling of the equipment are simulated by applying, as a minimum, the number of cycles estimated to occur during the target qualified life plus 10 percent. Mechanical cycling covers such operations as switching and relay actuation.
Joulean Self-Heating Where the equipment is not aged in a live condition, the aging effects resulting from Joulean self-heating are recognized by employing the equipment operating temperature as the datum temperature for assessing the accelerated thermal aging parameters to be employed.
3D-76 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR B.4.5 External Stresses Thermal Effects Thermal effects are considered one of the most significant aging mechanisms to address. The equipment is thermally aged to simulate an end-of-qualified-life condition using the Arrhenius model to establish the appropriate conditioning period at elevated temperature. Where data is not available to establish the model parameters for the materials employed, a verifiably conservative value of 0.5 eV is used for activation energy (Attachment D).
For each piece of equipment an appropriate normal and abnormal operating temperature and an associated time history are determined for inclusion in the Arrhenius model. The equipment temperature is determined by the addition of an appropriate equipment specific T to the external ambient temperature. Attachment D also provides information concerning the determination of appropriate ambient temperatures and time-temperature histories for use in thermal aging evaluation of equipment. Post-accident thermal aging is included by recognizing the higher post-accident ambient temperatures in determining the parameters employed for the post-accident accelerated thermal aging simulation.
In-Service Vibration The majority of safety-related electrical equipment has a proven history of in-plant service. Thus, it is unlikely that a significant, undetected, failure mechanism exists because of low-level, in-plant vibration. In addition, a simulation of earthquakes smaller than the safe shutdown earthquake (SSE) employed during equipment and component seismic testing give added confidence that this potential aging mechanism is covered (See Attachment E, Section 4.4). For line-mounted equipment, in-service pipe and flow induced vibration may be significant. As a consequence, an additional vibration aging step is included in the aging sequence as indicated for certain items of equipment in Table 3D.B-2. (See Attachment E, Subsection 5.2.2.)
Radiation Radiation during normal operation is not considered an aging mechanism for equipment subject to in-service integrated doses less than 104 rads. Research has established that no aging mechanisms are measurable below 104 rads (Attachment C) for materials and most components supplied in safety-related electrical equipment. Some devices may have performance limitations below 104 rads.
For radiation doses in excess of 104 rads, the equipment is irradiated using a gamma () source to a dose equivalent to the estimated dose to be incurred during normal operation for the target qualified life. The estimated doses employed are specified in the equipment qualification data package, Subection 1.8.4, and are based on a 100 percent load factor, including appropriate margin. For harsh environment equipment, the equivalent accident dose is usually applied before design basis event testing.
Humidity The use of materials significantly affected by humidity is avoided. For equipment subject to high energy line break environments, the aging effects due to humidity during normal operation are judged to be insignificant compared to the effects of the high-temperature steam accident simulation.
Therefore, no additional humidity aging simulation is required.
Seismic Aging The potential aging effects of low-level seismic activity and some low-level, in-plant vibration are addressed by employing a simulation of five earthquakes of 50 percent of the magnitude of a safe shutdown earthquake before seismic testing of the aged equipment.
3D-77 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR B.4.6 Synergism An important consideration in aging is the possible existence of synergistic effects when multiple stress environments are applied simultaneously. The potential for significant synergistic effects is addressed by the conservatisms inherent in using the "worst-case" aging sequence, conservative accelerated aging parameters and conservative, design basis event test levels which provide confidence that any synergistic effects are enveloped.
B.4.7 Design Basis Event Testing Design basis event testing subsequent to equipment aging is discussed in Appendix 3D as to guidelines for defining high-energy line break environments and seismic conditions. Testing for equipment specific test environments and seismic parameters is discussed in Attachment A, Section 3.
B.4.8 Aging Sequence The aging mechanisms applied to equipment subject to high-energy line break environments are determined by definition of the aging environments at the equipment location and by a subsequent evaluation of the sensitivity of the equipment to these environments. If the sensitivity of the equipment is not known, aging mechanisms are simulated by conservative methods as previously described. Those aging mechanisms that are simulated for example equipment subject to high-energy line break environments are shown in Table 3D.B-2.
The order in which each of the aging mechanisms is applied is as shown in Table 3D.B-2. This order is considered to be conservative, as no aging mechanism is anticipated to be capable of reducing the impact of the previously applied mechanisms. As an example, thermal aging is applied before radiation aging to preclude the annealing out of radiation-induced defects. Similarly, the effects of mechanical aging are considered more significant when applied to equipment that has already been preaged to address thermal and radiation phenomena.
B.4.9 Performance Criterion The basic acceptance criterion is that the qualification tests demonstrate the capability of the aged equipment to perform prespecified, safety-related functions consistent with meeting the performance specification of Attachment A, Section 1.7 of the applicable equipment qualification data packages while exposed to the associated environmental conditions defined in Attachment A, Section 1.8.
B.4.10 Failure Treatment When thermal aging is simulated at an equipment level, a conservative value for the activation energy is assumed for the components composing the equipment. As a consequence, many components are grossly overaged, and failure of some of the components is expected during the aging simulation. When three test units are preaged, in the event of such failure(s), one of the following options is selected.
when a particular component fails in one of the three test units, the failure is considered random. The failed component is replaced by a new component, and the test is continued when a particular component fails in more than one of the three test units, either:
- 1. the failed components are replaced by new identical components and the aging simulation continued. The claimed qualified life of the unit is consistent with the minimum aging period simulated by at least two of the three units; or 3D-78 Revision 10
- 2. the failed components is replaced by identical components specifically aged to the qualified life by assuming for thermal aging a less conservative activation energy specifically determined for the component, or
- 3. the failed components are replaced by a different type of component which is aged for a period equal to the test units.
When less than three test samples prevent such a conclusion from being reached, any failures are investigated to ascertain whether the failure mechanism is of common mode origin. Should a common mode failure mechanism be identified as having caused the failure, a design change is implemented to eliminate the problem. Supplemental or repeat tests will be completed to demonstrate compliance with the acceptance criteria.
B.5 Mild Environment A mild environment aging program includes Class 1E equipment not required to perform a safety related function in a high-energy line break environment. It involves a review of available information to demonstrate the absence of significant in-service aging mechanisms. For equipment allocated to this category, the single design basis event capable of producing an adverse environment at the equipment location is the seismic event. Seismic testing completed on unaged equipment is verified as valid by demonstrating that no available information suggests that aged materials and components would not continue to meet their design specification during a seismic event.
B.5.1 Scope A mild environment aging program includes both a review of material analysis and the results of a component testing program for equipment not required to perform a safety-related function in a high-energy line break environment. Equipment is included that is required to mitigate high-energy line breaks but which, because of the equipment location, is isolated from the adverse environment resulting from the accident. An example of the equipment allocated to a mild environment is identified in Table 3D.B-1.
B.5.2 Performance Criteria Available Material Analysis - For equipment and components for which aging is addressed by evaluation of appropriate mechanisms, the basic performance criterion is that the evaluation of test data demonstrates the effect of aging is minor and does not affect the capability of the aged equipment to perform prespecified functions. This is consistent with meeting the performance specification of Attachment A, Section 1.7 of the applicable equipment qualification data package while exposed to the associated environmental conditions defined in Attachment A, Section 1.8.
Available Component Aging Data - Random component failure or unacceptable performance due to aging is detected by routine maintenance and equipment calibration during service. The objective of a mild environment aging program is to provide reasonable assurance that a seismic event does not constitute a common mode failure mechanism capable of inducing unacceptable performance characteristics in aged components. Consequently, the single performance criterion for the aging portion of the qualification sequence requires that the component not fail to perform its general function, not that the component meets the original design and procurement specifications.
For the seismic event simulation, the component is considered acceptable if, during and after the simulation, it does not exhibit any temporary or permanent step change in performance characteristics. Failure of one of three components tested is considered a random failure, subject to an investigation concluding the observed failure is not common mode.
3D-79 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR B.5.3 Failure Treatment In the event of failure to demonstrate conformance to criteria, the following options are available for resolution of qualification with respect to age:
Establish a maintenance and surveillance program Replace the materials or components with those constructed of materials of known acceptable characteristics.
3D-80 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3D.B-1 Example Class 1E Equipment Scope and Category Allocation Aging Method Equipment Harsh Environment Valve Motor Operators Solenoid Valves Externally Mounted Limit Switches Pressure Transmitters Differential Pressure Transmitters Resistance Temperature Detectors Neutron Detectors Pressure Sensor Batteries*
Mild Environment Pressure Transmitters Differential Pressure Transmitters Main Control Board Switch Modules Recorders (Post-Accident Monitoring)
Indicators (Post-Accident Monitoring)
Instrument Bus Distribution Panels Instrument Bus Power Supply (Static Inverter)
Motor Control Centers Integrated Protection Cabinets (IPC)
Engineered Safety Features Actuation Cabinets (ESFAC)
Logic Cabinets Reactor Trip Switchgear Reactor Coolant Pump Switchgear Note:
- To comply with R.G. 1.158 3D-81 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3D.B-2 Aging Mechanism Sequence Aging Mechanisms DBE Equipment Location Category Burn-in Thermal Radiation Mechanical Vibration Electrical Seismic Seismic HELB Safety-related Valve Motor I/C Harsh X X X X X X X Operators O/C Harsh X X X X X X Safety-related Solenoid I/C Harsh X X X X X X X Valves O/C Harsh X X X X X X Safety-related Externally I/C Harsh X X X X X X X Mounted Limit Switches O/C Harsh X X X X X X Pressure Transmitters I/C&OC Harsh X X X X X X Differential Pressure I/C&OC Harsh X X X X X X Transmitters Resistance Temperature I/C Harsh X X X X X X Detectors: Well Mounted Excore Neutron Detectors I/C Harsh X X X X X Pressure Sensor I/C Harsh X X X 3D-82 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR ATTACHMENT C EFFECTS OF GAMMA RADIATION DOSES BELOW 104 RADS ON THE MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS C.1 Introduction One potential common-mode failure mechanism to consider in the qualification of safety-related equipment is gamma radiation. As part of a qualification program, the effect of gamma radiation dose is considered for two purposes: as a component of the high-energy line break environment and as a potential aging mechanism that could reduce the capability of safety-related equipment to perform safety-related functions under design basis event conditions (seismic or high-energy line break).
The scope of this attachment is limited to consideration of the effect of radiation for that substantial portion of equipment that does not experience an adverse change in external environment as a result of a high-energy line break, and for which, therefore, the only gamma radiation concern is an in-service aging mechanism.
This attachment assumes that the equipment contains devices that have been selected for performance through the total integrated dose expected in service. For example, devices such as integrated circuits may have a limit of 1000 rads established, in which case the following discussion applies for its installed life. The information in this attachment is not adequate to be applied to equipment that must perform its function in a high-energy line break.
The primary purpose of equipment qualification is to reduce the potential for common-cause failures due to environmental effects during the qualified life. Random failures that inevitably occur inservice are accommodated by the redundancy and diversity of the design of safety-related systems.
Furthermore, in-service maintenance and testing programs are designed to detect such random failures. The chances of two identical components that perform identical functions failing during the same limited time period in between routine tests considered insignificant because of the following:
General low failure rate of components used in nuclear equipment Minor differences in component material or geometric tolerances or both Minor differences in operating environment.
Therefore, failures that are induced in components by normal background gamma radiation below 104 rads (103 rads for some devices) alone are considered to be random. Thus, the only gamma radiation concern addressed for equipment not subject to an adverse high-energy line break environment is the potential for an aging mechanism resulting in a deterioration in component properties such that, when subject to seismic stress, a common-cause failure results. When considering such a failure mode, the aging mechanism of concern is not one that affects the electrical properties of components but one that reduces the mechanical strength and flexibility of components.
C.2 Scope This report summarizes available information concerning the effects of gamma radiation on material mechanical properties. It justifies that for a gamma dose of less than 104 rads there are no observable radiation effects that impact material mechanical properties. Of the materials investigated, only Teflon (PTFE) is subject to an alteration of mechanical properties for a gamma dose of less than 105 rads. Information is drawn from several sources listed as references in Section C.5. They include various texts concerning radiation effects and damage and pertinent reports.
3D-83 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR C.3 Discussion The primary effects of gamma photons on materials are ionization, material heating (primarily at high dose rates, which is of negligible significance here), and some displacement damage caused by high-energy photons. Some other types of radiation have effects similar to those induced by gamma radiation. This allows the use of data obtained from exposure of material to an alternate radiation to provide limited information concerning the effects of exposure to gamma radiation.
For example, the primary consequence of fast-neutron bombardment of material is atom displacement. Therefore, if the effect of radiation on a material property is primarily dependent on atom displacement, it is inferred that for an equivalent dose (rads) of gamma and fast-neutron radiation, data obtained from neutron irradiation provides a conservative estimate of the effect of gamma irradiation in producing displacements.
The same type of inference is drawn for the ionization effect of charged particle (for example, electron, proton, alpha particle) irradiation. Charged particles do not have the penetration capability that gamma or neutron radiations exhibit as a result of extensive interaction between charged particles and atomic charge centers.
Table 3D.C-1 summarizes information derived from the listed references. The information relates to the effect of gamma radiation on material mechanical properties. Table 3D.C-1 presents either the threshold dose (that dose at which an effect on any mechanical property can first be detected) or, the dose that results in the identified effect. This provides a general indication of the susceptibility of material mechanical properties to gamma radiation.
An evaluation of the information available on inorganic materials summarized in Table 3D.C-1 shows that the mechanical damage threshold for gamma radiation is many orders of magnitude greater than 104 rads. For the organic materials listed in Table 3D.C-1, a histogram comparing threshold dose level and frequency of material susceptibility is provided. In instances for which a material threshold dose is not indicated in Table 3D.C-1, a threshold value is assumed which is one order of magnitude lower than the indicated damage dose. Where information is available, referenced documents indicate that the difference between threshold dose and 25 percent damage dose is about a factor of three. Thus, a factor of 10 supplies substantial margin in estimating the threshold dose level.
Figure C-1 shows that any indications of mechanical property damage thresholds below 104 rads would be extremely unusual.
The references listed do not identify the existence of materials whose mechanical properties are deteriorated when exposed to a gamma radiation dose up to 104 rads. So it can be concluded that common-cause failures do not occur in electrical equipment during or after a seismic event as a result of radiation-induced degradation up to 104 rads.
This is supported by NRC documentation available as an attachment to "Guidelines for Evaluating Environmental Qualification of Class 1E Electrical Equipment in Operating Reactors," which provides further justification for the use of 104 rads as a threshold for mechanical damage. The NRC information appears to be consistent with the information provided in Table 3D.C-1.
C.4 Conclusions For Class 1E equipment subject to a lifetime gamma dose of up to 104 rads, it is not necessary to address radiation aging for qualification purposes provided that the equipment is not required to perform a safety-related function in a high-energy line break environment.
As previously noted, this appendix does not apply to electrical properties of components in safety-related equipment.
3D-84 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR C.5 References
- 1. Ricketts, L. W., "Fundamentals of Nuclear Hardening of Electronic Equipment,"
R. G. Krieger Publishing Co., 1986.
- 2. NASA Tech Brief Vol. 10, No. 5, Item #3, "Response of Dielectrics to Space Radiation,"
October 1986.
- 3. IRT Study 4331-006, "Design Guidelines for Transient Radiation Effects on Tactical Army Systems," Harry Diamond Labs, June 12, 1981.
- 4. Regulatory Guide 1.89, Rev. 1.
- 5. Hanks, C. L., and Hamman, D. J., "The Effect of Radiation on Electrical Insulating Materials," REIC Report No. 46, Radiation Effects Information Center, Battelle Memorial Institute, Columbus, Ohio, June 1969.
- 6. Kangilaski, M., "The Effects of Neutron Irradiation on Structural Materials," REIC Report No. 45, Radiation Effects Information Center, Battelle Memorial Institute, Columbus, Ohio, June 1967.
- 7. Hanks, C. L., and Hamman, D. J., "The Effect of Nuclear Radiation on Capacitors," REIC Report No. 44, Radiation Effects Information Center, Battelle Memorial Institute, Columbus, Ohio, December 1966.
- 8. Chapin, W. E., Drennan, J. E., and Hamman, D. J., "The Effect of Nuclear Radiation on Transducers," REIC Report No. 43, Radiation Effects Information Center, Battelle Memorial Institute, Columbus, Ohio, October 1966.
- 9. Drennan, J. E., and Hamman, D. J., "Space Radiation Damage to Electronic Components and Materials," REIC Report No. 39, Radiation Effects Information Center, Battelle Memorial Institute, Columbus, Ohio, January 1966.
- 10. Larin, F., "Radiation Effects in Semiconductor Devices," John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1968.
- 11. Billington, D. S., and Crawford, J. H., "Radiation Damage in Solids," Princeton University Press, Princeton, New Jersey, 1961.
- 12. Corbett, J. W., "Electron Radiation Damage in Semiconductors and Metals," Academic Press, New York, 1966.
- 13. Ricketts, L. W., "Fundamentals of Nuclear Hardening of Electronic Equipment,"
Wiley-Interscience, New York, 1972.
- 14. Kircher, J. F., and Bowman, Richard E., "Effect of Radiation on Materials and Components," Reinhold Publishing Corp., New York, 1964.
- 15. Bolt, R. O., and Carroll, J. G., "Radiation Effects on Organic Materials," Academic Press, New York, 1963.
- 16. Kaplan, Irvin, "Nuclear Physics," Addison-Wesley, 1962.
3D-85 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3D.C-1 (Sheet 1 of 2)
Radiation-Induced Degradation of Material Mechanical Properties Material Mechanical Damage Threshold Dose for Comments Structural Metals 1019 n/cm2 (fast neutron spectrum) Similar to cold work (1010 rads)
Inorganic Materials ~1017 n/cm2 (fast neutron spectrum) Borated materials have lower threshold values for neutron irradiation.
Elastomers Natural Rubber 2x106 rads(C)
Polyurethane Rubber 9x105 rads(C)
Styrene-Butadiene Rubber 2x106 rads(C)
Nitrile Rubber 7x106 rads(C) Compression set is 25% degraded Neoprene Rubber 7x106 rads(C)
Hypalon ~107 rads(C) Variable Acrylic Rubber 9x107 rads(C) Variable Silicone Rubber 107 rads(C) ~25% damage Fluorocarbon Rubber 9x107 rads(C) ~25% hardness, 80% elongation Polysulfate Rubber 108 rads(C)
Butyl Rubber 107 rads(C) ~25% damage One rad (C) is the field of radiation that will produce 100 ergs/gm in carbon.
Plastic Teflon (PTFE) 1.7x104 rads(C)
Kel-F 1.3x106 rads(C)
Polyethylene 107 rads(C)
Polystyrene 108 rads Mylar 106 rads(C) Conservative Polyamide (Nylon) 8.6x105 rads(C)
Diallyl Phthalate 108 rads(C)
Polypropylene 107 rads(C)
Polyurethane 7x108 rads(C) 3D-86 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3D.C-1 (Sheet 2 of 2)
Radiation-Induced Degradation of Material Mechanical Properties Material Mechanical Damage Threshold Dose for Comments Plastic (Continued)
Kynar (400) 107 rads(C)
Acrylics 8.2x105 rads Amino Resins 106 rads Aromatic Amide-Imide 107 rads Resins 107 rads Cellulose Derivatives 3x107 rads 25% damage Polyester, Glass Filled 8.7x108 rads Phenolics 3x108 rads(C) 25% damage Silicones 108 rads(C)
Polycarbonate Resins 5x107 rads 25% damage to elongation Polyesters ~ 105 - 106 rads Styrene Polymers 4x107 rads(C)
Styrene Copolymers 4x107 rads(C) 25% damage Vinyl Polymers 1.4x106 - 8.8x107 rads(C)
Vinyl Copolymers 1.4x106 - 8.8x107 rads(C)
Encapsulating Compounds RTV 501 2x106 rads Sylgard 182 2x106 rads Sylgard 1383 2x106 rads Polyurethane Foam 2x106 rads Epoxies 109 rads 3D-87 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Figure 3D.C-1 Histogram of Threshold Gamma Dose for Mechanical Damage to Elastomers, Plastics, and Encapsulation Compounds 3D-88 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR ATTACHMENT D ACCELERATED THERMAL AGING PARAMETERS D.1 Introduction Attachment B describes the approach employed in the AP1000 equipment qualification program to address the aging requirement of IEEE 323. For equipment required to perform a safety-related function in a high-energy line break environment, the AP1000 equipment qualification program includes an aging simulation as part of its qualification test sequence (Harsh Environment of Attachment B).
For equipment not required to perform a safety related function in a high-energy line break environment, the single design basis event considered is a seismic event. Aging, in this case (Mild Environment of Attachment B) is not usually included in the test sequence. Aging, where significant, is addressed by separate qualification of aged components, using conservative testing under applicable seismic design basis event conditions.
Thermal effects are one of the primary aging mechanisms addressed by the AP1000 equipment qualification program described in Attachment B for equipment containing nonmetallic or nonceramic materials. When thermal aging effects are established as potentially significant to the capability of the component or equipment to perform its safety-related function under design basis event conditions, or in the absence of evidence to the contrary, the component or equipment is thermally aged to simulate an end-of-qualified-life condition before design basis event testing. Equipment required to operate in a high-energy line break environment is also thermally aged to simulate the post-accident conditions consistent with its established functional requirements.
This attachment defines the appropriate thermal environments considered for each item of equipment in the AP1000 equipment qualification program and establishes consequent accelerated thermal aging parameters for use in the qualification programs.
D.2 Arrhenius Model If an aging mechanism is governed by a single chemical reaction, the rate of which is dependent on temperature alone, the Arrhenius equation can be used as the basis for establishing the accelerated aging parameters:
E dR
= Ae kT (1) dt where:
E = activation energy (eV) k = Boltzmann's constant (8.617 x 10-5 eV/K)
A = constant factor T = material temperature (K) dR
= reaction rate = aging rate dt 3D-89 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Integration gives:
E (2)
R = Be kT t where:
R = change in measured property due to aging t = time for aging effect R to occur B = constant factor If the accelerated aging process employed correctly simulates the change in properties due to aging under normal operating or post-accident temperature conditions, then:
R 1 = R 0 (3) and E E kT1 kT0 B t1 e = B to e and E T1 T0 Ln t 1 = + Ln t o k T1T0 where:
T1 = accelerated aging material temperature (K) t1 = time at temperature T1 T0 = material temperature under normal operating or post-accident conditions (K) t0 = time at temperature T0 From Equation 3, given an activation energy (E) for the material, the time required at any selected elevated temperature can be calculated to simulate the ambient aging effects.
This model has been verified to represent the thermal aging characteristics of nonmetallic and non-ceramic materials and is employed in the AP1000 equipment qualification program to derive accelerated thermal aging parameters. The only material dependent parameter input into this model, when establishing the accelerated aging parameters, is the activation energy. This parameter is a direct measure of the chemical reaction rate governing the thermal degradation of the material.
D.3 Activation Energy A single material may have more than one physical property that thermally degrades (for example, dielectric strength, flexural strength.) As a consequence, the material exhibits different activation energies with respect to each property. The activation energy selected is the one that reflects the physical property most significant to the safety-related function performed or the stresses applied to the material by the design basis fault(s) considered.
3D-90 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR In actual practice, however, rarely is the choice so simple. Electrical components are invariably made up of more than one material. In many cases either the materials employed are not known in any chemical detail but just by a general organic or industrial trade name, or the appropriate activation energy is not known.
Where an activation energy is not available that reflects the material or component as well as the physical property of interest, a single conservative activation energy is used.
A distribution of activation energies (Figure 3D.D-1) was produced by EPRI (Reference 1) based on 170 materials. An independent review of materials used in Westinghouse-supplied equipment is summarized in Table 3D.D-1 and plotted in similar form in Figure 3D.D-2. A statistical analysis indicates that 95 percent of the activation energies exceed about 0.4 eV from the EPRI data and 0.6 eV from the Westinghouse data. Based on this information, a value of 0.5 eV is selected for use throughout this program whenever specific activation energies are not available. Employing a low value of activation energy in deriving the accelerated aging parameters causes materials having a high activation energy to be overaged with respect to the simulated conditions.
D.4 Thermal Aging (Normal/Abnormal Operating Conditions)
This section establishes the methodology employed and derives a typical set of accelerated aging parameters for equipment in various plant locations.
D.4.1 Normal Operation Temperature (T0)
In determining the ambient operating temperature (T0) of the component/material/equipment under investigation, the following is considered:
External ambient temperature (Ta)
Temperature rise in cabinet/enclosure (Tr)
Self-heating effects (Tj) where To = Ta + Tr + Tj D.4.1.1 External Ambient Temperature (Ta) a) For equipment located in areas supplied by an air-conditioning system, a typical value assumed for (Ta) throughout the qualified life is 68°F (20°C). For air-conditioning systems, two excursions per year to 91°F (33.3°C), each lasting 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br />, has a negligible additional aging effect.
b) For equipment located in areas supplied by a ventilation system, a typical value assumed (Ta) throughout the qualified life is 77°F (25°C). Two excursions per year to 122°F (50°C), each lasting 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br />, has a negligible additional aging effect.
D.4.1.2 Temperature Rise in Enclosure (Tr)
This temperature rise is estimated based on the heat generated (radiative and conductive) by equipment inside or attached to the enclosure. For example, limit switches may be affected by process heat through the valve. Temperatures measured during test runs may be available. A typical value for temperature rise inside an electronics cabinet is 10°C.
3D-91 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR D.4.1.3 Self-Heating Effects (Tj)
For equipment that is energized during most of its life, a self-heating effect is measured or established. If the equipment is energized only for short durations, this effect may be determined to be negligible. Temperature effects due to the solenoid of an energized valve may be significant (over 40°C). In determining junction temperatures of semiconductor devices, known operating parameters along with the thermal impedance are used. If the power dissipation is not known, a 50 percent operating stress is assumed.
D.4.2 Accelerated Aging Temperature (Ti)
Temperatures used for actual accelerated thermal aging tests are determined based on the equipment or component specifications in an attempt to prevent damage from high temperature alone and second-order (non-Arrhenius) effects such as the glass transition temperature of plastics.
A maximum of 130°C is typically used for electronic component aging, but this is evaluated on a case basis. If the device is energized during the accelerated aging process, the self-heating effect as determined in the preceding section is added to the oven temperature to determine the total aging temperature (T1).
D.4.3 Examples of Arrhenius Calculations D.4.3.1 For a Normally Energized Component Aged Energized - The Self-Heating Effect is Added to Both (To) and (T1):
Conditions: Ta = 25°C, Tr = 10°C Tj = 25°C, eV = 0.5, Aging time = ti Oven temperature = 130°C Qualified life goal = 10 years Therefore To = 25 + 10 + 25 = 60°C = 333K T1 = 130 + 25 = 155°C = 428K t1 = 10e - 0.5 (428 - 333)
- 8760 = 1831 hours0.0212 days <br />0.509 hours <br />0.00303 weeks <br />6.966955e-4 months <br /> K (428 x 333)
D.4.3.2 For a Normally De-energized Component Aged Energized - the Self-heating Effect is Added Only to T1:
Conditions: Ta = 25°C, Tr = 10°C Tj = 25°C, eV = 0.5, Aging time = t1 Oven temperature = 130°C Qualified life goal = 10 years Therefore To = 25 + 10 = 35°C = 308K T1 = 130 + 25 = 155°C = 428K t1 = 10e - 0.5 (428 - 308)
- 8760 = 445 hours0.00515 days <br />0.124 hours <br />7.357804e-4 weeks <br />1.693225e-4 months <br /> K (428 x 308) 3D-92 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR D.5 Post-Accident Thermal Aging Most cases, some safety-related postaccident performance capability is specified by the functional requirements. As a consequence, to qualify equipment to IEEE 323, the effects of post-accident thermal aging must be simulated after the high-energy line break test. This section establishes the accelerated thermal aging parameters employed in performing this simulation.
D.5.1 Post-Accident Operating Temperatures Assuming continuous operation of containment safeguards systems following an accident, the containment environment temperature is reduced to the external ambient temperature well within one year for any postulated high-energy line break. However, to allow for possible variations in plant operations following an accident, the design high-energy line break envelope extending to one year is indicated by Figure 3D.5-8 or an equivalent curve considering the location of the equipment.
For safety-related equipment located inside containment, either the self-heating effects of the operating unit, under post-accident conditions, may be insignificant compared to the heat input from the external environment (transmitters, RTDs), or the unit may not be in continuous operation during this phase (valve operators). So it may not be necessary to add a specific temperature increment to account for self-heating of these devices following an accident. The portion of Figure 3D.5-8 (or the localized equivalent) that is not addressed by DBA testing is then input at T0 into the Arrhenius equation to calculate appropriate accelerated aging parameters for post-accident conditions.
However, as noted in Section D.4, if the equipment is energized during the aging simulation period, the self-heating effect is added to both To and T1.
D.5.2 Accelerated Thermal Aging Parameters for Post-Accident Conditions The Arrhenius equation is used as the basis for establishing accelerated thermal aging. The aging temperature most often used for post-accident thermal simulation is 250°F (121°C). This temperature is selected as a maximum for electronic components and is generally used for tests. When applying the Arrhenius equation, conservative (lower bound) material activation energy is used that represents the equipment materials and material physical properties, and is essential to the safety function performance during the DBA. There are various ways to apply the Arrhenius equation to post-accident thermal aging. If the selected aging temperature is greater than the test temperature (including margin) at 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br />, the Arrhenius equation is applied to the post-DBA temperature curve from the first day to the end of the post-accident operability time (e.g.; 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br />, 2 weeks, 4 months or 1 year) in small time increments. The required aging times to simulate these small increments are then summed to yield a total test time. Another method is used if the selected aging temperature is less than the test temperature (including margin) after 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br />, then the test temperature should be applied until the aging temperature is met. The Arrhenius equation is applied to the post-DBA temperature curve from the time the aging temperature is met to the end of the post-accident operability time.
D.6 References
- 1. EPRI NP-1558, Project 890-1, "A Review of Equipment Aging Theory and Technology,"
September 1980.
3D-93 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3D.D-1 (Sheet 1 of 2)
Activation Energies From Westinghouse Reports Electron Material Volts Melamine-Glass, G5 0.29 Epoxy B-725 0.48 Ester-Glass, GPO-3 0.57 RTV Silicone 0.60 Phenolic-Asbestos, A 0.61 Nylon 33 GF 0.70 Acetal 0.73 Mineral Phenolic 0.74 Silicone Varnish 0.74 Polypropylene 0.81 Polysulfone 0.83 Phenolic-Cotton, C 0.84 Formvar 0.85 Epoxy 0.88 Epoxy Adhesive 0.89 Nylon 0.90 Pressboard 0.91 Kapton 0.93 Silicone 0.94 Phenolic-Asbestos, A 0.94 Cast Epoxy 0.98 Urethane-Nylon 0.99 Phenolic-Glass, G-3 1.01 Polycarbonate 1.01 Phenolic-Paper, X 1.02 Epoxy Wire 1.05 Epoxy-Glass, FR-4 1.05 Varnish Cotton 1.06 PVC 1.08 Ester-Glass, GPO-1 1.09 Cellulose Phenolic 1.10 X-Link Ethylene 1.11 Urethane 1.12 Ester-Glass, GPO-2 1.13 Ester-Nylon 1.14 3D-94 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Table 3D.D-1 (Sheet 2 of 2)
Activation Energies From Westinghouse Reports Electron Material Volts Ester-Glass, GPO-1 1.16 32102BK Varnish 1.16 Vulcanized Fiber 1.16 Cellulose Mineral Phenolic 1.17 Mylar 1.18 Cast Epoxy 1.18 32101EV Varnish 1.18 Epoxy 1.18 Silicone 1.18 Phenolic-Paper, XX 1.20 Vulanized Fiber 1.21 Cellulose Phenolic 1.24 Phenolic-Glass, G-3 1.24 Kraft Phenolic 1.25 Neoprene 1.26 Amide-Imide Varnish 1.31 Loctite 75 1.38 Acetyl. Cotton 1.39 Silicone-Asbestos 1.41 Epoxy-Glass, FR-4 1.50 Mylar 1.58 Nomex 1.59 Omega Varnish 1.59 Epoxy-Glass, G-11 1.64 Polythermaleze 1.64 Kraft Paper 1.67 Valox 310SE-0 1.75 Varnished Kraft 1.86 Nomex 1.91 Ester-Glass, GPO-3 2.03 Phenolic-Cotton, C 2.12 Melamine-Glass, G-5 2.18 3D-95 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Figure 3D.D-1 Frequency Distribution of Activation Energies of Various Components/Materials (EPRI Data) 3D-96 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Figure 3D.D-2 Frequency Distribution of Activation Energies of Various Components/Materials (Westinghouse Data) 3D-97 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Figure 3D.D-3 Not Used 3D-98 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR ATTACHMENT E SEISMIC QUALIFICATION TECHNIQUES E.1 Purpose The following is the methodology used to seismically qualify seismic Category I mechanical and electrical equipment for the AP1000 equipment qualification program. Qualification work covered by this appendix meets the applicable requirements of IEEE 344-1987 and 382-1996.
E.2 Definitions The following are definitions of terms unique to or distinct from common industry usage. (See Section E.4.2.)
E.2.1 1/2 Safe Shutdown Earthquake The 1/2 safe shutdown earth (SSE) is the earthquake level used during seismic testing to seismically age safety-related equipment before performing safe shutdown earthquake testing.
E.2.2 Seismic Category I Equipment Seismic Category 1 equipment consists of structures, systems, and components required to withstand the effects of the safe shutdown earthquake and remain structurally intact, leak-tight (in case of pressurized systems), and functional to the extent required to perform their safety-related function.
E.2.3 Seismic Category II Equipment Seismic Category II equipment is that equipment whose continued function is not required, but whose failure could reduce the functioning of seismic Category I structures, systems, and components to an unacceptable level. Seismic Category II equipment must be capable of maintaining structural integrity so that a seismic event up to and including an SSE would not cause such a failure.
E.2.4 Non-seismic Equipment Equipment designated as non-seismic does not require seismic qualification.
E.2.5 Active Equipment Equipment that must perform a mechanical or electrical operation during or after (or both) the safe shutdown earthquake in order to accomplish its safety-related function.
E.2.6 Passive Equipment Equipment where maintenance of structural or pressure integrity is the only requirement necessary for accomplishing its safety-related function.
E.3 Qualification Methods This section presents a general description of the seismic qualification methods used by AP1000 for the seismic qualification of seismic Category I safety-related mechanical and electrical equipment.
Three methods are used: test, analysis, and a combination of the two. The approaches for qualification by testing and by analysis are discussed in Section E.5 and Section E.6, respectively.
The following discussion covers the conditions under which each approach is used and the general 3D-99 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR requirements applicable to the use of the methods. The qualification sequence is defined in Appendix 3D.
E.3.1 Use of Qualification by Testing The preferred method for seismic qualification of safety-related Class 1E electrical and electromechanical equipment is seismic testing. The nature of the seismic and vibrational input used depends on where the equipment is used. For equipment mounted so that the seismic environment includes frequency content between 1 and 33 hertz (hard mounted), the seismic test input is multifrequency. For equipment mounted so that seismic ground motion is filtered to contain one predominant structural mode (line mounted), single frequency testing is appropriate. This is the case for equipment mounted on piping systems, ductwork, or cable trays.
E.3.2 Use of Qualification by Analysis Analysis is used for seismic qualification when one of the following conditions is met:
The equipment is too large or the interface support conditions cannot adequately be simulated on the test table.
The only requirement is to maintain structural integrity during a postulated seismic event.
The equipment represents a linear system, or the nonlinearities can conservatively be accounted for in the analysis. This approach is also applicable to the development of the seismic environment, required response spectrum curve, at the mounting location of a component attached to a larger structure when the device is seismically qualified by separate component testing.
The analysis is used to document the seismic similarity of the equipment provided and that previously qualified by testing.
Seismic qualification of safety-related electrical equipment by analysis alone is not recommended for complex equipment that cannot be modeled to adequately predict its response. Analysis without testing may be acceptable provided structural integrity alone can ensure the design-intended function.
E.4 Requirements E.4.1 Damping Damping level of a component or system describes its capability to dissipate vibrational energy during a seismic event. The damping level used defines the response magnitude of an ideal single degree of freedom linear oscillator when subjected to the specified input as documented by the required response spectrum (RRS) curve. The significance of the damping value used depends on whether qualification is by testing or analysis.
E.4.1.1 Testing Equipment qualification by testing involves subjecting the base of the equipment to a representative seismic acceleration time history. The response characteristics of the equipment are a function of the inherent damping present in the equipment. In this case the damping value used (typically five percent) serves as a convenient means of showing the compliance of the test response spectrum (TRS) with the required response spectrum.
3D-100 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR E.4.1.2 Analysis In the case of qualification by analysis, the damping level used is representative of the damping actually present in the equipment. Unless other documented equipment damping data is available, the values specified in Table 3.7.1-1 of Chapter 3 are used.
E.4.2 Interface Requirements As part of the seismic qualification program, consideration is given to the definition of the clearances needed around the equipment mounted in the plant to permit the equipment to move during a postulated seismic event without causing impact between adjacent pieces of safety-related equipment. This is done as part of seismic testing by measuring the maximum dynamic relative displacement of the top and bottom of the equipment.
When performing qualification by analysis, the relative motion is obtained as part of the analytical results. These motions are reported in the seismic analysis report or qualification report and are used to determine the required clearance between adjacent pieces of equipment.
In addition, the qualification program takes into account the restraining effect of other interfaces, such as cables and conduits attached to the equipment, which may change the dynamic response characteristic of the equipment.
E.4.3 Mounting Simulation The mounting conditions simulated by analysis or during seismic test are representative of the equipment as-installed mounting conditions used for the AP1000 equipment. When an interfacing structure exists between the safety-related equipment being qualified and the floor or wall at which the equipment mounting required response spectrum is specified, its flexibility is simulated as part of the qualification program. If this is not done, justification must be provided, demonstrating that the deviations in mounting conditions do not affect the applicability of qualification program.
E.4.4 1/2 Safe Shutdown Earthquake The AP1000 makes use of a small earthquake having the intensity of one-half of the safe shutdown earthquake at the safety-related equipment mounting location to simulate the fatigue effects of smaller earthquakes that may occur before the postulated safe shutdown earthquake. These small earthquakes correspond to the operating basis earthquakes (OBEs) referenced in IEEE 344-1987.
When qualification by testing is used, five of these small earthquakes are used to vibrationally age the equipment before the safe shutdown earthquake. When qualification by analysis is used, two safe shutdown earthquake events are used to simulate the fatigue aging effects. Each event contains 10 peak cycles. These stress cycles are used to verify that the equipment is not subject to failure due to low cycle fatigue.
E.4.5 Safe Shutdown Earthquake The safe shutdown earthquake required response spectrum curve defines the seismic qualification basis for each piece of safety-related equipment. The seismic level varies according to the mounting location of the equipment. When equipment qualification is based on testing, an additional 10 percent test acceleration margin is added as specified in IEEE 323-1974.
E.4.6 Other Dynamic Loads Hydrodynamic loads are considered as part of the qualification program, where applicable.
3D-101 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR E.5 Qualification by Test Seismic qualification testing is the preferred method for electrical, mechanical, and electromechanical equipment. Seismic testing shall be performed and input generated as specified in IEEE 344-1987. The nature of the test input used depends on whether the equipment is hard mounted or line mounted. The test program consists of the following elements, as applicable:
environmental aging, mechanical aging, vibrational aging, and safe shutdown earthquake testing. For those cases where the equipment is also subject to a loss of coolant or a high-energy line break accident, these accidents are simulated on the same qualification specimen after completion of the testing previously discussed. (See Subsections 3D.4.4 and 3D.7.4.)
The characteristics of the required seismic and dynamic input motions should be specified by the response spectrum or time history methods. These characteristics, derived from the structures or systems seismic and dynamic analyses, should be representative of the input motions at the equipment mounting locations.
For seismic and dynamic loads, the actual test input motion should be characterized in the same manner as the required input motion, and the conservatism in amplitude and frequency content should be demonstrated (that is, the test response spectrum should closely resemble and envelop the required response spectrum over the critical frequency range).
Since seismic and the dynamic load excitation generally have a broad frequency content, multi-frequency vibration input motion should be used. However, single frequency input motion, such as sine beats, is acceptable provided the characteristics of the required input motion indicate that the motion is dominated by one frequency (for example, by structural filtering effects), or that the anticipated response of the equipment is adequately represented by one mode, or in the case of structural integrity assurance, that the input has sufficient intensity and duration to produce sufficiently high levels of stress for such assurance. Components that have been previously tested to IEEE-344-1971 should be reevaluated or retested to justify the appropriateness of the input motion used, and requalified if necessary.
For the seismic and dynamic portion of the loads, the test input motion should be applied to one vertical axis and one principal axis (or two orthogonal axes) simultaneously unless it can be demonstrated that the equipment response motion in the horizontal direction is not sensitive to the vibratory motion in the horizontal direction, and vice versa. The time phasing of the inputs in the vertical and horizontal directions must be such that a purely rectilinear resultant input is avoided. An acceptable alternative is to test with vertical and horizontal inputs in-phase, and then repeat the test with inputs 180 degrees out-of-phase. In addition, the test must be repeated with the equipment rotated 90 degrees horizontally.
E.5.1 Qualification of Hard-Mounted Equipment Hard-mounted equipment is seismically tested mounted on a test table capable of producing multifrequency, multiaxis inputs. The waveform characteristics of the input are random and scaled in such a way that the test response spectrum equals or exceeds the required response spectrum (including margin). The input signal meets the requirements of Subsection 7.6.3 of IEEE 344-1987.
Furthermore, the test input simulates the multidirectional nature of the earthquake. The preferred method for meeting this requirement is to the use a triaxial test table capable of producing three statistically independent, orthogonal input motions. In this case the seismic testing consists of five 1/2 safe shutdown earthquake tests and one safe shutdown earthquake test in one orientation.
Using a biaxial test table is acceptable if it is justified that the horizontal and vertical test inputs conservatively simulate the three-dimensional nature of the seismic event. One acceptable approach 3D-102 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR is to mount the equipment on the test table with its front-to-back axis oriented at 45 degrees to the horizontal drive axis and scale the horizontal component of the input by a factor of the square root of two. Statistically independent inputs are preferred and, if used, the test can be performed in two stages, with the equipment rotated 90 degrees about the vertical axis. In this case, the five 1/2 safe shutdown earthquake inputs need to be applied only in the first orientation.
If a dependent biaxial test table is used, the test is performed in four stages. The first stage involves five 1/2 safe shutdown earthquake tests and one safe shutdown earthquake test in the first orientation. The second, third, and fourth orientations are obtained by successively rotating the equipment 90 degrees clockwise from its previous position. One safe shutdown earthquake test is performed in each of the last three orientations.
Each multifrequency test has a minimum of 15 seconds of strong motion input. The strong motion portion is preceded and followed by a period of testing where the test input is ramped up and ramped down, respectively, so that the equipment is not subjected to impact loading. The adequacy of each test run is evaluated using the criteria set forth in Subsection 7.6.3.1 of IEEE 344-1987.
E.5.2 Qualification of Line-Mounted Equipment Line-mounted equipment, because of the dynamic filtering characteristics of its mounting, is effectively subject to single frequency input. This condition is common for valves and sensors supported by piping systems, cable trays, and duct systems. This equipment is qualified consistent with the requirements of IEEE 382-1996.
In some cases this equipment may also be used in the hard-mounted condition. In this case multifrequency, multiaxis testing is also required unless justification is provided that the previous single frequency tests demonstrate the capability of the equipment to operate under the hard-mounted seismic conditions. Because of the large size of typical valves, it may be necessary to perform separate testing of the operators and valve assembly.
E.5.2.1 Seismic Qualification Test Sequence The seismic qualification process is broken down into the following steps:
- 1. Mount the equipment on a rigid test fixture and perform a resonant search test to demonstrate that the equipment is structurally rigid (fundamental frequency greater than 33 hertz) and does not amplify the seismic motions acting at the equipment mounting interface.
- 2. Perform single frequency testing on the line-mounted equipment.
- 3. Perform multifrequency, multiaxis testing on the equipment, if appropriate.
- 4. If an active valve assembly is to be seismically qualified, additional testing is needed as follows:
- a. Perform a static pull test on the valve.
- b. Perform a static seismic analysis using a verified model of the valve and its extended structure to demonstrate that the valve has adequate structural strength to perform its safety-related function without exceeding the design allowable stresses specified in ASME Code,Section III, Subsection NB, NC, or ND for pressure-retaining parts, as 3D-103 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR appropriate, and Subsection NF for non-pressure-retaining boundary parts. Limiting extended structure stress to material yield strength minimizes deflections, which could interfere with valve stroke function.
E.5.2.2 Line Vibration Aging Line-mounted equipment may be subject to operational vibrations resulting from normal plant operations. The potential fatiguing effect of this vibrational aging is simulated as part of the qualification program. This requirement is satisfied by subjecting the equipment to a sine sweep from 5 to 100 to 5 hertz at an acceleration level of 0.75g or such reduced acceleration at low frequencies to limit the double amplitude to 0.025 inch as specified in Section 5.3.a, Part III of IEEE 382-1996.
E.5.2.3 Single Frequency Testing The single frequency testing acceleration waveform is either sine beat or sine dwell applied at one-third octave frequency intervals as specified in IEEE 382-1996. Each dwell has a time length adequate to permit performance of functional testing, with a minimum time of 15 seconds. To account for the three-dimensional nature of the seismic event, the test input level is taken as the square root of two times the required input motion (RIM) level specified in IEEE 382. The level includes the 10 percent test margin. Each test series is performed using single axis input. The test series is performed successively in each of three orthogonal axes.
E.5.2.4 Seismic Aging The aging effect of the five 1/2 safe shutdown earthquake earthquakes can be simulated by exposing the equipment to two sinusoidal sweeps at one-half of the safe shutdown earthquake required input motion level in each orthogonal axis. Each sweep shall go from 2 to 35 hertz to 2 hertz at a rate not to exceed one octave per minute. One sweep is performed with the equipment in its inactive mode, and the other with the equipment in its safety-related operational mode.
E.5.2.5 Static Deflection Testing of Active Valves The seismic testing just discussed is normally performed only on the valve operator and the attached appurtenances. If the valve assembly is rigid, the operability of the valve assembly during a postulated seismic event may be demonstrated by performing a static pull test using a peak acceleration value equivalent to a triaxial acceleration of 6g. If the valve assembly is determined to be flexible, a supplemental analysis of the seismic response of the flexible valve and its supporting piping is performed to determine the actual acceleration level present at the center of gravity of the valve assembly.
The valve is placed in a suitable test fixture with the operator and appurtenances mounted and oriented as in the normal valve assembly installation. The valve is mounted so that the extended structure is freestanding and supported only by the valve nozzles. The valve is positioned so that the horizontal and vertical load components simulating the three-dimensional nature of the seismic event produce a worst-case stress condition in the valve extended structure.
During testing, the valve shall be internally pressurized and nozzle loads applied. Static loads simulating dead weight and seismic loads are applied to the extended structure. The tests are normally performed at ambient temperature. These loads simulate to the extent feasible the load distribution acting on critical parts of the valve assembly. The valve is actuated using the actuator system seismically qualified according to IEEE 382-1996. The valve assembly is cycled from its normal to the desired safety-related position within the time limits defined in the equipment specification. Leakage measurements are made, where required, and compared to the allowable values specified in the valve design specification.
3D-104 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR E.5.3 Operational Conditions When equipment being qualified performs a safety-related function during the safe shutdown earthquake, the equipment is operated and monitored to demonstrate that the equipment functions properly before, during, and after the seismic event. If the test time is not long enough to complete the required functional tests, the length of the strong motion test time is increased to permit completion of the required functional testing.
Where functional testing is dependent on external electrical supply, the testing is performed using the worst-case electrical supply conditions.
E.5.4 Resonant Search Testing Resonant search testing is performed to provide data on the natural frequency and dynamic response characteristics of the equipment qualified. For hard-mounted equipment being qualified by seismic testing, resonant search testing is done to provide additional information but is not required for qualification of the equipment. This is an important consideration because frequency testing for hard-mounted equipment is normally performed with the equipment mounted on the test table, where dynamic interaction of the table and the equipment has a significant effect on the measured natural frequency.
For qualification of line-mounted valve assemblies, it is necessary that the assemblies be rigid. To meet this requirement, the assembly mounted to a rigid test fixture so that the frequencies measured are indeed representative of the valve assembly. If it is not feasible to provide a rigid fixture, as is likely the case when testing such very large valves, as the main steam and feedwater isolation valves, additional tests and analyses may be required to determine if the apparent flexibility measured is due to the test fixture or to the characteristic of the valve assembly itself.
If the resonant search test data is being generated to verify the accuracy of an analytical modeling technique, the test specimen mounting details must accurately simulate the boundary conditions used in the analytical model.
E.6 Qualification by Analysis Section E.3.2 defines the limits on the use of analysis to demonstrate seismic qualification of safety-related equipment. The following sections describe the analytical methods to be employed for qualification of equipment. There are two techniques, static and dynamic, used to qualify equipment.
The success of either method depends on the ability of the analytical model to describe the response of the system to seismic loads. Alternative methods of analysis are accepted if their conservatism is documented.
The analysis is used to demonstrate the structural adequacy of the equipment being qualified. This is done by showing that the calculated stresses do not exceed the design allowable stresses specified in ASME Code,Section III, Subsection NB, NC, or ND for pressure-retaining equipment and Subsection NF for nonpressure-retaining equipment.
E.6.1 Modeling Analysis may be performed by hand calculations, finite element, or mathematical models that adequately represent the mass and stiffness characteristics of the equipment. The model contains enough degrees of freedom to adequately represent the dynamic behavior over the frequency range of interest. It includes the essential features of the equipment.
3D-105 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Dynamic properties reflect the in-service operating conditions, such as structural coupling, dynamic effects of contained liquids, and externally applied restraints (where appropriate). Where the modeled equipment exhibits some nonlinear behavior, this nonlinearity is modeled unless justification is provided that it is insignificant or that the linear model provides conservative results. The adequacy of the model or of the modeling techniques is shown by comparing the predicted responses to the responses predicted by benchmark problems or modal testing. Acceptable benchmark problems include hand calculations, analysis of the same problem using a comparable verified public-domain program, empirical data, or information from the technical literature.
In addition to documenting the modeling technique, a quality assurance program is in place that defines the requirements for the control, verification, and documentation for the computer programs used for qualification of safety-related equipment. The computer programs used in the qualification process are verified on the same computer on which the qualification analysis is performed.
E.6.2 Qualification by Static Analysis For rigid equipment, the seismic forces resulting from one seismic input direction are calculated for each node point by multiplying the nodal mass in that direction by the appropriate zero period acceleration (ZPA) floor acceleration. The combined system response of the equipment to the simultaneous loads acting in all three directions is calculated by combining the three components, using the square root sum of the squares (SRSS) method. The square root sum of the squares method is used to account for the statistical independence of the individual orthogonal seismic components.
E.6.3 Qualification by Dynamic Analysis If the lowest natural frequency of the equipment lies below the cutoff frequency, the response of the equipment to the seismic event in each orthogonal direction will be dynamically amplified and the equipment is said to be flexible. The analysis is performed in compliance with the guidelines set forth in the SSAR and in Regulatory Guides 1.92, 1.100, and 1.122.
The preferred method of analysis is the response spectrum method. In this method the responses in each equipment mode are calculated separately and combined by the square root sum of the squares method, provided the modes are not closely spaced. (Consecutive modes are said to be closely spaced if their frequencies differ from that of the first mode in the group by less than 10 percent.) The responses for each mode in a group are combined absolutely. The group response is then combined with the remaining modal responses using the square root sum of the squares method. The responses for each of the three orthogonal seismic components can then be combined as discussed in Section E.6.2. The applicable damping levels are noted in Table 3.7.1-1 of Chapter 3.
E.6.3.1 Response Spectrum Analysis Modes up to and including the cutoff frequency are included in this summation. In some cases, the structure is basically rigid, with some of the flexible mode representing local effects. This situation is evaluated by reviewing the modal masses applicable to a given seismic input direction. If the sum of the effective modal masses used in the response spectrum analysis is greater than 0.9 times the total equipment mass, the model is assumed to adequately represent the total equipment mass. If this criterion is not satisfied, it means that a significant part of the equipment seismic response is due to the static seismic response of the higher equipment modes (above the cutoff frequency). If this situation occurs, the analyst determines the component of the response due to the higher modes and combines it with the flexible response component by square root sum of the squares. (This requirement is discussed in the SSAR, Subsection 3.7.2.)
3D-106 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR E.6.3.2 Static Coefficient Method As an alternative to the response spectrum method, the static coefficient method of analysis may be used. In this method the frequencies of the equipment are not determined, but a static analysis is performed, assuming that a peak acceleration equal to 1.5 times the peak spectral acceleration given in the applicable required response spectrum acts on the structure as described in Section E.6.2.
The static coefficient of 1.5 takes into account the combined effects of multifrequency excitation and multimode response for equipment and structures that can be represented by a simple model. A lower static coefficient may be used when it can be demonstrated that it will yield conservative results.
E.6.3.3 Time History Analysis The time-history method of analysis is the preferred method of analysis when the equipment exhibits significant nonlinear behavior or when it is necessary to generate response spectra for specific component mounting locations in the equipment. The acceptable methods that are used to develop the seismic time histories are discussed in Regulatory Guide 1.122, ASME Code,Section III, Appendix N, and in Section 6.2 of IEEE 344-1987. Other analytical methods may be used to generate in-equipment response spectra provided that they are verified to produce accurate and/or conservative results.
E.7 Qualification by Test Experience This method of qualification is not used.
E.8 Performance Criteria E.8.1 Equipment Qualification by Test The performance criterion for qualification of equipment is that the equipment successfully perform its safety-related function during and after the postulated seismic event. Acceptance requires, as a minimum, that:
No spurious or unwanted outputs occur in the circuits that could impair the safety-related functional operability of the equipment; No gross structural damage of the equipment occur during the seismic event that could lead to the equipment or any part thereof becoming a missile. Local inelastic deformation of the equipment is permitted; and, Satisfactory completion of specified baseline tests are demonstrated before, during, and after the seismic test sequence.
E.8.2 Equipment Qualification by Analysis E.8.2.1 Structural Integrity The analysis verifies that the equipment, when subjected to the worst case combination of operating and seismic loads, maintains its structural integrity. In addition the analysis shows that the equipment is not subject to low cycle fatigue failure when subject to postulated seismic loading. Finally the analysis verifies that seismically induced equipment motion does not lead to impacting with other nearby equipment.
3D-107 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR E.8.2.2 Operability Analysis can be used to demonstrate equipment operability for those pieces of equipment where structural integrity or limitation of deformation guarantees operability. As an example the analysis of active equipment verifies that the combination of operating and postulated seismic loads do not produce stress levels or deformations that exceed established functional limits. The rationale for use of these limits is justified.
3D-108 Revision 10
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Appendix 3E High-Energy Piping in the Nuclear Island This appendix identifies high-energy piping in the nuclear island with a diameter larger than 1 inch.
Candidate leak-before-break piping is identified in Figures 3E-1 through 3E-5 along with other piping for which high-energy pipe failures are postulated. These figures also identify piping in the break exclusion zones inside and outside containment. These figures do not include piping of 1 inch size and smaller. These figures do not include the 6-inch diameter pipe segments on the high-energy reactor vessel head vent piping, or the 3-inch diameter high-energy lines for the reactor coolant pump heat exchangers which are evaluated in accordance with Subsection 3.6.2 and to which the leak-before-break methodology is not applied. Instrumentation and instrumentation lines are not included, except where a branch connection of greater than 1 inch is required.
The selection of the failure type is based on whether the system is high or moderate energy during normal operating conditions of the system. High-energy piping includes those systems or portions of systems in which the maximum normal operating temperature exceeds 200°F or the maximum normal operating pressure exceeds 275 psig. Piping systems or portions of systems pressurized above atmospheric pressure during normal plant conditions and not identified as high energy are considered moderate energy. Piping systems that exceed 200°F or 275 psig for 2 percent or less of the time during which the system is in operation or that experience high-energy pressures or temperatures for less than 1 percent of the plant operation time are considered moderate energy. In piping whose nominal diameter is greater than 1 inch but less than 4 inches, only circumferential breaks are postulated at each selected location. No breaks are postulated for piping whose nominal diameter is 1 inch or less.
The three-letter code included in the line numbering identifies the pipe specification. The letters define the pressure class, material specification, and AP1000 equipment classification, respectively.
The symbols used in Figures 3E-1 through 3E-5 are the same as the P&ID figures. See Figure 1.7-2 for additional information on the drawing legend and for the key for the pipe specification. Section 3.2 includes additional information on the AP1000 equipment classification.
3E-1 Revision 7
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR ATM ATM ATM ATM ATM ATM ATM ATM ATM ATM ATM ATM MY Y01A SILENCER OUTSIDE 10" GCD L019A 24" JCC L016A 24" JCC L016C 24" JCC L016D 24" JCC L016E 24" JCC L016F 24" JCC L016G 24" JCC L016H 24" JCC L016J 24" JCC L016K 24" JCC L016L 24" JCC L016M AUXILIARY 24" JCC L016B AUXILIARY TURBINE BUILDING BUILDING BUILDING EAC GCD 12 X 10 V233A (T)
V032A V033A V034A V035A FC V030A 12" EAC L014A EAB EAC M 10" JCC L018A 10" JCC L018C 10" JCC L018E EAB EAC V027A 10" JCC L018B 10" JCC L018D 10" JCC L018F 10" JCC L018B 10" JCC L018C 10" JCC L018D 10" JCC L018E 10" JCC L018F P H
NOTE 21 EAC EAE 38" EAB L006A 10" JCC L018A 8" EAB L015E 8" EAB L015F 12" EAB L024A 8" EAB L015A 8" EAB L015B 8" EAB L015C 8" EAB L015D FC 38" EAC L007A 3804 C01A MSS MN STEAM MSS M6 001 E-8 38" EAB L006A V040A 38" EAE IMB OMB 2" EAB L020A V042A V043A 12" EAB L021A EAB EAC LEGEND 38" EAB L006A FC FC CANDIDATE LBB PIPING EAC EAB V036A V240A (T) 3" EAC L023A 3" EAB L022A HIGH ENERGY BREAK EXCLUSION 2" EAC L025A ZONE PIPING (DIAMETER > 1")
V086A OTHER HIGH ENERGY PIPING FC ON NUCLEAR ISLAND (DIAMETER > 1") 2" EAC L048A ECE EAC AUXILIARY BUILDING BOUNDARY TURBINE BUILDING MB 01 STEAM GENERATOR TDS DRAINS 2" ECE 16" DAB 20" x 16" TDS M6 004 F-7 3803 20" DAB L003A DAB DAC IMB OMB P FC DAC DAE 20" DAB L003A H NOTE 21 FC FWS MFW C02A FWS M6 003 C05A V058A V057A 20" DAC L002A V250A (T) 20" DAE 6" DUB L005A FC DUB DUC DUC DCD M 1902 6" DUC L004A FWS SFW PUMP FWS M6 002 G-1 V067A V256A V255A (T) FE 6" DCD 055 AUXILIARY TURBINE BUILDING BUILDING 4" DAC L027A DAB DAC IMB OMB FC 4" DAB L009A FC C03A V074A V075A 4" DAC L010A 4" DAB L009A AUXILLIARY DAE DAC BUILDING TURBINE BUILDING BDS SGB HX 4" DAE BDS M6 001 F-8 IRC ORC 3802 Figure 3E-1 (Sheet 1 of 2)
High Energy Piping - Steam Generator System 3E-2 Revision 7
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR ATM ATM ATM ATM ATM ATM ATM ATM ATM ATM ATM ATM MY Y01B SILENCER OUTSIDE 10" GCD L019B AUXILIARY 24" JCC L016Q AUXILIARY TURBINE 24" JCC L016N 24" JCC L016P 24" JCC L016R 24" JCC L016S 24" JCC L016T 24" JCC L016U 24" JCC L016V 24" JCC L016W 24" JCC L016X 24" JCC L016Y 24" JCC L016Z BUILDING BUILDING BUILDING EAC GCD 12 X 10 V233B (T)
FC V030B V031B V032B V033B V034B V035B 12" EAC L014B EAB EAC M 10" JCC L018G 10" JCC L018H 10" JCC L018M EAB EAC V027B 10" JCC L018J 10" JCC L018K 10" JCC L018L 10" JCC L018G 10" JCC L018H 10" JCC L018J 10" JCC L018K 10" JCC L018L 10" JCC L018M P NOTE 21 EAC EAE 38" EAB L006B 8" EAB L015G 8" EAB L015H 8" EAB L015J 8" EAB L015K 8" EAB L015L H #2XT 12" EAB L024B 8" EAB L015M 38" EAC L007B 3809 FC C01B MSS MN STEAM MSS M6 001 C-8 2" EAB L020B NOTE 9 V040B 38" EAE IMB OMB V042B V043B 12" EAB L021B EAB EAC 38" EAB L006B FC FC EAC EAB V036B V240B (T) 3" EAC L023B NOTE 7 LEGEND 3" EAB L022B 2" EAC L025B CANDIDATE LBB PIPING V086B HIGH ENERGY BREAK EXCLUSION FC ZONE PIPING (DIAMETER > 1")
NOTE 2" EAC L048B ECE EAC 8 AUXILIARY BUILDING OTHER HIGH ENERGY PIPING TURBINE BUILDING ON NUCLEAR ISLAND (DIAMETER > 1") MB 02 STEAM GENERATOR BOUNDARY TDS DRAINS 2" ECE TDS M6 004 E-7 20" DAB L003B 3808 DAB DAC IMB OMB P NOTE 21 FC DAC DAE 20" DAB L003B H FC FWS MFW C02B FWS M6 003 C05B V058B V057B 20" DAC L002B V250B (T) 20" DAE 6" DUB L005B FC DUB DUC DUC DCD M NOTE 8 6" DUC L004B FWS SFW PUMP FWS M6 002 F-1 V067B V256B V255B (T) FE 6" DCD 056 AUXILIARY TURBINE BUILDING BUILDING 4" DAC L027B DAB DAC IMB OMB 4" DAB L009B FC FC C03B 4" DAC L010B V074B V075B 4" DAB L009B AUXILLIARY DAE DAC BUILDING TURBINE BUILDING IRC ORC BDS SGB HX 4" DAE BDS M6 001 C-8 Figure 3E-1 (Sheet 2 of 2)
High Energy Piping - Steam Generator System 3E-3 Revision 7
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Figure 3E-2 High Energy Piping - Normal Residual Heat Removal System 3E-4 Revision 7
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Figure 3E-3 (Sheet 1 of 2)
High Energy Piping - Reactor Coolant System 3E-5 Revision 7
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Figure 3E-3 (Sheet 2 of 2)
High Energy Piping - Reactor Coolant System 3E-6 Revision 7
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Figure 3E-4 (Sheet 1 of 2)
High Energy Piping - Passive Core Cooling System 3E-7 Revision 7
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR LS LS 061 060 2" X 1" 2" X 1" 2" BBB L181 2" X 1" 2" X 1" BBB BTA 14" BTA L107 M
14" BTA L102 RCS HOT LEG RCS M6K 001 H-6 V101 IN-CONTAINMENT REFUELING PASSIVE RHR HX WATER STORAGE TANK ME 01 MT 03 FO V108A (T) 14" BTA L104A 14" BTA L103 14" BTA L105 LO IRWST IRWST RCS SG CL SCREEN A SCREEN B RCS M6K 001 F-8 MY Y01A MY Y01B V109 14" BTA FO V108B (T) 14" BTA L104B 10" JBC L112A 10" JBC L112B 10" JBC L120 RNS PUMP SUC 10" JBC L114 2" JBC L151 10" JBC JBC JBD 10" X 8" 10 X 8 M 8" JBC L131A M 8" JBC L131B WLS CONT SUMP 8" JBC L132A 8" JBC L132B V127 2" JBD CONTAINMENT V117A V118A CONTAINMENT V117B V118B RECIRCULATION RECIRCULATION SCREEN A SCREEN B MY Y02A MY Y02B V119A V120A V119B V120B 8" JBC L113B 8" JBC L113A 8" JBC L116A 8" JBC L116B 6" JBC L119 SFS PUMP SUC 6" JBC BBC JBC BBC JBC LEGEND M V121A M V121B CANDIDATE LBB PIPING HIGH ENERGY BREAK EXCLUSION ZONE PIPING (DIAMETER > 1")
R03A R03B OTHER HIGH ENERGY PIPING ON NUCLEAR ISLAND (DIAMETER > 1")
8" BBC L117A 8" BBC L117B 2" BBC L121A 2" BBC L121B BOUNDARY NOTE 26 M01 V126A M04 V126B 8" BBC L118A 8" BBC L124A 8" BBC L118B 8" BBC L124B BTA BBC BTA BBC BTA BBC BTA BBC V122A V124A V122B V124B 2" BBB L122A 2" BBB L126A 2" BBB L122B 2" BBB L126B NOTE 26 8" BTA L123A 8" BTA L123B NOTE 26 M02 V128A V129A M03 M05 V128B V129B M06 V123A V125A V123B V125B 8" BTA L123A 8" BTA L125A 8" BTA L123B 8" BTA L125B 8" BTA L134A 8" BTA L133A 8" BTA L134B 8" BTA L133B 8" BTA L127A 8" BTA L127B 1" X 2" OMB 1" X 2" 1" X 2" OMB 1" X 2" IMB IMB 2" BBB L162A 2" BBB L163A 2" BBB L162B 2" BBB L163B 2" X 1" 2" X 1" 2" X 1" 2" X 1" RCS DVI A RCS DVI B 2" X 1" 2" X 1" 2" X 1" 2" X 1" 2" X 1" 8" BTA 2" X 1" 2" X 1" 8" BTA 2" X 1" PXS M6K 001 E-6 PXS M6K 001 E-4 Figure 3E-4 (Sheet 2 of 2)
High Energy Piping - Passive Core Cooling System 3E-8 Revision 7
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Figure 3E-5 (Sheet 1 of 2)
High Energy Piping - Chemical and Volume Control System 3E-9 Revision 7
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Figure 3E-5 (Sheet 2 of 2)
High Energy Piping - Chemical and Volume Control System 3E-10 Revision 7
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Appendix 3F Cable Trays and Cable Tray Supports This appendix provides the design criteria for seismic Category I cable trays and their supports.
Seismic Category II cable trays and their supports are also designed utilizing the design criteria of this appendix.
3F.1 Codes and Standards The design of cable trays and their supports conform to the following codes and standards:
American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI), Specification for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members, 1996 Edition and Supplement No. 1, July 30, 1999 American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC), Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Steel Safety Related Structures for Nuclear Facilities, ANSI/AISC N690-1994.
American Welding Society (AWS), Structural Welding Code - Steel, AWS D1.1-2000 provides an acceptable alternative for ANSI/AISC N690 weld requirements as described in Subsections 3.8.3.2 and 3.8.4.2.
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE), Standard 344-1987, IEEE Recommended Practice for Seismic Qualification of Class 1E Equipment for Nuclear Power Generating Stations National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), Standard Publication No. VE 1-1998, Metallic Cable Tray Systems 3F.2 Loads and Load Combinations 3F.2.1 Loads 3F.2.1.1 Dead Load (D)
Dead load includes the weight of the cable trays, their supports and the cables inside the trays and any permanently attached items. Temporary items used during construction or maintenance are removed prior to operation.
It also includes the weight of Cable tray covers and Other components and fittings 3F.2.1.2 Construction Live Load (L)
Live load consists of a load of 250 pounds to be applied only during construction on the tray at a critical location to maximize flexural and shear stresses. This load is not combined with seismic loads.
3F.2.1.3 Safe Shutdown Earthquake (Es)
Seismic response of the cable trays and their supports are produced due to seismic excitation of the supports.
3F-1 Revision 3
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR 3F.2.1.4 Thermal Load These loads are usually not considered and trays are provided with expansion joints in accordance with NEMA.
3F.2.2 Load Combinations The following load combinations are used for designing the cable trays and their supports:
(a) D + L (b) D + Es 3F.3 Analysis and Design Cable tray systems are designed to maintain structural integrity which assures requirements for physical protection, cable separation, fire protection, and spatial interaction are met. The stresses are maintained within the allowable limits as specified in Subsection 3F.3.3. Section properties and weights of the trays are obtained from manufacturer's data.
3F.3.1 Damping The maximum damping ratio is 10 percent unless the configuration is demonstrated to be similar to that of the tests described in (Reference 19) of Subsection 3.7.6.
As stated in Subsection 3.7.1.3, the damping ratio used for the AP1000 cable tray systems may be based on test results presented in Reference 19 (Subsection 3.7.6). The cable tray test program conducted by ANCO Engineers Inc. included more than 2000 dynamic tests of representative cable tray system design and construction. The test configurations included items such as various tray types on rigid supports, various tray hanger systems, effects of tray types, effects of strut connections and effects of bracing spacing, unbraced and braced tray systems. Cable ties were also used during the test program. Based on observations during the tests, the high damping values within the cable tray system are provided mainly by the movement, sliding or bouncing of the cables within the tray.
The tests show that, for unloaded trays, the damping ratio closely approximates the 7 percent used for bolted structures, and a minimum damping value of 20 percent is maintained with cable ties at spacing greater than or equal to four feet. The tests show that for loaded trays, the damping ratio increases with increased cable loading, reaching a value of 30 percent at cable fill ratio of 50 percent to 100 percent. The major factors which affect the damping ratio of the cable tray systems are the input acceleration level, cable fill ratio, and the ability of the cables to move within the trays during a safe shutdown earthquake.
The AP1000 cable tray system design requires no sprayed-on material for fire protection. Cable ties are provided at spacing greater than 4 feet, thereby permitting cable movement within the trays. The damping ratio used for the cable tray system is dependent on the level of seismic input and the amount of cable fill within the trays. As shown in Figure 3.7.1-13, the 20 percent constant damping ratio may be used for trays loaded to more than 50 percent and subjected to input floor acceleration greater than 0.35g. For cable trays loaded to less than 50 percent and lower than 0.35g input floor acceleration, linearly interpolated lower damping values may be used.
3F.3.2 Seismic Analysis The methodology for seismic analysis is provided in Subsection 3.7.3. Seismic loads are determined by either using the equivalent static load method of analysis or by performing dynamic analysis.
3F-2 Revision 3
VEGP 3&4 - UFSAR Stresses are determined for the seismic excitation in two horizontal and one vertical direction. The stresses in the three directions are combined using the square root of the sum of the squares (SRSS) method or the 100-40-40 method as described in Subsection 3.7.3.6.
3F.3.3 Allowable Stresses The basic stress allowables for the cable trays are based on the American Iron and Steel Institute specification. The basic stress allowables for cable tray supports utilizing light gage cold rolled channel type sections are based on the manufacturer's published catalog values. The basic stress allowables for cable tray supports utilizing rolled structural shapes are in accordance with ANSI/AISC N690 and the supplemental requirements described in Subsection 3.8.4.5.2.
The allowable stresses for the load combinations are as follows:
D+L Basic Allowable D + Es 1.6 times basic allowable for tension and 1.4 times basic allowable for compression 3F.3.4 Connections Connections are designed in accordance with the applicable codes and standards listed in Section 3F.1. For connections used with light gage cold rolled channel type sections, design is based on the manufacturer's published catalog values. Supports are attached to the building structure by bolted or welded connections. Fastening of the supports to concrete structures meets the supplemental requirements given in Subsection 3.8.4.5.1.
3F-3 Revision 3